Radioplan

User Guide

Version 3.9

www.actix.com

Documentation Version: Software Version:

UG-v3.9, April 2008 Actix Radioplan v3.9

The content of this manual is provided for information only, is subject to change without notice, and should not be construed as a commitment by Actix. Actix assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that appear in this documentation. Copyright © 2001–2008 by Actix GmbH. All rights reserved. Trademark Notice Radioplan is a registered trademark of Actix GmbH in the European Union. Actix and the Actix logo are trademarks of Actix Ltd. Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista, MS Access, MS Query, and MS Excel are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation. InstallShield is a registered trademark of InstallShield Software Corporation. UNIX is a trademark of X/Open Company Ltd. Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Java is a trademark or registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. ESRI is a trademark or registered trademark of the Environmental Systems Research Institute (ESRI), Inc. Panasonic is a registered trademark of Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. CDMA2000 is a registered trademark of the Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA-USA) in the United States. Oracle is a registered trademark of the Oracle Corporation. All other product or brand names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders. Contact: Actix GmbH Altmarkt 10 D-01067 Dresden Germany tel.: +49 (0) 351 404 29 – 0 fax: +49 (0) 351 404 29 – 50 e-mail: sales@actix.com www.actix.com Actix Ltd 200, Hammersmith Road Hammersmith London, W6 7DL United Kingdom www.actix.com

www.actix.com

Contents
1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................ 13
1.1 RADIOPLAN .................................................................................................13 1.1.1 Values and Benefits .............................................................................13 1.1.2 Functional Overview ............................................................................13 1.2 MEASUREMENT MODULE ...................................................................................14 1.2.1 Values and Benefits .............................................................................14 1.2.2 Functional Overview ............................................................................14 1.3 DYNAMIC/SNAPSHOT UTRA/FDD RADIO NETWORK SYSTEM SIMULATOR (WINES)..............15 1.3.1 Values and Benefits .............................................................................15 1.3.2 Functional Overview ............................................................................15 1.4 AUTOMATIC CELL PLANNING (ACP) .....................................................................16 1.4.1 Values and Benefits .............................................................................16 1.4.2 Functional Overview ............................................................................17 1.5 AUTOMATIC FREQUENCY PLANNING (AFP)..............................................................17 1.6 AUTOMATIC NEIGHBOR LIST PLANNING (ANP) ........................................................17 1.7 AUTOMATIC RRM PARAMETER OPTIMIZATION (APO) .................................................18 1.8 CAPITAL PLANNING ........................................................................................18 1.9 DATA INTEGRITY TO PRIOR VERSIONS...................................................................18 1.10 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................18 1.11 OUTLINE OF THIS USER GUIDE .........................................................................18 1.12 SUPPORT ..................................................................................................19

2 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................ 21
2.1 SETTING UP THE RADIOPLAN WORKING ENVIRONMENT ...............................................21 2.1.1 Radioplan Software Package .................................................................21 2.1.2 Radioplan Installation Process ...............................................................21 2.2 CUSTOMIZATION OF THE RADIOPLAN INSTALLATION ...................................................22 2.3 LICENSE MANAGEMENT ....................................................................................22 2.3.1 Hardware Dongles ...............................................................................22
2.3.1.1 2.3.1.2 2.3.1.3 2.3.2.1 2.3.2.2 Single Computer License......................................................................23 Floating License Management ...............................................................23 Remote Update Procedure for a Hardware Dongle....................................23 Registering Radioplan..........................................................................25 License Transfer .................................................................................25

2.3.2 Software License Files ..........................................................................24

3 RADIOPLAN INTRODUCTION ........................................................................ 27
3.1 COORDINATE SYSTEM .....................................................................................28 3.1.1 Geographical and Cartesian Coordinate Systems ......................................28 3.1.2 Euclidian Cartesian Coordinate Systems used in Radioplan ........................30 3.2 MENU BAR ..................................................................................................31 3.3 TOOLBARS...................................................................................................32 3.4 LAYER CONCEPT ............................................................................................32 3.4.1 Configuration Data Layers ....................................................................33 3.4.2 Measurement Data Layers ....................................................................40 3.4.3 Result Data Layers ..............................................................................40 3.4.4 Optimization Data Layers .....................................................................40 3.4.5 Image Layers .....................................................................................40
www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

4

3.4.6 Post-Processing Layers.........................................................................41 3.4.7 Graphics Layers ..................................................................................41 3.4.8 Cell Visuals.........................................................................................41 3.4.9 Working with Layers ............................................................................41 3.4.10 Locking Layers ..................................................................................45 3.4.11 Converting Vector into Raster Layers....................................................46 3.4.12 Import/Export of Layers .....................................................................47 3.5 PERSONAL WORKSPACE ...................................................................................47 3.5.1 Workspace Handling ............................................................................47
3.5.1.1 3.5.1.2 3.5.1.3 3.5.1.4 3.5.1.5 Importing a Workspace........................................................................48 Exporting a Workspace ........................................................................49 Resetting the Workspace to Default Settings...........................................49 Handling of Legend Presets ..................................................................49 Managing Layer Templates...................................................................49

3.5.2 3.5.3 3.5.4 3.5.5

General Application Settings .................................................................50 Display Settings ..................................................................................52 Layer Settings ....................................................................................54 Color Palette.......................................................................................57

3.6 PAINT MODULE FOR GRAPHICS LAYERS..................................................................61 3.6.1 Creating a Graphics Layer.....................................................................61 3.6.2 Drawing in a Graphics Layer .................................................................62
3.6.2.1 3.6.2.2 3.6.2.3 3.6.2.4

3.5.5.1 3.5.5.2 3.5.5.3 3.5.5.4

Inspecting the Color Palette of a Layer...................................................58 Creating a Transition Color Palette ........................................................60 Using Legend Presets ..........................................................................60 Import and Export of Legend Presets .....................................................61

3.6.3 Deleting Graphics Layers ......................................................................64 3.7 TREE WINDOW .............................................................................................64 3.8 VIEWING AREA .............................................................................................64 3.9 ZOOM FUNCTIONS .........................................................................................65 3.10 MESSAGE WINDOW AND STATUS BAR .................................................................65 3.11 ONLINE HELP .............................................................................................66

Drawing Settings ................................................................................62 Drawing a Line ...................................................................................63 Drawing a Polygon ..............................................................................63 Inserting Text ....................................................................................63

4 GETTING STARTED WITH RADIOPLAN ............................................................. 67
4.1 SETTING UP A DEMO PROJECT ............................................................................67 4.2 RAN CONFIGURATION .....................................................................................68 4.2.1 First Site ............................................................................................68
4.2.1.1 4.2.1.2 4.2.1.3 4.2.1.4 Network Controller Configuration ..........................................................70 Site Configuration ...............................................................................70 Antenna Import ..................................................................................71 Cell Configuration ...............................................................................71

4.2.2 Second Site ........................................................................................73 4.2.3 Pathloss of the Cells ............................................................................73 4.3 USER CONFIGURATION ....................................................................................75 4.3.1 Equipment Profile ................................................................................75 4.3.2 Mobility Profile ....................................................................................76 4.3.3 Service Profile.....................................................................................76 4.3.4 Traffic................................................................................................76 4.3.5 UE Profile ...........................................................................................78 4.4 ENVIRONMENT CONFIGURATION ..........................................................................78 4.4.1 Streets ..............................................................................................79
www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

5

4.5 NEXT STEPS ................................................................................................80

5 PROJECT HANDLING ................................................................................. 81
5.1 GENERAL PROJECT SETUP .................................................................................81 5.1.1 Project Folders ....................................................................................81 5.1.2 Project Actions....................................................................................82 5.2 MULTI-LAYER/MULTI-TECHNOLOGY PROJECTS .........................................................83 5.2.1 Network Layer Management..................................................................83 5.2.2 Multi-Layer Project Structure ................................................................84 5.2.3 Duplicating a Network Layer .................................................................85 5.2.4 Applying Network Configurations from other Network Layers .....................85 5.3 USER RIGHTS MANAGEMENT ..............................................................................86 5.4 CREATING A NEW PROJECT ...............................................................................87 5.4.1 Library Integration ..............................................................................87 5.5 PROJECT DATA IMPORT ....................................................................................87 5.5.1 Importing a Project from an RNP Tool.....................................................87 5.5.2 Importing Network Configuration Data from the OSS................................88 5.5.3 Importing a Project from another Radioplan Database ..............................88 5.5.4 Loading Configuration Data in Radioplan Format ......................................89 5.5.5 Actix Cellopt AFP Plan Import ................................................................90 5.6 WORKING WITH EXISTING PROJECTS ....................................................................90 5.6.1 Duplicating a Project............................................................................90 5.6.2 Using the Project Maintenance Wizard ....................................................91 5.6.3 Merging Projects .................................................................................93 5.7 PROJECT DATABASE MANAGEMENT .......................................................................94 5.7.1 Project Update ....................................................................................94 5.7.2 Complete Project Update of the Database ...............................................95 5.7.3 List of Projects in the Database .............................................................96 5.7.4 Project Statistics .................................................................................96 5.7.5 Direct Comparison Between Project Configurations...................................96 5.8 PROJECT DATA EXPORT ....................................................................................98 5.8.1 Backward Synchronization of an RNP Project from Radioplan .....................98 5.8.2 Saving a Project into Files.....................................................................98 5.8.3 Actix CellRefs Export............................................................................99 5.8.4 Actix Cellopt AFP Plan Export ................................................................99 5.8.5 Configuration Item Export ....................................................................99 5.9 MANAGING NETWORK PERFORMANCE DATA IN A PROJECT .......................................... 100 5.9.1 Structure of Network Performance Data................................................ 100 5.9.2 Network Performance Data Import....................................................... 100 5.9.3 Deleting Network Performance Data..................................................... 100 5.10 DELETING AN EXISTING PROJECT ..................................................................... 101 5.11 HANDLING OF MASTER/SUB-PROJECTS .............................................................. 101 5.11.1 Deriving Sub-Projects from a Master Project ........................................ 101 5.11.2 Working with Sub-Projects ................................................................ 102 5.11.3 Synchronizing a Sub-Project with its Master Project .............................. 102 5.11.4 Deleting a Sub-Project ..................................................................... 103

6 MULTI-LAYER PROJECT CONFIGURATION ....................................................... 105
6.1 CONFIGURATION OVERVIEW ............................................................................ 105 6.2 PROJECT SETTINGS ...................................................................................... 106 6.3 AREA MANAGEMENT ...................................................................................... 107 6.3.1 Rules for the Shape of Areas ............................................................... 108
www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

6

6.3.2 Simulation Area ................................................................................ 109 6.3.3 Analysis Area.................................................................................... 110 6.3.4 Working with Area Polygons................................................................ 110
6.3.4.1 6.3.4.2 6.3.4.3 6.3.4.4 6.3.4.5 6.3.4.6 6.3.4.7 6.3.4.8 6.3.3.1 6.3.2.1 Assigning an Area Polygon as Simulation Area ...................................... 109 Assigning an Area Polygon as Analysis Area .......................................... 110 Importing an Area ............................................................................ 110 Exporting an Area ............................................................................. 111 Duplicating an Area........................................................................... 111 Inspecting Area Polygon Settings ........................................................ 111 Drawing an Area (Sub-) Polygon ......................................................... 112 Editing an Area (Sub-) Polygon ........................................................... 113 Controlling the Visibility of Areas......................................................... 114 Deleting an Area (Sub-) Polygon ......................................................... 114

6.4 CONFIGURATION OF THE ENVIRONMENT ............................................................... 114 6.4.1 Clutter ............................................................................................. 114
6.4.1.1 6.4.1.2 6.4.1.3 6.4.1.4 6.4.1.5 6.4.1.6 6.4.1.7 6.4.1.8 6.4.2.1 6.4.2.2 6.4.2.3 6.4.2.4 6.4.2.5 6.4.3.1 6.4.3.2 6.4.3.3 6.4.3.4

6.4.2 Digital Elevation Model (DEM) ............................................................. 124

Clutter Matrix Format ........................................................................ 115 Defining Clutter Classes ..................................................................... 115 Importing a Clutter Matrix.................................................................. 118 Exporting a Clutter Matrix .................................................................. 119 Viewing a Clutter Matrix..................................................................... 119 Defining a New Clutter Matrix ............................................................. 121 Creating a Clutter Matrix from Vector Layers......................................... 122 Deleting a Clutter Matrix .................................................................... 123 DEM Matrix Format ........................................................................... 124 Importing a DEM Matrix ..................................................................... 124 Exporting a DEM Matrix ..................................................................... 125 Viewing a DEM Matrix........................................................................ 125 Deleting a DEM Matrix ....................................................................... 126 Inspecting Street Data ...................................................................... 126 Importing Streets ............................................................................. 127 Drawing Streets ............................................................................... 127 Deleting Streets ............................................................................... 129

6.4.3 Streets (for Simulation Only) .............................................................. 126

6.5 CONFIGURATION OF THE RAN .......................................................................... 129 6.5.1 Overview ......................................................................................... 129 6.5.2 Network Controller ............................................................................ 130
6.5.2.1 6.5.2.2 6.5.2.3 6.5.2.4

6.5.3 Site ................................................................................................. 131
6.5.3.1 6.5.3.2 6.5.3.3 6.5.3.4 6.5.3.5 6.5.3.6 6.5.3.7 6.5.3.8 6.5.3.9 6.5.3.10 6.5.3.11 6.5.4.1 6.5.4.2 6.5.4.3 6.5.4.4

Creating the Network Controller .......................................................... 130 Network Controller Settings................................................................ 130 Exporting the Network Controller ........................................................ 130 Deleting the Network Controller .......................................................... 130 Creating a Site ................................................................................. 131 Exporting a Site................................................................................ 131 Duplicating a Site ............................................................................. 131 Moving a Site ................................................................................... 132 Access to Site Settings ...................................................................... 132 General Site Settings ........................................................................ 132 Additional Site Status Info ................................................................. 134 Site Settings Overview ...................................................................... 134 Finding a Site................................................................................... 136 Controlling Sites’ Visibility .................................................................. 137 Deleting a Site ................................................................................. 137 Creating a Cell ................................................................................. 138 Exporting a Cell ................................................................................ 138 Access to Cell Settings....................................................................... 138 General Cell Settings......................................................................... 139
www.actix.com

6.5.4 Cell ................................................................................................. 137

Actix Radioplan User Guide

7

6.5.5 Repeater .......................................................................................... 145
6.5.5.1 6.5.5.2 6.5.5.3 6.5.5.4 6.5.5.5 6.5.5.6 6.5.5.7 6.5.6.1 6.5.6.2 6.5.6.3 6.5.6.4 6.5.6.5 6.5.6.6

6.5.4.5 6.5.4.6 6.5.4.7 6.5.4.8 6.5.4.9 6.5.4.10 6.5.4.11

Cell Custom Parameters..................................................................... 141 Cell Settings Overview....................................................................... 141 Transmitter Settings Overview............................................................ 143 Finding a Cell ................................................................................... 144 Active Flag of Cells and Transmitters ................................................... 144 Duplicating and Dragging a Cell .......................................................... 145 Deleting a Cell.................................................................................. 145 Adding a Repeater ............................................................................ 146 Access to Repeater Settings ............................................................... 146 General Repeater Settings ................................................................. 146 Repeater Settings Overview ............................................................... 148 Switching Repeaters On/Off ............................................................... 148 Dragging a Repeater ......................................................................... 149 Deleting a Repeater .......................................................................... 149 Adding an Additional Antenna at a Cell................................................. 149 Access to Additional Antenna Settings.................................................. 150 General Settings of an Additional Antenna ............................................ 150 Additional Antenna Settings Overview.................................................. 152 Switching Additional Antennas On/Off .................................................. 152 Deleting an Additional Antenna ........................................................... 153

6.5.6 Additional Antenna ............................................................................ 149

6.5.7 Neighbor Lists................................................................................... 153 6.5.8 Pathloss Matrix ................................................................................. 154
6.5.8.1 6.5.8.2 6.5.8.3 6.5.8.4 6.5.8.5 6.5.8.6 6.5.8.7 6.5.8.8 6.5.8.9 6.5.9.1 6.5.9.2 6.5.9.3 6.5.9.4 6.5.9.5 6.5.9.6

6.5.9 Antenna........................................................................................... 160

Importing a Pathloss Matrix................................................................ 154 Pathloss Matrix Format ...................................................................... 155 Inspecting the Settings of a Pathloss Matrix.......................................... 155 Pathloss Matrix Settings Overview ....................................................... 156 Viewing Pathloss Plots ....................................................................... 157 Editing a Pathloss Matrix.................................................................... 157 Duplicating and Dragging Pathloss Matrices .......................................... 158 Deleting a Pathloss Matrix .................................................................. 159 Working with Tuned Pathloss Matrices ................................................. 159 Importing an Antenna ....................................................................... 161 Exporting an Antenna ........................................................................ 162 Duplicating an Antenna...................................................................... 162 Inspecting the Antenna Configuration Data........................................... 162 Viewing the Antenna Diagram............................................................. 164 Deleting an Antenna.......................................................................... 165

6.6 CONFIGURATION OF THE USER BEHAVIOR ............................................................. 165 6.6.1 Assembling a UE Profile...................................................................... 166
6.6.1.1 6.6.1.2 6.6.1.3 6.6.1.4 6.6.1.5 6.6.1.6 6.6.2.1 6.6.2.2 6.6.2.3 6.6.2.4 6.6.2.5 6.6.3.1 6.6.3.2 6.6.3.3

6.6.2 Equipment Profile .............................................................................. 169

Importing a UE Profile ....................................................................... 166 Adding a New UE Profile .................................................................... 167 Inspecting the UE Profile Configuration Data ......................................... 167 UE Profile Settings Overview .............................................................. 168 Duplicating a UE Profile ..................................................................... 169 Deleting a UE Profile ......................................................................... 169 Importing an Equipment Profile........................................................... 169 Exporting an Equipment Profile ........................................................... 170 General Equipment Profile Settings...................................................... 170 Duplicating an Equipment Profile......................................................... 171 Deleting an Equipment Profile............................................................. 171 Importing a Mobility Profile ................................................................ 173 Exporting a Mobility Profile ................................................................. 173 Inspecting the Mobility Profile Configuration Data .................................. 173
www.actix.com

6.6.3 Mobility Profile .................................................................................. 172

.....................................6...... 191 Deleting a Service Profile ........................ 192 6...7 Revenue Matrix .................................6.......................... 202 Deleting a Revenue Matrix ....................................1.............................................................2 6....................1 OTSR Configuration .................1........6....................................6..................................... 201 Inspecting the Settings of a Revenue Matrix .......................3 6.............................................6 Compressed Mode Configuration........4.............................. 219 7......................................... 174 Deleting a Mobility Profile..........5 6..6.................................4 UMTS REPEATER CONFIGURATION ........................................2 NODE B CONFIGURATION ................................1 6...... 177 Exporting a Service Profile ........1.............. 205 7..2 HSDPA Cell Configuration .....7.........6.............6........6...............6......................................2 Power Control Related Configuration ................8 6..4 6..............6.....................6............................... 194 Defining a New Traffic Matrix.............................6 Scrambling Code List Handling .......... 203 7 UTRAN CONFIGURATION .. 231 7.....................................4 Service Profile...........7 6...........9 6.............4.......7 6................6...6...........3 6.........6.....6.......................................1 6..1 UMTS Resources Configuration ..........6......6 6...................................6...... 212 7...........4......................................7.........................8 6...................................... 221 7..........................................3.......................................6...............4...........................................................................................................7.................1 UMTS Resources Configuration for Repeaters ...................... 232 www..........6.....2.3.....5 Global Handover Configuration ............................................................ 207 7.6..................................6.......6 6.......6...........................................9 6........ 194 Viewing a Traffic Matrix .4 Common Channels Configuration ...........................................................................5 Duplicating a Mobility Profile.......4 Handover and Cell Selection Parameter Settings ................2 Node B Hardware Configuration..... 174 6.. 174 Modeling Services ................................................................ 209 7... 200 Importing a Revenue Matrix .2 6..3..................... 201 Importing a Traffic Matrix .......1................................................................................................................1 General RNC Settings....... 202 Creating a Revenue Matrix from a Traffic Matrix ........... 206 7...... 201 Revenue Matrix Format......................6.................6....... 195 Creating a Traffic Matrix from a Surface Plot Layer ... 177 General Service Profile Settings .......3...............................5 6................... 222 7.................................................................................Actix Radioplan User Guide 8 6............................6........4..... 196 Duplicating and Dragging a Traffic Matrix ..4...................5 CONFIGURATION OF THE USER BEHAVIOR ..3........... 177 Physical Layer Parameters . 217 7..........................................................3 UMTS CELL CONFIGURATION ... 215 7...................6.......6...................................1 RNC CONFIGURATION .............3 Node B Connection Configuration............ 228 7............................................7................................................. 175 Importing a Service Profile ...... 193 Traffic Matrix Format............................6................6.. 220 7.................................6 Traffic Matrix .............3 Radio Bearer Control Configuration ............3..................6..........................6..................6. 226 7.. 210 7..............................3......3................4 6.......4.............................. 229 7.....4 6.. 201 Viewing a Revenue Matrix ..... 200 Deleting a Traffic Matrix........................... 191 6....1 6...................7......................6.............. 179 Packet Data Settings .....com .... 192 6............6..................... 231 7..................................1..6......3 6..... 217 7..........4................. 231 7............................................................................................1.............. 180 Traffic Model Configuration........ 224 7.....4.................... 193 Exporting a Traffic Matrix ...2..6.............................. 202 Duplicating and Dragging a Revenue Matrix ..4...................................................................4 6..2 6........................... 194 Inspecting the Settings of a Traffic Matrix.................2.......7........3 HSUPA Cell Configuration ....6...7 6.....5 Load Control Configuration ..................................actix.............6..................................6......6 6.........................7...............................6..... 182 Duplicating a Service Profile ...... 205 7.......................5 Creating Generic User Profiles .........5 6.........................

................................................. 233 8...... 233 8...... 241 10............. 250 12..........4............1 12............1 NETWORK CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION ...4......................................... 233 8..2..............5 Result Filter ..............2 GSM Transmitters Configuration ......................... 240 10 IDEN RAN CONFIGURATION ..........4..................................................1 RNC CONFIGURATION ..................................4............... 235 8.........................................................................................com .3 GSM CELL CONFIGURATION ................................. 245 11................. 254 12.............................2 BINARY FILE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND DEFAULT PARAMETER IMPORT SETTINGS ............1 BSC CONFIGURATION ...2 iDEN Transmitters Configuration ............................................... 262 www................. 245 11.... 244 11 WIMAX RAN CONFIGURATION .........5 CONFIGURATION OF THE USER BEHAVIOR ..... 243 10... 256 Surface Plots.......................... 235 8........................4 IDEN REPEATER CONFIGURATION .....4..........4...........................................................................1 Analysis Capabilities of Result Parameters .....................1 GSM Resources Configuration........................................4 WIMAX REPEATER CONFIGURATION ...................3...................... 246 11............................................ 233 8.............................................. 246 11....................................................1 CDMA2000 Resources Configuration for Repeaters .......... 243 10......................................................................................4..............................................3........................... 262 Spatial and Temporal Restrictions .. 237 9........................ 258 Chart Graphs .........................3 WIMAX CELL CONFIGURATION ....... 245 11...................................3.....................2 GSM BASE STATION CONFIGURATION ................................................................................. 255 12........................ 260 Histograms ..........2 WIMAX BASE STATION CONFIGURATION ............4....................................................................................................................... 245 11..................................3........................... 250 12............1 GSM Resources Configuration for Repeaters ................. 241 10... 253 12............................ 237 9....Actix Radioplan User Guide 9 8 CDMA2000 RAN CONFIGURATION ......4 12.......................................2 IDEN BASE STATION CONFIGURATION ....2.............................................................1 NETWORK CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION ................5 CONFIGURATION OF THE USER BEHAVIOR .......................3 CONCEPT OF RESULT ANALYSIS ..........5 CONFIGURATION OF THE USER BEHAVIOR ..4 CDMA2000 REPEATER CONFIGURATION .................... 235 8........................... 239 9.......................1 WiMAX Resources Configuration................................................... 237 9..1 WiMAX Resources Configuration for Repeaters ...............................1 CDMA2000 Resources Configuration..........3 CDMA2000 CELL CONFIGURATION .........3 12.................2...... 241 10................2..... 249 12........................................................................... 238 9......................................................4....4 GSM REPEATER CONFIGURATION ....... 245 11....................................................3.............4....................................................................................2 Results Selection Dialog ......3.. 247 12 NETWORK DATA EVALUATION .............................2 Scrambling Code List Handling ..... 237 9..................1 iDEN Resources Configuration for Repeaters .......................... 237 9............................actix........2 CDMA2000 BASE STATION CONFIGURATION .5 CONFIGURATION OF THE USER BEHAVIOR ..................... 236 9 GSM RAN CONFIGURATION....................2.....................3............................4.........2 12.........................................3 IDEN CELL CONFIGURATION ....................................................................... 239 9..............................4 ANALYZING RESULT PARAMETERS .................1 NETWORK PERFORMANCE DATA MANAGEMENT......... 241 10............ 249 12........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 241 10. 233 8........................1 iDEN Resources Configuration ....... 242 10...............................................

................... 265 12...................................................1 UMTS KPI Analysis ......................................8...........6 Printing a Histogram .......9...............7 Transforming Table Data into Graphical Presentations .... 280 12.8 Converting Table Data into a Result Set ...............................7..................4 Saving a Table/Report in the Project ...2 Identifying a Certain Data Item for Trouble Shooting ... 284 12...... 275 12.....................................................6 RESULTS ANALYSIS WITH CHARTS (PLOTS OVER TIME) .. 263 12..4 Export an Interference Matrix ................... 278 12..............................3 Interference Matrix Result Set ................1 Prerequisites .......2 Data Evaluation Opportunities in Chart Graphs....................................................................................... 276 12.....................................................3 Creating a Table from a Graph..................... 306 12.... 287 12..7.........................5......................................................8......................................... 291 12.........................................................................6.......9 NETWORK KPI ANALYSIS ... 283 12..... 282 12............. 307 12.................... 293 12..............8.......3 Data Export from Tables ........ 312 12..........................................................................2 Traffic Matrix Generation.......................................................11 INTERFERENCE MATRIX GENERATION .....10 Printing a Table ...................3 Creating a Table from a Histogram............. 297 12.........................7..........3 Manipulating a Surface Plot Layer ..................................5............................5 RESULTS ANALYSIS WITH SURFACE PLOTS ... 292 Creating a Mapped Surface Plot or Cell Visual from Table Data . 279 12.....2 Data Evaluation Opportunities in Histograms .....10................................................... 289 12... 267 12.............5 Customizing the Interference Matrix Generation ............. 313 12......................... 312 12....5.................. 303 12...........1 Creating a Chart Graph ............6..................................... 289 12..............4 Customization of Charts ....................................... 274 12........................................................ 314 www......... 264 12.. 297 12........................................6.................................................. 286 12...............9 Discrete Value Layers....4 KPI Analysis with Measurements .......... 280 12..................... 288 12.... 304 12......................................................................4 Coinciding Surface Plot Layers .............Actix Radioplan User Guide 10 12.................................... 314 12......................................8................8...7.......... 272 12.................8.............5...........11.......11.................... 278 12........................12 RESULT SET AGGREGATION ...........5...............................................................7 Cell Statistics from a Layer .....................................................................................9..........actix.. 311 12.........8........................................................................10..5..........9..11 Printing Surface Plots .................. 310 12................................... 290 12....... 297 12...........1 12.....9......................... 283 12..............................7......2 Creating a Surface Plot from Table Data ................1 Prerequisites .......................................8 Clutter Statistics from a Layer .............................7.......................8.........................5........................5 UMTS Combined RSCP and Ec/I0 Analysis ..........8.................................... 287 12.......................2 Data Import into Tables.............1 Result Surface Plot Layers....7.............................................. 300 12.. 296 12................................7 RESULTS ANALYSIS WITH HISTOGRAMS ...11............................2 Create an Interference Matrix Result Set ...................9.. 292 ...............................5........................6 Statistical Data Evaluation in Tables ..5 Embedded Clipboard .........10 Layer Slide Show ...........9 Customization of Tables..............................................................4 Customization of Histograms .........5 Printing a Chart Graph .......... 272 12....... 277 12......... 275 12.............11.......................... 271 12...1 Creating a Table ................. 288 12................................................5...3 GSM KPI Analysis ..................7.... 266 12.........8 RESULTS ANALYSIS WITH TABLES .5 Deriving Histograms from Surface Plots .........5 Threshold Evaluation Methods in Histograms . 306 12.....................................6.......... 281 12.......................... 301 12.................................................................10 TRAFFIC MATRIX GENERATION ..............com 12.....5...........5......6......... 283 12.8.................................6 Extracting Tables from Surface Plots and Cell Visuals ........2 CDMA2000 KPI Analysis.......................8......1 Creating a Histogram .........................................................................................8.......................11..........................

.5...................3 Arc/Info Binary Coverage File Format .............5.......................2...............2 Dresden City Example ...................................... 317 13.................. 334 13.............................5.Actix Radioplan User Guide 11 13 APPENDIX .. 333 13................. 333 13........................................2...................................................................8 Hierarchical Data Format (Release 4) .........................5...........................................2 Network Configuration File Format ..................................................................... 317 13.. 332 14 ABBREVIATIONS .........................................1 NETWORK CONFIGURATION DATA SPECIFICATION ...............................com ................................. 333 13......................................................................................1 TIFF / Geo TIFF Format .....................9 Japanese DEM Format ..5................................................1 Menus............................................................. 336 Arc/Info ASCII Interchange Format ...................................................................16 X11 Pixmap Format..5 Erdas Imagine Format .............6...........4.2........................... 337 15 REFERENCES ........................2 WINDOW CONTROLS REFERENCE ...............................2 BIL File Format........................................6..5...........5......2 Toolbars....................1... 332 13............. 335 13.........5....................1 Directory Structure of the Network Configuration Files .........................6............................................. 318 13.................... 335 13........................ 317 13....................................................3........3...........1 Demo Project ............5...5 Asset Vector Binary Format.............................................. 334 13.. 336 13.............................5........................... 329 13.... 332 13........15 USGS SDTS DEM Format...................... 330 13.................................................................................................................................................. 341 16 INDEX ........................5......................... 333 13....................................... 332 13..............2 MapInfo File Format ...................................14 USGS DOQ Format...................6.........4 EXAMPLES OVERVIEW ....................................................... 333 13.................................. 325 13.........................4 EOSAT Fast Format...................12 PCI Labeled Raw Format ............................................ 333 13.................................4..........................7 Grid eXchange File Format .. 334 13............ 327 13........................ 334 13..... 335 13..............................................13 Portable Network Graphics ....6............... 333 13........................................5........................................ 334 13..................5 SUPPORTED RASTER DATA FILE FORMATS ................................................................................ 317 13.......................................10 JPEG File Format................................................................................... 329 13........................... 318 13... 334 13...actix............................ 335 13.... 345 www.............................2 13.......................6 SUPPORTED VECTOR DATA FILE FORMATS .....1.....................................................5.......................................................1 13........11 Atlantis MFF Raster File Format ................ 334 13.........5................... 332 13............3 Additional Table Grid Settings................ 332 Arc/Info Binary Grid Format .......................................................................5.... 328 13.4 Planet ASCII Vector Format......1...................................5..........................................6 GIF File Format ................................................3 LIBRARY OVERVIEW .3 Arc/Info Raster Formats .......5........ 332 13.........1 ESRI World File Format..........................17 ERMapper Compress Wavelets Format ................1 Shape File Format .......5........5.....5...

actix.com .Actix Radioplan User Guide 12 www.

QoS Network Validation Traffic Mgmt. Capital planning . This platform collects and manages all network related data. These modules are briefly introduced in the subsequent sections. Network Simulator Automatic Cell Planning Measurement Module Aut.1. or WiMAX. 1-1 Radioplan Several modules are embedded into the platform for different.Actix Radioplan User Guide Overview 13 1 Overview 1. Policies Cell/Antenna optimization Site selection Data Verification Pathloss Tuning Neighbor list generation Neighbor list optimization Traffic matrix generation Interference matrix gener. and realizes the pertinent data synchronization with other databases and applications. Its hierarchical database structure and complete GIS functionality enable a convenient usage and an efficient analysis of the network settings and behavior. and operation support of mobile radio networks. Neighbor List Planning Automating workflow steps Customer Engine. iDEN. 1. GSM. partly interacting tasks.actix. deployment. The present product is targeted at systems like UMTS (UTRA/FDD).1 Values and Benefits Radioplan is the perfect solution to • • • • accelerate and secure the development and introduction of mobile networks and wireless services.2 Functional Overview Attributed to its framework character. cut down costs in engineering and planning due to more reliable and quicker data provision... Fig.. 1-1. It functions as the central framework to guide the user throughout the network planning and deployment workflows.1. it comprises the following features: • • complete representation and storage of large area network and environment data automated synchronization of network planning data with other RNP tools www. and operation. CDMA2000. Radioplan supports the workflows and procedures in radio network planning. optimization.. and comprises a variety of functional modules. Radioplan Dyn.com . In order to fulfil its purpose. 1.1 Radioplan Radioplan is a comprehensive system for planning. cope with the increasing network complexity and thus reduce the operational effort. deployment. An overview of the Radioplan system architecture can be found in [R-Admin]. and to increase network revenues and subscribers' satisfaction by delivering and securing maximal network capacity and high Quality of Service. Fig.

measurement data import Measurement Software GPS Receiver Measurement Device Vendor specific Fig. 1-2 Network performance measurement system The Radioplan Measurement Module supports two different operation modes which are indicated by the numbers (1) and (2) in the above Figure: • Measurement analysis mode (1): Measurement data can be imported from all major commercially available drive test systems.2 Measurement Module The Measurement Module is one embedded module of Radioplan.2. Radioplan Filter 1 Measurement Module Filter 2 Filter 3 .Actix Radioplan User Guide Overview 14 • • • • • • comprehensive interfaces for data exchange and platform integration tuning and verification of network planning data with measurements unified data evaluation system for planning and measurement data fully GIS enabled for numerous Cartesian/geographic coordinate systems and geographic data formats rich analysis and visualization functions with diverse data presentation opportunities database with user rights management for multiple users 1.1 Values and Benefits • • • • comfortable drive test solution for UMTS/FDD open interfaces for a large variety of drive test systems across various network technologies direct connection and synchronization of measured data with a network planning database direct competition analysis between different networks 1..2 Functional Overview The complete network performance measurement solution consists of several components that are shown in Fig. special plots and a measurement summary report can be generated to efficiently extract the www. These data can be analyzed using the variety of data evaluation opportunities of Radioplan. It efficiently supports the network deployment and optimization workflows. These components interact via the indicated interfaces.. 1. Furthermore.actix. 1-2.com .2.

3. • Drive test mode (2): For directly taking live measurements from the network. Planning data can be adjusted and calibrated by means of the measurement data incl. The measurement status can be observed online in different diagram windows (presenting certain measurement parameters) and in a map that automatically follows the current position using an autopad function. the Panasonic W-CDMA Area Analyzer with a dedicated measurement software Mcollect is supported. The drive test mode is only available for UMTS/FDD.com . by imitating trouble regions with different traffic and mobility scenarios. for example to • • • • • • • find out and define rules for an optimal network rollout. pathloss tuning. minimize the number of dropped services to increase subscriber satisfaction. More detailed information about the Radioplan Measurement Module can be found in [RMeas]. maximize the throughput by improving parameter settings under dynamic conditions.2 Functional Overview The UTRA/FDD Wireless Network System Simulator comprises many outstanding features that are founded in its superior hybrid technology that unifies the dynamic and snapshot network simulation approaches. In particular the dynamic network simulator can be applied for numerous tasks that make it an excellent solution for 3G network rollout and operation. The Radioplan WiNeS simulator architecture is depicted in Fig.3. 1. It supports both the network planning and rollout phase as well as the network optimization. www. All measurement results are stored during the drive test.actix. 1-3.g.Actix Radioplan User Guide Overview 15 main network performance indicators out of the recorded data. support optimization tasks.3 Dynamic/Snapshot UTRA/FDD Radio Network System Simulator (WiNeS) The UTRA/FDD network simulator is one embedded module of Radioplan. configuring the RRM for hierarchical cell layers and multiple frequencies. e. determine the realistic capacity limits under dynamic conditions. 1.1 Values and Benefits Radioplan WiNeS comprises both a snapshot and a dynamic network simulator. secure decisions concerning service level agreements. 1. A selection of them with regard to mainly the dynamic network simulator is given below.

there are significant differences between these link directions. [R-TecRef].4. 1.Actix Radioplan User Guide Overview 16 Radioplan Topography Technology & Network Setup User Profiles User Behavior WiNeS Simulator Monitor Fig.com . It enables a very fast and accurate network optimization. 1. This means that a whole radio access network topology (or a representative part of it) with many concurrent users is modeled on a frame based approach with 10 ms resolution.1 Values and Benefits • • • • • cut down operational and capital expenditures significantly increase data service revenues and maintain QoS without investments in new sites reduce the time to market for new network setups and new services significantly evolve the network in a controlled manner in alignment with the marketing traffic forecast ensure a leading edge position regarding network quality and capacity against competing networks www. The WiNeS Simulator allows to assess the impact of a multi-service UMTS network. 1-3 Wireless Network System Simulator Architecture • The WiNeS Simulator imitates the real radio access network behavior dynamically at system level.actix. Especially in UMTS. The WiNeS Simulator comprises a detailed modeling of Radio Resource Management (RRM) algorithms. and [R-API].4 Automatic Cell Planning (ACP) Automatic Cell Planning (ACP) is a functional module of Radioplan. The WiNeS Simulator enables the study of both uplink and downlink. It was especially designed for investigating the precise impact of these algorithms on the network behavior. The WiNeS Simulator supports multiple Transport Channel types thus offering the whole flexibility of the UTRA/FDD air interface. The WiNeS Simulator offers different ways of result reporting (monitoring): The opportunities range from comprehensive data monitoring and statistical analysis to individual link tracing. Mixed traffic scenarios with both circuit-switched and packet-switched services can be investigated. • • • • • More detailed information about the Radioplan WiNeS Simulator Module can be found in [RSim]. [R-Snapshot].

coverage optimization. It allows to automatically create and update neighbor relations between cells based on planning data and measurements. 1-4. More detailed information about the miniAFP Module can be found in [miniAFP]. 1. Of particular interest are neighbor relations between cells of different network layers and/or different technologies. antenna height. and cell transmission power optimization algorithms for capacity optimization (maintaining coverage level).electrical). and site integration very fast: optimizes larger clusters (more than 100 cells) within a few minutes very reliable: can be tuned with live network measurements in conjunction with the Measurement Module More detailed information about the Radioplan ACP Module can be found in [R-ACP].6 Automatic Neighbor List Planning (ANP) Neighbor List Planning is another functional module of Radioplan.actix.5 Automatic Frequency Planning (AFP) Relying on the Actix Cellopt AFP technology. The principle of network optimization as implemented in Radioplan is visualized in Fig. More detailed information about the Radioplan Automatic Neighbor List Planning Module can be found in [R-ANP]. balance traffic load between cells while reducing peak traffic reconfigurable parameters: antenna tilt (mechanical or -remote.com . antenna type. Radioplan contains a miniAFP Module that allows to automatically optimize the frequency plan and other 2G related cell configurations. www. 1. network setup DEM map pathloss maps clutter map traffic maps constraints Simulations or Measurements (optional) pre-analysis Simulations or Measurements (optional) reconfiguration of the network setup objective function QoS validation High-speed iterative process Fig.4.Actix Radioplan User Guide Overview 17 1. 1-4 Network optimization process supported by the Radioplan ACP • • • • • optimization target: reduce interference between cells and create dominant cell areas. All the usual platform functions including the visualization of AFP related aspects are possible. antenna azimuth. The key characteristics of the Radioplan ACP are given below. site selection.2 Functional Overview Network optimization is the process of steadily improving the network setup from the planning stage up to the live optimization of the running network.

The prioritization can be configured using different interference scenarios and is also dependent on the traffic assignment in order to give the most reliable plan for implementation. In addition. the following chapter 2 gives instructions on the installation of the system. and 12 (data evaluation). the configuration data format is fully downward compatible. www.7 Automatic RRM Parameter Optimization (APO) Automatic Parameter Optimization embraces all aspects of network optimization that exceed the purely physical parameter set of Automatic Cell Planning or the resource assignment parameters of Automatic Frequency Planning.com . large network configurations may require more memory at least 200 MB hard disk space (10 GB recommended) at least 1.10 System Requirements The general system requirements for running Radioplan in different environments can be found in [R-Admin]. analysis.5 or higher at least 1 GB RAM. 5 (project handling).Actix Radioplan User Guide Overview 18 1. Radioplan comprises all general functionality for network data representation. The database update will not corrupt your existing data in any way.e. The user guide is concluded with the appendix containing some reference manuals. new and renamed result parameters are treated in a way that full data integrity is guaranteed. one can work with older configuration data without changes since all new parameters are set to according default values. 1.11 Outline of this User Guide This user guide describes the usage of Radioplan. The WiNeS simulator as part of Radioplan is written in Java. and synchronization. also new configuration parameters are steadily introduced. 1. The following system prerequisites are required for this module: • • • • • Java JRE 1. various seamlessly integrated modules are available that are targeted on certain application scenarios in a real mobile radio access network.actix. The actual description of Radioplan is presented in chapters 3 (general usage). The required database update of your existing data will be conducted automatically when Radioplan is started for the first time with a new version. 6 to 11 (project configuration). Radioplan contains a module for tuning different parameters of the RRM. 1. However. After an introduction to the basic principles of the mentioned modules and their interaction in this chapter.0 GHz microprocessor clock speed recommended CD-ROM drive (for installation) 1. Also. i. 4 (Getting Started).8 Capital Planning Capital planning allows the user to prioritize the implementation of cell and site modifications.9 Data Integrity to Prior Versions With the implementation of new features.

com +49 351 404 29 20 +49 351 404 29 50 www.Actix Radioplan User Guide Overview 19 1.com +65 6333 7469 +65 6333 5540 Regional contact EMEA: Email: Support direct number: Fax: Actix switchboard: EMEAsupport@actix.myactix.actix.com support@actix.12 Support Comprehensive product support is available at the following contact points: Main support web portal: Main support email contact: Regional contact Americas: www.com +1 703 707 4779 +1 8777 72 ACTIX +1 703 707 4778 +1 703 707 4777 Regional contact Asia Pacific: Email: Support direct number: Fax: ap.com .support@actix.com • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Email: Support direct number: Support US toll free: Fax: Actix switchboard: support.com +44 20 8735 6303 +44 20 8735 6301 +44 20 8735 6300 Direct Actix Radioplan product support: Email: Support direct number: Fax: support.dresden@actix.us@actix.

actix.Actix Radioplan User Guide Overview 20 www.com .

Make sure that you have those rights when Radioplan is installed with hardware dongle support.Actix Radioplan User Guide Installation 21 2 Installation 2. an on-line help function. Any previous Radioplan installation of a different version is not removed by this setup process. the software is installed comparable to any other Windows application.1 Radioplan Software Package The Radioplan application comprises • • • • • the AO Platform. side-by-side installations of different releases are supported.1. The setup program is automatically started.2 Radioplan Installation Process This section describes the normal installation procedure for Radioplan on a single computer. Important Notice for Hardware Dongle Usage If the Radioplan installation is delivered with a hardware dongle.1. optionally certain modules of Radioplan that are enabled depending on license flags user manuals (this and other documents. In the first case. and several example projects. To install the software on a stand-alone computer (Windows 2000/XP platform). If floating licenses in a computer network shall be used.3. Then just follow the instructions on the screen. make sure that any of the dongles is not inserted before the entire installation procedure has been finished! This will ensure that the USB port driver for the hardware dongle is installed correctly before the dongle is inserted for the first time. If no other path is specified the default Radioplan installation folder %ApplicationPath% is: c:\program files\Actix\Radioplan\<Radioplan-version>\ .1 Setting Up the Radioplan Working Environment 2. 2. The InstallShield installer software is used for the setup process. More information about the installation in different environments can be found in [RAdmin].actix.com . a client-server application that manages all configuration data and results. The installation of the driver for the hardware dongle requires administrator rights on the computer. Thus. see references) incl. Radioplan can generally be installed on a stand-alone computer or in a Citrix environment. please consider the additional information in section 2. a library with building blocks for radio network configurations. The Windows Installer is configured and the setup procedure is started. www. insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

www. The original JRE by Sun Microsystems is available on the installation CD-ROM in the directory \jre\ as additional setup executable. just run the setup program again. or to repair the installation. Floating License: A single hardware dongle controls the software usage in a computer network. also floating licenses can be supported. if necessary they could also be adjusted at any given time. More information on license management can be found in [R-Admin]. enable a customization of Radioplan. Further information can also be found in the module-specific manuals: [R-ACP] [R-ANP] [R-Meas] [R-Sim].Actix Radioplan User Guide Installation 22 Important Notice for the WiNeS Network Simulator The WiNeS Network Simulator requires a Java Runtime Environment.5 or higher. 2.1 Hardware Dongles Radioplan can be delivered with hardware dongle protection by MARX Datentechnik GmbH. thus. In the case of hardware dongles. it must be done separately.ini files that contain application parameters and. These security devices can be plugged into the USB port of a computer.ini files are located in the Radioplan configuration folder %APPDATA%.2 Customization of the Radioplan Installation There are several *. which is (for Radioplan version 3.actix.3. to install any other feature. Two different options can be used: either hardware dongles or software license files. 2. The Radioplan software can be used concurrently on any computer in the network up to the number of purchased floating licenses. release 1. If necessary. The end-user-relevant options are explained in the following sections. However. 2. They support the following two options: • • Single License: The Radioplan software can only be used on that computer where the hardware dongle is inserted. the Java Runtime Environment is not installed by InstallShield. All *. Important Notice for Installation Make sure that the hardware dongle is not inserted into the USB port before the entire installation procedure has been finished! This will ensure that the USB port driver for the dongle is installed correctly before it is inserted into the computer for the first time.3 License Management Radioplan has a built-in software protection function to avoid illegal copies of registered products. Normally such settings are configured only during the installation process. Since most of the computers have already installed an up-to-date JDK or a JRE.8 and higher) by default: c:\documents and settings\all users\application data\actix\radioplan\<Radiopl an-version>\configuration [R-Admin] gives more explanations on the most important of those initialization files. In order to uninstall the Radioplan software.com .

1 Single Computer License When using a hardware dongle for a single computer license. 2-1 General procedure of the hardware key update process The necessary steps for creating a transaction key and updating the hardware security device using an activation code provided by Actix is described in detail in the following. the dongle must be inserted into the USB port of that computer where Radioplan is used.g.2 Floating License Management The installation and administration of the floating license manager is described in [RAdmin].3.1. the number of purchased Radioplan licenses is equal to the number of hardware dongles shipped. www. In order to use a hardware dongle for license control on a single computer. as schematically depicted in Fig. the calculations will continue and the user will be prompted to reconnect to the license at a later time.ini file. 2. which is located in the license subdirectory of the Radioplan configuration folder (see section 2.1. This file must be sent to Actix.3 Remote Update Procedure for a Hardware Dongle If Radioplan is protected by a hardware dongle and all the necessary license information is retrieved from this USB hardware security device. So in this case.g. the customer generates a transaction file for the currently connected hardware dongle. First. 2-1. Should the dongle become dislodged while calculations are being performed (e.2 and also [R-Admin]): [License] License = 0 Port = "USB" Server = "USB" 2. Using this activation file.com . As long as Radioplan is running. When a customer licenses e. an optimization). the dongle should be kept inserted. This section describes how the license information can be updated at the end user’s side without sending the USB dongle to Actix. make sure to have the following settings in the license. additional software modules– also for a limited time period – these modules can be activated remotely by reprogramming the hardware dongle.actix. Fig.Actix Radioplan User Guide Installation 23 2.3.3.1. the customer can update the respective hardware dongle. and in return an activation file is submitted to the end user.

exe. 2-2 Remote update utility used for hardware dongle reprogramming A transaction key is created by executing the New Transaction button. However. Thus. If successful. the customer will receive a file that comprises the updated hardware dongle information. if no transaction was initialized before or if the last transaction was already completed. the update procedure executed by pressing the Update button will reprogram your hardware dongle. copy the license file into the license subdirectory of the Radioplan configuration folder (see section 2.dresden@actix. the customer must contact our support in order to unlock the license. a new transaction key is shown in the upper field.2 Software License Files The alternative to hardware dongles is license files. 2-2. This transaction key is also stored onto the hardware dongle. it is only possible to create a new transaction key.actix. namely an activation code (default: ActCode. It is not possible to reprogram other hardware dongles using the submitted activation code.lf) which is delivered on a separate diskette. This key can be exported to a file with the Export button.rfp. This application was installed together with Radioplan and can be found in the %ApplicationPath%\licensing\RUpdate subdirectory. If an open transaction is detected. Please. please send the following information via email to support. This file must be imported into the Remote Update utility by using the Import button. it is still possible to overwrite a previously created transaction key which cancels the transaction started before. all license information is stored in a file (wineslicense. 2. see also [R-Admin]. a warning appears and the user has the choice to cancel this open transaction. refer to the next Section for further details. The license file must be saved before Radioplan is removed. Fig. Note that only that hardware dongle can be updated that the transaction key was created for.myactix.com . Once the license has been unlocked.rfp).2 and also [R-Admin]) before you start Radioplan for the first time. reinstalled or an update is installed. In return. It is possible to transfer a registered license from one PC to another PC. Then. In this case.3. During this period. Finally. Initially. the application is bound to the hardware of a specific workstation. www.com or via the portal www. The license file mechanism distinguishes two states of the license.com: • • the serial number of the dongle (as found on the little badge attached on the dongle) and the transaction key file TrKey.Actix Radioplan User Guide Installation 24 The transaction necessary to start a license update can be generated with the utility rupdate. The application window of the Remote Update utility is shown in in Fig. the license is in a locked status where the application can be executed a maximum of 30 times.

2-3.com . 2.1 Registering Radioplan It is necessary to unlock the Radioplan license for normal use. The dialog is reachable in Radioplan by the menu entry Tools License Management License Registration…. Immediately. The computer ID of your workstation is shown in the License Registration dialog.Actix Radioplan User Guide Installation 25 When using a license file. Do not use the original license file diskette that was delivered with Radioplan! www. which initially contains no license file. When you have received the registration code(s) from the technical support.3. a simple three-step procedure is performed utilizing a blank floppy disk. Within this period.2. Radioplan can be executed a maximum of 30 times.3. you can enter these values in the fields Registration Code 1 and Registration Code 2 of the dialog.2. Fig. refer to Fig.com). customers may want to move licensed software from one machine to another. and submit the computer ID number of the workstation where Radioplan shall be unlocked.2 and also [R-Admin]). Without doing so. the customer must contact our technical support via email (support. As an alternative. This license transfer scheme can be accomplished without having the customer call for registration codes. it must be ensured that the following settings are valid in the license. 2-3 License registration dialog 2.actix. a shared directory can be used as transfer media as well. we return the registration codes to unlock the application. In this case.dresden@actix.ini file: [License] License = 2 This file is located in the license subdirectory of the Radioplan configuration folder (see section 2. Then you press the button Process Registration Codes to update the license file. The current license status is shown in the lower part of the dialog.2 License Transfer From time to time.

actix. Step 3: The last step is to simply move the license file from the floppy disk onto the new computer to be licensed. The license file can be copied using the menu item Tools License Management Complete License Transfer on the target machine. This file has already been properly enabled for the target machine. Radioplan must be installed on the new machine. Choose the menu item Tools License Management Transfer this license on the old machine which manipulates the license file stored on the floppy and de-authorizes the license on the current machine. www. the license file on the floppy is enabled and the license file on the current (old) computer is disabled. so it will not run for an unlimited time. Step 2: In the second step. Then choose the menu item Tools License Management Start License Transfer to create a blank license file on the floppy identified with the computer ID number of the new machine. the blank floppy disk is taken to the licensed (old) machine.Actix Radioplan User Guide Installation 26 Step 1: To transfer a license from one computer to another. This software will be locked. During this step.com .

actix.2. the main window controls of Radioplan are introduced. however initially with an empty viewing area. www. 3-1 Window controls of the Radioplan application In the following.com . deployment. it enables the user to • • • • • • manage/load/save projects view and evaluate configuration data in several ways configure a complete network setup incl. e. the viewing area is filled. in a Citrix environment by double clicking an application icon or directly out of an RNP tool. chart graph. e..) Components Toolbar Message Window Status Bar Fig. 3-1.g. and optimization workflows. Radioplan is started from the Windows start menu under a local installation.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 27 3 Radioplan Introduction The Radioplan application provides a comfortable graphical user interface for a variety of tasks in the radio network planning. . table. In particular. the ACP module load/export network configurations and various measurement data view and evaluate network related data in a large variety of ways Usually. environment invoke and control modules of Radioplan as.. The application window looks as in Fig. There are also other ways of invoking Radioplan. As soon as a project has been opened. A reference to the controls can be found in appendix 13..g. Cell Search Toolbar Tree Window Menu Bar Standard Toolbar Views Toolbar Module Toolbars Paint Toolbar Viewing Area (surface plot.

as a GIS-enabled platform. often given in degrees that are measured relative to a reference ellipsoid.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 28 3.actix. In some cases.1 Coordinate System Radioplan.1). A Cartesian coordinate system defines the projection of a part of the earth’s surface onto a flat plane. This can be done by choosing a second display coordinate system. This display coordinate system can be a Cartesian or a geographical coordinate system. and a scaling of a point in 3D space. To understand how Radioplan handles different coordinates. the projection of its surface onto a flat plane is done part wise. the projection plane. Some of the projections are defined relative to a set of common reference ellipsoids. Table 3-1 contains a description of the parameters. This type of coordinate systems is frequently called an ECEF (earth centred. the orientation of the supported 3D coordinate systems is explained. given by a datum transformation. It constitutes the transformation of Cartesian coordinates into geographical coordinates and vice versa. first a short introduction into types of coordinate systems and their transformation is given. Such a transformation can be described by seven parameters in a way given by (3. Fig. a rotation. Since the earth is not an ideal sphere. 3-2 explains the coordinate system transformation between a projection and a display coordinate system schematically: www.1 Geographical and Cartesian Coordinate Systems A geographical coordinate system describes a position in 3D space with respect to the earth by a longitude and a latitude. a projection coordinate system must be defined. Many different coordinate systems exist in order to describe a small piece out of the earth’s surface by a flat plane as accurately as possible. Next.1. A datum transformation is the composite operation of a translation. 0 0 ⎤ ⎡ 1 ⎡ x ⎤ ⎡ dx ⎤ ⎡1 + m ⎢ ⎢ y ⎥ = ⎢dy ⎥ + ⎢ 0 1+ m 0 ⎥ ⋅ ⎢ − rz ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ z ⎥ ⎢ dz ⎥ ⎢ 0 0 1 + m⎥ ⎢ r y ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ rz 1 − rx − ry ⎤ ⎡ x0 ⎤ ⎥ rx ⎥ ⋅ ⎢ y 0 ⎥ ⎢ ⎥ 1 ⎥ ⎢ z0 ⎥ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ (3. 3. earth-fixed) system.com . it may be helpful to represent coordinates in a different coordinate system compared to the projection system.1) Table 3-1 Datum transformation parameters Parameter Description Unit dx dy dz m rx ry rz translation dx to WGS84 translation dy to WGS84 translation dz to WGS84 scaling factor to WGS84 rotation ro (rho) to WGS84 rotation rf (phi) to WGS84 rotation rk (kappa) to WGS84 m m m ppm (parts per million) radian radian radian In order to represent a position in both Cartesian coordinates and geographical coordinates. it is possible to represent display coordinates in a second projection or in a second geographical coordinate system. supports both geographical and Cartesian coordinate systems. Therefore. Note that this projection coordinate system is used for all coordinates stored internally.

actix. In the lower part.ini file. located in the coordinatesystems subdirectory of the Radioplan configuration folder (see section 2. accessible via View Projection… from the menu bar. An optional third line can be used for a user-defined datum transformation. 3-3 Projection settings dialog From the upper list box in the coordinate settings dialog one of the coordinate systems for the projection can be selected. Fig. The choice of a proper projection coordinate system is decisive for a correct import of georeferenced data or maps. The coordinate system list itself can be modified by editing the wkt. The snapshot below shows a definition of a standard projection coordinate system with a certain datum transformation to and from WGS84: www. the display coordinate system can be a Cartesian or geographical system. It can be handled by several GIS tools. Especially if geographical coordinates (e. optionally a display coordinate system can be chosen. Depending on the selection buttons. The format used in the ini-file is called Well Known Text (WKT) format. the right projection coordinate system must have been chosen before.g. 3-2 Principle of coordinate system transformation between projection and display coordinate systems The coordinate systems can be chosen in the projection dialog. Each coordinate system is defined by at least two lines.2 and also [R-Admin]). GPS positions from drive test measurements) are imported.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 29 Projection Coordinate System Cartesian Coordinates Geographical Coordinates Datum Transformation (optional) WGS 84 Datum Transformation (optional) Display Coordinate System Geographical Coordinates Cartesian Coordinates Fig.com .

z y x Fig.actix. 0].0.6377397.042e-6.696e-6.5. It consists of a horizontal x-y-plane and a vertical z-axis.PROJECTION["Transverse_Mercator"].SPHEROID["Bessel 1841". They have the following meanings: • • • • North: positive y-direction South: negative y-direction West: East: negative x-direction positive x-direction These relations are depicted in Fig. Radioplan uses a 3-dimensional Euclidian coordinate system as depicted in Fig. directions in the 3-dimensional coordinate system are given in terms of the angles ϕ and ϑ.0].4500000].PARAMETER["central_meridian".299.PARAMETER["latitu de_of_origin". the EPSG identifiers will be stored into the SQL database for the projection and optionally the display coordinate system.ini file.155.3 Internally.1.1528128]].1]] TOWGS84=582. 3.DATUM["Deutsche_Hauptdreiecksnetz".UNIT["metre".0.PARAMETER["false_northing". www.414. The orientation of these angles is presented below.0.2 Euclidian Cartesian Coordinate Systems used in Radioplan Internally. Especially when handling antenna diagrams.PRIMEM["Greenwich". 3-4. 0174532925199433]].Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 30 EPSG=31494 PROJCS["DHDN / Germany zone 4".com .PARAMETER["false_easting".1. Therefore. it is necessary that all users who use the same database work with equal coordinate system definitions that can be simply achieved by using one identical wkt. 3-4 Coordinate system used in Radioplan Often the coordinates of the x-y-plane are denoted by means of the orientations North – South – West – East.4932e-5.105.GEOGCS["DHDN".0.PARAMETER["scale_fac tor".-1.12].1].8.0]. 3-5.UNIT["degree".

an antenna with ϑ = 10° means that the antenna has 10° downtilt. 3-5). see Fig. an angle of ϕ = 90° denotes the direction of the y-axis (North). Then the angle ϕ starts counting at the y-axis (North). However. this setting cannot be changed.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 31 North North-to-East orientation Alternative orientation East ϕ = 0° y West ϕ x ϕ = 0° South Fig. 3-7 Radioplan menu bar www. there are two possible orientations of ϕ (refer to Fig. • • In the standard case. The vertical x-z-plane is shown in Fig.e. Naturally. By default. An angle of ϑ = -90° denotes the direction of the z-axis. the North-to-East alignment is used. i. It is also involved in the 3-dimensional antenna pattern interpolation algorithm as described in section 6.actix. see section 6. with the same orientation as described above. vertical antenna patterns are usually defined for a range of ϑ = [0° … 360°) where an angle of ϑ = 0° denotes the direction of the x-axis. An angle of ϑ = 0° denotes the direction of the x-axis.5. It is counted clockwise such that an angle of ϕ = 90° denotes the direction of the x-axis (East). 3-7. The antenna orientation used in a project is shown for information in the project settings dialog with the checkbox Use Horizontal North-To-East Orientation. The angle ϑ is counted downward and is defined in the range [-90° … 90°]. ACP Optimization Module. WiNeS Simulation Module) can be accessed there. positive angles represent a corresponding downtilt of an antenna.e. Alternatively. Fig.g. i. also the distinct modules (e. Measurement Module. horizontal antenna patterns are given in a North-to-East alignment. 3-6 Vertical x-z-plane of the coordinate system In contrast to this. An angle of ϕ = 0° denotes the direction of the x-axis (East). The rear hemisphere of the pattern is then in the range ϑ = [90° … 270°) from bottom to top. As an example.8. Besides the general functions. 3.2 Menu Bar Most of the functionality of Radioplan can be reached from the menu bar. the angle ϕ could be counted counter-clockwise. 3-6.2. 3-5 Horizontal x-y-plane of the coordinate system The angle ϕ in the horizontal x-y-plane is defined in the range [0° … 360°).com . z ϑ x Fig.

labels of the sites and the cells. and save configurations and network data. or text) in graphics layers to produce e. In all the other modes. The graphics toolbar allows to draw certain graphical objects (e. streets.g. among others.. The same functionality is also contained Visible Components submenu. This toolbar is undocked by default and is only visible if the graphics mode is active. the presentation of sites. and an optional legend can be toggled.g. the window controls can be used in the normal way. lines. • • • • • • More information about the toolbars and their customization can be found in appendix 13. All created layers are collected in the Layers tab of the tree window.3 Toolbars Several toolbars are provided for easy access to frequently used functions. functions to load. All toolbars can be freely moved inside the application window by dragging and dropping with the mouse. also a dedicated menu is provided. These plots can also be called from Configuration Data Plots submenu among others. the WiNeS network simulator. Cells are identified both in the map and in the hierarchical data tree. These layers can be displayed in arbitrary order and with freely definable transparency. The module toolbars summarize the main controls for the different modules of Radioplan as. For each of the modules. 3-8.actix.com . When positioning the mouse pointer over a toolbar icon. Paint submenu. and partly the View menus. The views toolbar provides quick access to the network layers and some surface plot views of configuration and network data. polygons. Edit.g. In particular. An example set of different layers is shown in Fig. In the default It comprises the same functionality as the View paint mode.4 Layer Concept Radioplan supports an arbitrary number of layers for surface plots. An explanation of the respective function is also shown in the status bar. the mouse pointer is used to perform special actions. • The standard (or default) toolbar offers functionality that is mainly contained in the File. 3.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 32 3. The components toolbar has some checkboxes to show or hide the distinct configuration data items in surface plots. a tooltip with a short description of the corresponding function appears. The paint toolbar defines the mode that controls the actions of the mouse pointer. They embrace. the View The cell search toolbar offers easy access to a text based search function for cells in the network. simulation/analysis area boundaries.2.2. www. e. refer to section 3.6. annotations for surface plots. in the View cells. and to print and to zoom active views.

g. More configuration data plots are Configuration Data Plots submenu where also some technology available from the View specific plots can be visualized.1 Configuration Data Layers Several configuration data can be presented in layers. 3.com . the layer presentation is updated.actix.4. The only exception is the traffic data that cannot be viewed www. a configuration matrix is moved).Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 33 Fig. Most of these data can be shown by clicking the respective icon from the views toolbar. 3-8 Sample view of the Layers tab Layers can be created from several things. Only if the corresponding layer is created anew. They are summarized in Table 3-2 along with the symbols as they appear in the Layers tab. Table 3-2 Different layer types Symbol Layer Contents configuration data measurement data result data (network performance data from different Radioplan Modules) optimization plots images post-processing layer (created by coinciding two layers) post-processing layer (created by manipulating a single layer) cell visual graphics layer A layer is not recalculated if the underlying data are modified (e.

see section 3. Since this plot is generated from the pathloss distribution. i. best cell received power Best Cell Received Power Creates a layer of the best cell received power distribution in the network from all active cells of the currently active network layer(s).e. if pathloss matrices are available. interference ratio. This accelerates any further creation of such plots.5). or an interference ratio layer is interpolated by default. Table 3-3 General configuration data layers Data Views Toolbar Icon Menu Entry in View Configuration Data Plots Use Plot Settings Dialog? Comment pathloss — Composite Pathloss — Creates a layer of the composite pathloss distribution in the network from all active sites.5). 2 When creating a surface plot that utilizes antenna diagrams (like pathloss incl.1.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 34 from a toolbar icon or menu entry because it is service specific. if pathloss matrices are available.com 1 .1.5. antennas — Composite Pathloss with Antennas — Creates a layer of the composite pathloss distribution including antenna patterns in the network from all active sites / cells.5. the Interpolate Image checkbox is selected in the layer settings dialog.8. or all cell area mapped plots) for the first time. RSSI.2 A pathloss.4. a best pilot received power. pathloss incl. antennas.5.1 Alternatively. Read more details about the distinct configuration data layers in Table 3-3. it can only be created if pathloss matrices are available. and the cell pilot powers. a caching procedure is done. www. a single pathloss matrix can be shown by selecting Show this Matrix from the corresponding pathloss matrix’s context menu (refer to section 6. cell overlap. best cell received power. a single pathloss matrix can be shown including the currently active cell antennas by selecting Show this Matrix incl.actix.2 Alternatively.8. an RSSI. Antenna Diagrams from the corresponding pathloss matrix’s context menu (refer to section 6. the antenna patterns.

It shows the cell areas in colors that correspond to the carrier frequencies of the cells.1.com . The best serving cell areas are derived from the best cell received power.e.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 35 Data Views Toolbar Icon Menu Entry in View Configuration Data Plots Use Plot Settings Dialog? Comment interference ratio Interence Ratio Creates a layer of the relevant signal-to-interference measure depending on technology for the active network layer(s).2 Creates a layer of the frequency plan of the network for the currently active network layer(s).5. for GSM or iDEN networks a C/I plot of the BCCH signals is shown.2 best serving cell Best Serving Cell cell overlap Cell Overlapping Active Set size — Active Set Size frequency plan — Frequency Plan RSSI — RSSI 3 A best serving cell plot layer is presented with discrete colors to make adjacent cell areas better distinguishable. CDMA2000) an Ec/I0 plot of the pilot signals is shown. this layer can only be created if pathloss matrices are available. i. For CDMA-type networks (UMTS.3 Creates a layer of the cell overlap under the assumption of 0dB hysteresis and a configurable HO margin below the best pilot for the currently active network layer(s).2 Creates a layer of the RSSI under the assumption of a certain network load for the currently active network layer(s). where each cell area is assigned a certain color.2. Thus the Discrete Colors checkbox is selected in the layer settings dialog. The determination of the cell areas is based on the best serving cell plot.2 Creates a layer of the best serving cell plot considering all active cells of the currently active network layer(s). www. see below.e.actix.2 Creates a layer of the Active Set size under the assumption of 0dB hysteresis. it can only be created if pathloss matrices are available. with a HO margin below the best pilot and a maximal Active Set size for the currently active network layer(s).1. configurable in the plot settings dialog. for WiMAX networks a CINR plot of the pilot signals is shown. see section 3. see below. i. This margin can be configured as the Cell Overlap Window in the plot settings dialog.4.

4. Creates a layer of the DEM matrix (if available). The different ground height levels are displayed according to the current color palette. clutter Clutter Data DEM matrix DEM Terrain Data — traffic — — — All the configuration data layers that do not just represent a direct mapping of matrix configuration data (such as e.com . a plot settings dialog is shown before the actual plot is created.g.actix.4.5). This layer can also be created by choosing Show this Matrix from the clutter matrix’s context menu (refer to section 6. it is not expedient to generate a composite traffic plot.6. Instead. www. choose Show this Matrix from the respective traffic matrix’s context menu (refer to section 6. This layer can also be created by choosing Show this Matrix from the DEM matrix’s context menu (refer to section 6.1. So for all layers that have the corresponding checkbox ticked in the Use Plot Settings Dialog? column in Table 3-3. It shows the clutter class indices by colors according to the current color palette. the plot parameters are described in Table 3-4. clutter or DEM). The plot settings dialog is given in Fig.6. require some further parameters to be specified before the plot is created.2 — Creates a layer of the clutter matrix. 3-9.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 36 Data Views Toolbar Icon Menu Entry in View Configuration Data Plots Use Plot Settings Dialog? Comment C/A — C/A Creates a layer of the carrier-toadjacent channel interference for all active cells of the currently active GSM or iDEN network layer(s).4). each traffic matrix can be shown for itself in a separate layer. Since every service has its own traffic matrix.2. To accomplish this.5).1. The default settings in the dialog are initialized from the general surface plot settings dialog that can be accessed from the Tools menu.

This field is initialized with the proper layer name depending on the chosen layer type and active network layer. — Use Pathloss Clutter Offsets (= Indoor Coverage) Restrict Plot to Simulation Area — — www.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 37 Fig. This setting is by default active. When holding down the <Shift> key during invocation of the layer functions. If this checkbox is active. the new layer will be restricted to the simulation area.actix. Pixels where the Rx power is lower than this threshold will by empty in the created layer. additional pathloss offsets as defined in the clutter classes definition are applied in relation to the Minimum DL Rx Power. If this checkbox is active. This effectively models indoor coverage thresholds. a possibly existing layer of the same type would be re-used and overwritten. The pixel size of the layer to be created. — Pixel Size Minimum DL Rx Power m dBm Options Overwrite existing Layer If this checkbox is active. if the corresponding flag in the general surface plot settings is set.com . 3-9 Plot settings dialog (here: for Best Pilot Power plot for UMTS) Table 3-4 Plot creation parameters Parameter Description Unit Plot Title The plot title for the layer to be created. The assumed minimum required DL Rx power of the pilot to be considered for the plot. this flag will be disabled initially.

iDEN only — www. The resulting plot then represents the actual interference situation on the BCCH.actix. areas with zero traffic will be empty in the layer. The resulting plot then represents the general overlap / interference situation between all cells. for UMTS. CDMA2000 only dBm Constant Network Load — Constant Cell Tx Power A radio button to create an interference ratio plot assuming a constant cell Tx power in all cells. the frequency plan is considered in the interference calculation for an interference ratio plot. — Use Color of Primary Cell for Additional Antennas and Repeaters Special Plot Settings — Evaluate Nth Best Server Interference Defines the Nth best server for the creation of a received power / RxLev plot.com . from simulation results or imported from another RNP tool. — Noise Floor The total noise threshold that is used as the thermal background noise incl. The network load can be specified by the Network Load parameter. for GSM.g. In this case the interference depends on the total number of available frequencies in the network and the forbidden frequencies at each cell/radio. A radio button to create an interference ratio plot assuming a constant network load in all cells. The particular control channel power settings of the cells are ignored in this case. iDEN only — Expected Interference If this checkbox is active. CDMA2000 only — Frequency Plan If this checkbox is active. iDEN only — Co-Channel Network If this checkbox is active. i. The user can choose between the 1st and 5th best server. CDMA2000 only — Individual Cell Tx Power A radio button to create an interference ratio plot assuming individual cell Tx powers. for UMTS. for UMTS. for GSM. for GSM. The particular control channel power settings of the cells are ignored in this case. any shadowing margin or mobile terminal noise figure (sensitivity) to create an interference ratio plot. all BCCH and TCH channels would be assumed on the same frequency. If this checkbox is active. The indivual cell Tx powers are taken from the Total Power cell parameter which can be set e. additional antennas and repeaters will use the same color in best cell area plots as their associated primary cell.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 38 Parameter Description Unit Mask Area by Traffic If this checkbox is active. the new layer will be masked with the traffic matrix. The total cell power can be specified by the Cell Tx Power parameter. the interference ratio plot is created using an expected interference approach.e.

body loss and any additional attenuation). j where nl is the presumed total DL network load. best cell + other cells j ∑ Ptotal . i is the PCPICH transmit power of cell i. www. 100% of network load mean that all cells transmit at their maximum output power.5.actix. N is the thermal noise floor. i and all cells i ∑ RSCP dedicated traffic . Active Set Size # All layers created by help of the plot settings dialog represent the current setting of active network layer(s).com .2. i is the effective pathloss from cell i (incl. antenna gain. j PLeffective . The assumed number of available channels in the network to be considered for creating an interference ratio plot if the Expected Interference option is selected. best cell PLeffective .2. Interference ratio plots of other technologies are calculated in a similar way. A network load of 0% corresponds to DL control channel power only. i = P[ pilot / CCCH ]. i is the compound transmit power of the other common control channels in cell i. antenna directivity. Read more about the network layer management in section 5. i PLeffective. % Cell Tx Power dBm # of Available Channels # Cell Overlapping / Active Set Cell Overlap Window The cell overlap margin below the best received pilot where cells are counted for the cell overlap and Active Set size plots. body loss. i = Ptotal . Ppilot. i + 1 N ⋅ 4 L 4 NF ⋅ ⋅ 23 100% all cells i all cells i all cells i total noise threshold ∑ ∑ ∑ with RSCP[ pilot / CCCH ].g. etc. In case the Constant Network Load option is selected in the plot settings dialog. i is the maximal transmit power of cell i (given by the cell parameter Maximum Power or Output Power). cable losses. L is the compound loss factor (including e. refer to section 3. and NF is the (average) noise figure at the terminals. best cell − PCCCH .Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 39 Parameter Description Unit Network Load The DL network load for data traffic that is used to create an interference ratio plot if the Constant Network Load option is selected. The default values for the network load nl and the total noise threshold L ⋅ N ⋅ NF (noise floor) can be configured in the general settings dialog. j − Ppilot . Ptotal. PCCCH.). the Ec/I0 at each pixel of the best pilot Ec/I0 plot for UMTS is calculated in the following manner: Ec I0 = RSCPbest pilot RSCPpilot . i + RSCPCCCH . i + nl RSCPdedicated traffic . The constant DL transmit power assumed for all cells to create an interference ratio plot if the Constant Cell Tx Power option is selected. j − PCCCH . The maximal Active Set size applied for creating the Active Set size plot. e. cable losses. dB Max. PLeffective.g. best cell − Ppilot .

Otherwise. an overview is provided in appendices 13. a certain configuration data layer is reused if the layer is created anew.5.4. 3.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 40 Usually. For UE specific parameters (as e. Also plots created from values in a table are result data layers.4. This type of layer could serve as background images. A file open dialog appears where the user can select the file name(s) of the image(s). A large variety of file formats is supported.4. Alternatively. The image file must be georeferenced in order to be properly loaded and displayed at the desired coordinates. Once an image file has been loaded into a project.3 Result Data Layers It is possible to create layers from all result parameters. the result data are mapped homogeneously to the corresponding best cell areas. others (such as e.com . a DL C/I). especially if so-called ‘before – after’ comparisons shall be made. Optimization data layers are only available in the ACP Optimization Module. a reference to it is stored in the database. 3. all respective images are loaded automatically.6 (vector formats). although their appearance in the surface plots is slightly different in order to distinguish between them.1 for details on the georeferencing capabilities of the distinct file formats.5 (raster formats) and 13. multiple file selection is supported.2 Measurement Data Layers All network related data imported from a measurement device are displayed in measurement data layers.gif or *. the result data are mapped to the respective UE positions to create a pixel matrix.5 Image Layers An arbitrary number of images from raster or vector data files can be imported as distinct Import layers by using the entries Raster Image… and Vector Data… from the File submenu. the previous layer would be overridden. described in [R-ACP]. respectively. Some data formats directly support georeferencing information.4. www. Read more about the creation of result data surface plots in chapter 12. in some cases it is useful to retain older layers of the same configuration data. 3. This means that the previous layer presentation is lost because its data is overridden. raster images can also be imported by clicking the icon from the standard toolbar (tooltip: Import Raster Image …). To accomplish this.jpg) can be georeferenced by using an ESRI world file with the same name and commonly the extension *. However.1.g. described in [R-Meas].g. Remember Holding down the <Shift> key while creating a layer will add a new layer even if another layer of the same nature already exists. however. For cell/site specific parameters.wld. Whenever the same project is opened again.actix. These surface plots represent either optimization results or auxiliary measures that help to understand and asses the progress of the network optimization. Measurement data layers are only available in the Measurement Module. one can hold down the <Shift> key while selecting the corresponding toolbar icon or menu entry. 3. This classification is used both for online measurement data during a drive test and for measurement data post-processing. See appendix 13. *. Then a new layer is created containing the current status of those configuration data.4 Optimization Data Layers The network optimization process is visually supported by some special surface plots.

Alternatively. a selected layer need not be visible. swapped in a layer slide show. 3. so various parameters can be displayed simultaneously. line style. Even post-processing layers themselves can be manipulated or coincided again. Checking a layer automatically selects that layer. All graphics layers once created in a project are retained in the database when the project is closed. 3. Another application of graphics layers is displaying cell neighbor list relationships graphically or highlighting a site in a surface plot. To rename a layer. Accessing the manipulating and coinciding layers function is described below in section 3. The usage of these graphical capabilities is described in section 3.4. any pair of two layers (except image layers or graphics layers) can be coincided using various functions to generate a new. post-processing cell visual.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 41 3. Then the layer name can be edited. or text objects with different properties for color. A selected layer can be deleted by pressing the <Delete> key.9. more details about this function can be found in chapter 12..e. the same function can be chosen from the layer’s context menu by clicking Activate only this Layer. annotations for surface plots. the < > and < > arrow keys can be used to step up or down in the list. Tooltips are also enabled for cell visuals. thickness.actix. assigning graphical objects to these layers. its tree item has to be clicked another time once it is selected. the key command <RETURN> can be used to invoke this function for the currently selected layer item. too. it will appear as first layer in the Layers tab. the cell symbol (normally a simple arrow) is replaced by a wedge-like form which is colored according to the associated cell value and the chosen color scale. A newly created layer will be placed topmost.9 Working with Layers All created layers are presented in descending order in the Layers tab of the tree window. In general. The layers can be selected in the tree window by clicking on them with the left mouse button.7 Graphics Layers Graphics layers can be used to add arbitrary graphical objects as e. post-processing layer. In this layer type. Cell visuals represent an alternative to mapped surface plots – both of them visualize cell related values. though.g. fill color. size. e. etc. inversion or adding a value etc.4.4.4.com . key commands are available to navigate in the layer list. Thus when re-opening the project previous graphics layers are still available and can be used for flexible graphical annotation of surface plots. The only exception from this rule is image layers that are always appended below all other layers.4. Thus it is always ensured that they lie in the background and could be permanently visible even if some other layers are.8 Cell Visuals Any kind of cell related data can be displayed in cell visuals. Also. Any pair of two cell visuals can be coincided using various functions to generate a new. the order of the layers in the Layers tab decides upon the visibility of the layers. Higher ordered layers are always www. A double-click on a layer selects that layer and makes it the only visible one. A layer is visible if the checkbox left of the layer is marked.g. polygons.g. if several layers are displayed simultaneously. Cell visuals can easily be overlaid on normal surface plots. 3. In turn. in particular. Such objects could be lines. the user has a powerful tool to add arbitrary annotations and marks for surface plots.6. By creating new graphics layers. and choosing an appropriate order of the layers. Also. i.6 Post-Processing Layers Any layer containing values can be manipulated by a mathematical function (e.).

color palette. scaling. The same function is also available by pressing the <Delete> key for the currently active layer item. alpha blending. e. Legend Colors… Settings Overview… Activate only this Layer Zoom to Layer Boundaries Lock Layer Lock All Layers Unlock All Layers Remove www.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 42 displayed above lower ordered layers.g. Performs a zoom command that shows the entire layer contents in the viewing area. Shows the layer settings overview dialog that summarizes the graphical presentation settings of all layers. Unlocks all layers in one step after a confirmation query. The currently selected layer can be lower than other visible layers in the tree window. this dialog can be used to modify the layer properties in a single step (see below). The legend can. Then drag and drop that layer to the desired position in the hierarchy of the Layers tab. Selects the layer and makes it the only visible one. This is a separate access to the color palette settings of the layer which are also accessible from the layer settings dialog.e.actix. etc.5. For the latter option. is suppressed. This is always the selected layer in the tree window. The only exception are cell visuals – only one of them can be visible simultaneously. The black legend shown to the left of the viewing area always belongs to the currently selected layer (not immediately visible). A flag to lock a layer. The context menu can be reached by right-clicking the respective layer in the Layers tab. several layers can be presented at the same time. For the first option. The order of the layers can be changed either by means of the context menu functions or by moving layers with the mouse. all other layers are unchecked. e. Which layers are shown is solely controlled by the checkbox left of the layer item in the tree window. Manipulate this Layer…. If the selected layer is not visible (i. Its properties can be set in the layer settings dialog (see section 3. Locks all layers in one step after a confirmation query. checkbox not set). There is a difference between the visible view in the viewing area and the color scale and layer captions shown in the black legend. see the description of the different move functions in Table 3-5 below.4) by clicking into the legend or selecting Settings… from the context menu of the layer. of course. Opens the color palette dialog of the layer. click on a layer icon and hold the left mouse button pressed down. A locked layer is stored permanently in the project and is retained even if the project is closed. the color scale etc.com . Table 3-5 Layer functions Layer Function Description Settings… Opens the layer settings dialog of the layer. • The viewing area can show an arbitrary number of overlaid layers simultaneously.. If the checkbox of the currently selected layer is not checked. i.g. only belong to a single layer. Then the visible view in the viewing area and the shown color scale in the black legend might not be matching! • All the functions of the layer context menu are summarized in Table 3-5. It is especially useful to modify the opacity (alpha blending) of layers to visually overlay several of them. The layers are automatically reordered then. By properly using alpha blending and transparent colors. Note that the context menu of graphics layers is shorted because certain functions are not necessary for them as. Despite the overview. the display of the layer color scale in the black legend to the left is suppressed. Removes the layer. Can be used to define all graphical properties of a layer as.e..

Manipulate this Layer… Coincide with other Layer… Layer Navigation Vector Layer Export In order to get a better overview of the graphical presentation settings of all layers together. Submenu for various layer export functions. Removes all layers of the same type as this one.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 43 Layer Function Description Remove All Remove Layers of this Type Removes all layers. The resulting layer is ready for further use.12 below. This function is useful if many layers of a certain type have been created that consume a large amount of memory. Fig.4. Opens a dialog to select a function to coincide the layer or cell visual with another one (see below).com . A vector layer can be converted into a raster layer by using the entry Convert to Raster Layer… (see section 3.actix. Submenu for vector layer functions. Available moving commands are Move to Foreground. this dialog offers the possibility to quickly change the layer properties. Thus selecting this function frees the memory again.g. Opens a dialog to select a function to manipulate this layer (see below). This changes the order of layers which has an impact on visibility. 3-10 Layer settings overview dialog Besides the practical overview.11 below). the following actions can be performed in the table: www.4. refer to Fig. Move one Layer Down. 3-10. Submenu to move layers in the Layers tab tree. Graphics overlays are excluded from the layer settings overview dialog because of their different properties. e. For more detailed information about layer export please refer to section 3. as clutter or traffic matrix. Move to Background. In particular. it is possible to view an overview dialog by choosing Settings Overview… from an arbitrary layer’s context menu. The settings overview dialog can be maximized such that the whole screen size can be used to view the layer settings. Move one Layer Up.

QUOTIENT. This enables a selective modification of a certain group of layers in conjunction with the copy/fill function (see next bullet). DIFFERENCE. 3-11. Choose the entry Manipulate this Layer… from a layer’s context menu to show a dialog where the required settings can be made. For a practical example on how to make efficient use of the table filter functions to modify some settings in the overview dialog. Choose the entry Coincide with other Layer/Visual… from a layer’s or cell visual’s context menu to show a dialog where the required settings can be made. Fig. read more later in section 6. Read more about the layer manipulation and coincidence functions in chapter 12.5 regarding the site settings overview dialog. etc. The basic principle is to relate the pixel-oriented data of two layers by means of a certain operation (e. An interesting option is to manipulate the data of a layer.) to produce a new layer. Parameter values can easily be copied in a column (copy/fill function). To delete layers. www. SUM. 3-11 Layer manipulation dialog Another interesting option is to coincide the data of one layer or cell visual with that of another one. Filters can be set individually for each column with the help of functions from the context menu.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 44 • • • • Individual parameter values can be changed. The layers will eventually be deleted as soon as the action is committed by pressing the OK button of the dialog.com . 3-12. Multiple layers can be erased in one action. simply mark the left checkbox of all the layers that shall be removed and then choose Remove Marked Layers from the Tools pulldown menu in the upper left corner of the dialog. Fig. It is also possible to derive an x-y scatter analysis (as graph or table) or scatter statistics (as surface plot or table) from two layers. Fig. Especially for the result analysis this function can unveil relations between different parameters that otherwise would be difficult to discover.5.g.3. PRODUCT.actix.

the layers are not automatically updated. the user has to choose either of the functions Lock All Layers or Unlock All Layers from the context menu of an arbitrary layer item. 3-13 Locking a layer It is also possible to lock or unlock all layers at a time in one step. 3-13.actix. In order to lock a layer. the Lock Layer function from that layer’s context menu must be invoked.5.3). When changing the network configuration. www. these image files are loaded into the project whenever the project is opened. A locked layer will be preserved when closing the project. 3-12 Layer coincidence dialog 3. This function is particularly useful to preserve layers that have been created by coinciding other layers etc. so it will still be in the project when it is opened again. Optionally the user can choose to have all layers initially locked when they are created by editing the Display Settings dialog (see section 3. Caution It should be clear for the user that especially a locked layer which possibly was created some time ago need not immediately reflect the current status of the network.com . This should be borne in mind when locking layers.4. In order to do this. It should be noted that in the case of background images (as image layers). the same context menu function has to be selected again. Then the layer icon gets a small lock symbol to indicate the locked status of the layer as shown in Fig. This function is not available for measurement layers because they are only temporarily shown while MCollect is active.10 Locking Layers Normal data containing layers (configuration/measurement/result/optimization/postprocessing data layers) can be locked in a project. Image layers and graphics layers (overlays) cannot be locked because they are permanently available in a project.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 45 Fig. To unlock a layer. Fig.

4. a new raster layer is created as result layer.com . It contains pixels with values as specified. www. For more information please refer to section 6. the polygons of the vector layer are filled with the associated values given by a certain data field of the vector layer. Selecting this radiobutton. Fig. 3-14 Vector to raster layer conversion dialog Table 3-6 Vector to raster layer conversion settings Parameter Data Selection Description Unit Use values from a data field Data Field Use fixed value Fixed Value Area Filter If this option is selected. — — — — Whole Area Selecting this radiobutton. the resulting raster layer will be clipped to the simulation area. This dialog is shown in Fig. e. a traffic matrix or a clutter matrix.actix. The fixed value that all surrounded pixels in the new raster layer shall be initialized with.11 Converting Vector into Raster Layers Sometimes it can be useful to convert a vector layer into a raster layer which then can be further used as e.. Selecting this radiobutton. If this option is selected. — Simulation Area Analysis Area Resolution — — Pixel Size The pixel size of the resulting raster layer. be used as a traffic matrix by using the context menu function Create Traffic Matrix from Raster Layer… at a service profile in the Configuration tab.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 46 3.6. the polygons of the vector layer are all filled with the same given value. by choosing Vector Layer the settings are described in Table 3-6.g. The data field that shall define the values of the surrounded pixels in the raster layer to be created. 3-14.g. the resulting raster layer will comprise the entire rectangle that is spanned by the extents of the original vector layer. Then the conversion dialog can be opened from the context menu of the imported vector layer Convert to Raster Layer….4. It is assumed that a vector layer was imported using File Import Vector Image…. m After committing the settings in the dialog. The new layer could be saved or. the resulting raster layer will be clipped to the analysis area.

5 Personal Workspace This section introduces the options to modify the graphical presentation in the viewing area.4. and individual layer templates. such layers Export to can be saved as a raster file by using the context menu functions Export Raster Image… or Export Save as TIFF File…. Saves the current layer presentation into a TIFF file. Shows a file save dialog to select a file name. transparency settings. The workspace settings are initially set to default settings that can be defined globally for all users at a customer. All layer properties (values. 3. Alternatively. This function is invoked by choosing Export Export to MapInfo/Shape File… from the layer’s context menu. Saves this layer as a georeferenced vector file.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 47 3. All information of the layer is choosing Export stored then into a file incl. Data containing layers (configuration/measurement/result/optimization/post-processing data layers) can also be exported to file in other formats.12 Import/Export of Layers The distinct layer export functions are listed in Table 3-7.actix. However. This function is invoked by Export… from the layer’s context menu. In particular. color palette. The layer can later be loaded again by choosing the menu entry Import Layer from File… or File Import File Graphics Overlay from File…. color palette.com . the layer type. Saves this layer as a georeferenced raster file. ranges.5.1 Workspace Handling The workspace is the conglomeration of all properties that affect the appearance of the graphical elements in the viewing area. it contains: • • • general surface plot settings. Export to MapInfo/Shape File… Export to Raster Image… Save as TIFF File… A layer can be saved to a file in native Radioplan format. captions. www. every user can individually adjust his workspace settings in the respective dialogs of the Radioplan application. The first subsection describes the workspace handling in Radioplan. legends. transparency. For example.) are preserved. display settings. scale. Such presentation properties are collectively called the workspace that can be adjusted by each user individually. whereas the following subsections highlight different aspects of the workspace. etc. The TIFF file is created in a format definition that is compatible with the import capabilities of Forsk’s ATOLL. A layer that was saved to a file can be imported into a project by choosing either of the Import Layer from File… or File Import Graphics Overlay menu functions File from File…. All settings of the layer are restored then. Table 3-7 Layer Export Functions Export Function Description Export… Saves this layer in native Radioplan format. georeferencing. The layer is saved together with a TFW file. values. they can be saved as a vector file in Shape or MapInfo format. etc. 3.

Accordingly. If step 2 was not successful. This option might not work if Radioplan is run on a remote server (e.ini file is found there.ini file in the applicable Radioplan user folder.1 Importing a Workspace In addition to the predefinition of the workspace by the winesworkspace. if the WINESHOME path is not defined in the wines.ini file is found there.ini file.ini file does not exist at this location. This central workspace can be overridden by a consecutively loaded workspace file with userspecific workspace settings. are automatically re-applied when opening Radioplan. The order of their consideration is specified in Table 3-8.g. Then the user is prompted for the workspace ini file in a open file dialog. on start of Radioplan. If the winesworkspace.ini file.2 and also [R-Admin]).ini files.1. which is: • • • the WINESHOME path defined in the wines. the central workspace settings are overridden by that.com . Citrix server). thereby overriding the installation defaults.actix. which may be located at one or more different locations. Radioplan-internal factory defaults apply. 3 %WINESHOME%\ A Windows environment variable WINESHOME can be created to define the location of user-specific Radioplan settings such as the workspace. If it is defined and the winesworkspace.5. After the workspace import.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 48 When Radioplan is shut down. the new workspace settings are active and will be used for newly created layers. Table 3-8 Order of workspace import on start of Radioplan Order Checked Location Comment 1 the Radioplan configuration folder (see section 2.ini file.ini from this location. www.ini file: the WINESHOME path defined as Windows environment variable. the user can at any time import another *.2 and also [R-Admin]) A central workspace is always loaded during Radioplan startup. if no WINESHOME path is defined at all: the Documents and Settings\<username>\Application Data\Actix\Radioplan\ folder. WINESHOME may define the location of user-specific Radioplan settings such as the workspace. 3. the system tries to read workspace settings from winesworkspace. 4 Documents and Settings\ <username>\ Application Data\ Actix\Radioplan\ If neither step 2 nor 3 were successful. 2 WINESHOME path as defined in the wines. specific workspace settings defined by the user in the application. but this variable is defined and the winesworkspace.ini file as described above. A workspace can be imported by choosing the menu entry Tools User Settings Import Workspace…. Radioplan tries to load the winesworkspace. Thus.ini file In the wines. which is located in the Radioplan configuration folder (see section 2. the central workspace settings are overridden by that. all workspace settings – including any user specific adjustments – are automatically saved to a winesworkspace.

Thus.actix.5. are automatically re-applied when opening Radioplan.2 and also [R-Admin]).5. the legend presets are not a part of the actual workspace. the installation defaults are taken from there. This can be opened by using the menu entry Tools User Settings Manage Layer Templates…. Fig.5.1).ini file has been installed.5. Then the user is prompted for the workspace ini file in a save file dialog.4 Handling of Legend Presets Similar to the workspace. also the legend presets (defining the available color palette templates to be applied for layers) can be stored in a legend.ini file(s) are handled in the same way as described above for the workspace file (see section 3.5.ini file is available in the Radioplan configuration folder (see section 2.1. the Delete button gets enabled which can be used to permanently erase that layer template from the workspace. thereby overriding the installation defaults. specific legend presets defined by the user in the application.5. 3. User Settings The workspace export is initiated by choosing the menu entry Tools Export Workspace…. the user is prompted with a query dialog to commit the workspace reset action. Read more about the handling of legend commands in the Tools presets in section 3. When a layer template is selected.1.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 49 3.com . The legend. www. In order to avoid unintended deletion of any settings. 3-15 Layer templates overview dialog Besides the overview. 3.4.1.1. If a winesworkspace. 3.5. Legend presets can also be imported and exported separately by using the according User Settings submenu. which are defined internally in Radioplan.2 Exporting a Workspace The current workspace settings can be exported to an ini file at an arbitrary location. one can use the layer templates overview dialog. this dialog gives the opportunity to delete layer templates that shall no longer be stored in the workspace. Such a workspace definition could later be retrieved as described in the Subsection above. Read more about how to add new layer templates to the workspace in section 3. 3-15. As such.5. factory defaults are applied. see Fig.ini file.3 Resetting the Workspace to Default Settings All workspace settings can be reset to installation defaults by using the menu entry Tools User Settings Reset Workspace….5 Managing Layer Templates In order to get an overview of all the individual layer templates that are stored in the workspace. If no winesworkspace.

any shadowing margin or mobile terminal noise figure (sensitivity) for various technologies.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 50 3.actix. all created plots are clipped to the simulation area.5. and the simulation area cuts out a smaller area of interest.2 General Application Settings Some general settings for the entire application can be specified in the general settings General Settings… menu entry. dBm Default Settings for Interference Plot Constant Network Load A radio button to preselect the usage of a constant network load in all cells for interference ratio plot creation. If checked. 3-16 General settings dialog Table 3-9 General application parameters Parameter Description Unit Raster Matrix Display Settings Default Minimum Plot Pixel Size Restrict Plots to Simulation Area This parameter defines the minimum pixel dimensions for the generation of surface plot layers.4. The default network load can be specified by the Network Load parameter. If the creation of dialog that is opened by using the Tools a surface plot can be further specified in a plot settings dialog (refer to section 3. its parameters are described in Table 3-9. The general settings dialog is shown in Fig.com . This option is particularly useful if network data are available for a large area. then the parameters of the plot settings dialog is initialized with the general settings. CDMA2000 only — www.1). Fig. m — Noise Floor for Interference Calculations (Nt + MS Noise Figure) The total noise floor for downlink transmission as defined as the thermal background noise Nt incl. for UMTS. 3-16.

This logfile is located in the Radioplan user folder (see section 3. All pilots receivable within this margin below the best pilot are counted in the (potential) Active Set or as pilot polluters. where the application runs. The indivual cell Tx powers are taken from the Total Power cell parameter which can be set e.e. The particular control channel power settings of the cells are ignored in this case. dB Message Logging Log Messages to File If this checkbox is active. — www. A button to open an explorer window with the folder where the logfile is saved.actix. The default constant DL transmit power assumed for all cells to create an interference ratio plot if the Constant Cell Tx Power option is selected. This setting is recommended if the disk quota on the local machine are very restricted for the user.1 and also [R-Admin]). The default total cell power can be specified by the Cell Tx Power parameter. Choosing this option will enforce the storage of temporary files in the user’s TEMP directory on the local machine.com . A network load of 0% corresponds to DL control channel power only. for UMTS. This setting is recommended to enhance the efficiency of Radioplan. The available maximal number corresponds to the number of processor cores of the underlying hardware. from simulation results or imported from another RNP tool. % Cell Tx Power dBm Default Settings for Cell Overlap Plot Cell Overlap Window The overlap margin below the best pilot for cell overlap and Active Set size plots. in a TEMP directory location in the shared file system. that are created and maintained by the memory management of the application. CDMA2000 only — Total Downlink Network Load The default DL network load for data traffic that is used to create an interference ratio plot if the Constant Network Load option is selected. 100% of network load mean that all cells transmit at their maximum output power. CDMA2000 only — Individual Cell Tx Power A radio button to preselect the usage of individual cell Tx powers for interference ratio plot creation. The particular control channel power settings of the cells are ignored in this case.5. all messages that are printed in the message window of the application are also logged into a file. — Explore Log Folder… — Storage Location of Temporary Files Store Temporary Files in Shared File System Choosing this option will store temporary files. The setting ‘Auto’ chooses the value according to the system variable NUMBER_OF_PROCESSORS. — Store Temporary Files in Local TEMP Directory — Multithreading Number of Processors The number of threads to be exploited for parallel processing. for UMTS. i.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 51 Parameter Description Unit Constant Cell Tx Power A radio button to preselect the usage of a constant cell Tx power in all cells for interference ratio plot creation.g.

actix. 3-17. This dialog is opened by choosing the menu entry Tools Its configuration is described in Table 3-10. Setting this flag displays a white halo in the background of the site symbol. Alternatively.5. presenting the cells by arrows that point towards their respective antenna orientation. 3-17 Display settings dialog Table 3-10 Display settings options Parameter Rendering of Sites Description Radiation Pattern This radiobutton enables the display of sites by using the horizontal antenna patterns with their respective orientations at each cell. Fig. A checkbox to suppress the display of inactive transmitters. this radiobutton enables a simplified display of sites.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 52 3. Simplified Use Halo Effect Size Opacity Hide cells with inactive transmitters www. The display size of sites can be regulated in 10 steps.3 Display Settings The general display settings can be configured in the display settings dialog which is shown Display Settings…. The opacity (alpha blending factor) of the site symbols can be smoothly changed between 0% and 100%.com . in Fig. Thus it can be better distinguished on a speckled background.

This setting is only effective if the Show Labels flag is active. drawing streets. Double Buffered Display Shading for Cell Visuals Data Tooltips Tiny Legend Imprint Watermark Grid Size for Editing Restore Defaults www. the viewing area settings (e. Default Opacity Lock all Layers Initially Options The default opacity (alpha blending factor) for all newly created layers. see below. The appearance of the watermark can be configured by using the Configure… button. visible area. The text size for site labels given in points. The same function is controlled by the components toolbar.) are derived from the printer settings. Tooltips are displayed in surface plots that contain data if this option is activated. The text color for site labels. In particular. This watermark can consist of an image and a text message. scrambling codes in site labels. Shading for Simulation/Analysis Area Enable WYSIWYG A checkbox to active the shading in the outside regions of simulation and analysis areas. cell visuals are drawn with a plain color corresponding to their value according to the color scale. A checkbox to optionally show site labels in a box with selectable background color.g.actix. it will appear on all printouts of the viewing area plots. etc. If this is inactive. such as drawing simulation/analysis areas. A checkbox to optionally show the cell names incl. A checkbox to activate the color shading for cell visuals. The same opacity (alpha blending factor) as for the site symbols applies. This setting is only effective if the Show Labels flag is active. If this checkbox is active.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 53 Parameter Site Labels Description Show Labels A checkbox to generally switch on or off the display of site icon in the labels. text size. etc. A checkbox to optionally have all layers being locked when they are first created. The background color for site labels. Show Site Names Show Cell Names Background Box Text Size Text Color Background Color Rendering of Streets Color Opacity New Layers The color for displaying streets. exactly the same area will be printed. A button to restore the factory settings of the display options. The opacity (alpha blending factor) for displaying streets. modifying clutter/traffic matrices.com . The grid size in [m] applied for all editing operations. The black legend is drawn with half the usual width. A checkbox to optionally show the site name in site labels. This setting is only effective if the Show Labels flag is active. This means that when choosing to print a surface plot. A watermark can be faded in at the bottom of the viewing area. scaling factor. This feature can be activated (which is recommended) to improve the viewing of tooltips.

g. a copyright message) in the watermark configuration dialog which can be opened by using the Configure… button from the display settings dialog. The watermark configuration dialog is shown in Fig.5. an exemplary viewing area with imprint watermark can be seen in Fig. It has a subdialog for a flexible configuration of the color scale for the layer.com .4 Layer Settings Besides the general display settings. 3-19. Then a small color chooser is shown the usage of which is explained in section 3. a logo) and a text (e. 3-21) can also be opened by selecting the entry Settings… from the respective layer item’s context menu. Both dialogs can be quickly accessed by clicking into the respective sensitive areas in the black legend of the currently active layer as apparent from Fig.actix. www. 3-18 Watermark configuration dialog Fig. for label text or streets) the user can simply click on the respective color button. The layer settings dialog summarizes those settings.5.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 54 For selecting a color (e. each layer has its own settings for presentation. 3-19 Viewing area with imprint watermark 3. 3-18.g. The customer can specify an image (e.5. A watermark can be faded in at the bottom of the viewing area which then would also be visible on all printouts. The layer settings dialog (see Fig. Its parameters are explained in Table 3-11. Fig. 3-20.g.

3-20 Quick access to the layer settings Fig.com .Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 55 Fig. 3-21 Layer settings dialog www.actix.

The displayed scale factor is automatically adjusted whenever the display is rescaled by a zoom operation. This option is particularly suited for displaying measurement data. Draw Contour Lines Discrete Colors Gray Scale Image Transparent Color Range Color 1/2 Opacity Scale Factor Information Legend Scale Limits Orientation and Resolution The legend scale limits are shown here for information. Only available for image layers. The scale factor of the layer. A checkbox to apply a discrete color representation to the layer. no color scale will be shown in the upper part of the black legend. The position of the upper left corner and the pixel resolution of the layer are given here for information. The label of the layer item in the tree window. They are displayed in the lower part of the black legend.5). This name is shown in the black legend in the viewing area.com . A checkbox to choose display of a slim border line around each individual layer pixel. If the color scale shall still be shown. If this field is left empty. Layer Details Options Customize Colors and Ranges… Interpolate Image Use High-Contrast Pixels A button to open the color palette dialog. A slider to define the opacity (alpha blending factor) between 0% and 100% for the layer. This feature is useful for assigning each cell a dedicated color for mapped surface plots (plots with cellspecific values mapped onto the best server cell areas). The unit applied for the layer. All pixels of the current layer that belong to the specified color range according to the active color palette are presented transparently. A checkbox to apply a transparent color range (spun between two colors) to a layer. Additional comments for the layer. The number of contour levels and their colors are determined by the color palette of that layer (see section 3.5. A checkbox to switch the layer presentation to gray scale. They can be modified in the color palette dialog.actix. It can be set to some dedicated scale factors by using the pre-defined list field entries. The latter option is recommended for true-to-scale printing of the viewing area. On the contrary. for normal surface plots with specific values in each pixel.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 56 Table 3-11 Layer settings parameters Parameter Content Description Description Caption Tree Label Unit The layer caption. A checkbox to display contour lines instead of the actual layers. this option should not be used. A checkbox to choose interpolation between adjacent pixels of a layer. www. Make sure that the colors are not too different – otherwise the color space could not be properly delimited. The two colors that span the transparent color range for the layer presentation. a white space should be entered for the unit.

If the checkbox Save these Settings as Template for all layers of this type / Update Layer Template to these settings is active when the layer settings are confirmed by clicking the OK button of the dialog.5 Color Palette Data in surface plots is displayed using a color palette. A button to open the vector layer settings dialog (only enabled for vector layers). the workspace can be saved into a winesworkspace. Then lower layer get visible at the respective pixels. the workspace is automatically saved on shutdown of Radioplan. To this end. the user may define special color palette settings for a Best Pilot Power plot and remember those settings. Furthermore. This way the user can define his own layer appearance settings and store them in his workspace.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 57 Parameter Description Layer Template / Layer uses template ‘LayerTemplate’ Save these Settings as Template for all layers of this type / Update Layer Template to these settings Open Display Settings… Open Vector Settings… If this checkbox is active when the OK button of the dialog is pressed. As an example. Furthermore.actix. www. for point data a symbol and a symbol size can be chosen. certain colors of a layer can be set completely transparent by defining a proper transparent color range. these settings are stored in the workspace as template for layers of the same type. The layer settings include the color palette definition which is described in the following section. Fig. A button to open the general display settings dialog. Furthermore. then the settings of the current layer are stored in the workspace as template for all layers of the same type. if the vector layer contains data fields. so all userdefined layer settings are retrieved when Radioplan is restarted next time. the previously stored layer settings will be retrieved from the workspace and are applied for the new layer. 3. the user can specify a field name to be visualized.com . 3-22 Vector layer settings dialog Several layers can be overlaid and displayed simultaneously. 3-22.2. the Open Vector Settings… button is enabled. By clicking it the vector layer settings dialog is opened as shown in Fig.ini file as described in section 3. A value at a certain position is shown in that color that corresponds to its scaling in the color palette between the maximum and minimum values.1. the alpha blending factor (opacity) and transparency of a color range can be controlled for each layer individually. all plots of this type will adopt these layer settings. If the layer settings dialog of a vector layer is opened. Whenever a new Best Pilot Power plot will be created after that. The transparency feature can also be used to selectively mask a certain value range of a parameter which is very helpful especially for the analysis of network related data in a surface plot. By reducing the opacity of a layer it becomes more and more transparent such that lower layers can shine through. After a user-defined layer definition has been added to the workspace. In the sequel. In particular.5.5.

refer to Fig. 3-20). 3-23 Color palette dialog Table 3-12 Color palette configuration Parameter Scale Limits Description Autoscale Minimum Maximum Colors A flag to automatically retrieve the scale limits from the extreme values of the current layer. Appends a new color entry at the end of the color palette.com . The maximum value of the scale limits. The usage of this dialog is described in Table 3-12. The minimum value of the scale limits. Deletes the currently marked color entry. The same function can also be performed by typing <Delete>. Moves the currently marked color entry one step down. 3-23. a quicker access to this dialog is provided by clicking into the upper part of the black legend area where the color scale is shown (see Fig. www.5. Moves the currently marked color entry one step up. Alternatively.5.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 58 3.1 Inspecting the Color Palette of a Layer The color palette of the currently active layer can be configured in the color palette dialog that is shown in a separate window when clicking the Customize Colors and Ranges… button.actix. Insert Entry Append Entry Delete Entry Move Up Move Down Inserts a new color entry in the color palette below the currently marked entry. Fig.

the spacing between the discrete color ranges can even be non-linear. A button to mirror the currently defined color palette. The distinct colors of the color palette each cover certain value ranges that are defined by giving a minimum value for each color. Deletes the currently selected user-defined color legend preset. A button to define a color palette by transition over a certain color range. Moreover. The colors are not shaded. www.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 59 Parameter Description Use Shading A radiobutton to use a shaded color palette. Updates the currently selected user-defined color legend preset with the current contents of the color palette table in the upper part of the dialog. the discrete colors are used for all values in the respective ranges. 3-25. see Fig. another column appears to the right of the colors. All current color palette settings are stored in the new preset. A radiobutton to use discrete color steps. Adds a new user-defined color legend preset. the currently active color palette is stored as default in the user’s registry. Use Color Steps Create Transition… Legend Presets Load Update Loads the selected color legend preset into the color palette table in the upper part of the dialog. This situation is shown in Fig. If this flag is selected when the dialog is closed by clicking the OK button. The colors of the color palette are equally spaced between the scale limits.com . instead. 3-24. values between the discrete interpolation values of the palette colors are smoothly shaded between the corresponding colors. 3-24 Defining an individual color scale with discrete colors Each color of the color palette can be modified by clicking on the corresponding color field in the table and choosing the desired color from the appearing color dialog. Delete Add… Replace Current Default with these Colors In case the option Use Color Steps is chosen. Fig.actix. In order to specify the minimum values for each color range.

3. the previous palette is overridden then. Fig.com .3 Using Legend Presets In order to ease the definition of a color palette. The new color palette is immedialy created when the Create button is hit. The minimum value of the color palette. This function can be invoked by pressing the Create Transition… button in the color palette dialog. it is also possible to automatically create a color transition with a defined number of values. later users can add their own legend presets. the dialog offers some pre-defined color palettes in the Legend Presets pane. Threshold Max. Here all parameters of the color transition can be specified as described in Table 3-13.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 60 Fig. Threshold Color Min.5.2 Creating a Transition Color Palette In addition to the manual definition of the distinct colors of a palette.5. Color Wheel Direction Clockwise or Counter-Clockwise A radio button to move clockwise or counter-clockwise from the maximum to the minimum color through the hue/saturation/brightness color space.5. Threshold Min. 3-25 Color dialog 3. The range between maximum and minimum divided by the step size determines the number of colors in the palette. The color that is associated with the maximum value. A dialog is opened which is shown in Fig. 3-26 Color transition dialog Table 3-13 Color transition settings Parameter Description Max. The step size from one color entry to the next between maximum and minimum. 3-26. The preset “Current Default” contains the color palette settings that were latest stored in the user’s registry when having the Replace Current Default with these Colors flag being set. There are three types of legend presets as shown in Table 3-14. The color that is associated with the minimum value. Threshold Color Step Size The maximum value of the color palette. Factory preset are delivered with the Radioplan installation.5.actix. www.

Likewise. These settings are persistently stored in the user’s registry. a legend. This toolbar window can be freely moved on the screen and could even be docked at the preferred toolbar places of the application window.1 Creating a Graphics Layer All graphics layer functions are controlled by the graphics toolbar.ini file is the Radioplan user folder (see section 3.5. This can be accomplished by using the menu entry Tools User Settings Export Legend Presets…. 3. 3.ini file can be imported into Radioplan by using the menu entry Tools User Settings Import Legend Presets….Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 61 Table 3-14 Legend preset types Symbol Legend Preset Type Current default Factory preset User-defined preset A legend preset can be chosen by either double-clicking on the respective entry or by selecting a preset and then press the Load button. This toolbar can be icon (tooltip Draw Graphics displayed by entering the graphics painting mode using the Overlays) from the paint toolbar to the left.4 Import and Export of Legend Presets It is possible to store the currently defined legend presets in an ini file in order to retain them for future use. Immediately. the newly loaded legend presets are available as legend templates in the color palette dialog. 3-28. This is done by clicking the left icon in the graphics toolbar (tooltip Add Overlay). 3-27 Graphics toolbar As long as the graphics painting mode is active. a snapping grid is shown in the viewing area. Then a small dialog is shown where the user can specify a name for the new graphics layer. The default location for the legend. www. first a graphics layer needs to be created.6 Paint Module for Graphics Layers 3. An existing entry can be updated by pressing the Update button.1 and also [R-Admin]). In order to create a new color legend preset. to compare between plots). The graphics toolbar is shown in Fig. see Fig.5.actix. Then press the Add… button and specify a legend name in the appearing dialog. 3-27. first the desired settings should be adjusted. All previous manipulations of the color palette will be overridden in that case.e.6.5. it can be deleted by pressing the Delete button. could be changed by using the Before any graphics element can be drawn in the graphics painting mode. This name will then be appended in the legend presets list. The distance between the grid points is determined by the configured grid size which icon (tooltip Grid Size) from the paint toolbar to the left. This is very useful for often used parameters that shall always be shown with the same scaling (i.com . The user can add an arbitrary number of user-defined color legend presets. Fig.

6. Draw a polygon. The graphics painting mode can be left by changing to another painting mode (one of the other icons of the painting toolbar) or leaving any painting mode by using the icon (top most icon of the painting toolbar).e.com . Toggle arrow heads for line ends. polygons. Shows the drawing settings dialog. or text. if needed. Then the graphics toolbar and the snapping grid disappear. Toggle filled status for polygons. 3-28 Specifying a name for a graphics layer Once the creation of the new graphics layer has been confirmed by pressing the OK button in this dialog. The two left of them are just toggle buttons to add an arrow to the end of a line and to fill a drawn polygon. 3.e. for showing neighbor list relationships of a cell or for highlighting a certain site for finding it.1 Drawing Settings The properties of the graphics elements to be drawn can be influenced by the three icons to the right of the graphics toolbar. polygon.6. 3. the layer is created and listed on top of the Layers tab in the tree window.1. www. This is a prerequisite for any drawing action. In order to select one of the drawing functions for line. Any graphics layers and their content that have been produced so far are retained.g. These icons are described in Table 3-15. The new layer is initially empty. However.6.1. Graphics layers are also used e. Draw a straight line.2 Drawing in a Graphics Layer The graphics toolbar offers several paint functions (lines. and text) as well as different property controls for graphics elements. its alpha blending factor (opacity) is 100%.6.2. If no graphics layer is active or if the active one is not visible. Insert arbitrary text. they initially have a lower alpha blending factor. refer to section 3.actix. Table 3-15 Graphics toolbar controls Icon Description Create a new graphics layer. refer to section 3.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 62 Fig. checkbox set). it is required that a graphics layer is both active (i. Any graphics element that is drawn is appended to the currently active graphics layer. the icons of the drawing functions remain gray and cannot be chosen.2. Such special layers are like normal graphics layers that could even be used for drawing. selected) and visible (i.

Then a dialog is shown that can be used to enter the text and to define its properties. 3-29 Drawing settings dialog All currently active property settings are thenceforth applied to any graphics drawing action.2. just click on the color button and select the new color from the appearing color chooser.6. The drawing command can be aborted by pressing the <ESC> key as long as the end vertex has not been set yet. The upper left corner of the text to be inserted is then set with the left mouse button according to the snapping grid. 3.actix. After the last vertex has been set. and arrow status. 3. 3-30 Text insertion dialog www. 3-30. the polygon is closed automatically to the first vertex and is shown with the selected properties in terms of color.6. Fig. Then the mouse turns into a crosshair. Then the mouse turns into a crosshair. end) vertex has been set. Fig. After the second (i. Then the mouse turns into a crosshair. select the icon in the graphics toolbar. line width. select the icon in the graphics toolbar. 3. and fill status. The start and end vertex of the line are then set with the left mouse button while their positions are snapped to the chosen grid size. select the icon in the graphics toolbar.2 Drawing a Line To draw a straight line.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 63 The last icon opens the drawing settings dialog that can be used to set the line width and the color used for lines and polygons. The distinct vertices of the polygon are then set with the left mouse button while their positions are snapped to the chosen grid size. To change the color. line width.6.3 Drawing a Polygon To draw a polygon.4 Inserting Text To insert text in the graphics layer.2.com . The drawing command can be aborted by pressing the <ESC> key as long as the last vertex has not been set yet. The drawing settings dialog is shown in Fig.2. see Fig. 3-29.e. The last vertex is marked with a double click of the left mouse button. the new line is shown with the selected properties in terms of color.

3. and Layers tab. 3. but it cannot be dragged to a network controller (RNC/BSC). 3. pixel-based input/output data). it is retained persistently in the project.8 Viewing Area The viewing area can display data in three different kinds: • • • surface plot (simulation/analysis area. result parameters.com . In general.actix. If the flag Draw Background Box is set. It consists of four tabs: Projects tab. So the font. These viewing options are used to present all kinds of network related data. the font size (in points). or table (measurement data. Table 3-16 Icons for different viewing options Icon Description Show surface plot Show diagram chart Show histogram chart Show table (not result summary report) Show result summary report www. All changes that are made in the tree structure are directly updated in the underlying database.3. summary report. chart graph (diagram. the text color (upper color button) and an optional background color (lower color button) can be specified. For example. It is possible to drag and drop items to a different position in the tree if the data structure allows this. So after closing and re-opening the project.6. The other controls in the upper part of the dialog are for determining the text properties. More details on the different viewing options can be found in conjunction with the explanation of the network data evaluation in section 12. all graphics layers can be deleted in one step by using the menu entry View Remove All Overlays. each tab presents its data in a tree structure. A graphics layer can be deleted by using the according entries from the layer context menu. Each tree item (leaf) has a context menu that can be accessed by right-clicking the item. After the label settings have been commited by pressing the OK button of this dialog. The standard toolbar provides a quick access to switch between the different viewing options. all its contents is still available.7 Tree Window The tree window lets the user control all project data. Further. These buttons are only active if a view of the corresponding kind has already been created.3 Deleting Graphics Layers Once a graphics layer has been created. the text would be surrounded by a box that is filled with the background color. Configuration tab.).Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 64 The big text field in the lower part of the dialog is for text label itself. a cell can only be dragged from one site to another. The respective icons are listed in Table 3-16. etc. histogram). Results tab. the text is inserted at the defined position.

Alternatively. the zoom mode need not be chosen to scale the diagrams. They can be accomplished as follows: • • Zoom on simulation area: This view is shown by selecting View Zoom Fit to Simulation Area or by clicking the icon (tooltip Fit to Simulation Area) from the standard toolbar. If an action is started that takes some moments as. a progress bar is shown in the statusbar that informs the user about the current working status. It can be chosen by selecting View Zoom Fit to Window or by clicking icon (tooltip Fit to Window) from the standard toolbar. If there are configuration data placed outside the simulation area.10 Message Window and Status Bar The message window is for showing messages including warnings. 3. Zoom on analysis area: This view is shown by selecting View Zoom Fit to Analysis Area or by clicking the icon (tooltip Fit to Analysis Area) from the standard toolbar. i.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 65 3. When releasing the mouse button. then this view will also show these regions. For example. Alternatively. the the shortkey <F4> can be used. errors. the shortkey <Shift-F4> can be used.g.. and status indications of the distinct modules during the usage of Radioplan. The user can then clicking the draw a dragbox with the mouse pointer by holding down the left mouse button. relevant data as. For tables.g. If the mouse pointer is located in the viewing area. this function shows the complete area that is covered by configuration data (e. The status bar shows the current status of Radioplan. pathloss matrices). The different types of messages have according prefixes: ERR for errors. e. Alternatively.e. the shortkey <Ctrl-F4> can be used.9 Zoom Functions The scaling of the presented data in the viewing area is basically controlled by the zoom functions. the shortkey <F3> can be used. Zoom Out: Shows a down-scaled (thus larger) portion of the current view by Zoom Zoom Out or by clicking the icon (tooltip Zoom Out) selecting View from the standard toolbar. In surface plots.g. loading data into the database. Default Zoom: In surface plots. Alternatively. Additionally. e. the current position is shown there. and MSG for other messages.. These functions are helpful to quickly focus on these regions that are especially important for the network data analysis. Any zoom actions in surface plots can be undone by using the previous scaling) from the standard toolbar. the shortkey <F2> can be used. chart graph. irrespective of the type of presentation (surface plot. www.com . it is also possible to zoom in and out using the mouse wheel while holding down the <Ctrl> key. two additional default zoom actions are supported: Zooming on the simulation area or the analysis area. the viewing area is scaled to the just drawn dragbox. icon (tooltip Zoom to If a chart graph is displayed in the viewing area. WRN for warnings. The following functions are available: • • • Zoom In: Shows an enlarged (thus smaller) portion of the current view by selecting View Zoom Zoom In or by clicking the icon (tooltip Zoom In) from the standard toolbar.actix. The status bar is also used to display the tooltip texts when the mouse pointer is positioned over an item providing tooltips. then zooming with the mouse pointer also works in the default mode. or table). messages originating from the underlying database or simulator output messages are displayed in the message window. there is a graphical zoom mode for surface plots that can be entered by icon (tooltip Zoom) from the paint toolbar to the left. Alternatively.

com . www.actix.11 Online Help Radioplan has a context sensitive online help system. This leads to the relevant help page. The general help page can be opened by using the menu entry ? Help Topics.Actix Radioplan User Guide Radioplan Introduction 66 3. the help system is opened with the relevant page. the GUI elements of Radioplan can be investigated with the help function icon (tooltip Help) in the standard toolbar. The help dialog can be accessed from any situation (in particular in dialogs) in Radioplan by typing <F1>. When clicking on a GUI element. Furthermore. Then the mouse pointer available from the turns into a symbol.

or click the New Project. The project dialog appears where you should change the project title to “Demo Project”. see appendix 13.1 Setting Up a Demo Project On start of the Radioplan application. type Ctrl-N.actix. This situation is depicted in Fig. A project with a simple network configuration is created and properly configured. Then the project is ready for usage with the different Radioplan modules. The entire demo project configuration can also be found in the provided examples directory. 4-1 A newly created project Open the project settings dialog by double-clicking on the project item in the Projects tab of the tree window to the left.com . 4-1.Actix Radioplan User Guide Getting Started with Radioplan 67 4 Getting Started with Radioplan The main focus of this chapter is to demonstrate the ease of working with Radioplan. The new project will have an initial beneath the menu bar.1. The default project name is “New Project” which appears in the project list to the left. To create a new project. or choose File size of 1 km2.4. www. Now the dialog should look as in Fig. Fig. This tutorial is instructive for understanding the handling of the different network configuration items while setting up a complete network layout. the viewing area to the right is initially empty (light icon in the standard toolbar gray). 4. 4-2.

This is accomplished by clicking the icon (tooltip Add Sites and Cells) in the paint toolbar to the left. www. It is shown in the left part of the views toolbar as “UMTS::0::Default”. A simple UMTS network with two sites with threesectored cells shall be defined. For the purpose of this demo project. user behavior. 4-3. Then a snapping grid is shown.2 RAN Configuration We start configuring the RAN setup. 4. As apparent from the configuration data treeview in Fig. environment. we do not need to add further network layers. 4-3 Configuration tab of the tree window giving the hierarchical configuration data structure 4. 4-2 Project settings dialog of the demo project Next. Fig.com . the network setup is divided into four groups: • • • • areas (polygons).2. The configuration data can be inspected in the Configuration tab of the tree window.1 First Site To set a site at a certain position in the simulation area.Actix Radioplan User Guide Getting Started with Radioplan 68 Fig. the whole network setup to be investigated has to be configured. you must enter the Site and Cell Add Mode. and RAN setup. Please note that initially only a UMTS network layer was generated in the new project.actix.

The current situation is shown in Fig. This is apparent from the tree window as shown in Fig. Fig. also three associated cells and a superordinate network controller have been created. 4-4.Actix Radioplan User Guide Getting Started with Radioplan 69 You should change the grid size to 50m by clicking the icon (tooltip Grid Size) in the paint toolbar. The cells of the site are currently symbolized by orange arrows because no antenna has been chosen yet for them. In the appearing dialog. 4-5 Network setup with first site Note that together with the site. 250m). 4-4 Changing the grid size to 50m Now you can place the first site at the position (250m. the new site is shown in the viewing area. Locate the mouse pointer at the given position and hit the right mouse key. and the hierarchical network setup in the Configuration tab of the tree window is updated accordingly.com . A context menu appears where you choose the entry Add Site + 3 Cells.actix. Immediately. Fig. www. 4-6. you can modify the grid size as shown in Fig. 4-5.

com . the configuration dialog for the network controller can be opened by double clicking the network controller item in the tree window. If desired. 4-7. The resulting site configuration should look as given in Fig.2. www.1 Network Controller Configuration For this demo. 4-8.Actix Radioplan User Guide Getting Started with Radioplan 70 Fig. site.1. Open the site configuration dialog by double clicking the respective item in the tree window and make the following simple change: • Change the ID to “Site 1”. the parameter settings of the newly created network controller do not need to be changed.actix. 4-7 Network controller configuration dialog 4.2. 4-6 Hierarchy of network controller. and cells 4. The dialog should look as shown in Fig.1.2 Site Configuration Next the site settings are to be adjusted. Fig.

You can inspect both the horizontal and the vertical diagrams from the antenna settings dialog which can be opened by double clicking the antenna item.3 Antenna Import Prior to configuring the cells.2. first an antenna has to be imported.1. For this you should first leave the Site and Cell Add Mode and return to the normal mode by clicking the icon in the paint toolbar to the left. Then the antenna diagrams can be displayed by pressing either of the Show Diagram buttons. the cells can be configured. Then a file open dialog appears that shows all available antennas in the library by default.cfg file. 4-9 shows the vertical diagram of the dipole antenna.actix. Antennas are like templates that are referenced from a cell. 4-9 Vertical antenna diagram of a sector antenna 4.Actix Radioplan User Guide Getting Started with Radioplan 71 Fig.com . The import is done by choosing Import Antenna… from the context menu of the Antennas node in the tree window.4 Cell Configuration After the antenna has been imported. The new antenna is added to the Antennas node in the tree window below the No Family category. Fig. www. 4-8 Site configuration dialog 4.1. You should choose the Antenna_6deg_Tilt.2. Fig.

All other settings may remain unchanged for now.actix. 4-11 Cell configuration dialog The cell is shown then as a black arrow in the surface plot instead of an orange one. 4-10. This is the antenna that has just been imported. Their names should be “Cell 1-2” and “Cell 1-3”. 4-10 Opening a cell configuration dialog by double clicking a cell You should make the following adjustments for the cell: • • • Modify the ID to “Cell 1-1”. Fig.Actix Radioplan User Guide Getting Started with Radioplan 72 The cell configuration dialog is opened by double clicking the respective cell symbol in the viewing area. Fig.com . Now the other two cells can be configured accordingly. www. Choose the sector antenna from the antenna pattern list field. This is shown in Fig. This value is interpreted relative to the altitude value in the site which was set to 0m previously (default). In addition to opening the cell configuration dialog this way. Set the height over ground to 25m. the cell symbol is selected on the screen and the according cell item highlighted in the tree window to the left. The resulting cell configuration should look as given in Fig. 4-11.

Place the second site at the position (750m. Click this button to align the lowest attenuation value in the pathloss matrix with the cell position. Make similar adjustments of the configurations of the second site and its associated cells. Select the pathloss matrix freespace_pathloss_pl3. To import one for the first cell.3 Pathloss of the Cells Each cell needs an associated pathloss matrix. Now the resulting best received pilot power can be displayed in the simulation area by clicking the icon (tooltip Plot Received Power) in the views toolbar. the best received pilot power plot must be recreated and the new situation as in Fig.cfg that is located in a subdirectory of the Node B configuration data in the library. 4. As you will notice. “Cell 2-3” accordingly.Actix Radioplan User Guide Getting Started with Radioplan 73 4. 4-12.2. This pathloss matrix models free space propagation with a pathloss exponent of 3. After the second site has been configured properly. The file open dialog for the pathloss matrix is shown. Note that the coordinates of the upper left corner of the pathloss matrix are changed. choose Import Pathloss Matrix… from this cell’s context menu. After leaving the settings dialog again. www.2 Second Site Likewise. Make sure that you are in the Site and Cell Add Mode . The plot settings in the appearing dialog can simply be confirmed by pressing the OK button. Open the settings dialog of the pathloss matrix by double clicking its item in the configuration data tree. In the IDs you should denote them by “Site 2” and “Cell 2-1”.actix. otherwise you could not graphically create the new site. a second site shall be created in the very same way as the first one. Fig. 4-13 is reached. “Cell 2-2”. the pathloss matrix is still misaligned.2. Please make sure to hold down the <Shift> key while selecting the menu entry. 4-12 Demo network setup with two sites Now you can leave the Site and Cell Add Mode and return to the normal mode by clicking the icon in the paint toolbar. 750m).com . the network setup should look as shown in Fig. Of course. the network controller need not be changed because there is only a single network controller in the network that all sites are connected to. In the appearing dialog there is a button Synchronize Position with Site/Cell.

www.com . If all pathloss matrices have been configured correctly. Notice the small + sign beside the mouse pointer that indicates the simultaneous duplicating action while dragging the matrix item. You can center them to the antenna position in the way as described above. Just hold down the <Ctrl> key and drag the new matrix with the mouse to the next cell and drop it there as soon as that cell item is selected under the mouse pointer. the network setup will look as shown in Fig.actix. 4-13 Cell 1-1 with pathloss matrix The pathloss matrix of the other cells is created by copying the first one and dragging it to the other cell items in the configuration data tree. 4-14 Dragging&dropping + copying the pathloss matrix This action shall be repeated until all cells have their pathloss matrices. drag&drop copying Fig. Make sure that the pathloss matrices of the cells at the second site are properly positioned. This operation is shown in Fig. 4-14. 4-15.Actix Radioplan User Guide Getting Started with Radioplan 74 Fig.

This is shown in Fig.3 User Configuration The user behavior is summarized in the UE profile that consists of three subprofiles: equipment profile. For network optimization. and service profile.com . typically a simplified user modeling with a single. The correct subdirectory in the library is already preselected in the file open dialog. mobility profile. the user configuration in this sample project uses several services. Once this equipment profile has been loaded. The configuration file is called R99. moving on streets at vehicular speed. 4. you can inspect the parameter settings of it by double clicking the newly added items in the configuration data tree. moving straight forward at pedestrian speed.actix.3. 4-15 RAN setup of the demo project 4. Such a detailed configuration is usually only needed for network simulations. www. generic service is sufficient.1 Equipment Profile Import the equipment profile that is specified in Table 4-1 from the library by choosing Import Equipment Profile… from the context menu of the Equipment Profiles item of the configuration data tree. User with a packet-switched web browsing service at 384kbit/s.2kbit/s.Actix Radioplan User Guide Getting Started with Radioplan 75 Fig. 4-16. Now we will create two different UE profiles with the following specifications: Table 4-1 UE profiles for the demo project UE Profile Subprofiles Description Speech UE R99 Terminal Street Movement Vehicular Speech R99 Terminal Straight Movement Pedestrian Internet User with a circuit-switched speech service at 12. The subprofiles are like templates that are referenced from a UE profile. Internet UE For demonstration purposes.cfg.

We will create a new traffic matrix each for the service profiles and define a simple traffic distribution in the matrix.2 Mobility Profile Likewise. It is recommended that this region should cover almost the complete simulation area and only leave the areas close to the margins empty. The drawing action can be canceled at any time by pressing the <ESC> key. The new matrix is added to the configuration data tree below the service profile. You should enter 25m as a reasonable setting. In the appearing matrix resolution dialog the pixel size for the new matrix can be specified. For this one has to enter the traffic region drawing mode by clicking the icon (tooltip: Add Traffic Region) from the left toolbar. 4. Note that this matrix is initialized with ones. 4. Now let us draw a rectangular region in the traffic matrix where users should be created. corresponding to a traffic of 1user per square kilometer. After the last vertex was set.3. A traffic matrix contains pixel-based relative/absolute traffic density values.3. see Fig.cfg and Straight Movement Pedestrian. you should change the setting to e.Actix Radioplan User Guide Getting Started with Radioplan 76 Fig. 40 Erl/km2. 4-17.com . import the mobility profiles from the library by choosing Import Mobility Profile… from the context menu of the Mobility Profiles item of the configuration data tree. The final vertex is set with a double click.cfg. The traffic can be displayed by selecting Show this Matrix from the context menu of the traffic matrix. choose the movement models Street Movement Vehicular. 4-16 Importing an equipment profile 4.actix.3 Service Profile Import the service profiles from the library by choosing Import Service Profile… from the context menu of the Service Profiles item of the configuration data tree. Since the initial matrix was filled with ones. 4-18. The rectangle is drawn vertex by vertex with the left mouse button.cfg and Internet.3.4 Traffic Each service profile shall have an own associated traffic matrix. www. 4-17 Setting the traffic value for a new traffic region The resulting traffic matrix should look approximately as in Fig.cfg for importing. You can inspect the parameter settings of the service profiles by double clicking the newly added items in the configuration data tree. You can inspect the parameter settings of the mobility profiles by double clicking the newly added items in the configuration data tree.g. a dialog appears where you have to specify a (relative) traffic value for the drawn polygon in the lower field. In the appearing file open dialog. The first traffic matrix is assigned to the service profile “Speech” by choosing Add new Matrix from the context menu of the service profile. Fig. The service profiles for the demo project are called Speech.

Actix Radioplan User Guide Getting Started with Radioplan 77 Fig. Now the region where UEs are activated should be confined to the right half of the simulation area around Site 2. Here the traffic density in the drawn polygon should be set to e.actix.com .g. 5 Erl/km2. 4-19. 4-18 Traffic matrix of the “Speech” service profile Repeat the procedure for the second service profile “Internet”. 4-19 Traffic matrix of the “Internet” service profile www. The matrix should look approximately as in Fig. Fig.

3. www.4 Environment Configuration The environment consists of clutter data. Usually such data come from geographic databases and can be imported from there into Radioplan. 4-21 Defining the UE profile “Internet UE” 4. and optionally streets. 4-20 Defining the UE profile “Speech UE” To define the second UE profile. mobility. 4-20.5 UE Profile Create a first UE profile by choosing Add UE Profile from the context menu of the UE Profiles item in the configuration data tree. Change its name to “Internet UE” and choose the other subprofiles as indicated in Table 4-1.com . The new profile called “Added UE” immediately appears beneath the UE Profiles item. The settings are shown in Fig. Enter its settings dialog by double-clicking the item. Change the ID to “Speech UE” and select the three profiles (equipment.actix. Fig. Fig. just duplicate the first one by choosing Duplicate Profile from its context menu. So here it shall only be demonstrated to draw some streets. DEM matrix.Actix Radioplan User Guide Getting Started with Radioplan 78 4. 4-21. The settings for this UE profile are shown in Fig. and service) as indicated in Table 4-1.

There they can be used for the street movement model. Select the only available street category “Category1” (default street category) as shown in Fig. 4-24. Open this dialog by double-clicking the Streets item in the configuration data tree. street vectors could simply be imported as a background image. Modify the default category as shown in Fig. Fig. Before you start drawing make sure that the grid is fairly rough. 50m).Actix Radioplan User Guide Getting Started with Radioplan 79 4. www. and specify the street width of that category. Possibly modify the grid by clicking the icon from the left toolbar. 4-23.com .4.1 Streets Normally streets are only needed for network simulations.g. The drawing action can be canceled at any time by pressing the <ESC> key. Here you can change the category name. Each street corner (vertex of the polyline) is set with the left mouse button. The last corner is set with a double-click. 4-22.actix. Fig. Enter this mode by clicking the icon (tooltip: Add Streets) from the paint toolbar to the left. Streets can be drawn as polylines in the streets drawing mode. In the appearing dialog you can enter the new grid size (e. 4-22 Selecting a category for a newly drawn street The street categories can be edited in the street settings dialog. 4-23 Defining a street category The resulting street could look like in Fig. Try to draw a rectangular street quarter with the mouse. Then a dialog appears where the street category of the street just drawn must be given. enter a description. Otherwise.

Detailed information on the usage of these modules you can find in the corresponding chapters of this user guide or in the specialized documentations. www.actix.g.Actix Radioplan User Guide Getting Started with Radioplan 80 Fig.5 Next Steps Now your first little sample network is completely set up and ready for more. 4-24 The “Highway” 4. simulation or optimization) to further explore Radioplan.com . You can use the different Radioplan modules (e.

com . 5. All available projects are shown in the Projects tab of the tree window.1 Project Folders Projects can be hierarchically organized in the Projects tab. all loaded network performance data are contained in the Results tab.actix. Project folders can be renamed by using their context menu entry Rename Folder or by simply clicking the folder item twice in the tree window. Thus it is possible to properly group projects in nested folders www. A new folder has the default name “New Folder”. A project comprises all configuration. and all created surface plot layers are listed in the Layers tab of the tree window.Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 81 5 Project Handling Working with Radioplan is basically working with projects.1 General Project Setup A project defines the general radio network setup in a certain geographic region. Then the new name can be edited. However. 5. A sample project hierarchy is shown in Fig.1. and so are the simulation results and performance measurements. the network configuration data are accessible from the Configuration tab. Fig. The complete network configuration is managed in the project. Folders and projects can easily be shifted by the mouse pointer inside the tree with a simple drag&drop action. the project management supports loading and comparing different results from slightly modified configurations within the same project or even between different projects. In order to obtain an improved network setup. New folders and subfolders can easily be created by using the New Folder entry from the main node’s or any other folder’s context menu. 5-1. measurement. The project titles need not immediately be unique. it is good practice to choose unambiguous project titles. For the currently open project. or result data of a certain investigation scenario and is embedded in the entire network planning and operation workflow. 5-1 Sample project hierarchy The hierarchy of the project tree can be reordered according to the user’s requirements. Projects are stored in a database.

Moreover. too. This way the convenience of usage is increased remarkably. 5-2 Project folder context menu Please note that in case of using the function Delete Folder(s). 5. Read more about the different ways of working with projects in the subsequent sections. 5-3 Project context menu www. Save/export a project or single network items from the database.2 Project Actions Due to the complex nature of mobile communications systems. Most of the project handling actions are available from the context menu of a project.com . or from configuration files (in the proprietary Radioplan format). Merge projects inside the built-in database. the construction of a project right from scratch would be very tedious. a frequent requirement is to use existing data from other entities of the radio network planning/configuration workflow in the network simulation. • • • Use and modify an existing project from the built-in database. Shows the project settings dialog (only for open project) Opens this project (only for another project) Duplicates this project Creates Sub-project based on this project Deletes this project Updates Opens a Opens a Opens a the project and shows a parameter overview (only for open project) wizard for manipulating various project data dialog to merge this project with another one dialog to choose which Sub-Project to use for Synchronization Shows project statistics overview (only for open project) Deletes the result data stored in this project Refreshes the tree presentation Fig.1. the respective folder will be deleted including all subfolders and projects contained in it. subfolders Renames this project folder Refreshes the tree presentation Fig. The menu items are described in Fig. the user is prompted with an alert dialog to confirm the action. Import/load a project into the database: ▫ ▫ ▫ from a Radio Network Planning (RNP) tool. from another Radioplan database.actix. 5-2. 5-3. the following opportunities are offered to the user: • • Build a new project by using preconfigured items from the library. The complete context menu of the projects folders is shown in Fig. In order to avoid undesired deletion. In particular. Creates a new project folder below this one Deletes this project folder incl.Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 82 with arbitrary depth. Unused folders can be deleted by using the context menu entry Delete Folder(s). Thus working with projects in Radioplan means to use and rely on predefined configuration components.

Alternatively. the user can choose File Layers from the menu to open this dialog.com .1 Network Layer Management The network layers of a project are managed by the elements in the left part of the views toolbar. A possibility to create a multi-layer project is to merge projects containing different network layers.3 below. A network layer is characterized by a radio technology.2. ‘GSM’.6. For iDEN and GSM layers a priority can be set in order to support traffic assignment for concentric cells (Capital Planning Module) The number of cells currently assigned to the network layer (for information only). and ‘WiMAX’. Another possibility is to duplicate a network layer while choosing a different technology for the copied layer. ‘CDMA’. Each project can contain several of such network layers. ‘iDEN’. Within the same project. Radioplan projects can generally manage multiple network layers and even multiple technologies simultaneously. 5-4.actix. Fig. see section 5. 5-4 Network layer management dialog Table 5-1 Network layer properties Property Description System Frequency Band HCS Priority Cells The system technology of the network layer. 5.2 Multi-Layer/Multi-Technology Projects Radioplan supports hierarchical cell structures (HCS) consisting of network layers. see section 5. www. The general network layer management is done in the network layer management dialog which can be opened by pressing the icon (tooltip Manage Network Layers) from the Current Project Manage Network views toolbar. each network layer ID must be unique. the various configuration items are described in Table 5-1. The network layer ID. The user can choose between ‘UMTS’. This could be the ARFCN used by the network layer. A sample network layer setup is shown in Fig.2.Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 83 5. The frequency band of the network layer.3 for details.

And each cell is assigned to a network layer according to technology and frequency band. the string “Multiple Layers” is shown there. site sharing and even antenna sharing can be modeled.actix. Always select a system technology and enter proper values for the frequency band and HCS. Only empty network layers (no cells assigned) can be deleted by pressing the X button to the right.com .2 Multi-Layer Project Structure Multi-layer/multi-technology projects are modeled in Radioplan by having common sites across technologies and network layers. If several network layers are active. However. It is possible to activate several network layers in a project simultaneously using the checkboxes at the left side of the dialog. all active network layers must belong to the same system technology. • 5. Network optimization is only performed for the currently active network layer(s). Table 5-2 shows the available system technologies with their associated cell symbols. At least one network layer must be active at any time. A cell contains all relevant system specific parameters. Each site can have cells of various technologies.1) only consider the currently active network layer(s). If only a single network layer shall be active. Table 5-2 Available cell symbols Cell Symbol Description UMTS cell CDMA2000 cell GSM cell iDEN cell WiMAX cell The selected network layer(s) determine the network elements that are considered for any actions in Radioplan: • • • • All configuration plots (see section 3. it can also quickly be selected from the combo box directly. Measurement analysis and pathloss tuning can only be performed for the currently active network layer(s). By having cells of different systems at the same site. Network simulation is only performed for the currently active network layer(s). A site is mainly characterized by its position and can have various system specific hardware parameters. www. the following rules should be followed: • • • • • A new network layer can be created by pressing the Add… button on the lower left of the dialog.4.Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 84 For the definition and management of network layers. The currently active network layer is shown in the combo box to the left of the views toolbar.2.

3 Duplicating a Network Layer The network elements (cells.actix. the visibility of the network elements is filtered to the currently active network layer(s). Both the network elements in the configuration data tree to the left as well as in the viewing area are controlled by this visibility flag. additional antennas) of a network layer can be duplicated.2. During this action. 5-6. 5-5. The duplicate function is invoked by selecting the menu entry File Current Project Duplicate Network Layer…. This function is particularly useful if a different technology network shall be rolled out based on the site configurations of an existing network. Target Network Layer System Frequency Band HCS The technology of the new network layer. the technology of the new network layer can be freely chosen. all network elements in the project are visible. The filter status is also indicated by a special icon at the Network Elements node item in the tree window. repeaters. Then this function can be invoked by Current Project Apply Cell/Antenna Parameters from selecting the menu entry File other Network Layers…. The usage of this function is explained in Table 5-3.com . the target network layer must be active. ‘CDMA2000’.Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 85 In addition to the selection of the active network layer(s). If this button is active. ‘GSM’. and ‘WiMAX’. Fig. Initially. The frequency band of the new network layer. the visibility of the network icon elements in the various layers can be controlled separately. The name of the HCS for the new network layer. Otherwise.4 Applying Network Configurations from other Network Layers Similarly. ‘iDEN’. network configurations can be copied from one network layer to another one. 5. 5.g. 5-5 Duplicate network layer dialog Table 5-3 Duplicate network layer setup Parameter Description Source Network Layer The user can choose a single network layer out of all existing ones in the project to be duplicated. www.2. One can choose from ‘UMTS’. This could be e. the ARFCN of the new network. The according dialog appears that is shown in Fig. Then the duplicate network layer dialog appears as shown in Fig. This is done by the (tooltip Show only Active Layers) from the views toolbar.

it is possible to duplicate the project and work with the copy. different aspects of the network configuration can be chosen for being applied to the current network layer. If the user wants to work with another project. refer to [R-ASM]. If. It is possible to restrict the access to a certain project to a single user. then this association is used for applying the cell parameters to the target network layer. The current access status of a project is symbolized by the project icon in the Projects tab according to the key given in Table 5-4.com . the current project is closed. 5-6 Dialog for copying network configurations from other network layers In the upper part of this dialog. If no sector alias is defined for the cells of source and target network layer(s). 5. Table 5-4 Access restrictions of projects Project Icon Description Project with unrestricted access for all users Project with unrestricted access for the owner (within brackets) only Project access restricted to the user given in brackets (different user). Such sector aliases can be imported from Atoll.2. This icon can also appear together with the green or red lock symbol for showing the above mentioned access restrictions. the cells need to have identical names in order that the specified parameters can be copied from one network layer to another. If the user wants to work with two or more projects simultaneously. All project data are saved in the database automatically.Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 86 Fig. The current user has no access to this project. Sub-project (see section 5.actix. cells of different network layers are associated by identical sector aliases (irrespective of their names). In the lower part of the dialog.3 User Rights Management In general. Radioplan is project oriented. However. one or more network layers can be chosen to retrieve their configurations. The database is multiuser enabled such that several users can work with the same project data.11) with unrestricted access for all users. www. Currently open project (unrestricted access) Read how to specify the owner of a project and how to select the access policy in section 6. Multiple selection is possible by using the <Shift> and <Ctrl> keys. which means that at a certain time only one project can be open. however. Radioplan can be opened several times while using the same underlying multi-user enabled database.

5.ini file located in the Radioplan configuration folder (see section 2. 5. 5. When importing a new item into the network configuration. As an alternative. cells.1 Importing a Project from an RNP Tool Radioplan provides several interfaces to import entire project configurations from other RNP tools. If an owner of the project was specified.2 and also [R-Admin]). the name is given within brackets behind the project title. The simplest form of import is just a file based import. Furthermore.ini files. the login of the user who created the new project is taken as the owner.com . it is possible to load a network configuration from Radioplan’s own file format. sites.1. different user levels are available to allow or restrict the access to certain functions and controls of the application on a user individual basis.5 Project Data Import Usually.g. you can click the from the standard toolbar or type Ctrl-N. refer to chapter 4 where it is shown how to use the library to easily build a simple example configuration.actix. By default.Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 87 As another aspect of the user rights management. icon The initially empty project will immediately be transferred to the Radioplan database. to validate the radio network quality and to adjust the RRM algorithm parameters. A new list entry in the Projects tab of the tree window appears. Read more about how to edit the general project settings in section 6. Refer to section 5. and the three user profiles for equipment. Alternatively. These parameter settings are contained in the defaultparameters. A network configuration can also be imported from the OSS. and antennas. Please. and service can be exported. a representative set of preconfigured project items is provided with the installation in the library subdirectory of the Radioplan installation folder (see section 2. However. but e. Read more on Radioplan user rights and their configuration in [R-Admin]. a radio network setup that has been previously planned in Radioplan or another RNP tool can be imported into the current Radioplan database to further improve and optimize it.4. in case of the www. It is possible to extend the library by exporting certain simulation items into it that have been identified for future/general use. In order to create such a new project. the user has the opportunity to build a new network configuration from scratch.4 Creating a New Project For the case that no preconfigured project data are available. most of the configuration settings dialogs have a Default button that can be used to reset all parameters of that profile to pre-configured default values.2.5 for a more detailed description on this.8. mobility.1 Library Integration If all parameters of a network configuration had to be configured manually this would be a tedious and error-prone work. The project is automatically initialized with a default simulation area of 1 km2. the user is prompted with a file open dialog that presents the available library items by default. Especially the RAN items like network controller. no network elements are contained in the project yet.5. User levels and their special access rights can be configured by *. 5. one has to perform the following steps: • • Choose File New Project from the menu. In order to greatly simplify and automate this process.2 and also [RAdmin]).

5. In case of creating a new project. MMR data or switch counters). the network configuration of the currently open project can be updated with the selected network configuration file by checking the option Update Current Open Project. This dialog is shown in Fig. the selected network configuration will be imported as a new project.3 Importing a Project from another Radioplan Database Sometimes it might be necessary to transfer a Radioplan project between databases. The benefit of this function is that the imported network configuration would directly reflect the parameter settings in the live network without the need to maintain the data in an RNP tool. Further import interfaces can be added at short notice.g. Please refer to the Automatic Parameter Optimization Module and the Automatic Neighbor List Planning Module. next the user is prompted with the projection settings dialog where the projection and display coordinate systems can be selected. such Radioplan Modules allow to perform network optimization entirely based on live network data.actix. This can be accomplished by choosing the menu entry File Import Project from other Database…. pathloss matrices etc.2 Importing Network Configuration Data from the OSS Radioplan supports the import of network configuration from the OSS in certain formats. DEM. 5-7. After that the network configuration is imported.Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 88 ATOLL Synchronization Module (ASM). www. On the other hand. clutter. An OSS network configuration is imported by choosing the menu entry File Import OSS Network Configuration…. 5.5. In conjunction with performance measurement data from the live networks (e. 5-7 OSS network configuration data import dialog If this dialog is confirmed without further option. Still the network configuration data available from the OSS is sufficient for several Radioplan Modules. Then a dialog appears where the user can specify the database that contains the project(s) that shall be imported as apparent from Fig.5. 5-8. for example. OSS network configuration data does not contain any map data (e. The project import can be invoked from the File submenu.).com . Fig. A dialog appears where the user can select a network configuration file and an optional filter polygon for the network cluster. also a fully integrated COM based bidirectional data Import exchange is supported.g.

ini file has been recognized. In the course of the loading process. the user has the possibility to load a configuration that is stored in a hierarchical file structure. In order to load an existing project from an external configuration directory into the Radioplan database.5.actix. Alternatively. The user can select an arbitrary number of projects for import. all available projects from that database are listed in the dialog.Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 89 Fig. you can click the icon from the standard toolbar. 5. www.4 Loading Configuration Data in Radioplan Format If the specific network configuration to be investigated is not yet contained in the Radioplan database. Depending on the setting of the flag Change owner of project(s) to myself. The network configuration must be available in the Radioplan configuration format that is briefly described in appendix 13. The project import starts by pressing the OK button. The project(s) will be imported including their folder hierarchy of the original project tree. the following steps must be conducted: • Choose File Load Project Data… from the menu. A file open dialog appears.1. a new project is created. Multiple selection in the list is possible by using the <Shift> and <Ctrl> keys. the project owner is either retrieved from the original project(s) or set to the user who performs the import.com . 5-8 Project import from database dialog Once the database specified by the wines.

• To open the desired project. the progress of the action is shown in the progress bar that appears in the status bar. Although it is permitted to have projects www.6.2.actix. When you then open another project. alternatively.2. a project in the database can also be copied.5 for loading an externally stored network configuration into the Radioplan database. While the project is loaded. 5. one has to perform the following steps: • Select the Projects tab of the tree window by clicking the corresponding clip in the lower part of that window. Additionally. Here it is described how a network configuration is used that has already been loaded into the internal database of Radioplan. Import of both CellOpt AFP 2 and 3 formats is supported. See section 5. In order to open an existing project.Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 90 • • Select the main configuration file from the appropriate configuration directory of the project you want to load. This preliminary title can be changed in the project settings dialog. To change the access rights. that one is highlighted in the list with the symbol.6 Working with Existing Projects A usual case of working in the network planning/configuration process is to improve the network setup by performing recursive investigations in basically the same scenario. refer to section 6. the project title is displayed in the title bar of the application window. Typically only a very small number of parameters is changed in this type of investigations.1 Duplicating a Project In the case that a certain project configuration shall be preserved before modifying it. one can modify them in the project settings dialog. When loading is finished the simulation area is shown in the viewing area. refer to section 6. Project folders in the tree can be expanded/collapsed by clicking the +/. denoted by an appropriate suffix. If currently any project is open.5. 5.com . 5.sign left of them. In case of the Cellopt AFP 2 format. Immediately. the user can select several files that would be combined into a Radioplan project. This Import Cellopt AFP Project…. see the section on the Components toolbar in appendix 13. it is assured that only a single project is active at any time. A hierarchical list of all projects that are available in the database appears in the tree window. A function is invoked by choosing the menu entry File dialog is shown where the user can select the Cellopt AFP file.2. the previous one will be closed at the same time. This is done by selecting Duplicate Project from the corresponding project’s context menu. The extent of configuration items shown there depends on the settings of the viewing options.e. Then the project is opened and the simulation area is shown in the viewing area. the new copied project appears in the tree window. The user rights of the new project are automatically confined to the current user (owner). i.5 Actix Cellopt AFP Plan Import A network plan from Actix Cellopt AFP can be imported as a project into Radioplan. The project is loaded into the Radioplan database as soon as you choose the main configuration file. The clear choice in this case is to use a predefined network environment.2. just double-click on the respective list item or choose Open Project… from the item’s context menu.

its usage is explained in Table 5-5.com . 5-9 Project maintenance wizard: site removal Table 5-5 Site removal options in the project maintenance wizard Function Description Remove Sites from Project Remove Sites and Cells located outside of Simulation Area Remove Inactive Cells Remove Sites with no cells attached General flag to enable the subsequent site removal functions.6. 5. If this checkbox is activated.2 Using the Project Maintenance Wizard In order to reduce the memory consumption of a project and to strip the project data taylored to a certain area. all sites and cells outside the simulation area will be removed from the project. Fig. The first wizard dialog appears which allows to remove unnecessary sites and cells from the project. all sites that have no attached cells will be removed from the project. It can be invoked from the project context menu by using the entry Maintenance Wizard…. This dialog is shown in Fig. This is especially useful if several users work with the same database. 5-9. Pressing the Next button leads to the second wizard dialog.actix. the project conversion wizard can be used. 5-10. it is recommended to assign each project an unambiguous name in order to distinguish them from one another. Here the user can convert the pathloss matrices into multi-resolution matrices and possibly clip them to the extensions of the simulation area. Even if a certain project is not accessible due to the user rights management. This dialog is shown in Fig. Thus it is assured that the configuration data of other users are not disturbed while enabling access to the very same data in copied projects. www. its usage is explained in Table 5-6. it is possible to duplicate such a project and work with the copy. If this checkbox is activated.Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 91 with identical titles in the database. If this checkbox is activated. all inactive cells will be removed from the project.

a value of 4 reduces the pixel resolution outside the highres area by a factor of 4. As an example. the memory consumption for that part is reduced by a factor of 42=16. all single resolution pathloss matrices in the project will be converted into high/low resolution matrices.com . www. The radius of the highres part of the new pathloss matrices. its usage is explained in Table 5-7. this value should be chosen smaller than half the original matrix extension. 5-10 Project maintenance wizard: pathloss conversion Table 5-6 Pathloss conversion options in the project maintenance wizard Parameter Description Unit Convert Single Resolution into MultiResolution Pathloss New HighRes Radius If this checkbox is activated. — m New LowRes Resolution Factor — Clip Pathloss to Simulation Area — In the last wizard dialog. i. If this checkbox is activated. all pathloss matrices are clipped to the extensions of the simulation area.actix.e. it is possible to configure antenna families or to remove unused antenna families.Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 92 Fig. In order to reduce the memory consumption. The resolution reduction factor per dimension for the lowres part of the new pathloss matrices. 5-11. This dialog is shown in Fig.

the user can navigate back and forth through the wizard using the Back and Next buttons.actix. If this checkbox is activated.5. as the case may be. At any time before pressing the Run button. additional antenna. Remove Unused Antenna Families Pressing the Run button in the final wizard dialog will start the project conversion. Then a dialog is shown where the other project can be chosen that shall be merged into the current one. 5-11 Project maintenance wizard: antenna configuration and removal Table 5-7 Antenna family options in the project maintenance wizard Function Description Configure and Remove Antennas from Project Create Antenna Families General flag to enable the subsequent antenna conversion functions.9 for details on the antenna family definition. However. 5-12. 5.6. www. This dialog is shown in Fig. or repeater. In order to merge another project into the current one.g. If this checkbox is activated.com . such different network layers might only be available in separate projects.Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 93 Fig. the function Merge Projects… from the project’s context menu is to be selected. shared antennas). See section 6. the antennas in the project are grouped into antenna families according to the naming convention of the antennas. This is particularly the case if the RNP tool which is used as the data source does not support multi-layer projects including the corresponding cross-layer constraints (e. all antenna families are stripped from the project that are not referenced by any cell.3 Merging Projects In general it is possible to handle multi-layer projects in Radioplan.

Only network elements (sites and cells with their associated antennas. 5-13. selecting File Current Project List Project Parameters from the menu bar. The parameter settings of all configuration items are shown then in a table in the viewing area. It is in the responsibility of the user to update and maintain the cross-layer contraints. 5. and only the used antenna families.Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 94 Fig. Sites can be merged either according to their location or their name. a suffix can be specified that is added to all cell names of the imported network layer(s). So the user can choose to confine the merging to only the active network elements. are highlighted in red. A blue background color indicates that the respective parameter was filled with a value based on another parameter.actix. An example view of the configuration parameters overview is given in Fig.7. Please refer to [R-ACP] for a description on the usage and configuration.7 Project Database Management 5. 5-12 Merge projects dialog There are a few flags that can be used to customize the project merging. repeaters.com . additional antennas. Furthermore. in particular the shared antenna flags. www. alternatively. Parameters that were unset and that are thus filled with a default value.1 Project Update A complete overview of all configuration data settings of the current project including an update of possibly missing or obsolescent parameters can be obtained by choosing the entry Update Project from the project’s context menu or. and pathloss matrices) are copied from the other project into the current one. the network elements in the simulation area. Any network layers that did not yet exist in the current project and that are associated with any network elements copied from the other project are also copied.

These default values are taken from the defaultparameters. www.ini file is up-to-date).Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 95 Fig. Then the project update is started immediately.actix. 5-13 Complete parameter overview of a project Previously unset parameters (backed blue or red) are set to the displayed default values as soon as the Parameter Report & Update function is invoked. it might be necessary to update all projects in the database in one step. the processing of the database update can take some minutes.2 Complete Project Update of the Database Especially in the case when upgrading to a new Radioplan release.7. Hence this function is perfectly suited to update old project configurations to the latest version (presumed the defaultparameters. Then each project would be updated in the same way as done with the ‘Update Project’ function in the previous subsection. This will be automatically ensured if the new Radioplan release was correctly installed.ini files are installed when starting the database update.com . The complete project update of the database can be invoked by using the Tools Database Update All Projects menu entry.ini file in the Radioplan configuration folder (see section 2. 5. Make sure that the latest and up-to-date *. Depending on the number and size of projects in the database.2 and also [RAdmin]).

3 List of Projects in the Database In order to get an overview of all projects in the database with their current access rights and memory consumption. 5.Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 96 5.4 Project Statistics A report with project statistics about the memory consumption. www. An example of a project list is using the menu entry Tools given in Fig. and the number of sites/cells inside the areas can be created from the entry Project Statistics when right-clicking on the currently active project’s item in the Projects tab of the tree window. after a network optimization to compare the original with the optimized network setup. Fig. 5-15 Sample project statistics report If there are multiple network layers in the project.7. 5-14. 5-14 Project overview list 5. Fig.5 Direct Comparison Between Project Configurations Besides the configuration overview of a single project.7.g. the statistics report is opened in a separate window. This function is invoked by Database List All Projects. first a summary of the entire project is given in the project statistics report. the different areas. 5-15 shows a sample statistics report. a comparison between the configuration of two different project can be done. Fig.com .actix. This makes particular sense e.7. a list of projects can be created. When holding down the <Shift> key while choosing the menu entry. Below that the figures for each network layer are given separately.

Then the parameters of the current project are compared to those of another project that can be selected from all projects in the database. Additionally. After all necessary data have been collected. Then a dialog is shown where the other project for the comparison can be selected. 5-17 Project comparison overview www. the deviating value of the other project is given in parentheses.actix.com . a similar table is displayed as the parameter overview in section 5.Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 97 The project comparison function can only be called for an open project. This operation can take a moment. the respective fields are highlighted with a turquoise background.7. An example of a project comparison overview is given in Fig. 5-16 Project selection dialog for project comparison As soon as the selection of a project has been confirmed. the configuration comparison overview is determined. The progress is indicated in the status bar. Fig. Fig.1 above. This dialog is presented in Fig. 5-17. The project comparison function can be invoked by choosing File Current Project Compare with Other Project… from the menu bar. 5-16. If certain configuration parameter values differ between the projects.

this is necessary to exchange a network configuration between independent platforms/workstations.com . If the determined destination directory still contains some older configuration data. select “Browse…” in the upper list field to display a file select dialog. a dialog is shown where the user can specify the main configuration file name. For example.g. Before saving icon (tooltip Save the project.Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 98 5. see [R-ASM] for details on the ASM.8. the user is informed in the center list field which files must be deleted before saving the current project configuration. www. 5-18. it must be open in Radioplan. This is accomplished by opening the project update dialog and possibly selecting the cells to be updated. project. A sample view of the dialog is shown in Fig.cfg (e. For example. The main configuration file must have the extension *. 5. Besides saving a complete project it is also possible to export single configuration items into external configuration files. by clicking the Project Data) or by choosing File Save Project Data… from the menu. modifications in the network layout can also be transferred back to the original project in the RNP in order to keep them synchronized. Fig.8.2 Saving a Project into Files A project can be saved into a hierarchical directory structure in a file system. Both of these alternatives are described in the following subsections.cfg). Then.g.actix. 5.1 Backward Synchronization of an RNP Project from Radioplan If the current Radioplan project was imported from an RNP via an integrated interface (e.8 Project Data Export Projects are normally held in the Radioplan database. Details of the backward synchronization with different RNP tools can be found in the according documentation material. 5-18 Save dialog for the configuration data In order to enter a proper path. A project can also be saved entirely to external files. via COM API or direct database access).

g. the option Export for Simulator must be selected.3 Actix CellRefs Export It is possible to export a network plan in Actix CellRefs format.actix.ini file with the same name is stored. This function can be used to.com .. For a network simulation. To accomplish this. A file open dialog appears where the user can specify the filename and path where to store the item configuration. locations. This *. Such information can be used in the ActixOne Platform and related products such as Actix Viewpoint or Actix Analyzer as references of cell and site names. This check would only have importance if the network configuration is intended to be simulated which requires a complete set of configuration data. Then a dialog is shown where the user can select the filename incl. the site locations given in the CellRefs are always exported in WGS84 projection. The hierarchical directory structure of the configuration data and the configuration file format are further described in appendix 13. meaning that the filenames of the configuration files are directly derived from the primary keys of the respective items in the database. In the appearing file save dialog the user can choose the filename of the exported CellRefs file. This function is invoked by choosing the menu entry File Export Cellopt AFP Plan…. he could click the Cancel button instead.4 Actix Cellopt AFP Plan Export A network plan can also be exported in Cellopt AFP 2/3 format in order to be further used Export in Actix Cellopt AFP. The progress of the saving action is shown as a progress bar in the status bar. Typically.8.8. On the contrary. a smaller area from a large master project can be cut out effectively with the help of this option. the menu entry Tools Actix CellRefs File Export can be used. single configuration items can be exported to external configuration files. however.ini file can be utilized by Analyzer when the CellRefs file is read. e. one has to choose the entry Export <Item Name>… from the respective item’s context menu in the Configuration tab of the tree window. and some further parameters. • • • The configuration data are saved eventually by clicking the Proceed button. 5. www.Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 99 In the lower part of the dialog. In conjunction with the actual CellRefs file also an *. a completeness check of the project data will be performed during export. In order to export a CellRefs file. several options can be chosen: • By default. exchange certain configuration items of a network setup between different projects or to extend the library by user-defined items. Even if another projection system is used in the project. If it is checked.8. The option Use Primary Keys as File Names instead of Name of Network Elements is activated by default.5 Configuration Item Export Likewise. 5.1. Using the Restrict Environment data to Simulation Area option allows to limit the amount of data stored in the project to minimum. If the user would like to abort the saving action. path and the version of the Cellopt AFP file. the flag Check validity of project configuration is inactive to just store the project data as is. the filenames would be derived from the IDs of the distinct items. 5.

By default. one can click the icon from the simulator toolbar. For a more detailed description. respectively. or all results together. network element. To add new simulation results data to the already existing ones in the database. All network performance data originating from a single measurement or simulation is collectively called a result set.e. Import Measurements…. the user can also display the data of other projects from the same database in the Results tab and use them for an evaluation. position.9 Managing Network Performance Data in a Project Network performance data from measurements or simulations can only be loaded into an existing project in the database. According to the different types of network performance data. the checkbox Add Results – Existing Result Sets will not be removed in the import dialog must be selected.9. i.3 Deleting Network Performance Data To remove simulation results or drive test data from a project.9. The simulation results loading process is described in greater detail in [R-Sim]. i.1 Structure of Network Performance Data The network performance data of a project are listed in the Results tab in a hierarchical tree structure.Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 100 5.com . The removal of result parameters is described in greater detail in chapter 12. It is also possible to load results from several simulation runs incrementally into the project for the purpose of comparison. the user has the choice to either delete just a single parameter. newly loaded measurement data are added as a new result set. 5. In order to compare network data from different projects (with possibly similar network configuration).2 Network Performance Data Import The direct import of measurement data from different measurement devices is supported. newly loaded data override all existing network performance data in the project. simulation results are imported nonincrementally. Table 5-8 Types of result sets Result Set Icon Description Measurement result set Dynamic simulation result set Snapshot simulation result set Performance counter data result set Generic result set (converted from table data) 5. The network performance data management is briefly described in the following sections. a whole result set. Measurement data are loaded by using the menu entry File Such data are always incrementally imported to the project.actix. This way it is assured that they are always tied to a certain network configuration. The data are ordered in several hierarchical levels that are explained below. the network data (parameters) are grouped in certain Categories. 5. In order to load simulation results. Inside each result set. etc. Each parameter contains a set of values that have an associated time stamp. or select Simulation Import Results from the menu.9.e. In the appearing dialog the desired parameters can be chosen for loading. refer to chapter 12. www. This can be accomplished by selecting the corresponding Delete <…> entries in the context menus of the project (in the Projects tab) or an item in the Results tab. the result sets are symbolized by different icons that are summarized in Table 5-8.

The following steps have to be performed to accomplish this. A dialog appears where the user can select a filter area for the sites to be copied to the sub-project(s). 5-19 Create sub-projects dialog www.actix. In the appearing confirmation dialog. This saves disk space when several sub-projects are in use since all the pathloss and GEO data is contained in the one master project. The user is asked to confirm the deletion of the current project. the user can select Yes to all in order to delete all projects together. As one example. • • Choose Delete Project from the project’s context menu. As another option. they can be used in the Capital Planning process to calculate different scenarios for a network and compare the solutions to the initial master project. a larger master project could be divided into sub-projects of smaller clusters that can be optimized separately. If the question is negated the project will be preserved. 5.com .Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 101 5. After the optimization. 5-19. DEM) will only be contained in the master project. All pathloss data as well as GEO data (e. Sub-projects are useful for various purposes. Caution! The deletion of a project cannot be undone. open the context menu in the Projects tab and select Create Sub-Project(s)….11. A sub-project would then be a copy of the network configuration including the user configuration and the traffic matrices of the master project. 5. refer to Fig.1 Deriving Sub-Projects from a Master Project To create sub-projects from the currently open (master) project. The according project item in the tree window is removed.10 Deleting an Existing Project It is possible to delete an existing project from the Radioplan database. Otherwise it is completely deleted from the database including all results or drive test data that might have been loaded into it.g. Several projects can be deleted in one step by first marking them in the Projects tab and then choose Delete Project from the project context menu.11 Handling of Master/Sub-Projects It is possible to create one or more ‘Sub-projects’ from a given ‘Master Project’. cluster results are synchronized back and combined in the master project. A project can only be deleted if the current user has access permission to that project. clutter matrices. Fig.

In addition. the option Create without assigning an owner should be activated. amended by the name of the filter polygon they were created for. 5.com . a new sub-project for each selected area from the list would be created. Otherwise just a single sub-project as a full copy of the master project would be generated. Fig. using separate sub-projects. The corresponding master project is shown below the project title. all area polygons available in the project are listed. 5-20 Project settings dialog of a sub-project It is not possible to merge a sub-project with any other project – the respective entry in the project context menu is grayed out. so this is prohibited. simply open the project settings dialog of the sub-project. the investigation of different optimization scenarios or neighbor list optimization.11. If in addition also the option Copy only the selected filter area is activated then for each new sub-project only the respective area polygon will be copied as the new simulation area. e. If the new sub-projects shall be made available for more users than just the owner of the master project. see Fig. especially in the case where more than one sub-projects were derived from the same master project.11. The user may want to adjust the sub-project name accordingly for better identification. The reason for this is that merging the sub-project would have an impact on the master project.2 Working with Sub-Projects Since the pathloss matrices would be contained in the original master project. After the filter selection is committed.g. In order to determine the corresponding master project for a given sub-project. this would mean that pathloss tuning would only have to be performed once (i. the projects are identified as a sub-project by ‘<Sub Project>’ behind the name. the new sub-projects are created. it is excluded to call the project maintenance wizard from a sub-project for the same reason. They appear as new entries in the Projects tab of the tree window with a special sub-project icon (possibly amended by the green or red lock symbol) and having the same name as its master project.3 Synchronizing a Sub-Project with its Master Project After different optimization scenarios have been perfomed it is then possible to perform a synchronization of the site and cell settings between the master and sub-project. 5-20. Likewise. This synchronization can be accomplished by opening the context menu of the master project in www.e. This could be the recommended setting for a typical workflow of a super user assigning the subprojects to different engineers for further processing. Multiple sub-projects can be made from a given master project that allows. 5. in the master project).Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 102 In this dialog. If the option Filter Sites by Area is chosen.actix.

If a master project is deleted then automatically all its sub-projects will be deleted as well.4 Deleting a Sub-Project A sub-project is deleted like any normal project. all parameters that have changed in that subproject since the branching are updated in the master project. During the master/sub-project synchronization only network parameters of cells that exist in both projects are updated. 5-21 Selecting a sub-project for synchronization with its master project This dialog lists all existing sub-projects of the currently open master project. www. After the user has confirmed the selected sub-project. Sites/cells that would have been added afterwards to the master project would not be touched. There are two different ways to accomplish this: • Synchronization: A parameter synchronization in the sense as described above can be done by opening the context menu of the sub-project in the Projects tab and selecting Synchronize from Master Project…. Alternatively. In this case the network plan in the entire simulation area of the sub-project is refreshed from the master project. it is also possible to apply the network settings of the master project to the sub-project. Fig.actix. 5-21. the sub-project is updated immediately because it has only a single master project. This will open a dialog to choose which sub-project should be used for applying the network settings to the master project as shown in Fig. This means that. In this case the project deletion dialog contains a Detail… button as shown in Fig. Fresh-up: The complete sub-project can be refreshed from its master project by selecting Refresh from Master Project… from the sub-project’s context menu. in contrast to a simple parameter synchronization. • 5. Please refer to section 5. When pressing this button. In this case.11.10 for details. also new or deleted sites/cells will also be updated to the sub-project. all the affected sub-projects are listed in the lower part of the dialog. 5-22.Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 103 the Projects tab and selecting Synchronize from Sub-Project….com .

com .Actix Radioplan User Guide Project Handling 104 Fig. 5-22 Project delection dialog with sub-projects www.actix.

and dynamic or snapshot network simulation. RRM parameter optimization.1 Configuration Overview The Configuration tab of the tree window contains all configuration data of a project. or WiMAX is described in chapters 7 through 11. iDEN. environment data. The structure and particular meaning of the configuration data is explained in detail in this chapter.actix.com . CDMA2000. Projects can be used for various planning and optimization activities such as capacity/coverage optimization. GSM. An example configuration is shown in Fig. pathloss tuning. measurement analysis. The configuration of system technology specific elements for UMTS. site selection. 6-1. 6.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 105 6 Multi-Layer Project Configuration This chapter describes the general configuration of multi-layer/multi-technology projects in Radioplan. www. neighbor list planning. 6-1 Configuration data tree view The project configuration data are separated into four major categories: • • areas (polygons). Fig.

6-2.sign in front of it. just expand the corresponding folder by either double-clicking the folder icon or single-clicking the +/. it can be shown in the viewing area by choosing Show this Matrix.2 Project Settings The overall settings of a project can be configured in its project settings dialog. or they can be retained in the library. This can be opened from the project’s context menu (either in the Projects. This can be renamed and manipulated in its settings dialog. Copy: New items can be created by duplicating existing ones.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 106 • • user profile. It shows all of the configurable options of the particular item. or Results tab in the tree window) by clicking the entry Settings… or by simply double-clicking the project item. A new item will be added to the tree. Creation: For some types of configuration items (especially matrices or network elements). all data items in the tree can be manipulated in several ways. Export: Certain configuration items (UTRAN items and user profiles) can be exported into single configuration files by choosing Export <Item Name>…. it can be dragged to another position in the tree. In general.actix. The options are summarized in the following: • • • Settings dialog: Choose Settings… from the item’s context menu to display the settings dialog. and can configure the user rights management. Repeating the same action will collapse the branch items. Removal: Existing items can be deleted from the tree by choosing Delete <Item Name>. The new item is added to the database then. This way items can be exchanged between projects. Import: A new item can be imported from a configuration file (from the library by default) by choosing Import <Item Name>…. • • • • The following sections treat all the above mentioned major configuration data categories. Choose Duplicate <Item Name> from the context menu of an existing item. The dialog is shown in Fig. The user can specify the project title along with a description. new objects can be created by choosing Add <Item Name>. If required. Show Matrix: If the tree item is a matrix. Altogether they constitute a hierarchical structure of configuration items that is represented in a tree.com . Most of these options can be reached via the context menu of an item (right-click on the item). These groups are further subdivided as appropriate to ease the intuitive understanding of the configuration data structure. and RAN configuration. In order to make the data items in a tree branch visible. www. and the distinct fields are described in detail in Table 6-1. Configuration. 6. They are initialized with default settings.

However.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 107 Fig. This is especially important if no owner is specified in the field above. If on creation of sub-project no initial owner is assigned. — — — — By default. the current user login is taken as the owner of a new project. the associated master project is given below the project title. 6-3. A button to take ownership of this project by assigning the user ID to it. the user in charge of that sub-project could take ownership by pressing this button. 6. www. The meaning of the area symbols is described in Table 6-2. After that the button will be grayed out. it makes things easier to choose unambiguous titles for different projects. the Take Ownership button can be used. Especially in conjunction with sub-projects. special care should be taken with the user rights management. Read more on the handling of subprojects in section 5.3 Area Management Radioplan provides functions for managing area polygons to be used as simulation or analysis area.11. so the project ownership cannot be changed any more. This is a login name of the user who has single access rights for this project. If the checkbox is not selected. — Description Owner Take Ownership Grant Access for all Users Arbitrary description of the project Owner of the project. In case of a sub-project.com . an exemplary view of the area polygons used in a project is given in Fig. also other users can access this project. All available areas are listed below the Areas node in the hierarchical configuration data tree. the project access is restricted to the given owner. If this checkbox is selected.actix. The Grant Access for all Users option can be used to make the project available to all users. If Radioplan is deployed in a computer network (LAN). 6-2 Project settings dialog Table 6-1 Project settings Parameter Description Unit Project Title An arbitrary project title that need not immediately be unique among all project titles in the Radioplan database.

com . The currently assigned analysis area. make sure that no border line is intersecting with another one – such a simulation area is not allowed (right part of Fig. border lines must not be intersecting. However. Depending on the number of overlapping polygons in a certain region.2 and 6. Generally. There are certain rules how the polygons can be combined to form an area which can either be a simulation or an analysis area. This means that overlapping polygons are combined by an XOR function to form the resulting area. and each polygon must have at least three vertices. there is no weighting order among the subpolygons of an area.3. permissible forbidden Fig. In particular. 6-3 Simulation/analysis area and alternative area polygons in the configuration data tree The particular purposes of the simulation and analysis areas are described in the following sections 6. 6-4. An alternative spare polygon for simulation/analysis area. Fig. Naturally. however. Note: A single area polygon may have an arbitrary shape. 6.3. All subpolygons of an area are equitably considered.actix. there must be at least one polygon for an area.1 Rules for the Shape of Areas A valid area can consist of an arbitrary number of subpolygons. It may even be concave as shown in the left part of Fig. Or certain areas www. The above rules can be used to construct an area in a very flexible way.3. For example. 6-4). 6-4 An area (sub-) polygon may be concave. the area can be combined of several independent “islands”.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 108 Table 6-2 Available area polygon symbols Area Polygon Description The currently assigned simulation area. the following rules apply: • • A region covered by a single polygon (more general: by an odd number of polygons) is included in the area. A region covered by two polygons (more general: by an even number of polygons) is excluded from the area. all polygons of the area are allowed to overlap each other. this region either belongs to or is excluded from the area.3.

the simulation area determines the region that certain actions are confined to. The considered area where the objective function of the optimization is calculated and evaluated is identical with the simulation area. Depending on the particular Radioplan Module used. When a new project is created. Some of these examples are demonstrated in Fig.2. In the results selection dialog. the simulation area is presented by auburn lines. polygon inside polygon: exclusion extra polygon island: inclusion two overlapping polygons: exclusion Fig. default simulation area is a square area with the extensions (0m. avoid optimizing an area around a hospital with sensitive ICNIRP requirements. 6-5. the (1000m.1 Assigning an Area Polygon as Simulation Area An existing area polygon in the area management can be set as simulation area by choosing Set as Simulation Area from the respective area item’s context menu in the ocnfiguration data tree.4 for more details. Outside this area the display is shaded slightly gray. the analysis of measurement parameters can be confined to the simulation area. 0m) There are two ways to edit the simulation area. Table 6-3 Impact of the simulation area Module During Execution of Module During Result Analysis Measurement Module — In the results selection dialog. In a surface plot. it can have different meanings that are summarized in Table 6-3.com .3.g. See section 6.3. 1000m). It could either be drawn graphically with the mouse pointer or its vertices could be edited in the area settings dialog. 6-5 Possible constellations for exclusion and inclusion regions of an area 6.3. ACP and other Optimization Modules In a project there must always be a simulation area. [see Measurement Module or Network Simulator] Network Simulator The creation and movement of UEs during a network simulation is confined to the simulation area. Generally. 6.actix.2 Simulation Area The simulation area defines a region that represents the main geographic filter in a project.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 109 inside a larger area can be excluded from it by inserting proper subpolygons to e. the analysis of simulation result parameters can be confined to the simulation area. Then the area symbol is changed into and the viewing area is www.

Refer to appendix 13. Depending on the particular Radioplan Module used. the analysis area can also be unset by choosing the Set as Analysis Area context menu entry when the tick sign is set. the imported data can be confined to the analysis area. In case there is no analysis area defined. the analysis of measurement parameters can be confined to the analysis area. functions requiring an analysis area would work on the simulation area instead. In a surface plot.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 110 updated showing the new simulation area.6 for a short documentation of the supported vector data formats. Since it is not immediately necessary to have defined an analysis area in a project.3. For more details.4.1 Assigning an Area Polygon as Analysis Area An existing area polygon in the area management can be set as analysis area by choosing Set as Analysis Area from the respective area item’s context menu in the ocnfiguration and the viewing area is updated data tree. please refer to section 6.4 Working with Area Polygons Areas can be edited and modified in various ways. Then the area symbol is changed into showing the new analysis area. also the polygons of the analysis area can be edited either graphically with the mouse in the viewing area or by editing the coordinates in the area settings dialog.3 Analysis Area The analysis area is an optional region that can be used for additional geographic filtering for various purposes.3. If previously there was a different analysis area.3. [see Measurement Module or Network Simulator] Similar to the simulation area. Outside the valid analysis area the display is shaded slightly gray. Generally.3. During simulation results import.3. Then the analysis area is converted into a spare area again. 6.4. symbolized by .3. it can have different meanings that are summarized in Table 6-4. Table 6-4 Impact of the analysis area Module During Execution of Module During Result Analysis Measurement Module — In the results selection dialog.1 Importing an Area An area polygon can be imported into the area management by using the Import… function in the context menu of the Areas node in the configuration data tree. This section describes all available functions of the area management. the analysis area is presented by yellow lines. it is now converted into a spare area symbolized by . A file open dialog is shown where the polygon can be selected. www. this entry can also be accessed in the context menu of any area polygon.com . the analysis of simulation result parameters can be confined to the analysis area. 6. 6. In the results selection dialog. Once other areas are available in the area management. the analysis area determines the region that certain (analysis) actions are confined to. Network Simulator — ACP and other Optimization Modules The selection of reconfigurable and considered cells is determined in relation to the analysis area. 6.actix. The previous simulation area polygon is converted into a spare area symbolized by .

the distinct vertices that are listed in the table can be modified. www. A file save dialog is shown where a filename for the export can be determined.3. After confirming with the OK button. The table is fully editable. Then automatically a new row is appended for another addition of a vertex. the area including all its subpolygons is saved into the file.actix. each subpolygon is denoted by an index in the Subpolygon column. preceded by “Copy of“. the new polygon is added as a spare area. In this table. Furthermore. to change the name. refer to appendix 13.3. 6-6 Area settings dialog The dialog can be used to change the name of the area in the title field. A vertex can be moved by editing its coordinates accordingly. it can be saved as a vector file in Shape or MapInfo format.6.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 111 Initially.4. 6. 6-6. it is ready to be used as simulation/analysis area. symbolized by the icon. The area name is derived from the filename. Once a new area has been imported.4 Inspecting Area Polygon Settings The settings of an area can be inspected in the area settings dialog.3.2 Exporting an Area Any of the areas can be exported into commonly used vector format files. This dialog is shown in Fig. 6.3 Duplicating an Area An area can be duplicated in the area management by using the Duplicate function from that area’s context menu in the configuration data tree. For example. This function is invoked by choosing the Export… entry from the context menu of the respective area. new area is symbolized by the 6. The icon. below the Areas node in the configuration data tree.4. starting from 0.com . It is opened by either double-clicking an area item in the configuration data tree or by selecting Settings… from the area item’s context menu. or to modify their shape as explained in the following subsections. Fig.4. The copy of the area is added as a new spare area with a name derived from the original area. the following actions are possible: • • A new vertex can be simply added in the last (empty) row of the table.

4.5 Drawing an Area (Sub-) Polygon In order to define the simulation/analysis areas graphically in the viewing area. the mouse pointer turns into a cross-hair and a drawing grid is shown in the viewing area (if a surface plot is chosen).Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 112 • For deleting a vertex. the first vertex is repeated at the end of the vertex list.5. Fig.3. One has to enter the corresponding drawing mode by selecting either of the or icons (tooltip: Modify Simulation/Analysis Area) from the paint toolbar or by using the menu entries View Paint Modify Simulation/Analysis Area. A redo is possible by typing <Ctrl-Y>. The last vertex is marked by double-clicking the left mouse button. The drawing action can be canceled at any time by pressing the <ESC> key before the last vertex has been set. Section 3. So if the background image is a map. The grid size can be adjusted appropriately in the display settings dialog.actix. 6-7.com .5 explains how to create a new surface plot layer from a graphics file to be used as a background image. A dialog appears where the new grid size (equally for x. it is easy to surround the area in the map with the mouse that shall be considered for investigation. the according row in the coordinates table must be selected by clicking the field left of the coordinates and then pressing the <Delete> key. the grid size can be modified by clicking the icon from the paint toolbar. or whether it shall replace the existing area. see Fig. When the polygon is closed and it is not the first subpolygon of an area. It is possible to undo all drawing actions of an area polygon by typing <Ctrl-Z>. respectively. Then the newly added polygon is immediately shown in the surface plot.and y-direction) can be specified. At least 3 points must be added. 6-7 Grid size settings dialog It is recommended to display a background image before starting to draw the new simulation/analysis area. As soon as this special drawing mode is activated. Alternatively. Also multiple undo and redo commands can be performed. It should also be noted that for each subpolygon. a dialog appears that asks the user whether this new polygons shall just be added as a subpolygon.2 how to adjust the grid size in the display settings dialog. A polygon of the simulation/analysis area is drawn then by setting one vertex after the other by left-clicking with the mouse. 6. www.4. make sure that currently a surface plot is shown. See section 3. The polygon is then automatically closed to the first vertex.

In addition. subpolygons or the entire area can be removed. Extract Subpolygon: In order to extract a subpolygon out of a multi-polygon area.3. Fig. 6-8. In order to determine the new vertex position. Then the left mouse button must be clicked in order to start the moving action. the mouse pointer should be placed above the respective edge. the respective polygon will be removed from the area. and the simulation area is redrawn with the new vertex position. a dashed auxiliary line is drawn from the old vertex position to the current one. the respective vertex is highlighted by a purple circle around it. the left mouse button needs to be clicked another time.6 Editing an Area (Sub-) Polygon The vertices of the simulation/analysis area can be edited in either of the respective drawing mode. Now the mouse pointer can be moved to the desired new vertex position. and a context menu appears. In particular. 6-8 Editing a vertex/subpolygon of an area The following functions can be called from this context menu: • • • Remove Vertex: The highlighted vertex is removed from the (sub-)polygon. When then moving the mouse pointer. vertices and subpolygons can be removed graphically with the mouse. the two adjacent vertices will be directly connected by a straight line. Then the right mouse button can be pressed to show the context menu of that vertex/subpolygon. or delete a vertex graphically with the mouse. This action is presented in Fig. A right mouse click on the edge will highlight it.4. spanning the path via the current mouse pointer position. To add a vertex on an existing edge of a polygon.com . this function can be called. www. move. Moving a vertex is initiated by placing the mouse pointer above the vertex to be moved until it is highlighted by a purple circle around it. It is also possible to add. After removal. When approaching a certain vertex with the mouse pointer in the according area drawing mode. Also.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 113 6. A dashed auxiliary line appears between the adjacent vertices. Remove Subpolygon: When called for a subpolygon. Then the dashed line disappears. A left mouse click determines the new vertex. new vertices can be added and each vertex can be freely moved or even be deleted. Choose Insert Vertex from that menu.actix.

Typical examples for such clutter classes are terms like rural. each local region in the simulation area is ruled by different propagation and reception properties. In order to avoid undesired erasure.6. In particular. importing a clutter matrix in Radioplan format automatically loads the corresponding clutter classes www.3. A clutter matrix defines a certain clutter class for each position that is covered by the matrix. icon 6. they have an impact on the behavior of the network. 6-3 above.7 Controlling the Visibility of Areas Each area can be individually displayed. or urban environments.com . the areas can be displayed with a shading of the regions outside the respective area.4 Configuration of the Environment The environment comprises all items that do not directly belong to the mobile network. an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the polygon. A clutter matrix is always linked with a clutter classes definition. However. The visibility status of an area does not impact its validity as simulation/analysis area.actix. In addition to that. This is a general display setting which can be configured in the according dialog as described in section 3.4.5. It is also possible to delete a single subpolygon in a combined area graphically. or the user can define his own clutter matrix.4.1 Clutter Depending on different environmental conditions. Consequently.3. Such a matrix can be imported from an external file or from an RNP tool. suburban. The user can choose between these options in the pulldown list of the extract subpolygon dialog: 6.4. These distinct regions are categorized in clutter classes. 6. These items are explained in more detail in the subsequent sections. the following items define the network environment: • • • clutter matrix. Optionally. and streets (for dynamic simulation movement models). So the spare areas can be displayed occasionally by setting their checkbox in order to envision their position. This is accomplished by choosing the Delete entry from the respective area polygon’s context menu.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 114 An extracted subpolygon can either form a new area or it can be added to an existing area as another subpolygon. This is described in subsection 6. the visibility of all areas together can be toggled by using the (tooltip Draw Areas) from the components toolbar to the left. The clutter is represented in form of a matrix.8 Deleting an Area (Sub-) Polygon An area polygon that is currently not in use (symbolized by the icon in the configuration data tree) can be deleted from the area management.3.3. DEM matrix.4. The visibility of an area is controlled by the checkbox left of its item in the tree as shown in Fig. 6.

. The matrix is a rectangular grid consisting of pixels that lies in the horizontal x-y-plane..actix. select Settings… from its context menu.1 Clutter Matrix Format The clutter matrix format as used in Radioplan is shown in Fig.2 Defining Clutter Classes To inspect and modify the clutter classes settings. As apparent from this figure. Storage Format West East = West + PixelWidth * (m – 1) PixelHeight RnCm n = Rows (Number of Rows) m = Cols (Number of Columns) PixelWidth South = North . several additional properties needed for network simulation (see [R-Sim]): ▫ ▫ the standard deviation of the shadowing. The width and height of a pixel are independently adjustable by the values of PixelWidth and PixelHeight.PixelHeight * (n – 1) Fig. and a presentation color. i.1. double-click the Clutter Classes item in the configuration data tree or. the Northwestern corner. 6-10 (clutter classes highlighted). 6-11.. 6.e.. North R1C1 R2C1 .Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 115 definition.. 6-9 Clutter matrix format in Radioplan 6.4. a pathloss offset and an interference ratio offset for plot generation and optimization (see [R-ACP]). The alignment of a clutter matrix is oriented at the upper left corner of the matrix. R1C2 R2C2 R 1C 3 R 2C 3 . The clutter data in the configuration data tree are shown in Fig. the fading profile (one of the four available profiles given in Table 6-6).1. The covered area of a clutter matrix is determined by the pixel dimensions (PixelWidth and PixelHeight) in conjunction with the number of rows and columns. .4. Each pixel contains a single value representing a clutter class. a clutter class is characterized by • • • an index. When loading another format or creating a new clutter matrix. Fig. it is required to define the clutter classes separately. www.com . An example of a typical set of clutter classes is shown in Fig. 6-10 Configuring the clutter in the configuration data tree Then the clutter classes settings dialog is opened. a description. 6-9. alternatively..

com . — — — dB dB dB see Table 6-6 — — — www. and three different DL intracell inter-scrambling code orthogonality factors subdivided according to the user speed. The intracell orthogonality factor αc between OVSF codes under the same scrambling code for users with speed v = 2…15m/s for this clutter class. The fading profile of this clutter class. An arbitrary string that describes the respective clutter class. The standard deviation of the shadowing distribution for this particular clutter class. An optional clutter specific offset which is only considered in the network optimization in relation to the pilot RSCP target. An arbitrary color to represent this clutter class in surface plots. The corresponding parameters are summarized in Table 6-5. The intracell orthogonality factor αc between OVSF codes under the same scrambling code for users with speed v > 15m/s for this clutter class. Fading Profile OF alpha IntraCell v < 2m/s OF alpha IntraCell v = 2…15m/s OF alpha IntraCell v > 15m/s This is an integer that uniquely represents a clutter class. Usually this is a running number.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 116 ▫ ▫ three different DL intracell code orthogonality factors subdivided according to the user speed. The intracell orthogonality factor αc between OVSF codes under the same scrambling code for users with speed v < 2m/s for this clutter class.actix. An optional clutter specific offset which is only considered in the network optimization in relation to the interference ratio target (can be Ec/I0 or C/I depending on system technology). 6-11 Clutter classes configuration dialog Table 6-5 Clutter class parameters (gray part only for simulation) Parameter Description Unit Class Description Color Pathloss Offset (Optimization) Ec/I0 or C/I Offset (Optimization) StdDev. Fig.

5. typical values for built area (urban. Its usage is similar as for modifying the legend colors which is explained in section 3. Then the Radioplan color chooser appears where the user can select the desired color. non-densely built areas (partially) suburban and urban areas urban areas. open areas. directly associated with the fading profiles. Table 6-7 gives a recommendation for the intracell orthogonality factor αc split up for three speed ranges. www. If. water. a more accurate pathloss model is used that takes the shadowing caused by buildings and other obstacles into account (e. They are given in Table 6-6. Table 6-6 Recommendation for the deployment of fading profiles (for simulation only) Fading Profile Title Applicable Environment RA TU BU HT Rural Area Typical Urban Bad Urban Hilly Terrain rural. the standard deviation of the shadowing can be chosen much smaller or can even vanish. heavily obstructed. The intracell orthogonality factor αsc between OVSF codes under different scrambling codes for users with speed v > 15m/s for this clutter class. however.g. Thus. Thus there should be a close relationship to the fading profiles. — — — The color can be easily edited by clicking with the left mouse button on the respective color field in the table. suburban) lie between 6dB and 8dB.g. ray launching). For the fading profile. like water or snow. densely built areas hilly areas (if applicable) The intracell OVSF code orthogonality factor αc in DL generally depends on the local propagation conditions and the user speed. the standard deviation of the shadowing is the higher.5. The intracell orthogonality factor αsc between OVSF codes under different scrambling codes for users with speed v = 2…15m/s for this clutter class. in extreme. environments it could be 10dB to 12dB.com . For open areas. snow.actix.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 117 Parameter Description Unit OF alpha InterScramblingCode v < 2m/s OF alpha InterScramblingCode v = 2…15m/s OF alpha InterScramblingCode v > 15m/s The intracell orthogonality factor αsc between OVSF codes under different scrambling codes for users with speed v < 2m/s for this clutter class. only a coarse mapping to general environment categorizations can be recommended. The default clutter class color is black. It is only necessary to consider shadowing if the pathloss matrices used are very coarse and represent a mean pathloss as can be determined by e. the shadowing standard deviation is considerably lower. All clutter classes that have black color would be presented in a surface plot with a color that is derived from the standard color palette. empirical pathloss models. Usually. the more obstacles there are in the corresponding region.

slightly depending on the environment and the user speed.4 Some system vendors offer more than one scrambling code per cell.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 118 Table 6-7 Recommendation for intracell OVSF code orthogonality factors (for simulation only) Fading Profile v < 2 m/s Orthogonality Factor α 2 m/s ≤ v < 15 m/s v ≥ 15 m/s RA TU BU HT 0. A clutter class definition can be deleted.25 0.actix. a possibly existing one is replaced.1 0.06 0.1 0.4 0. www. their default values can be specified in the simulator settings.com .1.1 0. An existing clutter class definition can be modified. Since the orthogonality factors only have an impact on the network simulator.25 0. The deletion of a clutter class does not change the current clutter matrix. there could occur confusion about which matrix data to use. Also in Compressed Mode. Make sure that you do not delete a clutter class that is used in the matrix. Generally. when a new matrix is imported. Parameter values can easily be copied. an additional orthogonality factor αsc has been introduced. Arbitrary. or a georeferenced raster file (see appendix 13.1 0.9. if no values are given for any of the orthogonality factors in the clutter classes settings. a second code tree with another scrambling code might be used. In order to account for a reasonable interference portion between different scrambling codes in the same cell. the overall default values from the simulator settings (see [RSim]) are used.5 for supported file formats). contiguous fields in the table can be selected and copied to the clipboard. Rows in the table can be filtered with respect to arbitrarily chosen field values. If even class 0 is not defined. The clutter class definitions in the settings dialog can be edited in various ways. The usage of the table is similar to applications as MS Access or MS Query.3 Importing a Clutter Matrix There are two possibilities to import a clutter matrix. In a project. the parameters of clutter class 0 (presumed default class) is used. especially if there would be several clutter classes definitions.1 0. 6.4.7 and 0. refer to [R-Sim].25 0. Columns in the table can be moved. Columns in the table can be easily sorted by double-clicking the header field. Its values are typically between 0.4 0. One can import • • either a predefined Radioplan clutter matrix. they are automatically filled with the preconfigured default values. • • • • • • • • A new clutter class definition can be added. Hence. only a single clutter matrix is supported. Otherwise. If a class definition is missing.

4 Exporting a Clutter Matrix A clutter matrix can be exported as a georeferenced raster data file by using the Export Clutter Matrix to Raster Image… entry from the context menu of the clutter matrix item in the Configuration tab of the tree window. The alternative choice is to first import another clutter matrix from the library with a clutter classes definition that shall also be used for the raster data file. Defining clutter classes for an imported raster data file There are two possibilities to accomplish this. the associated clutter classes are loaded. If the user confirms the import by pressing the OK button of the file open dialog.. 6-12.4.4. If a TIFF file is being imported. too. 6. the attribution of color values to clutter classes is realized via the TIFF file’s color palette. the clutter matrix is imported. a tiled matrix can be imported. the configuration data tree is simultaneously updated such that the new matrix appears beneath the Clutter Classes item. Indices outside this range are ignored by Radioplan and are mapped to the (presumed) default class 0. Alternatively. One choice is to manually define the clutter classes in the clutter classes settings dialog as it is described in subsection 6. 1..1. This configuration dialog is shown in Fig. select Import Clutter Data… from the context menu of the Clutter Classes tree item. alternatively. the matrix settings parameters are explained in Table 6-8. Since there is no separate clutter classes definition for the TIFF file. etc. A file open dialog is shown that lets the user choose a clutter configuration file. After the import. The range of admissible clutter class indices is generally restricted to [0.5 Viewing a Clutter Matrix To inspect the clutter matrix settings the user can open the clutter matrix configuration dialog by double-clicking the matrix item in the tree or. choosing Settings… from its context menu. If the checkbox Restrict to Simulation Area is active. To import a matrix. a clutter classes definition from a previously loaded matrix is retained. the second color is assigned clutter class 1. In the latter case. the matrix will be properly clipped to the bounding rectangle of the simulation area. Thus on loading the clutter matrix. Then a file save dialog is opened where a file name and the format to be stored can be selected. 6.actix.4.. the existing classes definition is adopted. When the raster data file is loaded afterwards. .Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 119 A clutter matrix stored in the library or a project is inseparably combined with its clutter classes definition. This is done by selecting Import Clutter Matrix from Raster Image… or Import Clutter Matrix from Planet Raster Image… from the context menu of the Clutter Classes tree item.1. Generally. the clutter class indexing must start at 0.com .1. 254].2. an arbitrary georeferenced raster data file can be imported as clutter matrix. the mapping is simply accomplished such that the first color entry in the palette is assigned clutter class 0. In both cases. www.

6-12 Clutter matrix configuration dialog Table 6-8 Clutter matrix parameters Parameter Description Unit West North Pixel Width Pixel Height Cols Rows The x-coordinate of the Northwestern corner of the clutter matrix. Use the layer settings dialog to adjust the scaling.5. The same result can be obtained by icon (tooltip: Plot Clutter Data) from the views toolbar or by using the menu clicking the Configuration Data Plots Clutter Data. www. The number of rows in the clutter matrix. This value cannot be changed since it is determined by the matrix size. See section 3. 6-13.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 120 Fig. The expansion of a clutter matrix pixel in West-East direction. the color palette.4 how to adjust these settings.actix. The number of columns in the clutter matrix. m m m m # # A surface plot layer can be created from the clutter matrix by selecting Show this Matrix from the context menu of the clutter matrix item. and the alpha blending factor appropriately. This value cannot be changed since it is determined by the matrix size. An example is given in Fig. This coordinate has a South-North alignment. The expansion of a clutter matrix pixel in South-North direction. This coordinate has a West-East alignment. The y-coordinate of the Northwestern corner of the clutter matrix.com . Clutter classes with the (default) black color are shown in a color derived from the standard color palette. The newly created clutter layer is entry View shown then in the viewing area by using the colors assigned to each clutter class.

2. the matrix covers the encompassing rectangle.e. The clutter classes definition for the new matrix is retained from the previous matrix. To do so.6 Defining a New Clutter Matrix If no clutter data are available. it is filled with zeros only (presumed default clutter class). Otherwise. For this purpose. The user can then choose a pixel resolution in the grid settings dialog (see Fig. i.com . The resulting matrix settings can be inspected in the matrix configuration dialog as described in subsection 6. www.5.actix. if there was one.4. The new matrix is immediately added to the configuration data tree below the corresponding Clutter Classes item. 6-13 Sample clutter matrix with custom colors 6. It is rectangular and spans the total simulation area.1.4. In case of an arbitrary polygonal simulation area. Fig. The toolbar to the left is immediately activated to notify the matrix editing mode state.4. the classes definition is empty. they could also be created in Radioplan. You can define own class definitions as described in subsection 6. one has to enter the matrix editing mode by selecting Edit this Matrix from the icon (tooltip: Edit Matrix) in the paint context menu of the clutter matrix item. The reason for this is that every clutter region that is drawn must be associated with a clutter class. the new clutter matrix is totally empty. add a new empty clutter matrix by choosing Add new Matrix from the context menu of the Clutter Classes item in the configuration data tree.1. In the beginning. polygons) in the new clutter matrix with a certain clutter class with the mouse.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 121 Fig. 6-14 The grid settings dialog is shown prior to creating a matrix to determine the pixel resolution. The configured pixel resolution is used for both the pixel width and height. Radioplan offers the possibility to simply draw regions (i.e. 6-14). In order to modify the initially empty matrix.1. A valid clutter classes definition is the precondition to specify the clutter matrix.

5 explains how to create a new surface plot layer from a graphics file to be used as a background image. Section 3. 6-15. (by clicking on The matrix editing mode can be left by disabling the matrix editing icon it). It is depicted in Fig.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 122 The matrix editing mode can be temporarily left to use the zoom and pan functions to navigate to the area where the matrix shall be modified.7 Creating a Clutter Matrix from Vector Layers In cases when the clutter is given in terms of vector layer(s) instead of a raster matrix. it is easy to surround geographical regions in the map while drawing with the mouse. Note that this drawing grid size is independent of the matrix pixel resolution and only influences the drawing actions.1.actix.com . The drawing action can be canceled at any time by pressing the <ESC> key before the last vertex has been set.2 how to adjust the grid size in the display settings dialog.4. and the mouse pointer turns into a cross-hair. A dialog appears where the new grid size (equally for x. the chosen clutter matrix is shown in the viewing area together with a drawing grid.5. Then a dialog is shown that asks the user to specify a clutter class that is assigned to the region just drawn. First the www. the matrix editing mode can also be left by selecting any other drawing icon from the paint toolbar. mode or by clicking the 6. the grid size can be modified by clicking the icon from the paint toolbar. it is possible to automatically convert those vector layers into a clutter matrix. Fig. see Fig. In order to switch then back to the actual matrix editing mode. 6-15 Grid size settings dialog It is recommended to display a background image before starting to draw clutter regions.4. The clutter regions are drawn then by setting one vertex after the other by left-clicking with the mouse. The grid size can be adjusted appropriately in the display settings dialog.and y-direction) can be specified. simply click the icon again. 6-16 Clutter class selection dialog After choosing the appropriate clutter class. Fig. the new clutter region is shown in the surface plot. So if the background image is a map. Alternatively. See section 3. The last vertex of a polygon is marked by double-clicking the left mouse button. Thus clutter regions can be drawn very quickly. Also the distance measure mode is available. As soon as the matrix editing mode is activated. 6-16. Alternatively.

its clutter class definition is retained. 6-18. the conversion can be started by pressing the OK button. Please note that each vector layer (i.actix. 6-17. www. however. Then all selected vector layers are processed which is documented by a progress bar on the bottom of the application window.com .e. Fig.8 Deleting a Clutter Matrix A clutter matrix can be deleted from the configuration by selecting Delete Matrix from the matrix’s context menu. 6-17 Clutter vector layers loaded into the project Then the areas defined by the vector layers can be converted into a clutter matrix.4. 6.1. Further. The dialog with some exemplary settings is shown in Fig. each vector layer can be assigned a clutter index (i. This function can be invoked from the context menu of the items below the Clutter node in the Configuration tab of the tree window by choosing the entry Create Clutter Matrix from Vector Layers…. The user can select each vector layer individually for inclusion in the clutter matrix creation by checking the according flag. the size of the created matrix is confined to the bounding rectangle of the simulation area. A dialog is opened where all loaded vector layers are shown.e. This means that as many vector data files must be loaded as there shall be clutter classes. In order to avoid undesired erasure. When the conversion is completed. When the clutter matrix is deleted. Fig.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 123 available vector layers that define the areas of each clutter class must be loaded. Further. the new clutter matrix is added in the Configuration tab of the tree window. An example of the Layers tab with 5 loaded vector layers is given in Fig. 6-18 Clutter matrix creation dialog After having chosen a proper pixel resolution for the clutter matrix. an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the clutter matrix. vector file loaded into the Radioplan project) can only define the areas (closed polygons) of a single clutter class. clutter class). All pixels of the resulting clutter matrix that are not covered by any polygon from the vector layers are filled with clutter class 0 which is assumed being the default class.

. Alternatively. R1C2 R2C2 R1C3 R2C3 . site placement. The covered area of a DEM matrix is determined by the pixel dimensions (PixelWidth and PixelHeight) in conjunction with the number of rows and columns.4. www. North R 1C1 R 2C1 . These matrices can be saved to a single larger matrix that then could be reimported. 6-19. The DEM matrix is used to better represent the investigated environment and to provide additional height information for e. One can import • • either a predefined Radioplan DEM matrix. the DEM matrix is imported.actix. select Import DEM Data… from the context menu of the DEM tree item or an existing DEM matrix item. . 6.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 124 6.g.2. it is possible to have several non-overlapping DEM matrices.1 DEM Matrix Format The DEM matrix format as used in Radioplan is shown in Fig.PixelHeight * (n – 1) Fig. The width and height of a pixel are independently adjustable by the values of PixelWidth and PixelHeight...4.com . Each pixel contains a single value representing a terrain elevation (height).5 for supported file formats). In a project. a tiled matrix can be imported. or a georeferenced raster file (see appendix 13. If the user confirms the import by pressing the OK button of the file open dialog.. 6-19 DEM matrix format in Radioplan 6. Storage Format West East = West + PixelWidth * (m – 1) PixelHeight RnCm n = Rows (Number of Rows) m = Cols (Number of Columns) PixelWidth South = North . The matrix is a rectangular grid consisting of pixels that lies in the horizontal x-y-plane. The alignment of a DEM matrix is oriented at the upper left corner of the matrix.4.. i. the Northwestern corner. an arbitrary raster data file can be imported as DEM matrix. This is done by selecting Import DEM from Raster Image… or Import DEM from Planet Raster Image… from the context menu of the DEM tree item or an existing DEM matrix item. A file open dialog is shown that lets the user choose a DEM configuration file..e.2 Importing a DEM Matrix There are two possibilities to import a DEM matrix. In the latter case. To import a Radioplan DEM matrix.2.2 Digital Elevation Model (DEM) The terrain shape of the environment is represented by a digital elevation model (DEM) in Radioplan. The DEM is actually a matrix that contains height values of the ground surface for each matrix pixel.

This coordinate has a West-East alignment.4. This coordinate has a South-North alignment. This configuration dialog is shown in Fig. The number of rows in the DEM matrix. the configuration data tree is simultaneously updated such that the new matrix appears beneath the DEM node. alternatively. The usage of the appearing file save dialog is identical to the above description of the single matrix case.2. If the checkbox Restrict to Simulation Area is active.com . If several DEM matrices reside in the DEM node of the hierarchical configuration tree that are tiled to form a larger matrix.4 Viewing a DEM Matrix To inspect the DEM matrix settings the user can open the DEM matrix configuration dialog by double-clicking the matrix item in the tree or. choosing Settings… from its context menu. The expansion of a DEM matrix pixel in West-East direction. This value cannot be changed since it is determined by the matrix size. 6-20. This function can be invoked by using the Export all DEM to Single Raster Image… entry from the context menu of the DEM node (above the actual DEM matrix items). The expansion of a DEM matrix pixel in South-North direction. there is also the possibility to store them together in a larger raster data file. the matrix settings parameters are explained in Table 6-9.3 Exporting a DEM Matrix A DEM matrix can be exported as a georeferenced raster data file by using the Export DEM to Raster Image… entry from the context menu of the DEM matrix item in the Configuration tab of the tree window. 6.4. 6-20 DEM matrix configuration dialog Table 6-9 DEM matrix parameters Parameter Description Unit West North Pixel Width Pixel Height Cols Rows The x-coordinate of the Northwestern corner of the DEM matrix.2. m m m m # # www.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 125 After the import.actix. 6. The y-coordinate of the Northwestern corner of the DEM matrix. Then a file save dialog is opened where a file name and the format to be stored can be selected. This value cannot be changed since it is determined by the matrix size. Fig. the matrix will be properly clipped to the bounding rectangle of the simulation area. The number of columns in the DEM matrix.

e. the height of all streets is z = 0m.2. Generally. different street widths. Regarding dynamic network simulations. A street category can be deleted. If no DEM layer is defined. This scaling factor is multiplied with the elevation values in the DEM matrix. In the snapshot network simulator.6. A street consists of one or several straight street segments that are combined to a polyline without any forks.4. So it is possible to distinguish e. 6. 6-21 shows the streets configuration dialog that can be accessed by double-clicking the streets item in the configuration data tree or by selecting Settings… from its context menu. and the alpha blending factor appropriately.e. the DEM layer. www. Rows in the table could be filtered with respect to arbitrarily chosen field values.4. See section 3.3 Streets (for Simulation Only) Generally. i.3. One can edit the street categories in various ways: • • • • • A new street category can be added. i. users are exclusively created on the streets if the according movement model is chosen. an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the DEM matrix. the streets are situated in the horizontal x-y-plane.5 Deleting a DEM Matrix A DEM matrix can be deleted from the configuration by selecting Delete Matrix from the matrix’s context menu. provided that the street movement model is applied. The newly created DEM layer is View shown then in the viewing area.g. In order to avoid undesired erasure. the streets define corridors where users can move. An existing street category can be modified. Streets are organized in street categories. Use the layer settings dialog to adjust the scaling. Usually there are several streets belonging to a certain category.3 for more details on the available movement models. Refer to section 6. Parameter values can easily be copied.1 Inspecting Street Data Fig.5.actix. 6. Together they form a street map. That is.4. The configuration dialog contains a table with all available street categories. the real street map used in a simulation is constructed then with all forks that it might have.com . the streets of each category are checked for hidden crossings that are not contained in the street map yet. 6.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 126 Parameter Description Unit Height Offset Scaling Factor With the help of this offset. The same result can be obtained by clicking the icon (tooltip: Plot DEM Terrain Data) from the views toolbar or by using the menu entry Configuration Data Plots DEM Terrain Data. the entire DEM matrix can be vertically shifted. Upon start of a network simulation. m — A surface plot layer can be created from the DEM matrix by selecting Show this Matrix from the context menu of the DEM matrix.4 how to adjust these settings. the height of the streets follows the terrain profile. streets represent geographic data belonging to the network environment. The corresponding parameters are explained in Table 6-10. the color palette.

com . the vector data are imported and added as new street category to those streets that already exist in the current project. If the user confirms the import by pressing the OK button of the file open dialog. polylines) with the mouse. The street width of that street category.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 127 Fig.4. As soon as the www. 6-21 Streets configuration dialog Table 6-10 Street category parameters Parameter Description Unit Category The identifier of the street category. A file open dialog is shown that lets the user choose a street configuration file. — Description Width — m 6.3 Drawing Streets Radioplan offers the possibility to simply edit a street map by drawing streets (i. If the user confirms the import by pressing the OK button of the file open dialog. 6. one has to enter the streets drawing mode by selecting the icon (tooltip: Add Streets) from the paint toolbar to the left. or a georeferenced vector data file containing street data (see appendix 13.2 Importing Streets There are two possibilities to import street data. One can import • • either a Radioplan street category from the library or another project. It is filled with the street category by default.e. A file open dialog appears that lets the user choose the vector data file. Importing a Radioplan street category is accomplished by selecting Import Streets… from the streets item’s context menu. An arbitrary string that describes the street category.6 for supported file formats).4. a vector data file containing polylines can be imported as a new streets category by selecting Import Streets from Vector Data… from the streets item’s context menu. White spaces are not allowed. Alternatively. This is a string that is unique in the environment configuration such that it can be distinguished from other street categories.3. To do so. the streets are imported and added to those streets that already exist in the current project.actix.3.

6-23 Street category selection dialog After choosing the appropriate street category.actix. So if the background image is a map. If the street is drawn then. The drawing action can be canceled at any time by pressing the <ESC> key before the last vertex has been set. the mouse pointer turns into a cross-hair and a drawing grid is shown in the viewing area (if a surface plot is chosen). The last vertex of a street is marked by double-clicking the left mouse button.4. one of the available categories can instantly be assigned to it. So it is useful having defined appropriate street categories in the street settings dialog prior to drawing new streets (refer to subsection 6. if there are no street categories defined previously.3. Then a dialog is shown that asks the user to specify a street category that is assigned to the street just drawn.4. it is even possible to draw streets without having defined any street category before. As mentioned before. 6-24. 6-22. the grid size can be modified by clicking the icon from the paint toolbar. it is easy to follow the streets in the map while drawing with the mouse. 6-23. 6-22 Grid size settings dialog It is recommended to display a background image before starting to draw streets. The default grid size can be adjusted appropriately in the display settings dialog. Fig. Temporarily. Fig. the new street is shown in the surface plot with the predefined width.1). The streets are drawn then by setting one vertex after the other by left-clicking with the mouse. Section 3. Thus an accurate street map can be drawn very quickly. See section 3. However. It is depicted in Fig.5 explains how to create a new surface plot layer from a graphics file to be used as a background image. Then a default category is created automatically.2 how to adjust the default grid size in the display settings dialog. a default category ‘Category1’ with a street width of 10m is created automatically which can be chosen for the recently drawn polyline. see Fig. www.and y-direction) can be specified. A dialog appears where the new grid size (equally for x.5.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 128 streets drawing mode is activated. New streets are always assigned a certain street category.com . An example of a surface plot with a newly drawn street is shown in Fig.

3. This action is shown in Fig. Fig. Additionally. In order to remove a polyline from the street map. Refer to subsection 6. The color and the alpha blending factor of the streets can be modified in the display settings dialog. Furthermore. After confirming the deletion in the following dialog.1 Overview The radio access network (RAN) configuration data consist of the hierarchically arranged network architecture data. there is a single network controller item. 6-25.5. Site: A site has a position such that it can be displayed in a surface plot. a cell has one or more antennas.5 Configuration of the RAN 6. 6-24 Street (here: red polyline) drawn in a map. www. Choose Remove Street from the appearing context menu to delete it.actix. hit it with the right mouse button.4. repeaters.4. 6-25 Deleting a street (polyline) It is also possible to delete a complete street category in the streets configuration dialog. it can comprise some system technology specific hardware parameters. Cell: A cell embraces many system technology specific RAN and RRM parameters. 6. and additional antennas of different technologies can be placed at a site.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 129 Fig. The RAN configuration comprises the following items in a topdown order: • Network Controller: In every network configuration.1 above for details about how to delete a complete street category. This implies that all streets that belong to the particular street category are removed. Cells.3. the whole selected polyline is removed. All sites of an investigation scenario belong to the network controller.4 Deleting Streets Streets can be graphically deleted with the mouse pointer when the streets drawing mode is active. Depending on the system technology it can be called RNC or BSC or similar. The network controller can have relevant Radio Resource Management parameters. 6.com • • .

Furthermore.5. there is exactly one network controller object.actix. 6.3 Exporting the Network Controller The network controller can be exported to an external configuration file by choosing Export Network Controller… from its context menu.2. if a completely new network setup is constructed from scratch. it can have technology specific parameters. the creation of a new network controller is only necessary. or to retain it permanently in the library. or the network controller can be imported from the library. Alternatively.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 130 • • Repeater: A repeater has some system technology specific parameters.2. Furthermore. Either a default network controller can be added. Then the network controller is imported and added to the tree directly beneath the Network Elements. If one would like to use another network controller.4 Deleting the Network Controller The network controller can be deleted from the network configuration by selecting Delete Network Controller from the network controller’s context menu. By default the available library items are presented. according to the hierarchical network architecture. Antennas of the same type with different tilt angles are arranged in antenna families. This is done by selecting Import Network Controller… from the context menu of the Network Elements node of the configuration data tree.com . Since only a single network controller is allowed per network configuration. the network controller cannot be deleted. Note that.5. 6. 6. This function can be used to make the network controller available for other projects. it can only be created once. Depending on the system technology. 6. Antenna: There is a pool of antenna templates that can be deployed at the cells. If there are other subordinate elements in the network configuration like sites and cells.5.2.2.5. it is possible to import a network controller configuration from the library. 6. www.2 Network Controller In every Radioplan project. A file open dialog is opened where the desired network controller configuration file can be chosen. The new network controller is added then to the tree directly beneath the Network Elements. Creating the network controller from generic default settings is accomplished by choosing Add Network Controller from the context menu of the Network Elements node of the configuration data tree. If there is already a network controller in the project then the network controller add/import functions are disabled. It just serves as the superordinate item of all sites and cells of the network(s).1 Creating the Network Controller In general.5. the network controller embodies the topmost level and exists exactly once in a network configuration.2 Network Controller Settings The technology specific parameters of the network controller configuration are described in chapters 7 through 11. All sites and cells must be deleted first before the network controller can be deleted. There are two opportunities to create the network controller. It is always associated with a donor cell. an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the network controller. the network controller object could also be called RNC or BSC or similar. All these configuration data items are explained in more detail in the following sections. the existing one has first to be deleted. In order to avoid undesired erasure. a cell has one or more antennas.

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Multi-Layer Project Configuration 131

6.5.3 Site
The site basically defines the site location and some technology specific hardware parameters. Each site can have an arbitrary number of cells or repeaters that each can have a freely configurable positioning offset against the site location. Also, the cells and repeaters can belong to different sytem technologies.

6.5.3.1

Creating a Site

In general, there are two possibilities to create a new site in a network configuration. Either a default site can be added, or a site can be imported from the library. Note that, according to the hierarchical network architecture, all the sites of a network configuration reside below the network controller. Hence it is a precondition that the network controller has already been created. Creating a site from generic default settings is accomplished by choosing Add Site from the superordinate network controller’s context menu. The new site is added then to the tree beneath the network controller. Alternatively, to import a site, select Import Site… from the superordinate network controller’s context menu. If there are already other sites in the network configuration, then the same entry is also available at them. A file open dialog appears where the desired site configuration file can be chosen. By default the available library items are presented. Then the site is imported and added to the tree beneath the network controller. A further possibility is to graphically place a complete pre-configured site including one or three cells at a given position in a surface plot. To use this function, the Site and Cell Add icon (tooltip Add Sites and Cells) in the paint Mode must be entered by clicking the toolbar to the left. A snapping grid is shown the grid size of which can be adjusted in the icon from the paint toolbar. Then to set the site, click the known manner by clicking the right mouse button at a position in a surface plot where a site with cells shall be added. A context menu will pop up. Choose Add Site + 1 Cell or Add Site + 3 Cells from this context menu to insert a new site with the respective number of cells at the closest grid vertex. Both the site and the cell(s) are initialized with default values. The site is visualized as a small black circle that the cells are attached to (if the cells are not offset from the site position). Note that no antenna template has been referenced in the cell(s) yet, hence the cells are shown as orange arrows, see Fig. 6-26.

Fig. 6-26 A new site with three cells (without antennas) added in the Site and Cell Add Mode

6.5.3.2

Exporting a Site

A site can be exported to an external configuration file by choosing Export Site… from its context menu. This function can be used to make the site available for other projects, or to retain it permanently in the library.

6.5.3.3

Duplicating a Site

Usually, a network configuration in an investigation scenario contains a larger number of sites. These sites typically differ in only very few parameters (as, e.g., the IDs and positions). For this reason the opportunity is provided to duplicate an existing site. Then the parameter changes are quickly made. So it is not necessary to import all the sites of the network configuration from the library.

www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Multi-Layer Project Configuration 132

To duplicate a site, choose Duplicate Site from an existing site’s context menu. A new site with the same name, amended by “(Copy)” is added then to the hierarchical network configuration tree on the same level as the existing one. By opening the configuration dialog of the new site its parameters can be modified as appropriate. This is explained in section 6.5.3.5.

6.5.3.4

Moving a Site

In the Site and Cell Add Mode ( icon in the paint toolbar), the position of a site can easily be changed with the mouse in a surface plot. To initiate this function, select Move Site… from the site’s context menu in a surface plot. Then the mouse pointer is turned into a symbol. Click the left mouse button at the desired site position. After an affirmation dialog the site is placed at the new position with respect to the current snapping grid. All pathloss matrices that are linked to that site (either at the site directly or at its cells) must be moved manually, if appropriate.
Caution! Possibly existing pathloss matrices associated with the moved site should only be moved, if their pathloss data is independent of the surroundings. In realistic environments with many irregular obstacles in the propagation channel this is usually not the case. Thus the move function for sites should be used with care. In general, associated pathloss matrices must be recalculated in a radio propagation prediction tool.

6.5.3.5

Access to Site Settings

The configuration data of a site can be inspected in the according configuration dialog. To access this dialog select Settings… from the respective site’s context menu (by rightclicking the site item) or double-click the site item in the tree, alternatively. Also, the right mouse button can be clicked directly above a site symbol in the viewing area to display the site configuration dialog by choosing Site Settings… from a site’s context menu. Then the site configuration dialog is opened. The technology specific parameters of the site configuration are described in chapters 7 through 11. Here only the general parameters are discussed.

6.5.3.6

General Site Settings

The General tab of the site configuration dialog is shown in Fig. 6-27. Refer to Table 6-11 for a description of the general site parameters.
Table 6-11 General site parameters

Parameter

Description

Unit

ID

The identifier of the site. This is a string that is unique in the network configuration such that it can be distinguished from other sites. An arbitrary string that describes the site.

Description
Position

X Y Longitude Latitude

The x-coordinate of the site. This coordinate has a WestEast alignment. The y-coordinate of the site. This coordinate has a South-North alignment. The longitude of the site position. This is only displayed if a display coordinated system is chosen. The latitude of the site position. This is only displayed if a display coordinated system is chosen.

m m °’” °’”

www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Multi-Layer Project Configuration 133

Parameter

Description

Unit

Altitude

The absolute altitude of the ground at the site position. This value should be set to the height of the DEM matrix at the site position.

m

Optimization

Is Reconfigurable

If this flag is set, the cells at this site are reconfigurable by optimization.
Network Optimization Module only

Is Removable during Site Selection Lock Angle between Cells during Azimuth Optimization Rollout Status

If this flag is set, this site is removable by Site Selection.
Network Optimization Module only

If this flag is set, the azimuth of all cells at this site would be changed by the same offset. This means that a three-sectored site would be treated like a fixed “star” and twisted as a whole during azimuth optimization.
Network Optimization Module only

The rollout status of the site. Different pre-defined values can be selected from the list field. These values can be used for prioritization during Site Selection
Network Optimization Module only

Site Candidate Group

For group site selection [R-ACP], the site can be assigned to one of 10 candidate groups. All sites assigned to the same candidate group are regarded as candidates for one site position.
Network Optimization Module only

Fig. 6-27 General tab of the site configuration dialog

Almost each tab of the site configuration dialog has a Default button to reset all its parameters to reasonable default settings. The same pre-defined settings are used when a site is created with the context menu entry Add Site at the network controller item in the configuration data tree.

www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Multi-Layer Project Configuration 134

6.5.3.7

Additional Site Status Info

A site can be assigned additional information in a separate tab of the site configuration dialog. Fig. 6-28 shows the Status Info tab of the site configuration dialog. These 10 additional database fields can be freely used, e.g. for status information.

Fig. 6-28 Status Info tab of the site configuration dialog

6.5.3.8

Site Settings Overview

In order to get a better overview of the settings of all sites together, it is possible to view an overview dialog by choosing the menu entry File Current Project Site Settings, refer to Fig. 6-29. Alternatively, one can select Settings Overview… from an arbitrary site’s context menu to open this dialog. The settings overview dialog is maximizable such that the whole screen size can be used to view the site settings.

Fig. 6-29 Site settings overview

www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Multi-Layer Project Configuration 135

Besides the practical overview, this dialog offers the possibility to quickly change the site configurations. In particular, the following actions can be performed in the table:

• • • • •

A parameter can simply be displayed in a cell visual by using the context menu item Visualize. Quick Jump to a certain column using the pull down menu in the upper left part Individual parameter values can be changed. Filters can be set individually for each column with the help of functions from the context menu. This enables a selective modification of a certain group of sites in conjunction with the copy/fill function (see next bullet). Parameter values can easily be copied in a column (copy/fill function).

Export to or Update from File

As for all overview settings tables in Radioplan, the contents of the entire Site Settings Overview table including the column headers can be exported to a tab-delimited text file by selecting Export to File… from the context menu on the table grid, refer to Fig. 6-29.

Fig. 6-30 Export to File… in the context menu of the Site settings overview

Likewise, the -visible- table contents can also be updated – completely or partially – by imported data. By selecting Update from File… from the context menu on the table grid, those values are overwritten by the loaded data, for which the table key (here: “ID”) and the column header is found in the loaded tab-delimited text file. The text file may contain the columns and the rows of the Settings Overview table in an arbitrary order and it may also contain only a subset of them. Only the column with the table key (here: “ID”) is mandatory.
How to selectively modify a network configuration

This example shall explain how to exploit the filter functions and the copy/fill functions in table grids to change a configuration parameter in a well determined subset of sites using the settings overview dialog. The same basic mechanisms can also be applied in the other settings overview dialogs, of course. It shall be demonstrated how to change the DL capacity credit in all those sites that have an altitude different from 113m. First, display the site settings overview dialog as described above. Scroll down until you find a site with an altitude (terrain level) equal to 113m. Click into this field with the right mouse button to show the table grid context menu and choose the entry Set Filter. Then all those sites are excluded from the settings overview that have an altitude different from 113m.
www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Multi-Layer Project Configuration 136

To get a presentation of the sites that have an altitude different from 113m, the table grid filter must be inverted by selecting Invert Filter from the context menu. Then all the desired sites are shown in the settings overview dialog. Now let us set the DL capacity credit to 1280. Choose “Hardware” from the Quick Jump menu in the upper left corner. Then select the topmost field in the Capacity Credit DL column and type ‘1280’. Then select the complete column by clicking on the corresponding headline field and press <Ctrl-D> to copy the first value in the selection to the other selected fields of the column. Alternatively, you could choose Fill Down from the table grid context menu after the column was selected. Then the new setting ‘1280’ will be copied to all other sites that match the above stated condition.

Select column

<Ctrl-D>

If the table grid filter is removed then by selecting Remove Filter from the context menu, all sites are shown in the settings overview dialog again. You will notice that the DL capacity credit of the sites with 113m altitude has not been changed as was demanded. The Site and Cell Configuration Mode offers yet another possibility to display a selection of icon (tooltip Configure sites in a settings overview dialog. Enter the mode by clicking the Sites or Cells) in the paint toolbar. The mouse pointer automatically turns into a cross-hair. To graphically select sites for editing their parameters, just draw a polygon around those sites, vertex by vertex. The final vertex is set with a double click. Then all sites enclosed in the polygon are shown in a settings overview dialog similar to Fig. 6-29. See also section 6.5.4.6 for more information in using the Site and Cell Configuration Mode to open overview dialogs of cell settings.

6.5.3.9

Finding a Site

In larger projects, there is usually a considerable number of sites, and it is not easy to quickly associate a site item in the configuration data tree with its graphical representation in a surface plot. Thus there is a function to easily localize the position of a site in a surface plot from its item in the configuration data tree by using the context menu entry Find in Map. Then the surface plot is shifted such that the associated site is exactly in the center of the current view. Furthermore, it is highlighted by cell grippers for identification. See Fig. 6-31 for an example of a highlighted site in a map.

www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Multi-Layer Project Configuration 137

Fig. 6-31 A highlighted site in a map

6.5.3.10 Controlling Sites’ Visibility
In huge network scenarios with thousands of sites it might be useful to filter the visible sites in the tree window to those located inside the simulation area. Then the access to the relevant sites is more structured. This filter option can be switched on by using the entry Filter Sites located inside Simulation Area from a site’s or the Network Elements node’s icon at the context menu. The status of limited site visibility is indicated by a special Network Elements node in the hierarchical configuration data tree of the Configuration tab. In order to show the complete site data in the tree window again, just click the same entry in the site’s or the Network Elements node’s context menu anew. Note that this option has no influence on the visibility of the sites in a surface plot – they are always completely shown. In multi-technology networks, there is another option to control the visibility of the various network layers. By using the icon (tooltip Show only Active Layers) from the views toolbar, only those sites having cells that belong to the currently active network layer(s) are set visible; all other sites disappear. The site visibility pertains both the sites shown in the tree window to the left as well as in the viewing area. If the network layer filter flag is icon at the Network Elements node in the set, this status is also indicated by the special tree window.

6.5.3.11 Deleting a Site
A site can be deleted from the network configuration by selecting Delete Site from that particular site’s context menu. In order to avoid undesired erasure, an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the site. If there are other subordinate elements in the network configuration such as cells, repeaters, and pathloss matrices, they are also deleted together with their site.

6.5.4 Cell
In Radioplan, a cell is a system technology specific element. It is always connected to a site. All cells (and repeaters) at one site can belong to different sytem technologies. The association of a cell with a technology is determined by the network layer that the cell is assigned to. The network layer is mainly defined by the system technology, a carrier frequency, and an HCS identifier. In hierarchical multi-frequency network structures, cells belonging to different hierarchical network layers can operate on different frequencies. See section 5.2.1 on the definition of network layers. A cell must have at least one antenna. In case of additional antennas at a cell, those antennas can have individual position offsets. Each cell (or repeater or additional antenna) is usually assigned a pathloss matrix. See section 6.5.8 on how to assign pathloss matrices to cells, repeaters, and additional antennas.

www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Multi-Layer Project Configuration 138

6.5.4.1

Creating a Cell

It is possible to either create a new cell with default settings or to import a cell configuration from the library or another project. According to the hierarchical network architecture, a cell is always subordinate to a site in the network configuration. Hence, it can only be created if there is at least one site in the network. A new cell will automatically be assigned to the currently active network layer. So before a new cell is created, the desired network layer must be activated in the combo box of the views toolbar. In case of multiple network layers, the new cell would be assigned to the first network layer in the network layer management dialog.
Remember! Make sure to activate the right network layer before a new cell is created.

Creating a cell from generic default settings is accomplished by choosing Add Cell from the superordinate site’s context menu. The new cell is added then to the tree directly beneath the according site. Alternatively, to import a cell from the library, select Import Cell… from the superordinate site’s context menu. If there are already other cells in the network configuration, then the same entry is also available at them. A file open dialog appears where the desired cell configuration file can be chosen. By default the available library items are presented. Then the cell is imported and added to the tree directly beneath the according site. A possibility to add a complete site with several cells in one step is described in section icon in the paint toolbar) must 6.5.3.1. To use this function, the Site and Cell Add Mode ( be entered. Usually, a newly created cell has not yet been assigned an antenna. Initially, such a cell is symbolized by an orange arrow pointing towards the direction of the cell sector. As soon as an antenna is referenced in the cell, the arrow is replaced by a black arrow, refer to Fig. 6-32. Please, also consider the site symbol visualization as configured in the display settings dialog, refer to section 3.5.2.

Fig. 6-32 Cell symbol without any antenna (left) and with an assigned antenna (right)

6.5.4.2

Exporting a Cell

A cell can be exported to an external configuration file by choosing Export Cell… from its context menu. This function can be used to make the cell available for other projects, or to retain it permanently in the library.

6.5.4.3

Access to Cell Settings

The configuration data of a cell can be inspected in the according configuration dialog. To access this dialog select Settings… from the respective cell’s context menu (by rightclicking the cell item) or double-click the cell item in the tree, alternatively. There is yet another way to conveniently access the cell settings directly from a surface plot in the viewing area. By double-clicking a cell symbol (arrow or antenna pattern), the respective cell symbol in the viewing area and the according cell item in the tree window are highlighted, and its cell configuration dialog is opened. This action is visualized in Fig. 6-33.

www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Multi-Layer Project Configuration 139

Fig. 6-33 Opening the cell configuration dialog directly from a cell symbol

Also, the right mouse button can be clicked directly above a cell symbol (arrow or antenna pattern) in the viewing area to display the cell configuration dialog by choosing Cell Settings… from the cell’s context menu. The technology specific parameters of the cell configuration are described in chapters 7 through 11.

6.5.4.4

General Cell Settings

The General tab of the cell configuration dialog is shown in Fig. 6-34. Refer to Table 6-12 for a description of the general parameters.

Fig. 6-34 General tab of the cell configuration dialog Table 6-12 General cell parameters

Parameter

Description

Unit

ID

The identifier of the cell. This is a string that is unique in the network configuration such that it can be distinguished from other cells. An arbitrary string that describes the cell. The network layer that this cell belongs to. The user can choose among all defined network layers from a combo box.

Description Network Layer

— —

www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Multi-Layer Project Configuration 140

Parameter Antenna

Description

Unit

Pattern

The antenna assigned to this cell. In this list field, one of the available antenna templates can be selected for this cell. A mouse click on the button to the right leads directly to the antenna configuration dialog of the selected pattern. The horizontal orientation of this cell’s antenna (azimuth). The vertical orientation of this cell’s antenna (mechanical downtilt). The electrical tilt instead is included in the antenna pattern used. The additional electrical tilt of this cell’s antenna. This value should only be different from zero in the case that the integrated electrical tilt of the antenna defines a preset electrical tilt, and no other antenna pattern of the same antenna family are available.

Azimuth Mechanical Tilt

° °

Additional Electrical Tilt

°

Position

Height over Ground Offset from Site (X) Offset from Site (Y)

The height of the cell antenna over ground. This height value is always interpreted with respect of the altitude parameter of the superordinate site. The position offset of the cell’s antenna in x-direction in relation to the superordinate site’s location. The position offset of the cell’s antenna in y-direction in relation to the superordinate site’s location.

m

m m

Hardware Properties

Cable Loss DL

A compound Tx loss characterizing the link between the amplifier and the antenna, including cable loss, antenna coupling loss, etc. Positive value stand for a real loss; negative values would mean a gain. A compound Rx loss characterizing the link between the amplifier and the antenna, including cable loss, antenna coupling loss, etc. Positive value stand for a real loss; negative values would mean a gain. The noise figure of the receiver at this cell.

dB

Cable Loss UL

dB

Noise Figure
Color

dB

Color for cell area plots

The color to be used for presentations of this cell in best cell area plots. Black is the default color which is automatically replaced by a color according to the standard color palette.

Transmitter

Activated

A flag to determine whether the transmitter(s) at this cell are transmitting or not. For GSM and iDEN cells the transmitters flags are in a separated tab Transmitters (see sections 9.3.2 and 10.3.2).

Each tab of the cell configuration dialog has a Default button to reset all parameters to reasonable default settings. The same pre-defined settings are used when a cell is created with the context menu entry Add Cell at the according site item in the configuration data tree.

www.actix.com

refer to Fig.actix.5. it is possible to view an overview dialog by choosing Settings Overview… from a certain cell’s context menu. For removing a custom parameter for many or all cells together.4. www. 6-36.6 Cell Settings Overview In order to get a better overview of the settings of all cells together. Only the settings of those cells are shown that belong to the same system technology as the cell where the function was invoked. 6-35. custom parameters may be imported by customer-specific plugins for the import of radio network planning tool data or measurement data. see on the Cell Settings Overview dialog in section 6.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 141 6.5 Cell Custom Parameters The Custom Parameters tab of the cell configuration dialog is shown in Fig.com . custom parameters can be removed by deleting them from the table in the Custom Parameters tab. Likewise.4.5. It lists parameters. 6-35 Example for the Custom Parameters tab of the cell configuration dialog Typically.6.4. They can be added by editing the fields as well as by pasting a 2-column table via clipboard into the table grid. a new custom parameter can also be defined by the user by adding parameter name and value pairs to the table grid in Radioplan. The settings overview dialog is maximizable such that the whole screen size can be used to view the cell settings.5. Fig. Alternatively. which have been defined for a cell in addition to the standard Radioplan parameters for the technology of this cell. 6.

the following actions can be performed in the table: • • • • • A parameter can simply be displayed in a cell visual by using the context menu item Visualize. Filters can be set individually for each column with the help of some context menu functions. The final vertex is set with a double click. The mouse pointer automatically turns into a cross-hair. It is also possible to create a technology independent cell settings overview. 6-36 Cell settings overview Besides the practical overview. but it only contains technology independent parameters such as the antenna position and orientation. Parameter values can easily be copied in a column (copy/fill function). To select certain cells for parameter configuration. 6-36. This enables a selective modification of a certain group of cells in conjunction with the copy/fill function (see next bullet).com . this dialog offers the possibility to quickly change the cell configurations. can be invoked by choosing the menu entry File Alternatively.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 142 Fig. In particular. one can select the entry Cell Settings Overview… from the context menu of an arbitrary site. This general overview also contains the settings of repeaters and additional antennas. This function Current Project Cell Settings. Remember: Hold down the <Shift> key in the Site and Cell Configuration Mode to open a technology independent overview dialog of the cell settings. Enter the mode by clicking the Sites or Cells) in the paint toolbar to the left. just hold down the <Shift> key and draw a polygon around the corresponding sites with the desired cells. 6-36 is opened. Then all cells enclosed by the polygon are shown in a settings overview dialog similar to Fig. The Site and Cell Configuration Mode offers yet another possibility to display a selection of icon (tooltip Configure cells in a settings overview dialog. www. Quick Jump to a certain column using the pull down menu in the upper left part Individual parameter values can be changed. vertex by vertex.actix. Then a similar overview dialog as shown in Fig.

Likewise. This transmitter settings overview dialog is available by selecting Transmitter Overview… from a cell’s context menu. 6. Export to or Update from File As for all overview settings tables in Radioplan.table contents can also be updated – completely or partially – by imported data. 6-37. Then a dialog in the shape of Fig. highlighted in orange. 6-38 Transmitter settings overview www. for which the table key (here: “ID”) and the column header is found in the loaded tab-delimited text file. The text file may contain the columns and the rows of the Settings Overview table in an arbitrary order and it may also contain only a subset of them. select New Parameter… from the context menu on the table grid and specify the parameter key to be used as column header. are listed in additional columns at the right end of the table. Consequently. 6-29 in section 6. the -visible. a new column is added to the table.3. those values are overwritten by the loaded data. Fig. 6-38 is opened. the contents of the entire Cell Settings Overview table including the column headers can be exported to a tab-delimited text file by selecting Export to File… from the context menu on the table grid (see Fig. Only the column with the table key (here: “ID”) is mandatory.7 Transmitter Settings Overview For GSM and iDEN there is another overview table that shows the transmitter settings of all cells. In order to completely remove a custom parameter from all cells listed in the Overview dialog.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 143 All custom parameters that are defined at least for one cell in the Overview dialog.8).actix. refer to Fig.5. select Delete Parameter… from the context menu on the table grid of the column to be removed. By selecting Update from File… from the context menu on the table grid.4.5.com . 6-37 Cell settings overview detail with custom parameters In order to add a new parameter. Fig.

By the Transmitter Active context menu entry of such a cell. 6. Fig. Once the symbol in the viewing area is highlighted by grippers and the respective cell item in the data tree is selected. 6. 6-39 Quick Search toolbar for cell names Alternatively. refer to Fig.6 above. the cell is already displayed as transmitter disabled. A cell can further be localized in the surface plot from its item in the configuration data tree by using the context menu entry Find in Map. www. Furthermore. a cell has at least one transmitter that can be active or not. if at least the BCCH transmitter is disabled. Also the usual edit and filter functions are available in this table as described in section 6. 6-40 Checkbox to toggle the existence of a cell in the network plan In contrast to that. 6-41. Nevertheless. In order to quickly find a cell in the network plan and/or associate it with its item in the configuration data tree.4.5.5. These two different active flags are configured as follows: The cell active flag is realized as a checkbox in the Configuration tab of the tree window to individually include or exclude it in the network plan. a disabled transmitter is shown as a dashed arrow instead of the solid one. the transmitter flags of all TRXs are toggled.5.actix.4. it is highlighted by cell grippers for identification. Alternatively. If a cell is switched off. 6-39.8 Finding a Cell In larger projects. it can be configured by the according parameter in the cell configuration dialog as apparent from section 6. there is usually a considerable number of sites and cells.4. see Fig. For GSM and iDEN cells each TRX has a transmitter flag.4. one can also use the cell lookup function of this toolbar by pulling down the icon is pressed.com . the user can quickly search for a cell by name. the name of the cell just needs to be entered in the cell search toolbar on the upper right of the application window. Then the surface plot is shifted such that the associated site is exactly in the center of the current view. both the cell list field and selecting the corresponding cell. An exemplary site with one disabled transmitter is shown in Fig.9 Active Flag of Cells and Transmitters Each cell has an active flag that determines whether the cell exists in the network plan or not. its symbol is then completely hidden from the viewing area. it does not exist in the network plan any more. 6-40. depending on whether it is on air or not. To this end.4.5. Fig.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 144 The data in this overview table contains the same items as the Transmitter tab of every GSM or iDEN cell. The active state of the transmitters at a cell is toggled by using the Transmitter Active context menu entry of the cell. Furthermore.

It can have an individual position offset from the parent site position. In order to realize this.actix. a repeater is a system technology specific element. dashed arrow) at a cell 6.e. it is possible to drag the cell with the mouse to the destination site with a simple drag&drop action. thus. For this reason the opportunity is provided to duplicate an existing cell. repeaters.4. i. 6-42.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 145 Fig. parameters from already configured cells could easily be copied to the new cell as explained in the previous subsection..5 Repeater In Radioplan. the superordinate site is not allowed to have a pathloss matrix. To duplicate a cell. See section 6.11 Deleting a Cell A cell can be deleted from the network configuration by selecting Delete Cell from that particular cell’s context menu. A repeater must have exactly one antenna.10 Duplicating and Dragging a Cell Usually.5. A repeater always inherits the same network layer and. and additional antennas. at the same site. the IDs and antenna directions).com . Then the parameter changes are quickly made. 6. Fig. e. The configuration tree view is immediately updated such that the moved cell is now shown at the destination site.8 on how to assign pathloss matrices to cells.g. Just left-click on the cell icon in the configuration data tree to be moved and hold the mouse button pressed down. an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the cell. These cells typically differ in only very few parameters (as. imported from the library. Then drag the cell item to the destination site and drop it there by releasing the mouse button when the destination site’s item appears selected. or duplicated) available at another site. A new cell is added then to the hierarchical network configuration data tree on the same level as the existing one. choose Duplicate Cell from an existing cell’s context menu.5. 6. 6-41 A disabled transmitter (red crossed. www.5. Alternatively. the same sytem technology as the donor cell. So it is not necessary to import all the cells of the network configuration from the library.4. Often it is desired to have a newly created cell (be it created with default settings. 6-42 A repeater (left) associated with its donor cell Each cell (or repeater or additional antenna) is usually assigned a pathloss matrix. By opening the settings dialog of the new cell its parameters can be modified as appropriate. It is always connected to a donor cell. If this is the case. a network configuration that is to be investigated contains a larger amount of cells that are distributed over the sites.5. The connection to its donor cell is symbolized by a dashed line between the repeater and the donor cell in the viewing area as shown in Fig. In order to avoid undesired erasure.

a repeater is always attached to a site.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 146 6.2 Access to Repeater Settings The configuration data of a repeater can be inspected in the according configuration dialog. This site need not necessarily be the same as the site where the associated donor cell is attached. Fig. 6.e. The technology specific parameters of the repeater configuration are described in chapters 7 through 11. The new repeater is added then to the tree directly at the site of the donor cell. 6-44 Opening the repeater configuration dialog directly from a repeater symbol Also. the donor “cell” of a repeater can be another repeater. There is yet another way to conveniently access the repeater settings directly from a surface plot in the viewing area.com . The new repeater will inherit the network layer and most parameters from its donor cell.5. 6-43 A repeater attached to a site in the hierarchical configuration data tree structure Also cascaded repeaters are supported. Fig.5. 6-44. According to the hierarchical network architecture. To access this dialog select Settings… from the respective repeater’s context menu (by right-clicking the repeater item) or double-click the repeater item in the tree. i. 6. refer to Table 6-13.5. The description of the general parameters is repeated here for convenience.5. The item of the new repeater is shown below the site item in the tree window where it was created. it can only be created if there is at least one cell in the network.5. 6-43.5.3 General Repeater Settings The General tab of the repeater configuration dialog is shown in Fig. www.5.1 Adding a Repeater It is possible to add a new repeater and associate it with its designated donor cell. the right mouse button can be clicked directly above a repeater symbol (arrow or antenna pattern) in the viewing area to display the repeater configuration dialog by choosing Cell Settings… from the repeater’s context menu. 6-45.6.actix. Since a repeater is always associated with a donor cell. It is similar to the general cell settings. and its repeater configuration dialog is opened.5. the respective repeater symbol in the viewing area and the according repeater item in the tree window are highlighted. see Fig. Creating a repeater from generic default settings is accomplished by choosing Add Repeater from the designated donor cell’s context menu. It is also possible to move the repeater to another site by a drag and drop action as described in subsection 6. This action is visualized in Fig. alternatively. By double-clicking a repeater symbol (arrow or antenna pattern).

In this list field. — Azimuth Mechanical Tilt ° ° Additional Electrical Tilt ° Position Height over Ground The height of the repeater antenna over ground. The network layer that this repeater’s donor cell belongs to. The position offset of the repeater’s antenna in xdirection in relation to the superordinate site’s location. one of the available antenna templates can be selected for this repeater.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 147 Fig. This is a string that is unique in the network configuration such that it can be distinguished from other repeaters. An arbitrary string that describes the repeater. This value should only be different from zero in the case that the integrated electrical tilt of the antenna defines a preset electrical tilt. and no other antenna pattern of the same antenna family are available. The additional electrical tilt of this repeater’s antenna. The vertical orientation of this repeater’s antenna (mechanical downtilt).actix. m Offset from Site (X) m www. — Description Network Layer Antenna — — Pattern The antenna assigned to this repeater. The electrical tilt instead is included in the antenna pattern used.com . It could only be changed in the donor cell itself. This height value is always interpreted with respect of the altitude parameter of the superordinate site. The horizontal orientation of this repeater’s antenna (azimuth). 6-45 General tab of the repeater configuration dialog Table 6-13 General repeater parameters Parameter Description Unit ID The identifier of the repeater.

— Transmitter Activated Donor Cell A flag to determine whether the transmitter(s) at this repeater are transmitting or not.5. It looks and works similar to the cell settings overview dialog. These two different active flags are configured as follows: The repeater active flag is realized as a checkbox in the Configuration tab of the tree window to individually include or exclude it in the network plan. negative values would mean a gain.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 148 Parameter Description Unit Offset from Site (Y) The position offset of the repeater’s antenna in ydirection in relation to the superordinate site’s location. Black is the default color which is automatically replaced by a color according to the standard color palette. www.5. see Fig. The same pre-defined settings are used when a repeater is created with the context menu entry Add Repeater at the according cell item in the configuration data tree. see Fig. it does not exist in the network plan any more. The settings overview dialog is maximizable such that the whole screen size can be used to view the repeater settings. dB Color Color for cell area plots The color to be used for presentations of this repeater in best cell area plots. 6.5.6. Positive value stand for a real loss. Furthermore. — Donor Cell Connection Type The donor cell can be selected from the pulldown list that contains all cells of the respective network layer. The type of connection between the donor cell and the repeater.5.4 Repeater Settings Overview In order to get a better overview of the settings of all repeaters together. ‘fiber’. etc.actix. it is possible to view an overview dialog by choosing Settings Overview… from an arbitrary repeater’s context menu. Possible values are ‘radio’. 6. If a repeater is switched off. and ‘microwave’. depending on whether it is on air or not.4. including cable loss.5.com . a repeater has at least one transmitter that can be active or not.5 Switching Repeaters On/Off Each repeater has an active flag that determines whether the repeater exists in the network plan or not. 6-36 in section 6. m Hardware Properties Cable Loss DL A compound loss characterizing the link between the repeater and the antenna. 6-46. — — Each tab of the repeater configuration dialog has a Default button to reset all parameters to reasonable default settings. its symbol is then completely hidden from the viewing area. antenna coupling loss.

actix. 6. 6. 6-46 Checkbox to toggle the existence of a repeater in the network plan In contrast to that.5. In this case.com . The active state of the transmitters at a cell is toggled by using the Transmitter Active context menu entry of the repeater. It can have an individual position offset from the parent site position.3.5.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 149 Fig. An additional antenna must have exactly one antenna.5.7 Deleting a Repeater A repeater can be deleted from the network configuration by selecting Delete from that particular repeater’s context menu. It is always connected to a cell that in turn must have a (main) antenna. Alternatively.6.5. a disabled transmitter is shown as a dashed arrow instead of the solid one. an additional antenna is always subordinate to its cell in the network configuration. In order to realize this.5.5. an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the repeater.5.3. repeaters. Dragging a repeater to another site does not change the association to its donor cell. there is one antenna pattern directly assigned to the cell. According to the hierarchical network architecture.5. The donor cell can be modified in the repeater settings dialog as described in section 6.e. Then drag the repeater item to the destination site and drop it there by releasing the mouse button when the destination site’s item appears selected. 6. Each cell (or repeater or additional antenna) is usually assigned a pathloss matrix.5. template) which is described in section 6. thus. it can only be created if there is at least one cell in the www. Just left-click on the repeater icon in the configuration data tree to be moved and hold the mouse button pressed down. all other antennas are modeled by additional antennas. the same sytem technology as the donor cell. Hence. An additional antenna always inherits the same network layer and.6 Additional Antenna In Radioplan. 6.6 Dragging a Repeater Often it is desired to have a newly created repeater be located at another site. and additional antennas. it can be configured by the according parameter in the repeater configuration dialog as apparent from section 6. The configuration tree view is immediately updated such that the moved repeater is now shown at the new site. it is possible to drag the repeater with the mouse to the destination site with a simple drag and drop action.5.5.9. the superordinate site is not allowed to have a pathloss matrix. An additional antenna is used in Radioplan to model the case that a cell has several antenna patterns. an additional antenna is a system technology specific element. If this is the case. An additional antenna should not be mixed up with a normal antenna pattern (i. In order to avoid undesired erasure.1 Adding an Additional Antenna at a Cell It is possible to add a new additional antenna at its designated donor cell. See section 6.8 on how to assign pathloss matrices to cells.5.

6-47. By double-clicking an additional antenna symbol (arrow or antenna pattern). The new additional antenna is added then to the tree directly beneath the according cell. refer to Table 6-14.2 Access to Additional Antenna Settings The configuration data of an additional antenna can be inspected in the according configuration dialog. 6-47 An additional antenna with its cell in the hierarchical configuration data tree structure Creating an additional antenna from generic default settings is accomplished by choosing Add Additional Antenna from the designated cell’s context menu. alternatively. the respective additional antenna symbol in the viewing area and the according additional antenna item in the tree window are highlighted.com .Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 150 network.6. and its additional antenna configuration dialog is opened. 6-48. The description of the general parameters is repeated here for convenience. see Fig.5. The technology specific parameters of the additional antenna configuration are described in chapters 7 through 11.actix. This action is visualized in Fig. Fig. Fig. 6-48 Opening the additional antenna configuration dialog directly from an additional antenna symbol Also. To access this dialog select Settings… from the respective additional antenna’s context menu (by right-clicking the antenna item) or double-click the additional antenna item in the tree. www.5. The new additional antenna will inherit the network layer and most parameters from its cell.3 General Settings of an Additional Antenna The General tab of the additional antenna configuration dialog is shown in Fig. 6.6. The item of the new additional antenna is shown below the cell item in the tree window. It is similar to the general cell settings. 6. 6-49. the right mouse button can be clicked directly above an additional antenna symbol (arrow or antenna pattern) in the viewing area to display the additional antenna configuration dialog by choosing Cell Settings… from the additional antenna’s context menu. There is yet another way to conveniently access the additional antenna settings directly from a surface plot in the viewing area.

actix. This is a string that is unique in the network configuration such that it can be distinguished from other additional antennas. The horizontal orientation of this additional antenna (azimuth). This height value is always interpreted with respect of the altitude parameter of the superordinate site.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 151 Fig. In this list field. 6-49 General tab of the additional antenna configuration dialog Table 6-14 General additional antenna parameters Parameter Description Unit ID The identifier of the additional antenna. one of the available antenna templates can be selected for this additional antenna. It could only be changed in the donor cell itself. The position offset of the additional antenna in x-direction in relation to the superordinate site’s location. m Offset from Site (X) m www. The additional electrical tilt of this additional antenna.com . — Description Network Layer — — Antenna Pattern The antenna (pattern) assigned to this additional antenna. and no other antenna pattern of the same antenna family are available. This value should only be different from zero in the case that the integrated electrical tilt of the antenna defines a preset electrical tilt. The network layer that this additional antenna’s donor cell belongs to. — Azimuth Mechanical Tilt ° ° Additional Electrical Tilt ° Position Height over Ground The height of the additional antenna over ground. The electrical tilt instead is included in the antenna pattern used. An arbitrary string that describes the additional antenna. The vertical orientation of this additional antenna (mechanical downtilt).

actix.5. Furthermore. depending on whether it is on air or not. — Each tab of the additional antenna configuration dialog has a Default button to reset all parameters to reasonable default settings. Black is the default color which is automatically replaced by a color according to the standard color palette. see Fig. etc.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 152 Parameter Description Unit Offset from Site (Y) The position offset of the additional antenna in y-direction in relation to the superordinate site’s location.5. The active state of the transmitters at a cell is toggled by using the Transmitter Active context menu entry of the additional antenna.3. Alternatively.4. Positive value stand for a real loss. it does not exist in the network plan any more.4 Additional Antenna Settings Overview In order to get a better overview of the settings of all additional antennas together. The same pre-defined settings are used when an additional antenna is created with the context menu entry Add Additional Antenna at the according cell item in the configuration data tree. The settings overview dialog is maximizable such that the whole screen size can be used to view the additional antenna settings. m Hardware Properties Cable Loss DL A compound loss characterizing the link between the donor cell and the antenna. a disabled transmitter is shown as a dashed arrow instead of the solid one. It looks and works similar to the cell settings overview dialog.6. it can be configured by the according parameter in the additional antenna configuration dialog as apparent from section 6.5 Switching Additional Antennas On/Off Each additional antenna has an active flag that determines whether the additional antenna exists in the network plan or not.5. it is possible to view an overview dialog by choosing Settings Overview… from an arbitrary additional antenna’s context menu. 6. If an additional antenna is switched off. 6-50. negative values would mean a gain. www.5.6. These two different active flags are configured as follows: The active flag of the additional antenna is realized as a checkbox in the Configuration tab of the tree window to individually include or exclude it in the network plan. antenna coupling loss. 6-36 in section 6. Fig.6. dB Color Color for cell area plots The color to be used for presentations of this additional antenna in best cell area plots.6. — Transmitter Activated A flag to determine whether the transmitter(s) at this additional antenna are transmitting or not. see Fig. an additional antenna has at least one transmitter that can be active or not. 6. its symbol is then completely hidden from the viewing area. including cable loss. 6-50 Checkbox to toggle the existence of an additional antenna in the network plan In contrast to that.com .

an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the additional antenna.g. All generated graphics layers are listed in the Layers tab of the tree window.6 Deleting an Additional Antenna An additional antenna can be deleted from the network configuration by selecting Delete from that particular additional antenna’s context menu. Fig.5.5. An exemplary view of this dialog is shown in Fig. Then for each cell a separate graphics layer is created that would be reused when the neighbor list display of a cell is updated. 6-52. 6.e. www. be exchanged against another cell) by editing the according parameter in the list. An example of the graphical presentation of the neighbor lists of a cell is given in Fig. inter-frequency. Then the other fields of the line (Priority. 6-51. • • • Neighbor cell relations can be displayed graphically for each cell by using the function Show Neighbor List from that cell’s context menu. A neighbor cell can be deleted from the list by clicking the field left of the cell to be deleted.6. These neighbor lists are configured in a separate dialog that can be opened by using the entry Neighbor Lists… from a cell’s context menu.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 153 6. restrict the visibility of neighbor relations to those of a particular network layer. and intersystem handover – depending on the network layer of the related cell. In order to avoid undesired erasure. An existing neighbor cell can be modified (i. The usual filter function in the table grid can be applied to e.7 Neighbor Lists Each cell can have a list of neighbor cells for intra-frequency. Network Layer) have to be added. and then pressing the <Delete> key.actix.com . 6-51 Neighbor list configuration dialog The lists can be easily configured in the following ways: • A new neighbor cell can be appended at the end of the list by clicking into the last (empty) field and selecting a cell out of the appearing dropdown list. Exclusive Relation flag.

6. arranged in regular pixels.actix. Alternatively. position of an antenna) to each pixel in the matrix. the influence of the particular antenna pattern at the respective cell is overlaid to obtain the resulting coverage. It is even possible to import more than one pathloss matrix that can be held temporarily at a cell. Radioplan supports multi-resolution pathloss matrices. a pathloss matrix stored in a georeferenced raster data file can be imported. only a single pathloss matrix per cell. or additional antenna is allowed.1 Importing a Pathloss Matrix A pathloss matrix can be imported from the library by clicking Import Pathloss Matrix… from a cell’s. or an additional antenna. to perform any kind of network simulation or analysis. In Radioplan. in order to work with the network model. from the respective radiation point (i. It contains pathloss values.e.com . A detailed description of this feature can be found in [R-ANP]. a repeater. Some prediction models in radio network planning tools calculate the radio propagation in the short range area around a site with a comparatively higher accuracy and finer resolution than in the surrounding long range area. Afterwards.8 Pathloss Matrix A pathloss matrix represents the radio propagation conditions with respect to a specific cell/antenna location. or an additional antenna item. a repeater. Usually a pathloss matrix is assigned to a cell. It is based both on planning data (pathloss predictions) and drive test measurements. the attribution of color values to pathloss values is realized via the TIFF file’s color palette. repeater. i. a pathloss matrix contains the pure pathloss from the radiation point to each pixel. The Neighbor Lists Automatic function can be called by choosing the menu entry Tools Update…. However.8.5. This is done by selecting Import Pathloss Matrix from Raster Image… from the context menu of a cell. www. As soon as the matrix is imported it is shown in the configuration data tree one level below the corresponding network element. 6-52 Graphical presentation of the neighbor list of a cell A method to automatically allocate or amend cell neighbor lists is included in Radioplan. a repeater’s or an additional antenna’s context menu. A file open dialog appears where the user can specify the desired pathloss matrix. isotropic antennas are assumed. Such pathloss matrices can be imported into Radioplan and are handled in the same way as in the planning tool. 6.5. In case of a TIFF file.e.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 154 Fig.

e.. It consists of two rectangular grids made up of pixels positioned in the horizontal x-y-plane.8. The alignment of the pathloss matrices is oriented at the upper left corner of the matrix. dimension. 6-54. R1C2 R2C2 R1C3 R2C3 . Each pixel contains a single integer value representing a pathloss value in dB. This dialog is shown in Fig.5.5. In the area of the HiRes part...actix. Storage Format West East = West + PixelWidth * (m – 1) (optional) HiRes Part PixelHeight LowRes LowRes Part RnCm n = Rows (Number of Rows) m = Cols (Number of Columns) PixelWidth LowRes South = North .3 Inspecting the Settings of a Pathloss Matrix The configuration parameters of a pathloss matrix are basically its positioning..8. North R1C1 R2C1 .com . 6-53. the Northwestern corner.PixelHeight * (n – 1) Fig. Fig.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 155 6. The width and height of the pixels of both matrices are independently adjustable by the values of PixelWidth and PixelHeight.. The smaller of the matrices with the short range part (HiRes part) has typically a finer resolution than the larger long range part (LowRes part).2 Pathloss Matrix Format The pathloss matrix format as used in Radioplan is shown in Fig. The corresponding parameters are explained in Table 6-15. 6-53 Pathloss matrix format 6. and grid size for both matrix parts. 6-54 Pathloss matrix configuration dialog www. .. the pixels of the LowRes part are exchanged. i. It can be viewed by choosing Settings… from the matrix’s context menu or by double-clicking on the pathloss matrix item in the configuration tree. The covered area of a pathloss matrix is determined by the pixel dimensions (PixelWidth and PixelHeight) in conjunction with the number of rows and columns for the long range part. These parameters are summarized in the pathloss matrix configuration dialog.

The number of columns in the pathloss matrix. can be identified in the Pathloss Matrix Settings Overview. the HighRes part of the pathloss matrices are tuned or not. 6-55. The number of rows in the pathloss matrix. this dialog offers the possibility to quickly work with the pathloss configurations. This value cannot be changed since it is determined by the matrix size. the following actions can be performed in the table: • • Quick Jump to a certain column using the pull down menu in the lower left part Mark table fields and copy their content to other tables and applications via the clipboard www. this overview dialog also indicates whether the LowRes part and. if available.com . This value cannot be changed since it is determined by the matrix size. Besides the practical overview. m m m m # # Whether a pathloss matrix is tuned.8. the user can select Settings Overview… from a certain pathloss matrix’s context menu.5. refer to Fig. The y-coordinate of the Northwestern corner of the pathloss matrix. it is Current Project possible to view an overview dialog by choosing the menu entry File Pathloss Settings. The settings overview dialog is maximizable such that the whole screen size can be used to view the pathloss settings. This coordinate has a West-East alignment. The expansion of a pathloss matrix pixel in West-East direction. Fig. The expansion of a pathloss matrix pixel in South-North direction.actix. 6-55 Pathloss matrix settings overview In addition to the settings of a single pathloss matrix.4 Pathloss Matrix Settings Overview In order to get a better overview of all pathloss matrices used in the project together. In particular. This coordinate has a South-North alignment. 6.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 156 Table 6-15 Pathloss matrix parameters Parameter Description Unit Resolution Low/High West North Pixel Width Pixel Height Cols Rows The x-coordinate of the Northwestern corner of the pathloss matrix. Alternatively.

This option is chosen by selecting the entry Show Pathloss incl. such as the best pilot received power . Antenna Diagrams from the cell’s context menu (by right-clicking on the cell item). it is also possible to create composite layers for the entire network based on the pathloss matrices. More plots are interference ratio available from the View Configuration Data Plots submenu. Most of these plots can be easily accessed from the icons in the views toolbar.4 how to adjust these settings. 6-56 Sample plot of the pathloss including antenna for a single cell Besides viewing a single pathloss matrix.8. In order to modify a pathloss matrix. the color palette. one www. In order to avoid undesired erasure. Fig. This enables to display a certain group of pathloss matrices in conjunction with the copy/fill function (see next bullet). Use the layer settings dialog to adjust the scaling. See section 3. Layers of the same type can be retained if the <Shift> key is held down when clicking one of the toolbar icons or menu entries. Moreover. 6.5. Inactive sites / cells are not considered during the creation of these layers. best serving cell areas . The newly created pathloss layer is displayed then in the viewing area.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 157 • • • Filters can be set individually for each column with the help of some context menu functions. 6. Radioplan offers the possibility to simply draw regions (i. 255dB). The matrices are deleted when the overview dialog is closed by pressing the OK button.5 Viewing Pathloss Plots A surface plot layer can be created from a single pathloss matrix by choosing Show this Matrix from this matrix’s context menu (by right-clicking on the matrix item).e. 6-56 shows a typical plot of the pathloss for a single cell.actix. and cell overlap .com . and the alpha blending factor appropriately. polygons) in the matrix with a certain pathloss value with the mouse. Fig. Highlight a site/cell in the viewing area that belongs to the currently selected line in the table by clicking the Find selected Site button Delete several pathloss matrices in one step by selecting the according checkboxes in the Mark for Delete column.g.5. To do so.8. the antenna applied in a cell can be incorporated to produce another layer.5. an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the pathloss matrices. For example.6 Editing a Pathloss Matrix Under certain circumstances it can be useful to modify a pathloss matrix graphically. this way a certain area could be excluded from any consideration by assigning it a very high pathloss (e. best .

Fig.2 how to adjust the grid size in the display settings dialog. simply click the icon again. A dialog appears where the new grid size (equally for x. Note that this drawing grid size is independent of the matrix pixel resolution and only influences the drawing actions.7 Duplicating and Dragging Pathloss Matrices Especially when pathloss matrices generated by empirical pathloss models without any obstacles are used that have a regular shape (e. As soon as the matrix editing mode is activated.8. the grid size can be modified by clicking the icon from the paint toolbar.and y-direction) can be specified. it is easy to surround geographical regions in the map while drawing with the mouse.4. Also the distance measure mode is available.5 explains how to create a new surface plot layer from a graphics file to be used as a background image. The matrix editing mode can be temporarily left to use the zoom and pan functions to navigate to the area where the matrix shall be modified.com . Alternatively.5. Fig. The pathloss regions are drawn by setting one vertex after the other by left-clicking with the mouse. Then a dialog is shown that asks the user to specify the pathloss that is assigned to the region just drawn. Alternatively. The drawing action can be canceled at any time by pressing the <ESC> key before the last vertex has been set. The icon (tooltip: Edit Matrix) in the paint toolbar to the left is immediately activated to notify the matrix editing mode state. 6-57 Grid size settings dialog It is recommended to display a background image before starting to draw pathloss regions.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 158 has to enter the matrix editing mode by selecting Edit this Matrix from the context menu of the pathloss matrix item. mode or by clicking the 6. The last vertex of a polygon is marked by double-clicking the left mouse button. and the mouse pointer turns into a cross-hair. 6-58 Edit pathloss matrix dialog After having edited the appropriate pathloss value. the chosen pathloss matrix is shown in the viewing area together with a drawing grid. The edit pathloss matrix dialog is depicted in Fig.actix.g. Section 3. See section 3. Thus pathloss regions can be drawn very quickly. In order to switch then back to the actual matrix editing mode. (by clicking on The matrix editing mode can be left by disabling the matrix editing icon it). the matrix editing mode can also be left by selecting any other drawing icon from the paint toolbar. The grid size can be adjusted appropriately in the display settings dialog.5. 6-58. the new pathloss region is shown in the surface plot. smooth decay towards all directions) it www. So if the background image is a map. see Fig. 6-57.

a dragged pathloss matrix is not aligned with its new network element.5. A dialog one step using the menu function File www. One option to realize the alignment is to use the “Synchronize Position with Site/Cell” button from the pathloss matrix configuration dialog which is only visible if the <Shift> key was held down when opening the dialog.9 Working with Tuned Pathloss Matrices The Measurement Module allows to tune pathloss matrices with measurements. a complete chunk of tuned pathloss matrices can be imported into a project in Import Import Tuned Predictions….Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 159 seems to be useful to have a possibility to simply copy a matrix that has been imported once. In order to have the new pathloss matrix available at another network element (cell or repeater or additional antenna).. This functionality is provided by the entry Duplicate Matrix from the pathloss matrix’s context menu (by right-clicking the matrix item).4. the menu function File Export Export Tuned Predictions…. only a single pathloss matrix at each network element can be used.8 Deleting a Pathloss Matrix A pathloss matrix can be deleted from its associated network element by selecting Delete Matrix from the matrix’s context menu.actix. Fig. In order to save the tuned matrices from a project.com . Alternatively.5.5. To accomplish this. Then drag the matrix item to the destination network element and drop it there by releasing the mouse button when the destination network element’s item appears selected. Several pathloss matrices are only allowed to be placed temporarily at a single network element.g. The configuration tree view is immediately updated such that the moved pathloss matrix is now shown at the destination network element. it is possible to drag the matrix with the mouse to the destination network element with a simple drag&drop action. When used for normal operation as. 6.8. Likewise. several pathloss matrices can be deleted in one step using the pathloss matrix settings overview dialog as described in section 6. drag&drop Fig.8. Instead. When confirming this dialog. In either case. an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the pathloss matrix. Then a dialog appears where the user can select the directory to store the tuned matrices in. all tuned pathloss matrices from the project are saved into the selected directory. refer to [RMeas]. e. network simulation or analysis. 6-59 shows an example of such a drag&drop action. This way the matrices do not need to be tuned every time when the user works with a certain project. left-click on the pathloss matrix icon to be moved and hold the mouse button pressed down. 6. The newly created pathloss matrix is added at the same network element as the original one.8. the previously tuned pathloss matrices can be retrieved from their storage place and be imported into the project. Once pathloss matrices have been tuned they can be stored at a dedicated location for further use. 6-59 Dragging a pathloss matrix to another cell Generally.

e. Note that in order to be imported.5. An example pattern comprising a horizontal and a vertical diagram is shown in Fig. i. location and resolution. The horizontal pattern must be normalized such that the attenuation has its minimum at ϕ = 0° with Cϕ (ϕ = 0°) = 1 . In order to assign an antenna to a certain antenna family. These two cuts are used to interpolate a three-dimensional antenna pattern. 6-60. 6-60 Example antenna pattern described by a horizontal and a vertical cut Fig. the minimal attenuation is at ϑ ≠ 0° . this antenna www. Each distinct antenna represents a template that can be referenced arbitrary times from the cells. an antenna item describes an antenna pattern that is defined by a vertical and a horizontal diagram. In this process. Refer to [R-TecRef] for a detailed description of the antenna pattern interpolation. − 90° < ϑ ≤ 90° . Thus it is possible to use antenna patterns with an incorporated downtilt. 6-61 Three-dimensional presentation of the antenna pattern from Fig. and a vertical ( ϑ -plane) antenna diagram. The antenna diagram is specified by a horizontal ( ϕ -plane).com . all tuned pathloss matrices from the chosen directory are imported into the project and are automatically associated with the right network elements. The three-dimensional antenna pattern is interpolated from the given horizontal and vertical diagrams. 6. any non-tuned pathloss matrices at those network elements are overridden. When confirming this dialog. 6-61.actix. a matrix must fit the non-tuned matrix in extensions. its three-dimensional presentation from two different perspectives is given in Fig. For the vertical pattern it is only demanded that min Cϑ (ϑ ) = 1.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 160 appears where the user can specify the directory to retrieve the previously tuned matrices from. 6-60 Antennas of the same type with just different electrical tilt angles are grouped in an antenna family.9 Antenna In Radioplan. A gain value can be specified for the antenna. ϑ Fig.

A file open dialog is opened where the desired antenna configuration file can be chosen. The import of an antenna does not immediately mean that it is used in the network configuration. do. then the same entry is also available at them.g. They reside in a separate section of the configuration data tree called Antennas. To import an antenna in Radioplan format.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 161 must be given the respective antenna family name. If importing a Radioplan antenna. If antennas of one antenna family have different alternative antenna group names. 6-62 Hierarchical structure of antenna families In Radioplan a specific antenna model is called antenna family. An antenna family can have a range of allowed electrical tilts. Antennas that are not associated with an antenna family belong to the group No Family. The hierarchical structure of antenna families and antennas belonging to these families is reflected in the configuration tree structure. Alternatively.g.actix. 6-62. Fig. Especially for network optimization purposes. cells. repeaters etc.. Instead. For each tilt angle there could be a separate antenna belonging to the same antenna family. refer to Fig. Then the antenna is imported and added to the tree together with possibly other antennas. Antennas do not directly belong to the network hierarchy as network controller. an isotropic antenna. the available library items are presented by default.9. www.1 Importing an Antenna Despite very simple and rather theoretical antenna patterns as. To this end. If there are already other antennas in the network configuration. This is especially true for measured antenna patterns. the user can freely assign an antenna group name (also called alternative antenna group) to each antenna. it is possible to import an antenna configuration from the library. this antenna family would consequently belong to all of the referenced alternative antenna groups. Thus it is not intended to create an antenna configuration from the scratch. with different beam widths) that shall be used for antenna type optimization.com . 6. an antenna can be imported in the Planet format by using the context menu entry Import PLANET™ Antenna…. it might be necessary to group different antenna families (e. sites. e. select Import Antenna… from the context menu of the Antennas node of the configuration data tree. a three-dimensional antenna pattern is quite a complex unit.5. All antenna families having the same group name are assumed to belong to one antenna group. It must be referenced by a cell in order to be used.

4 Inspecting the Antenna Configuration Data The configuration data of an antenna can be inspected in the according configuration dialog. alternatively. This function can be used to make the antenna available for other projects. this family name is just the ID without the tilt info. The electrical tilt that is incorporated in the vertical antenna diagram. To access this dialog select Settings… from the respective antenna’s context menu (by right-clicking the antenna item) or double-click the antenna item in the tree. An arbitrary string that describes the antenna. or to preserve it permanently in the library. As normally. Then the copy could be modified as appropriate. The antenna gain.5. — Antenna Family Description Gain Electrical Tilt — — dBi ° www. A description of the configuration parameters is found in Table 6-16 whereas the pattern format of the horizontal cut (lower left table) and the vertical cut (lower right table) is explained in Table 6-17. 6-63. The configuration dialog of the antenna is shown in Fig. By opening the configuration dialog of the new antenna its parameters can be modified as appropriate.3 Duplicating an Antenna It is possible to duplicate an antenna as soon as it has been imported once.com . A new antenna is added then to the Antennas node in the configuration data tree.9. the included electrical tilt of an antenna pattern is appended to the antenna ID.9. This is explained in the following section.2 Exporting an Antenna An antenna can be exported to an external configuration file by choosing Export Antenna… from its context menu. To duplicate an antenna. choose Duplicate Antenna from an existing antenna’s context menu.5. Fig. 6. 6. The name of the antenna family.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 162 6. This is a string that is unique in the network configuration such that it can be distinguished from other antennas.5.9. 6-63 Antenna configuration dialog Table 6-16 Antenna parameters Parameter Description Unit ID The identifier of the antenna.actix.

Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 163 Parameter Description Unit Beamwidth Alternative Antenna Group The 3dB beamwidth of the horizontal antenna diagram. In order to get a better overview of the settings of all antennas of the project together. 6-64. The attenuation of the antenna diagram in a certain direction (i. the antenna pattern is scaled such that the attenuation is 0 dB for the main lobe of the pattern both in the horizontal and the vertical diagrams. it is Current Project possible to view an overview dialog by choosing the menu entry File Antenna Settings. ° — The attenuation values of the antenna pattern are positive for a real attenuation and negative for an amplification. Alternatively. Furthermore. — ° [0 … 359] dB If the antenna diagrams do not define an attenuation value for each integer angle. A string identifier that combines different antenna families in groups for antenna type optimization. it also show the number of occurrences for each antenna in the project. angle). The resulting power offset induced by the antenna pattern for a certain angle is then calculated as antenna power offset (angle) [dB] = antenna gain [dB] – antenna attenuation (angle) [dB]. The settings overview dialog is maximizable such that the whole screen size can be used to view the antenna settings. The angle in the horizontal/vertical antenna diagram of the associated pattern value. given in the right most column. the user can select Settings Overview… from an arbitrary antenna item’s or the Antennas node’s context menu. Table 6-17 Antenna pattern format Parameter Description Unit Show Diagram Azimuth/Downtilt Attenuation A button to show the respective antenna pattern cut (horizontal/vertical) in a separate window.com . In addition to the antenna parameters. www.e. Positive values mean a real attenuation. refer to Fig. negative values mean an amplification. the missing values are padded with the last value given for an angle smaller than the missing one.actix.

6-65. the dialog has two buttons to automatically fill the antenna family name fields (derived from the antenna IDs.5. www. this dialog offers the possibility to quickly change the antenna configurations. 6. Furthermore. the following actions can be performed in the table: • • • Individual parameter values can be changed. A sample view is shown in Fig. Besides the practical overview. respectively. Filters can be set individually for each column with the help of functions from the context menu. the entries Show Horizontal Diagram and Show Vertical Diagram.actix. from the corresponding antenna’s context menu (by right-clicking the antenna item) allow to display the diagrams. button Update Antenna Families) and to set the electrical tilt values from the antennas IDs (button Update Electrical Tilt from Antenna ID).5 Viewing the Antenna Diagram Both the horizontal and the vertical diagrams of an antenna can be shown in the viewing area in polar diagrams.com . In particular. 6-64 Antenna settings overview In the upper part.9. This enables a selective modification of a all antennas of a certain type in conjunction with the copy/fill function (see next bullet). Parameter values can easily be copied in a column (copy/fill function). These views can be directly accessed from the two Show Diagram buttons in the antenna configuration dialog.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 164 Fig.

www.6 Deleting an Antenna An antenna can be deleted from the network configuration by selecting Delete Antenna from that particular antenna’s context menu.9. Because of this. Yet the user behavior is described in this general configuration chapter due to its general relevance for project setup and optimization independent of the system technology. a UE profile represents a certain type of UE. The amount of traffic that is generated of a given UE profile is specified within the service parameters of that UE profile.com .5. network simulation requires a much more detailed modeling. repeaters. the configuration of the user behavior contains some specific UMTS parameters that are only necessary for network simulation. In order to avoid undesired erasure. not a certain UE instance itself. These properties can be subgrouped concerning the equipment. real UE instances are created that are assigned those frame parameters. 6-65 Sample view of a vertical antenna diagram 6. This traffic distribution is given by a traffic matrix. The user behavior modeling is generally necessary for considering traffic in network optimization and simulation. The service of a user is associated with a certain traffic load that has a determined distribution throughout the simulation area. or additional antennas that used the deleted antenna are removed. a network optimization or simulation could not run. While for optimization only a subset of general user related parameters is used across all system technologies. During a dynamic network simulation. A UE profile defines the frame parameters for a certain category of users. 6. The UE profile summarizes the compound properties of a user’s behavior.actix. All references in those cells. thus. Thus the following explanations in this section refer to some properties of the WiNeS dynamic/snapshot UTRAN simulators that might not be available or necessary in other Radioplan Modules. too. and the service parameters of a user. That is. Without assigning another antenna to those network elements. the mobility.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 165 Fig.6 Configuration of the User Behavior The user behavior configuration is mainly relevant for network simulations only. an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the antenna. the network configuration is incomplete and.

See subsection 6. Templates Equipment Equipment Profile Equipment Profile Equipment Profile Equipment Profile Profile Mobility Mobility Profile Mobility Profile Mobility Profile Mobility Profile Profile Service Service Profile Service Profile Service Profile Service Profile Profile UE Profile Equipment Profile Mobility Profile Service Profile «created from» «created from» «created from» Fig. UEs during a dynamic network simulation are created based on a UE profile.6. 6-66 further explains the relationship between the three template profiles. It has to be assured by the user that the sum of all Service Portions of UE profiles that use the same service is equal to 1. each UE profile is built of pre-defined sets of these three profiles.1 Assembling a UE Profile As mentioned above. In the case where several UE profiles utilize the same service profile.6. i.1 Importing a UE Profile In general.6. Otherwise the offered traffic load during a network simulation is proportionally higher or lower than the configured traffic (see subsection 6. and service profiles.e. then the same entry (called Import Profile… here) is also available at them. To import a UE profile.1. the user behavior is located in a separated branch called User. This is accomplished by a weighting factor called Service Portion that has a value between 0 and 1. select Import UE Profile… from the context menu of the UE Profiles node of the configuration data tree (by right-clicking the node item). A file open dialog appears where the desired UE profile configuration file can be chosen. mobility. 6-66 A UE profile references equipment. By default the available library items are presented. www.actix. Either a pre-defined UE profile can be imported from the library or a new empty UE profile can be added. Then the UE profile is imported and added to the tree together with possibly other UE profiles. mobility profile. it has to be determined to which portion each of these UE profiles is used for the activation of UEs.6. and actually created UE instances during a dynamic network simulation.4).com . This branch contains the UE profiles and the three sub profiles for equipment. mobility. They represent templates that are referenced from a UE profile. If there are already other UE profiles in the user configuration. The latter possibility is explained in the following subsection. a UE profile comprises three different profiles that describe different aspects of the user behavior. there are two possibilities to create a new UE profile.1. Fig. and service parameters. Each of these profiles is located in a separate tree node below the User node. 6. a UE profile.3 for the configuration of the UE profile parameters.6. and service profile.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 166 In the configuration data tree. 6. These profiles are: • • • equipment profile.

the traffic is equally divided over all network layers available in the project. mobility. then the same entry (called Add Profile here) is also available at them. To access this dialog select Settings… from the respective UE profile’s context menu (by right-clicking the UE Profile item) or double-click the UE Profile item in the tree. Table 6-18 UE profile parameters Parameter Description Unit ID The identifier of the UE profile. and service profiles) are list fields where the user can choose between all defined template sub profiles of the respective kind. The parameters of the new UE profile can be modified as described in the following subsection. This is accomplished by choosing Add UE Profile from the context menu of the UE Profiles node of the configuration data tree.actix. The parameters of the UE profile are described in Table 6-18. Note that it does not yet reference any of its sub profiles for equipment. and service behavior of the user must already exist in the database. and service properties. An arbitrary string that describes the UE profile. mobility. If ‘ALL’ is selected.1.6.2 Adding a New UE Profile The second and preferred possibility to create a new UE profile in a project is to add a completely new empty UE profile to the User tree node. — Description — www. If there are already other UE profiles in the user configuration. and the import would fail.3 Inspecting the UE Profile Configuration Data The configuration data of a UE profile can be inspected in the according configuration dialog. 6-67. The configuration dialog of the UE profile is shown in Fig.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 167 On importing a UE profile. alternatively.com . If there are no sub profiles available in at least one of these categories. the three referenced subprofiles for equipment. Fig.6. one has first to create/import the according template sub profiles in order to be able to complete the UE profile definition. This is a string that is unique in the network configuration such that it can be distinguished from other UE profiles. 6-67 UE profile configuration dialog In addition. The new UE profile is immediately added to the user configuration. 6.1. the associated network layer for the UE profile can be chosen. mobility. The three entries for the subordinate profiles (equipment. 6. Otherwise the subprofiles could not be correctly dereferenced.

the following actions can be performed in the table: • Individual parameter values can be changed. It can also be used to scale the traffic given by the traffic matrix of the associated service profile.com . this dialog offers the possibility to quickly change the UE profile configurations. A checkbox to denote this UE profile for a single UE instance in a dynamic network simulation only.1.6. If the setting ‘ALL’ is chosen. the user can choose one of the predefined mobility profiles. In this list field the user can choose one of the predefined equipment profiles. It determines the portion of traffic of the associated service profile that is utilized for the UE activation. The delay counted from the beginning of the simulation when the single UE instance with this UE profile is created. In particular. The network layer that the traffic created by this UE profile is associated with. www. refer to Fig. The service portion (see above) must be greater than 0 in order that the single UE is created.4 UE Profile Settings Overview In order to get a better overview of the settings of all UE profiles together. it is possible to view an overview dialog by choosing Settings Overview… from an arbitrary UE profile’s context menu. 6-68. The settings overview dialog is maximizable such that the whole screen size can be used to view the UE profile settings. — Equipment Profile Mobility Profile Service Profile Network Layer — — — — Single User Mode — Activation Delay s 6. Fig. In this list field the user can choose one of the predefined service profiles. 6-68 UE profile settings overview Besides the practical overview. In this list field.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 168 Parameter Description Unit Service Portion A weighting factor between 0 and 1. the traffic is equally divided across all network layers available in the project.actix.

6. §9. Handover. then the same entry (called Import Profile… here) is also available at them. and service profiles) are deleted.2. In particular. service specific. mobility. By default the available library items are presented.4).3]) is implemented. 6.2 Equipment Profile The equipment profile of a UE summarizes the hardware properties and most of the used RRM algorithms of the terminal. please refer to [R-TecRef]. Some equipment related parameters are.1.5 Duplicating a UE Profile In order to simplify the definition of further UE profiles from a given one. the subprofile definitions can also exist in the user configuration without actually being used in a UE profile.1.2. A copy of the UE profile is created that is immediately added to the configuration data tree. Inner Loop Power Control: Generally. too. The deletion of a UE profile does not mean that the referenced template subprofiles (equipment.6. 6.6 Deleting a UE Profile A UE profile can be deleted from the user configuration by selecting Delete Profile from that particular UE profile’s context menu.6. there is the opportunity to duplicate a UE profile.2. the following RRM algorithms are configured in the equipment profile: • • Measurement Processing: Measurements of different parameters are permanently taken and further processed in order to feed algorithms like e.actix. an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the UE profile. HSDPA: The supported HSDPA category can be set. The parameters of the new UE profile can be modified in its configuration dialog as described in the previous subsections. www.6.6.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 169 • • Filters can be set individually for each column with the help of functions from the context menu. This enables a selective modification of a certain group of UE profiles in conjunction with the copy/fill function (see next bullet).1 Importing an Equipment Profile To import an equipment profile. A file open dialog appears where the desired equipment profile configuration file can be chosen. Outer Loop Power Control: A default outer loop Power Control algorithm according to [Samp97] (also cited in [Holm04. the inner loop Power Control is modeled on a frame basis. In order to avoid undesired erasure.com . If there are already other equipment profiles in the user configuration.6. The controlled target C/I starts at the initial target C/I that is specified in the service profile in terms of the initial target Eb/N0. select Import Equipment Profile… from the context menu of the Equipment Profiles node of the configuration data tree (by right-clicking the node item). the TPC commands are processed on a slot basis. however. However. These parameters are thus not given in the equipment profile but rather in the service profile (see section 6.g. 6. That is. Parameter values can easily be copied in a column (copy/fill function). The adjustment step size and the limits of the outer loop Power Control range can be configured. • • • • For further information on these algorithms. HSUPA: The supported HSUPA category can be set. This option is accessed by selecting Duplicate Profile from the respective original UE profile’s context menu (by right-clicking the UE Profile item). if fast fading is applied. Acknowledged Mode RLC: The response delay of the UE side RLC can be set.

2. Possible values are 1 . An arbitrary string that describes the equipment profile. Output Power Min. Table 6-19 General equipment profile parameters Parameter Description Unit ID The identifier of the equipment profile. comprising effects like body loss. — Description Transceiver — Max. The noise figure of the receiver in the UE. — # UMTS frames Equipment Supports HSDPA HSDPA Category PCPICH SIR – CQI Mapping… A checkbox to enable this equipment to support the HSDPA. A button to open the mapping table between pilot SIR and CQI. 6. 12. 6-69.. To access this dialog select Settings… from the respective equipment profile’s context menu (by right-clicking the Equipment Profile item) or double-click the Equipment Profile item in the configuration data tree.actix. The General tab of the equipment profile configuration dialog is shown in Fig. etc. or to retain it permanently in the library. dBm dBm dB dB Outer Loop Power Control Target SIR Step Size The incremental value of the outer loop power control if an error occurred.6. This is explained in the subsections 6.2 Exporting an Equipment Profile An equipment profile can be exported to an external configuration file by choosing Export Profile… from its context menu. The new equipment profile can now be inspected and modified in the equipment profile configuration dialog..2. §5. The according general equipment profile parameters are described in Table 6-19. The two-side limits of the target SIR for the outer loop power control around the configured initial target SIR (see section 6.3 General Equipment Profile Settings The configuration data of an equipment profile can be inspected in the according configuration dialog.6.3 ff.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 170 Then the equipment profile is imported and added to the tree together with possibly other equipment profiles. The filter length.. dB Target SIR Limits Around Initial Value +/.6.6. An additional attenuation of the Tx/Rx signal at the UE.306.6.1]. The HSDPA category of the equipment according to [25.4). dB Pilot Measurement Filtering Ec/Io Filter Activated Window Size HSDPA A checkbox to enable the filtering of the received pilot Ec/I0. This function can be used to make the equipment profile available for other projects. The minimal output power of the UE. This is a string that is unique in the network configuration such that it can be distinguished from other equipment profiles.2. 6. Output Power Noise Figure Additional Attenuation The maximal output power of the UE. — — — www.4). The according decrement when no error is detected is the incremental value multiplied by the configured target BLER (see section 6. alternatively.com .

A copy of the equipment profile is created that is immediately added to the configuration data tree. Possible values are 1 . 6-69 General tab of the equipment profile configuration dialog To filter the received pilot Ec/I0 values has the effect that the number of cells in the Active Set does not change abruptly due to Active Set Control. It can be set in steps of 1 UMTS frame. there is the opportunity to duplicate an equipment profile. In order to avoid undesired erasure.2.1]. ms Fig. 6. The Ec/I0 values are averaged over the given filter length (window size) if the according pilot Ec/I0 filter option is activated..306. §5. The HSUPA category of the equipment according to [25. i. — — Acknowledged Mode RLC Response Delay The ARQ response delay on the uplink for the Acknowledged Mode RLC. The parameters of the new equipment profile can be modified in its configuration dialog as described in the previous subsections.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 171 Parameter HSUPA Description Unit Equipment Supports HSUPA HSUPA Category A checkbox to enable this equipment to support the HSUPA. www.com .e.2. This option is accessed by selecting Duplicate Profile from the respective original equipment profile’s context menu (by rightclicking the Equipment Profile item).6.actix.4 Duplicating an Equipment Profile In order to simplify the definition of further equipment profiles from a given one.6. 6. 6. 10ms. an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the equipment profile.5 Deleting an Equipment Profile An equipment profile can be deleted from the user configuration by selecting Delete Profile from that particular equipment profile’s context menu.

com . The speed can be chosen from either a uniform or a normal distribution. Optionally. a network optimization or simulation would not run. the service duration). The movement models to choose from are the following ones: • • No Movement: The simplest movement model. it is reflected and moves back into the simulation area again. thus. Due to this mechanism the UE moves preferably through regions with higher traffic volume. As soon as it arrives at the simulation area border. a UE chooses an arbitrary direction in the x-yplane and starts moving with an initial speed. and different speed parameters can be given. it follows a path consisting of segments of given length (parameter Segment Length). • Street Movement: To use this movement model it is required that at least one street is defined in the simulation area. The speed can be chosen from either a uniform or a normal distribution. Then they follow the streets. The end vertices of these segments are chosen in a way that they are located with high probability in a region with high traffic. The UEs are activated on the streets of the chosen category according to the underlying traffic matrix. Straight Movement: Upon activation. a UE chooses a final target in a region with high traffic. Different movement models can be chosen. Optionally.actix. the speed can be updated after each change of direction.6. where at every corner they can choose an arbitrary new direction among the branching possibilities. too. the speed can be updated after each change of direction. On its way to this target. the speed can be updated after each change of direction. The speed can be chosen from either a uniform or a normal distribution. the network configuration is incomplete and. 6. In order to reduce the computational effort of a dynamic network simulation. • Targeted Movement: Upon activation. Without assigning another equipment profile to those UE profiles.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 172 All references in those UE profiles that used the deleted equipment profile are removed. For the www. The UE does not move at all during its lifetime (i.e. the frequency of position updates can be decreased by the parameter Position Update Interval.3 Mobility Profile The mobility profile of a UE characterizes the mobility behavior of a user. Optionally.

Table 6-20 Mobility profile parameters Parameter Description Unit ID The identifier of the mobility profile. For normal simulation areas with dimensions of several kilometers to several tens of kilometers.1 Importing a Mobility Profile To import a mobility profile.3. the movement position of a UE is updated in every frame. — Description Movement — Movement Model This is a list field where the movement model for the UE can be chosen. The time span after which the movement position of a UE is updated by the movement model. This parameter is only used for the Street Movement model.3. Then the mobility profile is imported and added to the tree together with possibly other mobility profiles. 6. a movement step size of 1m … 10m seems to be appropriate. The parameters of the mobility profile are described in Table 6-20. A file open dialog appears where the desired mobility profile configuration file can be chosen. ‘Street Movement’. 6. The configuration dialog of the mobility profile is shown in Fig. 6.6. or to retain it permanently in the library.6. If there are already other mobility profiles in the user configuration. An arbitrary string that describes the mobility profile. The new mobility profile can now be inspected and modified in the mobility profile configuration dialog. By default the available library items are presented. To access this dialog select Settings… from the respective mobility profile’s context menu (by right-clicking the Mobility Profile item) or double-click the Mobility Profile item in the configuration data tree.2 Exporting a Mobility Profile A mobility profile can be exported to an external configuration file by choosing Export Profile… from its context menu.6. A value of 0s means that the UE is moved in every frame. — www. This is a string that is unique in the network configuration such that it can be distinguished from other mobility profiles.com . — Street Category — Position Update Interval Segment Length s m Speed Distribution This is a list field where the speed distribution of the UE can be chosen. select Import Mobility Profile… from the context menu of the Mobility Profiles node of the configuration data tree (by right-clicking the node item). This parameter is only used for the Targeted Movement model. The length of a straight movement segment until the direction is changed.3. ‘Straight Movement’.6. 6-70. Possible values are ‘No Movement’. The street category that a UE moves on. Usual values should range between 10m and 100m. This results in values for the position update interval of Position Update Interval [s] = (1 … 10) / (average speed [m/s]).3. and ‘Targeted Movement’. This function can be used to make the mobility profile available for other projects. Possible values are ‘Uniform’ and ‘Normal’.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 173 default setting of 0s. A value of ‘any’ indicates that the UE can move on any street category. then the same entry (called Import Profile… here) is also available at them. This is explained in subsection 6. alternatively.3.3 Inspecting the Mobility Profile Configuration Data The configuration data of a mobility profile can be inspected in the according configuration dialog.actix.

the UE will choose a new speed according to the given distribution on each change of direction.6. there is the opportunity to duplicate a mobility profile. thus. All references in those UE profiles that used the deleted mobility profile are removed. www. 6-70 Mobility profile configuration dialog 6. the traffic model.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 174 Parameter Description Unit Lowest Speed Highest Speed Mean Variance Enable Speed Variation The minimal speed in case of a uniform speed distribution.5 Deleting a Mobility Profile A mobility profile can be deleted from the user configuration by selecting Delete Profile from that particular mobility profile’s context menu. an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the mobility profile.6. m/s m/s m/s (m/s)2 — Fig. 6.actix. This option is accessed by selecting Duplicate Profile from the respective original mobility profile’s context menu (by right-clicking the Mobility Profile item). It contains information about the service arrival process.4 Duplicating a Mobility Profile In order to simplify the definition of further mobility profiles from a given one. the network configuration is incomplete and. The speed variance in case of a normal speed distribution. A checkbox to enable a variable user speed. Without assigning another mobility profile to those UE profiles. too.4 Service Profile All service specific parameters are summarized in the service profile. 6. If this option is activated.6.3.3. and physical layer parameters. The service arrival process and the traffic model together form a two level model that is described in more detail in [R-TecRef]. In order to avoid undesired erasure.com . a network optimization or simulation would not run. The parameters of the new mobility profile can be modified in its configuration dialog as described in the previous subsection. The maximal speed in case of a uniform speed distribution. A copy of the mobility profile is created that is immediately added to the configuration data tree. The average speed in case of a normal speed distribution.

Streaming Interactive.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 175 6. Atoll PS Conversational Conversational Conversational Conversational. Atoll CS File. Interactive. Background circuit switched circuit switched circuit switched circuit switched circuit switched circuit switched packet switched packet switched Transparent Transparent Transparent Transparent Transparent Transparent Acknowledged Acknowledged www. Atoll CS Streaming (VBR). the different aspects that have an impact on the service profile settings are surveyed. Streaming Conversational Conversational. Service Profile Bearer Service Attributes Radio Bearer Selection UMTS Traffic Class Service Type Radio Bearer Configuration Traffic Matrix Service Arrival Process UE Activation Traffic Model Data Traffic PHY Properties Data Detection. Depending on the Radio Bearer definition used. Power Control Fig.1 Modeling Services A service is determined by its service profile. Streaming (VBR).com . Atoll CS Streaming (CBR). The components of a service profile and their influence on the user/network behavior are depicted in Fig. The service profile combines several models and entities that together realize the service specific behavior of the corresponding UE. Atoll CS Speech / Video. Radioplan allows to model a great variety of services.6. Table 6-21 Recommended service modeling Service Type Traffic Model UMTS Traffic Class Switching Mode RLC Mode Speech Video Telephony Fax Transp. Note that it is possible to choose between several data rates for UL and DL (especially for Streaming. Atoll CS Streaming (CBR). 6-71. 6-71 Assembling a service profile In the following. Modem Audio Streaming Video Streaming File Download Web Browsing Speech / Video. 6-71. Atoll CS Streaming (VBR). Background Interactive. or Background data services). Table 6-21 gives recommendations for valid combinations of typical radio bearers and traffic models for certain service types along with their UMTS traffic classes. These aspects are shown to the left in Fig. Atoll PS WWW.actix.4.

VoIP A non-interactive traffic model for Conversational packet-switched services. The request size is negative exponentially distributed with a configurable mean size plus a constant offset of 320 bits (= 40 bytes). MMS E-Mail Messaging Messaging. This is the waiting time of the web server at the network controller to answer on a request. File Transfer Web Browsing - - Messaging A non-interactive traffic model for messaging services such as SMS. It widely corresponds to the packet service session model described in [30.actix. the codec. Furthermore. The model corresponds to the real time service model described in [30. It delivers an independent data stream in each UL and DL. File.1. but geometrically distributed. A file request message in UL is followed by a single file download in DL.2. For circuit switched data services. Background packet switched packet switched Acknowledged Acknowledged In order to model the data source behavior of different services.com . header compression and QoS criteria can be defined. It enables the high speed mode of the dynamic network simulator. §B. Table 6-22 gives an overview of the available traffic models. The model can be used for both bi-directional or uni-directional services. The amount of data to be transferred is configurable. Table 6-22 Available traffic models Traffic Model Description Speech/Video A non-interactive traffic model for Conversational or Streaming services. An interactive traffic model for a web browsing session.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 176 Service Type Traffic Model UMTS Traffic Class Switching Mode RLC Mode SMS. the length of the silent phase may be reduced to 0. These traffic models can be distinguished according to their different statistical properties in UL and DL. A non-interactive traffic model for typically streaming services with constant datarate and equal packet size. An interactive traffic model for file downloads. If the configured mean datagram size differs from 3840 bits (= 480 bytes) as specified in [30. The mean lengths of both phases as well as the mean service duration are configurable. and their interactivity capability. Atoll PS Background Interactive. This model has been refined in the following aspects: For each packet call within the packet service session.03]. The lengths of both the file request and the file download are configurable.03].03]. It is restricted to either UL or DL transmission. This traffic model is also available in a semi-dynamic version.1.2. §B. Streaming (Constant Bit Rate) www.2. The data streams consist of “packets” (active phase) with intermediate silent phases. The mean lengths of both phases as well as the mean service duration are configurable. Streaming (VBR). the datagram size is not Pareto. a request is sent in uplink. It delivers an independent data stream in each UL and DL. An additional configurable (constant) server response time was introduced. Radioplan provides several traffic models. The data streams consist of active and silent phases.2.

Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 177 Traffic Model Description Streaming (Variable Bit Rate.4 General Service Profile Settings The configuration data of a service profile can be inspected in the according configuration dialog. The model can be used for both bi-directional or uni-directional services.6. If there are already other service profiles in the user configuration. The model can be used for both bi-directional or uni-directional services. then the same entry (called Import Profile… here) is also available at them. This is explained in subsection 6.6. By default the available library items are presented. See [ATL-TR] for details. 6.actix. alternatively. Then the service profile is imported and added to the configuration data tree together with possibly other service profiles. The new service profile can now be inspected and modified in the service profile configuration dialog.4. A simple traffic model for circuit switched services with independent activity factors for UL and DL. See [ATL-TR] for details.4. This function can be used to make the service profile available for other projects.3 Exporting a Service Profile A service profile can be exported to an external configuration file by choosing Export Profile… from its context menu. On/Off) Streaming (Variable Bit Rate. A simple traffic model for packet switched services with independent efficiency factors for UL and DL. The General tab of the service profile configuration dialog is shown in Fig. www. Gauss) Circuit Switched (ATOLL compatible) Packet Switched (ATOLL compatible) A non-interactive traffic model for typically compressed encoded streaming services with variable datarate and equal packet size. Gaussian distributed packet size. 6.4.2 Importing a Service Profile To import a service profile. A non-interactive traffic model for typically compressed encoded streaming services with variable datarate and variable. To access this dialog select Settings… from the respective service profile’s context menu (by right-clicking the Service Profile item) or double-click the Service Profile item in the tree.com .6. A file open dialog appears where the desired service profile configuration file can be chosen. The general parameters of the service profile are described in Table 6-23. select Import Service Profile… from the context menu of the Service Profiles node of the configuration data tree (by right-clicking the node item).4. 6. 6-72.4. This model is suited for snapshot simulations only. or to retain it permanently in the library. This model is suited for snapshot simulations only.6.

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Multi-Layer Project Configuration 178

Fig. 6-72 General tab of the service profile configuration dialog Table 6-23 General service profile parameters

Parameter Traffic Model Type

Description

Unit

Speech / Video Speech / Video (Semi-Dynamic) VoIP (dynamic only) File Transfer Web Browsing Messaging Streaming (Constant Bit Rate) Streaming (VBR/OnOff) Streaming (VBR/Gauss) Circuit Switched Service (ATOLL Compatible) Packet Switched Service (ATOLL Compatible)

The radio button to choose the speech/video traffic model. The radio button to choose the semi-dynamic speech/video traffic model for high speed mode simulations. The radio button to choose the Voice over IP model.
For dynamic simulation only.

— —

— — — — — —

The radio button to choose the file traffic model. The radio button to choose the Web Browsing traffic model. The radio button to choose the messaging traffic model. The radio button to choose the CBR traffic model. The radio button to choose the VBR traffic model with on/off switching. The radio button to choose the VBR traffic model with Gaussian packet lengths. The radio button to choose the ATOLL compatible circuitswitched traffic model.
For snapshot simulation only.

The radio button to choose the ATOLL compatible packetswitched traffic model.
For snapshot simulation only.

www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Multi-Layer Project Configuration 179

Parameter

Description

Unit

Bearer Service Attributes

Switching Mode Traffic Class

A specifier to discriminate between ‘Circuit Switched’ and ’Packet Switched’ services. Depending on the selection of traffic model, the user can specify a UMTS traffic class in this field from the alternatives ‘Conversational’, ‘Streaming’, ‘Interactive’, or ‘Background’. The maximal data rates of this service for uplink or downlink. It must be ensured by the user that the available radio bearers are able to support the specified data rate. The guaranteed data rates of this service for uplink or downlink. It must be ensured by the user that the available radio bearers are able to support the specified data rate. The maximal high speed data rates of this service for uplink and downlink in conjunction with the QoS Profiling feature on HSPA.

— —

Maximum Bitrate UL/DL

bit/s

Guaranteed Bitrate UL/DL

bit/s

Maximum HS Bitrate UL/DL
Prioritization

bit/s

Service Priority

The service priority that determines the order how services are processed by the Congestion Control and the Inter-Frequency Handover Control. This is a value between 1 and 15 where 1 gives the highest priority. The default service priority is 3. The traffic handling priority that determines the order how certain user classes are processed by the Congestion Control and the Inter-Frequency Handover Control. This is a value between 1 and 15 where 1 gives the highest priority. The default priority is 3.

Traffic Handling Priority

Service Arrival Process

Interarrival Time Stretch Factor

The service interarrival process is stretched by this factor. Internally, the service interarrical times are multiplied by this factor.

For the Speech/Video traffic model there is a special semi-dynamic modeling available. Network configurations with semi-dynamic UEs can be investigated by dynamic network simulation in high speed mode without losing much of the accuracy compared to fully dynamic simulations. Read more on the high speed simulation mode in [R-Sim].

6.6.4.5

Physical Layer Parameters

The service specific physical layer parameters can be configured in a separate tab of the service profile configuration dialog. Fig. 6-73 shows the Physical Layer tab of the service profile configuration dialog. The physical layer parameters of the service profile are described in Table 6-24.

www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Multi-Layer Project Configuration 180

Fig. 6-73 Physical Layer tab of the service profile configuration dialog Table 6-24 Service specific physical layer parameters

Parameter Eb/No

Description

Unit

Decoding Limit UL/DL

The Eb/N0 threshold for correct (i.e. error-free) detection of signaling messages in UL and DL for the respective service. This value should be lower than the initial target Eb/N0. The initial target Eb/N0 in UL and DL for the service. This value could be modified by outer loop Power Control.

dB

Initial Target UL/DL

dB

Target Block Error Rate

Target BLER UL/DL

The target BLER for the outer loop Power Control in UL and DL. The value ranges between 0 and 1.

The UL/DL initial target values for the inner loop Power Control are specified in terms of a target Eb/N0. This value can easily be converted into a corresponding target SIR according to the following relationship: SIR [dB] = Eb/N0 [dB] - 10 * log10(3840 / (spreading factor * user data rate [kb/s])). Refer to [R-TecRef] for details on the definition of Eb/N0 and SIR. Especially if outer loop Power Control is applied, the choice of the decoding limits for UL and DL is crucial because they model the Transport Block (TB) detection thresholds of the modem. If a received TB’s Eb/N0 is above the configured decoding limit, then it is correctly received. Otherwise the TB could not be detected. In order to guarantee a reasonable behavior of the modem, the decoding limit offsets should be chosen slightly smaller than 0dB (-0.5dB … -1dB) such that decoding limits in turn are below the respective target Eb/N0 values.

6.6.4.6

Packet Data Settings

Some settings for packet switched services can be configured in a separate tab of the service profile configuration dialog. Fig. 6-74 shows the Packet Data tab of the service

www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Multi-Layer Project Configuration 181

profile configuration dialog. The packet data configuration of the service profile is described in Table 6-25.

Fig. 6-74 Packet Data tab of the service profile configuration dialog Table 6-25 Packet data configuration of the service profile

Parameter TCP

Description

Unit

Enable TCP Model Max. Segment Size Initial Window UL/DL Loss Window UL/DL Restart Window UL/DL Fast Recovery Congestion Window Setting UL/DL

A flag to enable or disable the TCP model. The maximal segment size used by TCP. The initial transmission window for UL and DL. The TCP loss window for UL and DL. The TCP restart window for UL and DL. A number specifying the fast recovery congestion window setting. Possible values are 1 or 2.

— byte Max. Segment Size Max. Segment Size Max. Segment Size —

Acknowledged Mode RLC

Enable Maximum Transmissions

A flag to enable the Acknowledged Mode RLC. The maximal number of transmissions of a single RLC PDU in Acknowledged Mode. If the PDU could not successfully be received, it is lost. Flags for UL and DL to enable polling on the last PDU in the transmission buffer. Flags for UL and DL to enable polling on the last PDU in the retransmission buffer. Flags for UL and DL to enable polling on every Poll_PDU.

— #

Poll on last PDU in Transmission Buffer Poll on last PDU in Retransmission Buffer Poll every Poll_PDU

— — —

www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Multi-Layer Project Configuration 182

Parameter

Description

Unit

Use Window Based Polling Window Size UL/DL Poll_PDU UL/DL Poll_Window UL/DL Timer_Poll_Prohibit Timer_Status_Prohibit

Flags for UL and DL to enable window based polling. The transmission window size of the ARQ algorithm according to [25.322, §9.4]. This value gives the number of PDUs to be transmitted before the next polling is done. The required fill level of the transmission window to initiate polling. See [25.322, §9.5(b)] See [25.322, §9.5(f)]

— — # PDUs % ms ms

The Default button can be used to reset all parameters to reasonable default settings.

6.6.4.7

Traffic Model Configuration

The parameters of the distinct traffic models can be configured in a separate tab of the service profile configuration dialog. Depending on the choice of traffic model, the model parameters may differ. In the sequel, the configuration tabs of the various traffic models are described.
Speech/Video Traffic Model

The speech/video traffic model can be configured in a separate tab of the service profile configuration dialog if it was selected in the Traffic Model tab. Fig. 6-75 shows the Speech / Video tab in the service profile configuration dialog. The parameters of this traffic model are described in Table 6-26.

Fig. 6-75 Speech / Video tab in the service profile configuration dialog

www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Multi-Layer Project Configuration 183

Table 6-26 Speech/video traffic model parameters

Parameter Activity

Description

Unit

Mean Active Time

This is the mean active time of a speech transmission. The resulting voice activity factor is calculated as (Mean Active Time) / ((Mean Active Time) + (Mean Silent Time)). This is the mean silent time of a speech transmission. The resulting voice activity factor is calculated as (Mean Active Time) / ((Mean Active Time) + (Mean Silent Time)). The mean holding time of the service (also called service duration).

s

Mean Silence Time

s

Mean Holding Time
Data Rate

s

Bitrate UL/DL

The data rate of the speech/video service in UL and DL. These values are only given for information here; they are copied from the Bearer Service Attributes section in the General tab.

bit/s

Voice over IP Traffic Model

The Voice over IP traffic model can be configured in a separate tab of the service profile configuration dialog if it was selected in the Traffic Model tab. Fig. 6-76 shows the Voice over IP tab in the service profile configuration dialog. The parameters of this traffic model are described in Table 6-27.

Fig. 6-76 Voice over IP tab in the service profile configuration dialog

www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Multi-Layer Project Configuration 184

Table 6-27 Voice over IP traffic model parameters

Parameter Activity

Description

Unit

Mean Active Time Mean Silence Time Mean Holding Time
Codec

This is the mean active time of a speech transmission. This is the mean silent time of a speech transmission. The mean holding time of the service (also called service duration).

s s s

Codec Configure

Selects the type of speech codec. This button is only enabled if the Codec is set to ‘Manual’. Then the speech codec parameters can be set as described below this table.

— —

QoS

Max. Tolerable Delay

The maximally tolerable packet delay of VoIP packets in order to not get discarded.

ms

Robust Header Compression

Enable RoHC Compressor Decompressor

If this checkbox is activated, robust header compression is enabled during VoIP transmission. The configuration parameters of the header compression. The configuration parameters of the header decompression.

— — —

In case the user has selected ‘Manual’ for the speech codec type, the Configure button is enabled. When pressing it, another dialog is opened that contains the custom VoIP dodec configuration settings. This dialog is shown in Fig. 6-77; Table 6-28 below describes the codec setup.

Fig. 6-77 Custom Voice over IP codec settings dialog Table 6-28 Voice over IP codec configuration

Parameter Payload

Description

Unit

Mean Payload Size Payload Std. Deviation

The mean payload size per VoIP packet. The standard deviation of the VoIP payload size.

bytes bytes

www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 185 Parameter Interarrival Time Description Unit Mean IAT IAT Std. The parameters of this traffic model are described in Table 6-29.actix. The constant server response time that models a waiting time between a file request in uplink and the corresponding download. Fig. Deviation IAT Distribution Access Order The mean interarrival time of voice packets. ms ms — File Transfer Traffic Model The file transfer traffic model can be configured in a separate tab of the service profile configuration dialog if it was selected in the Traffic Model tab. Choice between determinate of random IAT distribution access order. The standard deviation of the interarrival time of voice packets. 6-78 File Transfer tab in the service profile configuration dialog Table 6-29 File transfer traffic model parameters Parameter File Transfer Description Unit Mean File Size UL Mean File Size DL The mean file size in uplink for a file transfer. bits bits Server Response Time s www. This size is usually relatively short (FTP request message).com . Fig. This size is usually much larger than the uplink value (actual file transfer). The mean file size in downlink for a file transfer. 6-78 shows the File Transfer tab in the service profile configuration dialog.

The constant server response time that models a waiting time between a HTTP request in uplink and the corresponding download. # # bits bytes Mean Datagram IAT Mean Reading Time Server Response Time s s s www. The mean size of a datagram. The parameters of this traffic model are described in Table 6-30. 6-79 WWW tab in the service profile configuration dialog Table 6-30 Web Browsing traffic model parameters Parameter Web Browsing Description Unit Mean Packet Call Count Mean Datagram Count Mean DL Datagram Size Mean UL Datagram Body Size The mean number of packet calls per Web Browsing session.com . A packet call corresponds to an answer to an HTTP request. Fig.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 186 Web Browsing Traffic Model The Web Browsing traffic model can be configured in a separate tab of the service profile configuration dialog if it was selected in the Traffic Model tab. The mean reading time between two packet calls. 6-79 shows the WWW tab in the service profile configuration dialog. A datagram corresponds to an IP packet. The actial UL packet request size is calculated as the sum of a negative exponentially distributed part with given mean plus a constant offset of 40 bytes. The mean number of datagrams per packet call. Fig. The mean interarrival time between two consecutive datagrams.actix. The mean size of the variable part of the UL packet request.

s bits www. SF = 256 is used. 6-80 shows the Messaging tab in the service profile configuration dialog.com . Fig. The parameters of this traffic model are described in Table 6-32. The user can choose between ‘Uplink’ and ‘Downlink’.. The parameters of this traffic model are described in Table 6-31.g. The maximal considered SMS length is restricted to 2400 bits at a SF of 32 on the RACH. The size of a single data packet in UL and DL. Fig. Amount of Data The maximal amount of data bits to carry an SMS.actix.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 187 Messaging Traffic Model The Messaging traffic model can be configured in a separate tab of the service profile configuration dialog if it was selected in the Traffic Model tab. e. the maximal length is only 300 bits. bits Direction — Streaming (Constant Bit Rate) Traffic Model The streaming (CBR) traffic model can be configured in a separate tab of the service profile configuration dialog if it was selected in the Traffic Model tab. Table 6-32 CBR streaming traffic model parameters Parameter Data Quantity Description Unit Mean Holding Time Packet Size UL/DL The mean holding time of the service (also called service duration). If. Fig. The direction of data transfer for this unidirectional traffic model. 6-80 Messaging tab in the service profile configuration dialog Table 6-31 Messaging traffic model parameters Parameter Description Unit Messaging (SMS/MMS) Max. 6-81 shows the Streaming tab for CBR services in the service profile configuration dialog.

The parameters of this traffic model are described in Table 6-33.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 188 Parameter Data Rates [bits/s] Description Unit Data Rate UL/DL The constant data rate in UL and DL. On/Off) Traffic Model The VBR streaming (On/Off) traffic model can be configured in a separate tab of the service profile configuration dialog if it was selected in the Traffic Model tab. bit/s Fig.com . Fig.actix. Fig. 6-82 shows the Streaming tab for VBR (On/Off) services in the service profile configuration dialog. 6-82 Streaming tab for VBR (On/Off) services in the service profile configuration dialog www. 6-81 Streaming tab for CBR services in the service profile configuration dialog Streaming (Variable Bit Rate.

The size of a single data packet in UL and DL. 6-83 Streaming tab for VBR (Gauss) services in the service profile configuration dialog Table 6-34 VBR streaming (Gaussian packet size) traffic model parameters Parameter Data Quantity Description Unit Mean Holding Time The mean holding time of the service (also called service duration). 6-83 shows the Streaming tab for VBR (Gaussian packet size) services in the service profile configuration dialog. The distribution of the on/off durations of the data streams in UL and DL.actix. s bits Peak Data Rate UL/DL Average Data Rate UL/DL Distribution of On/Off Durations The peak data rate of the packet stream in UL and DL.com . Gauss) Traffic Model The VBR streaming (Gauss) traffic model can be configured in a separate tab of the service profile configuration dialog if it was selected in the Traffic Model tab. Possible values are ‘Exponential’ and ‘Pareto’.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 189 Table 6-33 VBR streaming (On/Off) traffic model parameters Parameter Data Quantity Description Unit Mean Holding Time Packet Size UL/DL Data Rates [bits/s] The mean holding time of the service (also called service duration). bit/s bit/s — Streaming (Variable Bit Rate. Fig. Fig. The parameters of this traffic model are described in Table 6-34. s www. The average data rate of the packet stream in UL and DL.

The parameters of these traffic models are described in Table 6-35. The autocorrelation constant characterizing the correlation of the packet size between consecutive data packets for UL and DL. The mean call duration. 6-84 Atoll Service tab in the service profile configuration dialog Table 6-35 ATOLL compatible traffic model parameters Parameter Circuit Switched Description Unit Mean Number of Calls / Hour Mean Call Duration The mean number of calls per hour.actix. 6-84 shows the Atoll Service tab in the service profile configuration dialog.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 190 Parameter Data Rates Description Unit Average Data Rate UL/DL Data Rate Std. Deviation UL/DL Autocorrelation Constant UL/DL Flow Control The average data rate in UL and DL. s ATOLL Compatible Traffic Models The ATOLL compatible traffic models can be configured in a separate tab of the service profile configuration dialog if they were selected in the Traffic Model tab. Please refer to [ATL-TR] for a detailed description of these traffic models. either the upper left hand side (circuit switched traffic model) or the right hand side (packet switched traffic model) is enabled. Fig. Fig. # s www.com . The standard deviation of the data packet size in UL and DL. bit/s bits s Buffer Dimension The reception buffer dimension in terms of storage time. Depending on the type of model.

www.4. This is a value between 0 and 1.com .actix.8 Duplicating a Service Profile In order to simplify the definition of further service profiles from a given one. This option is accessed by selecting Duplicate Profile from the respective original service profile’s context menu (by right-clicking the Service Profile item). The mean transmitted data volume of a session in downlink. The mean reading time of a session. if there was a traffic matrix and/or a revenue matrix assigned to that service profile. too. In order to avoid undesired erasure. This is a value between 0 and 1. This value is only used for determining the probability of CTS to the FACH. — — Mean Number of Sessions / Hour Mean Reading Time UL Efficiency Factor DL Efficiency Factor UL Volume / Session DL Volume / Session The mean number of sessions per hour. thus. Furthermore. All references in those UE profiles that used the deleted service profile are removed.4. Without assigning another service profile to those UE profiles. an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the service profile. The parameters of the new service profile can be modified in its configuration dialog as described in the previous subsections. The efficiency factor of the packet transmission in the uplink. This is a value between 0 and 1. the network configuration is incomplete and. # s — — KByte Kbyte 6. The average power ratio between DPCCH and DPCH in UL and DL. a network optimization or simulation would not run. The mean transmitted data volume of a session in uplink.6.6. This is a value between 0 and 1. — — Optimization Performance Prediction Coding Factor UL/DL DPCCH/DPCH Power Ratio Packet Switched The coding factor in UL and DL. they are also deleted from the project. there is the opportunity to duplicate a service profile. The efficiency factor of the packet transmission in the downlink.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 191 Parameter Description Unit UL Voice Activity Factor DL Voice Activity Factor The uplink voice activity factor.9 Deleting a Service Profile A service profile can be deleted from the user configuration by selecting Delete Profile from that particular service profile’s context menu. A copy of the service profile is created that is immediately added to the configuration data tree. The downlink voice activity factor. 6.

A traffic matrix is location based data of traffic density values.5 Creating Generic User Profiles It is also possible to create a set of generic user profiles with one action. So the network can be optimized for carrying a defined network load. www. This is accomplished by right-clicking on the User folder in the Configuration tab and selecting Add Generic User Profiles (see Fig. Zero traffic masking: Areas with no traffic can be excluded from network optimization in order to focus on traffic relevant areas. movement.6 Traffic Matrix Each service profile is associated with a traffic matrix.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 192 6. UE activation: New UEs are activated during a network simulation according to the spatial distribution of the relative traffic values in the traffic matrices. A traffic matrix is located subordinate to the respective service profile in the configuration data tree. for traffic matrix generation. Together with it. generic profiles for equipment.6. see section 12.6. Interarrival time of the service arrival process: The mean interarrival time of UE activations for a certain service is calculated from the given mean holding time of the service and the total traffic density (given through the traffic matrix). a new generic UE profile is created below the UE Profiles node. 6. UEs are created with higher probability at positions with higher traffic values. This generic set of profiles can be used. The relative traffic values in the traffic matrices are used for this directly. 6-85). a traffic matrix can be used to create load distributed throughout the network. and service are generated and referenced by the new UE profile. The traffic values in the traffic matrices are used for several purposes: • • • • • Traffic and load distribution: For network optimization. That is. Fig.10. for example.actix. Targeted movement: Users in a dynamic network simulation move preferably along paths with higher traffic.com . 6-85 Add Generic User Profiles After selecting this option. The traffic density is given in Erlang/km2.

A file open dialog is shown that lets the user choose a traffic configuration file. For each service profile.. 6. it is possible to temporarily have more than one traffic matrix at a certain service profile. each service profile immediately needs a traffic matrix because otherwise no UE at all would be created during a network simulation.actix. Each pixel contains a single integer value representing a relative traffic density value in Erlang/km2. 6-86.5 for supported file formats). or a georeferenced raster file (see appendix 13. select Import Traffic Matrix… from the superior service profile’s context menu. these services have different (and even varying) data rates and different service activity statistics. In order to allow for duplicate&move actions with traffic matrices in the configuration data tree between several service profiles. 6-86 Traffic matrix format Since a traffic matrix is always associated with a single service profile. Storage Format West East = West + PixelWidth * (m – 1) PixelHeight RnCm n = Rows (Number of Rows) m = Cols (Number of Columns) PixelWidth South = North . www. This is done by selecting Import Traffic Matrix from Raster Image… from the superior service profile’s context menu.. on average. if this service profile is referenced in UE profile(s). it is justified to represent the traffic of one service in terms of Erlangs. Vice versa. the attribution of color values to traffic values is realized via the TIFF file’s color palette. . North R1C1 R2C1 . Alternatively.2 Traffic Matrix Format The traffic matrix format as used in Radioplan is shown in Fig. in general.. Please also refer to the notion of “equivalent traffic” as used for optimization in [R-ACP].6. an arbitrary georeferenced raster data file can be imported as traffic matrix. The alignment of a traffic matrix is oriented at the upper left corner of the matrix. the Northwestern corner. In case of a TIFF file. One can import • • either a predefined traffic matrix from the library or another project. To import a matrix from the library or a stored project.. R1C2 R2C2 R1C3 R2C3 . only a single traffic matrix is supported.6.6. The matrix is a rectangular grid consisting of pixels that lies in the horizontal x-y-plane. The indices in the color palette are directly interpreted as traffic values.e. i. one UE uses the corresponding service at the same time. As soon as the matrix is imported it is shown in the configuration data tree one level below the corresponding service profile. The covered area of a traffic matrix is determined by the pixel dimensions (PixelWidth and PixelHeight) in conjunction with the number of rows and columns.com .PixelHeight * (n – 1) Fig..1 Importing a Traffic Matrix There are two possibilities to import a traffic matrix. However. The width and height of a pixel are independently adjustable by the values of PixelWidth and PixelHeight.6.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 193 6.. the traffic of different services cannot be compared because. A mean traffic of 1 Erlang means that.

Then a file save dialog is opened where a file name and the format to be stored can be selected. The newly created traffic layer is shown then in the viewing area. the color palette. www. dimension. The y-coordinate of the Northwestern corner of the traffic matrix. 6-88 shows a sample traffic matrix where the traffic is concentrated on the streets.6.6. 6-87 Traffic matrix configuration dialog Table 6-36 Traffic matrix parameters Parameter Matrix Settings Description Unit West North Pixel Width Pixel Height Cols Rows The x-coordinate of the Northwestern corner of the traffic matrix. If the checkbox Restrict to Simulation Area is active. 6. This value cannot be changed since it is determined by the matrix size. Fig.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 194 6.3 Exporting a Traffic Matrix A traffic matrix can be exported as a georeferenced raster data file by using the Export Traffic Matrix to Raster Image… entry from the context menu of the traffic matrix item in the Configuration tab of the tree window. For each service.6.4 Inspecting the Settings of a Traffic Matrix The configuration parameters of a traffic matrix are its positioning. The number of columns in the traffic matrix.com . See section 3. 6-87. The number of rows in the traffic matrix. This value cannot be changed since it is determined by the matrix size. This coordinate has a South-North alignment. The expansion of a traffic matrix pixel in South-North direction. The expansion of a traffic matrix pixel in West-East direction. It is shown in Fig. These parameters are summarized in the traffic matrix configuration dialog. Use the layer settings dialog to adjust the scaling.6.5 Viewing a Traffic Matrix A surface plot layer can be created from a traffic matrix by selecting Show this Matrix from the context menu of the traffic matrix (by right-clicking on the matrix item). and the alpha blending factor appropriately.5. The corresponding parameters are explained in Table 6-36. m m m m # # 6. the matrix will be properly clipped to the bounding rectangle of the simulation area.4 how to adjust these settings in the layer settings dialog. and grid size. This dialog can be accessed by selecting Settings… from the traffic matrix’s context menu or by double-clicking its item in the configuration data tree. Fig. a separate layer is created.6.6.actix. This coordinate has a West-East alignment.

6 Defining a New Traffic Matrix If no traffic data are available for the simulation area.6.6.6. i. they can also be created in Radioplan.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 195 Fig. In order to modify the initially empty matrix. It is still empty in the beginning. polygons) in the new traffic matrix with a certain relative/absolute traffic value with the mouse. 6-89). If there are already other traffic matrices then the same entry is also available from their context menus. the matrix covers the encompassing rectangle.com . For this purpose.e. It is rectangular and spans the total simulation area. Fig.4. In case of an arbitrary polygonal simulation area. The configured pixel resolution is used for both the pixel width and height.actix.e. Radioplan offers the possibility to simply draw regions (i. To do so. 6-88 A traffic matrix which basically concentrates the traffic to the streets (in yellow) 6. The new matrix is immediately added to the configuration data tree below the corresponding service profile. it is filled with zeros only. The icon (tooltip: Edit Matrix) in the paint toolbar to the left is immediately activated to notify the matrix editing mode state. The resulting matrix settings can be inspected in the matrix configuration dialog as described in subsection 6. www. The user can then choose a pixel resolution in the grid settings dialog (see Fig. 6-89 The matrix resolution settings dialog is shown prior to creating a matrix to determine the pixel size. one has to enter the matrix editing mode by selecting Edit this Matrix from the context menu of the traffic matrix item. add a new empty traffic matrix to a service profile by choosing Add new Matrix from that service profile’s context menu.6.

6. the grid size can be modified by clicking the icon from the paint toolbar. see Fig. The grid size can be adjusted appropriately in the display settings dialog.2 how to adjust the grid size in the display settings dialog.7 Creating a Traffic Matrix from a Surface Plot Layer Any existing surface plot layer can be used to create a traffic matrix from it under consideration of freely definable clutter weights. Note that this drawing grid size is independent of the matrix pixel resolution and only influences the drawing actions. Thus traffic regions can be drawn very quickly. Then a dialog is shown that asks the user to specify the traffic density that is assigned to the region just drawn. Also the distance measure mode is available.and y-direction) can be specified. (by clicking on The matrix editing mode can be left by disabling the matrix editing icon it). The associated service profile of the displayed traffic matrix is currently selected. Fig. The drawing action can be canceled at any time by pressing the <ESC> key before the last vertex has been set. 6-91 Traffic dialog After having edited the appropriate (relative) traffic density. The last vertex of a polygon is marked by double-clicking the left mouse button. 6-91. See section 3. and the mouse pointer turns into a cross-hair. mode or by clicking the 6. A dialog appears where the new grid size (equally for x. So if the background image is a map.5. 6-90 Grid size settings dialog It is recommended to display a background image before starting to draw traffic regions.4.5 explains how to create a new surface plot layer from a graphics file to be used as a background image.actix. the matrix editing mode can also be left by selecting any other drawing icon from the paint toolbar. 6-90. www. As soon as the matrix editing mode is activated.com .6. the chosen traffic matrix is shown in the viewing area together with a drawing grid.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 196 The matrix editing mode can be temporarily left to use the zoom and pan functions to navigate to the area where the matrix shall be modified. In this case. In order to switch then back to the actual matrix editing mode. the new traffic region is shown in the surface plot. the very recent modification would by applied to the traffic matrix of that service profile instead. simply click the icon again. Alternatively. The traffic dialog is depicted in Fig. it is easy to surround geographical regions in the map while drawing with the mouse. The user could choose another service profile from the list field. section 3. The traffic regions are drawn by setting one vertex after the other by left-clicking with the mouse. Fig. Alternatively.

All available layers are given in the topmost list field where the desired one can be selected.6. the layer with the assumed traffic values must be created before. the sets of pixels that each are associated with a certain cell) are determined according to the best server criterion. Each clutter class is assigned a weighting factor that is set to 1 initially. 6-92 Create Traffic Matrix from Layer dialog In this dialog. the user can determine the underlying layer that the traffic matrix shall be created from. If the weighting factor of a certain clutter class is not defined in the table then a factor of 1 is assumed for that class as it exists in the clutter matrix.e. the general scaling factor which is given in the middle of the dialog might be adjusted. i denotes the set of all pixels that belong to the cell that contains the pixel i . mi is the value from the original layer at pixel i . This can be accomplished by adjusting the scaling factor in the traffic matrix configuration dialog accordingly. a table with the clutter classes is shown. This can be accomplished using the various layer manipulation functions of Radioplan as detailed in section 12.i w(ci ) ⋅ mi ∑ w(ck ) ⋅ mk where f is the general scaling factor. Fig.4. For an automatic generation of a traffic matrix based on cell counters. they are all assumed to be 1 in order to obtain a useful result.i ∑m k ⋅ k∈Cell . in order to be used for the traffic matrix generation.6. www.10. 6-92. if necessary. In the lower part of the dialog. The result is a new traffic matrix that is added below the selected service profile in the configuration data tree. however.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 197 In order to use the function. the according traffic value t i is calculated as ti = f ⋅ k∈Cell . In the unlikely case that all weighting factors are 0. By using the Create Traffic Matrix from Raster Layer… entry from the context menu of that service profile item in the Configuration tab of the tree window the traffic matrix generation dialog is opened which is shown in Fig. Then the service profile must be determined where the new traffic matrix shall be added. Be aware that this is a relative traffic matrix. These weighting factors can be modified in the table.com . The traffic matrix is then determined as follows: For each pixel i of the resulting traffic matrix.actix.5. Lastly. refer to subsection 6. The cell areas (i. and w(ci ) is the the weighting factor of the clutter class at pixel i . Cell . see on Traffic Matrix Generation in section 12. It is up to the user to scale the traffic values of the matrix properly to end up with a reasonable traffic load.

the embedded clipboard must be Embedded Clipboard (Table). This is done by selecting the column with the traffic values in the embedded clipboard and then hitting the right mouse button somewhere in the selected column.actix. Then the traffic opened first by using the menu entry Edit table can be copied into the embedded clipboard with a normal copy&paste action. An example is given in the figure below. Fig. The next step is to create a surface plot layer with the weighted traffic values per cell. In order to import this table into Radioplan. Basically. Choose Graph Selection Mapped Surface Plot from the appearing context menu as shown below.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 198 An alternative way to create a traffic matrix from cell-based data is described below. www. a new surface plot layer is created representing the weighted traffic plot per cell. 6-94 Create Surface Plot from Table dialog After confirming these settings. How to generate a Radioplan traffic matrix from cell-specific traffic values? Assume there are cell-specific traffic values given for a particular service. this kind of traffic description is a mapping of traffic values to cell IDs which can be represented in a table.com . 6-93 Using the Graph Selection menu on the cell-based data in the Embedded Clipboard A dialog is shown where the correct column with the cell IDs must be selected in the Cell Name field. Moreover. Fig. the flag Weight Values by Covered Cell Area must be selected in order to weight the cell-specific traffic values with the according cell areas.

actix. the second phase of the procedure can be tackled.com . In this example we take a service profile ‘Generic Service’ for simplicity.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 199 Fig. 6-96 Create Traffic Matrix from Raster Layer dialog After confirming the settings in the traffic matrix generation dialog. choose the Show this Matrix entry from the matrix’s context menu. Fig. Here the weighted traffic plot that was just created should be selected. the new traffic matrix is created. Furthermore. First a service profile from the configuration data tree must be determined where the new traffic matrix shall be added. the traffic matrix generation dialog is opened. the clutter weights can be adjusted in the lower table if such values are available. In order to view the new traffic matrix. 6-95 Example mapped surface plot resulting from Embedded Clipboard data After having created the original layer for the generation of the new traffic matrix. Its item is immediately added in the configuration data tree below the selected service profile. www. By choosing the function Create Traffic Matrix from Raster Layer… from this service profile’s context menu.

there is the possibility to simply copy a matrix that has been imported once (or created from the scratch).6. Then drag the matrix item to the destination service profile and drop it there by releasing the mouse button when the destination service profile’s item appears selected. Fig. If the <Ctrl> key is held down during the drag&drop action.8 Duplicating and Dragging a Traffic Matrix Since traffic matrices for different services usually cover the same area with likely similar traffic loads. the traffic matrix is automatically duplicated.6.actix. 6. it is possible to drag the matrix with the mouse to the destination service profile with a simple drag&drop action.9 Deleting a Traffic Matrix A traffic matrix can be deleted from its superordinate service profile by selecting Delete Matrix from the matrix’s context menu. This functionality is provided by the entry Duplicate Matrix from the traffic matrix’s context menu (by right-clicking the matrix item). In order to have the new traffic matrix available for another service profile. The newly created traffic matrix is added at the same service profile as the original one.6.6.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 200 Fig. To accomplish this.com . In order to avoid undesired erasure. 6-97 Show this Matrix function in the Traffic Matrix context menu The resulting traffic matrix in the example is shown below. www. an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the traffic matrix. left-click on the traffic matrix icon to be moved and hold the mouse button pressed down. 6-98 Example traffic matrix resulting further from the creation with clutter weighting 6. The configuration tree view is immediately updated such that the moved/copied traffic matrix is now shown at the destination service profile.

R1C2 R2C2 R1C3 R2C3 . www. Each pixel contains a single integer value representing a relative revenue density value in [currency]/km2.6. North R1C1 R2C1 . The covered area of a revenue matrix is determined by the pixel dimensions (PixelWidth and PixelHeight) in conjunction with the number of rows and columns..Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 201 6. 6-99. A revenue matrix is location based data of revenue density values generated in the network. The width and height of a pixel are independently adjustable by the values of PixelWidth and PixelHeight.1 Importing a Revenue Matrix A revenue matrix can be imported in Radioplan format..g.actix. 6-100..6.7. For each service profile. 6-99 Revenue matrix format 6. As soon as the matrix is imported it is shown with the icon in the configuration data tree one level below the corresponding service profile.2 Revenue Matrix Format The revenue matrix format as used in Radioplan is shown in Fig. The matrix is a rectangular grid consisting of pixels that lies in the horizontal x-y-plane. The alignment of a revenue matrix is oriented at the upper left corner of the matrix. dimension. The revenue density is given in [currency]/km2. A revenue matrix is located subordinate to the respective service profile in the configuration data tree. coming from another project..7. . select Import Revenue Matrix… from the superior service profile’s context menu. The corresponding parameters are explained in Table 6-37. i. A file open dialog is shown that lets the user choose a revenue configuration file.6.PixelHeight * (n – 1) Fig. This dialog can be accessed by selecting Settings… from the revenue matrix’s context menu or by double-clicking its item in the configuration data tree. it is possible to temporarily have more than one revenue matrix at a certain service profile..6.7.7 Revenue Matrix Each service profile can be associated with a revenue matrix.3 Inspecting the Settings of a Revenue Matrix The configuration parameters of a revenue matrix are its positioning. only a single revenue matrix is supported. and grid size.e. 6. 6.. The revenue values in the revenue matrices can be used for Capital Planning and ROI oriented network optimization. To import a matrix. In order to allow for duplicate&move actions with revenue matrices in the configuration data tree between several service profiles. These parameters are summarized in the revenue matrix configuration dialog. It is shown in Fig. the Northwestern corner. Storage Format West East = West + PixelWidth * (m – 1) PixelHeight RnCm n = Rows (Number of Rows) m = Cols (Number of Columns) PixelWidth South = North . e.com .

Consequently. This value cannot be changed since it is determined by the matrix size. the color palette. After confirming the settings by pressing the OK button. It is immediately attached to the same service profile in the configuration data tree as also the original traffic matrix belongs to. there is the possibility to simply copy a matrix that has been imported or created once. choose the Generate Revenue Matrix… entry from the context menu of the respective traffic matrix. This value cannot be changed since it is determined by the matrix size. a separate layer is created.6 Duplicating and Dragging a Revenue Matrix Since revenue matrices for different service profiles usually cover the same area for a certain network cluster.5 Creating a Revenue Matrix from a Traffic Matrix Typically.4 Viewing a Revenue Matrix A surface plot layer can be created from a revenue matrix by selecting Show this Matrix from the context menu of the revenue matrix (by right-clicking on the matrix item). 6. 6.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 202 Fig. For each service. The number of columns in the revenue matrix.6. This coordinate has a South-North alignment.4 how to adjust these settings in the layer settings dialog. The expansion of a revenue matrix pixel in West-East direction.7.com . and the alpha blending factor appropriately. The newly created revenue layer is shown then in the viewing area.6.7. there is a function to derive a revenue matrix from a traffic matrix. the new revenue matrix will be created. Then the user is prompted with a configuration dialog where the revenue matrix generation function can be configured. The expansion of a revenue matrix pixel in South-North direction. 6-100 Revenue matrix configuration dialog Table 6-37 Revenue matrix parameters Parameter Matrix Settings Description Unit West North Pixel Width Pixel Height Cols Rows The x-coordinate of the Northwestern corner of the revenue matrix.6. the revenue generated from a network is related to the geographic traffic pattern. To invoke this function. m m m m # # 6. This coordinate has a West-East alignment. This functionality is provided by the entry Duplicate Matrix from www.7. Use the layer settings dialog to adjust the scaling.5. See section 3. The number of rows in the revenue matrix. The y-coordinate of the Northwestern corner of the revenue matrix.actix.

7 Deleting a Revenue Matrix A revenue matrix can be deleted from its superordinate service profile by selecting Delete Matrix from the matrix’s context menu. it is possible to drag the matrix with the mouse to the destination service profile with a simple drag&drop action. In order to have the new revenue matrix available for another service profile. The newly created revenue matrix is added at the same service profile as the original one.6. an alert dialog appears that asks the user to confirm the deletion of the revenue matrix.7. If the <Ctrl> key is held down during the drag&drop action.com . To accomplish this. the revenue matrix is automatically duplicated. Then drag the matrix item to the destination service profile and drop it there by releasing the mouse button when the destination service profile’s item appears selected. www.actix. The configuration tree view is immediately updated such that the moved/copied revenue matrix is now shown at the destination service profile. In order to avoid undesired erasure. left-click on the revenue matrix icon to be moved and hold the mouse button pressed down. 6.Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 203 the revenue matrix’s context menu (by right-clicking the matrix item).

Actix Radioplan User Guide Multi-Layer Project Configuration 204 www.actix.com .

measurement analysis. Power Balancing is only applied during Soft/Softer Handover. a DL Congestion Control algorithm is applied that is based upon the maximal DL Tx power that cannot be exceeded. the following Layer 2/3 algorithms are located here: • • • Radio Bearer Translation: The Radio Bearer Translation associates services with certain pre-defined UMTS Radio Bearer and Radio Access Bearer parameters. Handover Request Processing: Arriving handover requests from UEs are processed and. §8. Power Balancing (parameterization): The complete Power Balancing algorithm according to [25. §8. In case a request is admitted by the RNC. the CM is initiated for the requesting UE. Compressed Mode Control: Depending on a certain CPICH Ec/I0 threshold. DL and UL use the same algorithm with the same parameter settings. Projects with UMTS network layers can be used for a variety of network planning and optimization activities such as capacity/coverage optimization. Only the Power Adjustment Type ‘Common’ is implemented. As soon as the data stream contains sufficiently much data.6]. Possible handover types are Hard Handover.7. however. the connection is switched back to DCH again. 7. It comprises most of the Radio Resource Management algorithms that are relevant for dynamic/snapshot network simulation. and (hard) Inter-System Handover to GSM. Note that RLF Detection is applicable to DCH transmission only. it can fall back to one of the cell’s FACHs. The latter handover type is only monitored as outgoing because the GSM network is not modeled in Radioplan for UTRA/FDD. an UL Congestion Control algorithm realizes a fast (frame-based) UL Congestion Control that ignores Power Control commands for the UL that would result in an exceeded local UL network load. Congestion Control: By default. Radio Link Failure (RLF) Detection: Radio link monitoring is implemented according to [25.433. if admitted. Addtionally. (hard) Inter-Frequency Handover. §4. The latter parameters are provided by a Radio Bearer Definition file.3] which applies the radio link failure criteria specified in [25.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 205 7 UTRAN Configuration This chapter describes the configuration of UMTS specific project items in Radioplan.1 RNC Configuration The UMTS specific network controller is called RNC.3. It is assumed that the RNC initially informs all Node Bs by a single DL POWER CONTROL REQUEST message about the Power Balancing parameters. Soft/Softer Handover. The parameterization is cell specific. site selection. the UE sends a measurement report to the RNC requesting for Compressed Mode (CM).214. In particular.5. FACH and HSDPA Shared MAC (parameterization): Several scheduling methods for the shared MAC on each cell’s FACH and HSDPA can be configured. • • • • • • www.actix. meaning that all Node Bs have identical Power Balancing parameters. performed at the RNC. and dynamic or snapshot network simulation.com . pathloss tuning. Radio Bearer Control: In inactive periods of a DCH connection.2] is implemented.331.3. Admission Control: The Admission Control decides whether an access attempt can be served by the network based on the current local network load in UL and/or DL.

7-1 shows the configuration dialog of the RNC with the General parameters tab. Fig.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 206 Additionally. The general parameters of the RNC are described in Table 7-1. network optimization does not require any RNC configuration. Fig. 7-1 General tab of the RNC configuration dialog www. For further information on these algorithms. To access this dialog select Settings… from the RNC’s context menu or double-click the RNC item in the tree. 7.com .and downgrading adaptation of spreading factor and target C/I during Compressed Mode All UMTS parameters of the RNC are only needed for network simulation.2.actix. slot-based inner-loop) fast data rate up. please refer to [R-TecRef]. Their parameters are however mainly connection specific. These procedures are: • • • • • • C/I calculation maximum-ratio/selection combining in Soft/Softer Handover in the modem (in conjunction with Node Bs) detection of Transport Blocks in the modem (in conjunction with Node Bs) Power Control (open-loop. several Layer 1 procedures are located at the RNC side. On the contrary.1 General RNC Settings Once the RNC has been created.1. its data can be inspected in the according configuration dialog. alternatively. in particular dynamic simulation.5. The general RNC parameters can be found in section 6. outer-loop.

Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 207 Table 7-1 General RNC parameters (for simulation only) Parameter Description Unit ID Description The identifier of the RNC. Power Balancing. the user can select the RRM algorithms from a certain vendor. some more parameters for those algorithms can appear in the distinct network element configuration dialogs.5 dB ). ms Depending on the chosen vendor specific RRM algorithms. Fig. Choosing Use Factory Default Files applies the built-in settings. This choice influences the entire network configuration.1 . — Configure Cell Parameter Templates… Radio Bearer Definitions — — Neighbor List Support Use Configured Neighbor Lists Measurement If this checkbox is activated. the Power Balancing and Radio Link Failure Detection algorithms are described in Table 7-2. Table 7-2 Power Control parameters (for simulation only) Parameter Description Unit Radioplan Outer Loop Power Control Step Size The target SIR adjustment step size (typically 0. — — Vendor Specific RRM Algorithms Vendor In this list field. The network wide parameters of the Radioplan Outer Loop Power Control.2 Power Control Related Configuration The Power Control. the neighbor lists configured at each cell are considered in network simulations. whereas selecting From Custom Folder and giving a directory in the input field offers the opportunity to enforce a customized Radio Bearer Definition. This is a string that is unique in the network configuration. Specifies the source of the Radio Bearer Definitions used in the simulator. The higher the step size the faster the algorithm converges. this User Guide contains only the standard parameters of the implemented default RRM algorithms. An arbitrary string that describes the RNC.actix. 7-2 shows shows the Power Control tab of the RNC configuration dialog. — Measurement Cycle Duration The interval for measurement reports being sent to the network. The same pre-defined settings are used when the RNC is created with the context menu entry Add Network Controller at the Network Elements node in the configuration data tree. please refer to the additional manual(s) for the usage of those algorithms. 7.0. In case you purchased Radioplan with certain vendor specific RRM algorithms.1. and Radio Link Failure Detection parameters of the RNC can be configured in a separate tab of the RNC settings dialog. It defines the convergence speed of the algorithm.com . s Acknowledged Mode RLC Response Delay The ARQ response delay on the downlink for the Acknowledged Mode RLC. Pressing this button opens a dialog where the user can choose a file with templates for cell parameters sets. However. dB www. Each tab of the RNC configuration dialog has a Default button to reset all its parameters to reasonable default settings.

56A]. §9. given relative to the PCPICH Tx power of the respective cell. §9.433.1. This parameter is defined as N313 in [25.1. Adjustment Step). — Adjustment Period Max. §6.3.3.4. A small value (close to 0) results in faster convergence.3.2.433. 6.C]. This parameter is defined as N315 in [25. §10.433. The DL Power IE as specified in [25.331.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 208 Parameter Description Unit Limit The two-side limit of the target SIR around the initial target SIR. In Sync Count Max.433. Fig.43] and as N_INSYNC_IND in [25. §9. Out of Sync Count Max. The Qin measure as defined in [25. Fig. This is an offset to the DPCCH SIR target indicating good quality.2.47B].331.1.2.21]. §9.3.2. Maximal value of the RLF timer. Maximal number of in-sync indications.1]. — dB dB # UMTS frames # # # UMTS frames www.43] and as T_RLFAILURE in [25.1. §6.2. It is defined as the number of slots where the accumulated power adjustment due to Power Balancing does not exceed 1dB.4. a large value (close to 1) results in slower convergence.43] and as N_OUTSYNC_IND in [25.1.1. This parameter is defined as T313 in [25.101.433.2.47A].B].3. The Qout measure as defined in [25. This is an offset to the DPCCH SIR target indicating bad quality. §10. During each window period.2.3.2. It can be transformed into a maximal adjustment step size per frame as MaxAdjStepSize[dB] = 15dB / (Max. exactly one synchronization status is indicated. During this period the Power Balancing algorithm applies a constant power offset per frame.433. The window size for observing the quality to indicate the synchronization status.2.433.331. §9. §9. 6.actix. The Adjustment Period IE as specified in [25. It mainly determines the convergence rate of the Power Balancing algorithm between different cells.com . — dB The Adjustment Ratio IE as specified in [25. Adjustment Step # UMTS frames # UMTS slots Radio Link Failure Detection Activate RLF Detection DPCCH SIR offset for bad quality DPCCH SIR offset for good quality Quality Window Size Max.4.101. RLF Timer Value Checkbox to activate the Radio Link Failure Detection algorithm throughout the entire network. The Max Adjustment Step IE as specified in [25. §10. Maximal number of out-of-sync indications. §9.20].2.1]. dB Power Balancing Activate Power Balancing DL Reference Power offset to PCPICH Tx Power Adjustment Ratio Checkbox to activate Power Balancing throughout the network.4.

1.actix. Fig. 7-3 Radio Bearer Control tab of the RNC configuration dialo www. Fig. 7-2 Power Control tab of the RNC configuration dialog 7. The traffic volume monitoring parameters are described in Table 7-3.3 Radio Bearer Control Configuration The Radio Bearer Control settings can be configured in a separate tab of the RNC configuration dialog.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 209 Fig. 7-3 shows the Radio Bearer Control tab of the RNC configuration dialog.com .

§10. If this traffic volume threshold in DL is exceeded. new data is requested.actix. In the other case. no DCH resources would be temporarily available. Fig.1. The common channels parameters are described in Table 7-4. a switching from FACH to DCH is initiated. Table 7-4 Common channels configuration parameters (for simulation only) Parameter HSxPA Description Unit Activate HSDPA Activate STTD Activate Reference Power Adjustment CQI Feedback Cycle MAC-d Flow Buffer Low Threshold This flag globally determines whether the HSDPA shall be used in simulations. This flag determines whether Space-Time Transmit Diversity is applied for the HSDPA. ms Use FACH for PS I/B Connection Setup — Traffic Volume Underflow (on DCH) UL Threshold If the traffic volume is below this UL threshold and simultaneously the according DL condition is met (see next parameter) then a switching from DCH to FACH is initiated.6.4 Common Channels Configuration The common channels can be configured in a separate tab of the RNC configuration dialog. — — — ms % www.331. a switching from FACH to DCH is initiated. The CQI feedback cycle as defined in [25. bytes DL Threshold bytes Time To Trigger ms Traffic Volume Overflow (on RACH) UL Threshold DL Threshold Time To Trigger If this traffic volume threshold in UL is exceeded.3.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 210 Table 7-3 Radio Bearer Control parameters (for simulation only) Parameter Description Unit Pending Time After Trigger The minimal guard time between two requests for the same Transport Channel switching. If the traffic volume is below this DL threshold and simultaneously the according UL condition is met (see previous parameter) then a switching from DCH to FACH is initiated. This guard would avoid multiple requests if e. bytes bytes ms 7.com . A flag to decide whether the Reference Power Adjustment is to be taken into account. The threshold indicating low MAC-d flow buffer level for the Iub capacity allocation algorithm. The time interval for which the switching condition from FACH to DCH at least must hold.40a]. an interactive or background connection would immediately start on the DCH. If this flag is activated. 7-4 shows the Common Channels tab of the RNC configuration dialog. If the buffer level is below this threshold. an interactive (I) or background (B) connection would first start on the FACH and later upgrade to DCH when there is enough data available.g. The time interval for which the switching condition from DCH to FACH at least must hold.

8]. This checkbox activates the HSUPA in the network.com .331. see [25.6.331. The power offset between the last transmitted preamble and the control part of the message (added to the preamble power to receive the power of the message control part).331.actix. The required Eb/N0 decoding limit (for error free reception) of the decoder on the RACH. §10. see [25.3.5.3. §10.54].6.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 211 Parameter Description Unit MAC-d Flow Scheduling Despite High Buffer Level Activate HSUPA RACH If this flag is activated. 7-4 Common Channels tab of the RNC configuration dialog www. The power step when no acquisition indicator is received. dB Power Ramp Step Power Offset p-m dB dB Eb/N0 Decoding Limit dB Fig. the MAC-d flow scheduling is active even for a high buffer level.11]. see [25.3. §10. — — Constant Value This constant value is used by the UE to calculate the initial output power on PRACH according to the open loop Power Control procedure.

Inter-Frequency Handover…. the Measurement Configuration group contains three subgroups in order to parameterize the intra-frequency. Fig.1. if supported by the selected RRM algorithms. In this tab. if supported by the selected RRM algorithms. the inter-frequency. The parameters of the global Handover settings are described in Table 7-5.5 Global Handover Configuration The global Handover settings are summarized in a separate tab of the RNC configuration dialog. Button to open the inter-frequency Handover settings dialog. and the inter-RAT Handover. 7-8. 7-5 Handover tab of the RNC configuration dialog Table 7-5 Global Handover configuration parameters (for simulation only) Parameter Handover Support Description Unit Inter-Frequency Handover Inter-RAT Handover Activates inter-frequency handover for the entire RNC region. — — Measurement Configuration Intra-Frequency Handover… Inter-Frequency Handover… Inter-RAT Handover… Button to open the intra-frequency Handover settings dialog. Activates inter-RAT handover for the entire RNC region. and Inter-RAT Handover… respectively.com . These dialogs are shown in Fig.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 212 7. Their parameters can be configured in separate dialogs that are opened by using the appropriate buttons IntraFrequency Handover…. — — — www.actix. Button to open the inter-RAT Handover settings dialog. Fig. 7-6 – Fig. 7-5 shows the Handover tab of the RNC configuration dialog.

this parameter directly corresponds to the maximal Active Set size.com .Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 213 Parameter Common Description Unit Reporting Deactivation Threshold The reporting deactivation threshold determines the number of cells in the Active Set where no measurement reports are sent from the UE to the RNC any more. 7-6 Intra-frequency Handover settings dialog www.actix. # Fig. Basically.

The conditions for these Handover reporting events are globally defined in the RNC for its complete network area. The measurement quantities of the different Handover types are described in Table 7-7.331.1.3.1] (for simulation only) www. for details refer to [R-TecRef].2. Only the cell individual offsets can be modified separately for every cell as explained in section 7. 7-8 Inter-RAT Handover settings dialog In order to trigger a Handover. every UE sends according requests to the RNC if certain events occur. §14.2.3.com . §14.1.actix. §14. [25.4.331]. Table 7-6 Handover reporting events [25.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 214 Fig. A summary of the available Handover reporting events is given in Table 7-6. 7-7 Inter-Frequency Handover settings dialog Fig.

Threshold for used frequency. Reporting Interval.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 215 Reporting Event Description Characterized by Intra-Frequency Reporting Events 1A A PCPICH enters the Reporting Range Hysteresis. ‘CPICH_RSCP’. Reporting Range Hysteresis. and ‘Pathloss’. Threshold 1B A PCPICH leaves the Reporting Range 1C 1D 1E 1F A non-active PCPICH becomes better than an active PCPICH Change of best cell A PCPICH becomes better than an absolute threshold A PCPICH becomes worse than an absolute threshold Inter-Frequency Reporting Events 2A 2B Change of best frequency The estimated quality of the currently used frequency is below a certain threshold and the estimated quality of a non-used frequency is above a certain threshold The estimated quality of the currently used frequency is below a certain threshold The estimated quality of the currently used frequency is above a certain threshold Hysteresis. Threshold for non-used frequencies. Time to Trigger. Time to Trigger. Time to Trigger. Weighting Factor. 7-9 shows the Compressed Mode tab of the RNC configuration dialog. Weighting Factor Hysteresis. Possible parameters are ‘CPICH_EcIo’. Time to Trigger. Weighting Factor. Weighting Factor 2D 2F Inter-RAT Reporting Events 3A The estimated quality of the currently used UTRAN frequency is below a certain threshold and the estimated quality of the other system is above a certain threshold Hysteresis. Threshold Hysteresis.1. Time to Trigger. Threshold. www. Time to Trigger. Weighting Factors Hysteresis. Fig. Reporting Interval Hysteresis. Weighting Factors Hysteresis. — — 7. Possible parameters are ‘CPICH_EcIo’ and ‘CPICH_RSCP’. Time to Trigger. Time to Trigger. Threshold.actix. Time to Trigger. Reporting Range Hysteresis. Time to Trigger Hysteresis. The measured quantity used for inter-frequency Handover.com . Weighting Factor Table 7-7 Handover measurement quantities (for simulation only) Parameter Description Unit Measurement Quantity Measured Quantity (Intra-Frequency Handover) Measured Quantity (Inter-Frequency Handover) The measured quantity used for intra-frequency Handover. Threshold.6 Compressed Mode Configuration The global settings for the Compressed Mode are summarized in a separate tab of the RNC configuration dialog. Time to Trigger.

The Transmission Gap Start Distance (in terms of slots). which is applied as the transmission time reduction method in Radioplan.com . The string ‘by event’ means that a Compressed Mode UE would measure either forever or until one of the events 2F. Furthermore. separately for UL. The Calculate button can be used to update the values. The TGP length 2. These flags indicate whether the code for CM has to be assigned from an alternative code tree (true) or from the ordinary code tree (false). Table 7-8 Compressed Mode configuration parameters (for simulation only) Parameter Activation Description Unit Measurement Purpose The measurement purpose indicates whether the TGPS (transmission gap pattern sequence) is to be used for FDD inter-frequency measurements or for GSM inter-system measurements. GSM.actix.. an activation template can be defined for the CM measurements and the CM method. Seperately the UL and the DL can be enabled for CM. 2B. # UMTS frames # UMTS frames # UMTS slots # ms TGPL2 TGD TGPRC Resulting Measurement Period www. The Transmission Gap Pattern Repetition Count. The duration of the first and second transmission gap within the TGP. The number of TGPs within the TGP sequence. SF/2 is always applied as CM method. These fields inform the user about the resulting measurement period for UEs in Compressed Mode. the use of an alternative code tree can be supported which is recommended to avoid code blocking on the ordinary code tree (see [R-TecRef] for more information). These flags enable the CM method ‘Spreading Factor Reduction by Factor 2 (SF/2)’. DL. respectively. or 3A occurs. The duration of TGP 1 (in terms of frames). The distance between the starting slots of two consecutive transmission gaps within a TGP. — TGL1 TGL2 # UMTS slots TGPL1 The TGP length 1. The number of the first slot of the first transmission gap in the first TGP of the sequence. If enabled. The transmission gap lengths 1 and 2 (in terms of slots). and FDD. — CM Method Use Alternative SC — — Transmission Gap Pattern TGSN The transmission gap starting slot number. The duration of TGP 2 (in terms of frames). The parameters of the Compressed Mode in the RNC settings dialog are described in Table 7-8.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 216 In this tab. both TGL values are set to 7 slots – thereby supporting the single-frame method. 0 stands for infinity. According to halving the spreading factor.

Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 217 Fig.1 OTSR Configuration The OTSR properties of a Node B can be configured in a separate tab of the Node B configuration dialog.com . The general Node B parameters can be found in section 6. Here only the UMTS related parameters are decscribed. The OTSR parameters are described in Table 7-9. The Node B basically defines hardware parameters and the site location.2 Node B Configuration A site in a pure UMTS network is called Node B in the following.5. www. 7-10 shows the OTSR tab of the Node B configuration dialog. 7.actix. Fig.2.3. 7-9 Compressed Mode settings dialog 7.

see [R-ANP]. for neighbor list optimization. — www.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 218 Fig. This information is used e.actix. 7-10 OTSR tab of the Node B configuration dialog Table 7-9 OTSR parameters of a Node B Parameter Description Unit OTSR Technology Installed A flag to determine whether OTSR technology is installed at this Node B.g.com .

7-11 Hardware tab of the Node B configuration dialog Table 7-10 Node B hardware configuration parameters (for simulation only) Parameter Resources Description Unit Use Global Credit If enabled. 7-11 shows the Hardware tab of the Node B configuration dialog.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 219 7.e. A list with capacity cost values per radio link of a dedicated channel for each spreading factor in terms of number of consumed channel elements. A list with capacity cost values per radio link of a common channel for each spreading factor in terms of number of consumed channel elements. Fig.com . the hardware capacity may be used for either UL or DL. The hardware parameters are described in Table 7-10.2.actix. — Capacity Credit # CE Capacity Consumption Laws Cost per RLS (Dedicated Channels) Cost per RL (Dedicated Channels) Cost (Common Channels) A list with capacity cost values per radio link set of a dedicated channel for each spreading factor in terms of number of consumed channel elements.2 Node B Hardware Configuration The hardware that a Node B is equipped with can be configured in a separate tab of the Node B configuration dialog. The available capacity credit for DL and UL in terms of number of channel elements. Fig. # CE # CE # CE www. a single credit value is used for both UL and DL. i.

3 Node B Connection Configuration The dimension of the Iub interface of a Node B can be configured in a separate tab of the Node B configuration dialog. Mbps Mbps Mbps www. Data Rate for Class A+B+C (Total) The maximal capacity of the Node B’s Iub interface for all Release 99 (DCH) connections of class A.2.actix. B. The maximal capacity of the Node B’s Iub interace for all user data connections in total of casses A. Data Rate for Class A (R99) Max. 7-12 Connection tab of the Node B configuration dialog Table 7-11 Node B connection parameters (for simulation only) Parameter Iub Interface Description Unit Max.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 220 7. Fig. Fig. The maximal capacity of the Node B’s Iub interface for all Release 99 (DCH) connections of classes A and B. and C. The connection parameters are described in Table 7-11.com . Data Rate for Class A+B (R99) Max. 7-12 shows the Connection tab of the Node B configuration dialog.

Different scheduling modes and retry policies can be configured. It is only transmitted for a tenth of a slot. BCH SCH FACH AICH PICH DCH RACH HSDPA HSUPA The general cell parameters can be found in section 6. A cell could be used exclusively for the HSDPA. The Synchronization Channel alternates in a time division manner with the PCCPCH. The Paging Indicator Channel is used in the paging procedure of the network. www. The Broadcast Channel is transmitted on the PCCPCH over the entire cell with a configurable – but constant – power. It is permanently broadcast over the entire cell with a configurable – but constant – power. Table 7-12 Available channels in a cell Channel CPICH Realization Out of the two Common Pilot Channels (physical channels). A cell can have several FACHs. only the Primary one (i. all other FACHs are used for Channel Type Switching with the DCH. many different channels can be configured. The transmit power of PCCPCH and SCH is configured as a common value representing the average power over the entire slot. open loop) Power Control.e. initial (i. and Compressed Mode. Each tab of the cell configuration dialog has a Default button to reset all parameters to reasonable default settings. Furthermore. The first FACH is modeled to be always fully loaded. repeated frames due to ARQ) with a power determined by the initial (i. outer loop Power Control. e.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 221 7. the user can specify a maximum number of supported users. The DPCH has fast inner loop Power Control. The availability of the RACH should be reflected in this Tx power.3 UMTS Cell Configuration A cell comprises both equipment and algorithm parameters that are cell specific.5. open loop) Power Control. The following list in Table 7-12 gives a coarse overview. The HSUPA can be enabled on a per-cell basis. The Dedicated Channel is available on both UL and DL. In a cell. Soft/Softer Handover.g. The UL Random Access Channel is transmitted on the PRACH for one or two frames (excl. Different power modes. The HSDPA can be enabled on a per-cell basis. and retry policies can be configured. in the case when a dedicated network layer (on a different carrier frequency) is reserved for the HSDPA. PCPICH) is modeled.e. The FACHs are transmitted on the SCCPCH over the entire cell with a configurable – but constant – power.4. Channel Type Switching with the FACH. The configured transmit power value represents an average power depending on the paging activity.e. Furthermore. It needs to be transmitted at high power without power control because all terminals in a cell need to receive and decode it. the AICH is modeled to be permanently transmitted with a configurable – but constant – power. See [RTecRef] for a deeper explanation on the RRM algorithms that are specified by some of these cell parameters. As the complementary DL channel for the connection setup procedure on the PRACH.actix. It is transmitted physically on the DPCCH and the DPDCH where the first one is permanently on whereas the latter one could have silence periods due to DTX. scheduling modes. the user can specify a maximum number of supported users and the used HARQ settings.com .

Fig. The constant average output power on any additional SCCPCH specified by an offset to the PCPICH output power. Furthermore. The constant AICH output power specified by an offset to the PCPICH output power and an activity factor. SCCPCH/FACH dB.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 222 7. The constant output power on the first SCCPCH specified by an offset to the PCPICH output power and an activity factor. the number of additional SCCPCHs can be determined. 7-13 shows the Resources tab of the cell configuration dialog. # AICH PICH dB. Fig. % www. The constant PICH output power specified by an offset to the PCPICH output power and an activity factor. 7-13 Resources tab of the UMTS cell configuration dialog Table 7-13 Radio resources settings of a UMTS cell Parameter Output Power Description Unit Maximum Power PCPICH Power Common Channels The maximal output power of the cell. % dB. % Addit. The distinct radio resources settings are described in Table 7-13. dB dB.3.actix. dBm dBm PCCPCH/SCH First SCCPCH The constant average PCCPCH/SCH output power specified by an offset to the PCPICH output power.com . The constant output power on the PCPICH.1 UMTS Resources Configuration The output power settings and radio resources of a cell can be configured in a separate tab of the cell configuration dialog.

dBm The assembly of the maximally assignable cell output power is depicted in Fig. 7-14. This string denotes the scrambling code domain that the scrambling code of this cell belongs to. AICH. This value can be initialized from the total DL power from a network simulation. and the initial DL Power Control.com . Output Power Available Cell Output Power available for Transport Channels PCPICH PCCPCH SCCPCH AICH PICH Fig. PRACH. the AICH activity should be configured accordingly higher in order to take the increased number of PRACH acknowledgment signaling on this channel into consideration. Typically. The valid range of the scrambling code number is 0 … 511. On the other hand. the Rx power filtering has an impact on the fast UL Congestion Control. Max.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 223 Parameter Scrambling Code Description Unit Code Number The scrambling code number that is assigned to this cell.actix. or HSPDSCH. If the RACH is available. this string can be empty. and PICH) ranges between 10% and 20% of the total cell Tx power. PCCPCH. The filter length. — Scrambling Code Domain Second Code Tree Available — — Tx/Rx Power Filter (for simulation only) Activated Window Size A checkbox to enable the filtering of Tx/Rx powers at this cell. — # UMTS frames Downlink Load (Optimization) Total Power An optional value denoting the total emitted DL power for Ec/I0 plots only. such as DPCH. The remaining cell Tx power can be utilized by other channels. If no scrambling code domain is defined. the compound Tx power of the common control channels (PCPICH. 7-14 Assembly of the cell output power in UMTS The filtering of the Tx powers influences the DL Congestion Control. A checkbox to deploy a second code tree at this cell. SCCPCH. www. These channels are modeled with their average effective power as if they all were broadcast permanently. the UL Admission Control.

customized Ec/I0 plots can be generated. Fig. — Max.DL.2 HSDPA Cell Configuration The HSDPA settings of a cell can be configured in a separate tab of the cell configuration dialog. It represents to total power radiated from that cell. 7.com . After the total powers have been set properly in the cells. More details about the generation of Ec/I0 plots can be found in section 3.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 224 The total cell power parameter of a cell is only used for creating Ec/I0 plots.actix.Cell » DL_TxPower [dBm]’ in the Results tab of the tree window. Possible values are ‘Rejection’.1. 7-15 shows the HSDPA tab of the cell configuration dialog. A dialog appears where the option Individual Cell Tx Power must be selected. There is the possibility to initialize the total power parameter of all cells from a dynamic or snapshot simulation. Fig.3. the Ec/I0 plot can be generated by choosing the icon (tooltip Plot Interference Ratio) from the views toolbar. # — www. ‘TryDCHSetup’. 7-15 HSDPA tab of the cell configuration dialog Table 7-14 HSDPA parameters of a cell Parameter Description Unit Activate HSDPA Admission A checkbox to enable the HSDPA at this cell. This can be done by choosing the context menu function Init Total Cell Tx Power with Parameter at the result parameter ‘PHY. The retry policy for service requests on the HSDPA. The distinct HSDPA settings are described in Table 7-14.4. or ‘TryAdjacentCell’. Number of HSDPA Users Retry Policy The maximum number of HSDPA users allowed in the cell. By assigning individual total power values to the cells of a network.

com . The power mode of the HS-SCCH. no user data is transmitted on the DCH. ‘DPCH Offset’. specified as PCPICH power offset. and ‘Proportional Fair’. Bit Rate for QoS Profiling HARQ — Redundancy Version The version of the redundancy exploitation used by the HARQ. — Max. HS-SCCH Power Max. The number of HS-SCCH used in the cell. The flow buffer size of the dedicated MAC for HSDPA. ‘Best CQI’.actix. i. Possible values are ‘Round Robin’. A checkbox to enable the F-DPCH for this cell instead of a separate A-DPCH for each user. The window size for the HARQ. A checkbox to enable CQI adjustment for HSDPA. Processes per UE Max. to compensate for CQI mapping offsets to achieve a given initial BLER. HS-SCCH Power Enable F-DPCH The number of HS-PDSCH used in the cell. — Algorithm The type of scheduling algorithm in the shared MAC of the HSDPA. The PCPICH Power Offset if the power mode ‘PCPICHOffset’ is chosen. The maximal number of stop-and-wait processes maintained by the cell per UE. The minimal HS-SCCH power.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 225 Parameter Description Unit No User Data on DCH Scheduling A checkbox to use this cell exclusively for HSDPA. The maximal HS-SCCH power. specified as PCPICH power offset. # — — dB dB # — dB dB dB — www. The user can choose between the options ‘Chase’ (soft combining of all transmitted TBs) and ‘IR’ (incremental redundancy). The HS-SCCH power offset for either of the power modes. Possible values are ‘PCPICHOffset’ or ‘Residue’. A checkbox to determine whether 16QAM is utilized as HSDSCH modulation. The measurement power offset in relation to the PCPICH transmit power.e. The power mode of the HS-PDSCH. A checkbox to apply the maximum configured HS data rate for the QoS Profiling feature. Retransmissions Window Size Radio Resources # # # TBS Number of HS-PDSCH Enable 16QAM HS-PDSCH Power Mode PCPICH Power Offset Power Margin Number of HS-SCCH HS-SCCH Power Mode HS-SCCH Power Offset Min. or ‘CQI Offset’. — MAC-d Flow Buffer Size Measurement Power Offset Use CQI Adjustment # TB dB — Use Max. i. The power margin that is left up to the maximal cell output power if the power mode ‘Residue’ is chosen. The maximal number of retransmissions per stop-andwait process.e. Possible values are ‘PCPICH Offset’.

The distinct HSUPA settings are described in Table 7-15. Fig. 7-17 shows the HSUPA tab of the cell configuration dialog.com . Possible values are ‘Rejection’ and ‘TryDCHSetup’. The distinct parameters can be found in Table 7-14 given above. 7-16 shows the HSDPA tab of the cell configuration dialog. Fig. Fig.3 HSUPA Cell Configuration The HSUPA settings of a cell can be configured in a separate tab of the cell configuration dialog.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 226 In case the Radioplan WiNeS Simulator Module is not licensed. 7-16 HSDPA tab of the cell configuration dialog for optimization 7. # Algorithm The type of scheduling algorithm in the HSUPA MAC. Retransmissions Scheduling The maximal number of retransmissions per stop-and-wait process. — Max.3.actix. The maximal number of E-DCHs scheduled on the HSUPA. ‘MaxTP-Equal’ and ‘MaxTPRoundRobin’. — Max. The retry policy for service requests on the HSUPA. Possible values are ‘ResourceRequest-Equal’. ‘ResourceRequest-Round Robin’. Table 7-15 HSUPA parameters of a cell (for simulation only) Parameter Description Unit Activate HSUPA Admission A checkbox to enable the HSDPA at this cell. Scheduled EDCH # www. Number of HSUPA Users Retry Policy HARQ The maximal number of HSUPA users allowed in the cell. there is a different HSDPA tab that contains some settings relevant for network optimization. # — Max.

com . The power offset of the E-RGCH and E-HICH in relation to the DPCH transmit power. A checkbox to enable the long TTI of 10ms. Bit Rate for QoS Profiling Enable Short TTI (2ms) Enable Long TTI (10ms) Radio Resources The maximal number of E-DCHs rescheduled in an HSUPA TTI.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 227 Parameter Description Unit Max. The number of E-RGCH/E-HICH available in the cell. # — — — Number of EAGCH Number of ERGCH/E-HICH E-AGCH Power Offset to PCPICH E-RGCH/E-HICH Power Offset to DPCH The number of E-AGCH available in the cell. Rescheduled E-DCH per TTI Use max. A checkbox to enable the short TTI of 2ms.actix. The power offset of the E-AGCH in relation to the PCPICH transmit power. A checkbox to apply the maximum configured HS data rate for the QoS Profiling feature. # # dB dB Fig. 7-17 HSUPA tab of the cell configuration dialog www.

Pulldown boxes for selecting parameter set templates for intra-frequency handover (IAF).com . 7-18 Handover tab of the cell configuration dialog Table 7-16 Handover and Cell Selection parameters of a cell (for simulation only) Parameter Handover Description Unit Cell Individual Offset The cell individual offset of the reporting range for the Handover reporting events 1A and 1B. 7-18 shows the Handover tab of the cell configuration dialog. A checkbox to enable inter-frequency handovers from this cell.actix. refer to Table 7-6. The distinct parameters are described in Table 7-16.1. Possible parameters are ‘CPICH_EcIo’ and ‘CPICH_RSCP’.3. and inter-RAT handover (IRAT). A checkbox to enable handovers to GSM at this cell. — www. refer to section 7. dB Inter-RAT handover supported Inter-frequency handover supported Templates — — — Cell Selection/Reselection Measurement Quantity The measured quantity used for cell (re-)selection. Fig.4 Handover and Cell Selection Parameter Settings The settings for Handover and Cell Selection with cell specific parameters can be configured in a separate tab of the cell configuration dialog. The boxes are only enabled if cell parameter templates have been loaded in the RNC. interfrequency handover (IEF).1.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 228 7. Fig.

Allowed UL Tx Power Cell Reselection Timer The minimal CPICH RSCP level to allow a service admission at this cell.) Max. The “trigger” time for which the cell reselection condition must be fulfilled. The distinct load control parameters are described in Table 7-17. Pilot RSCP (Qrxlevmin) Qhyst value (RSCP meas. 7-19 shows the Generic Load Control tab of the cell configuration dialog. The maximally allowed UL Tx power of a UE to successfully (re-)select a cell.actix.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 229 Parameter Description Unit Min.5 Load Control Configuration The load control of a cell can be configured in a separate tab of the cell configuration dialog.) Min. Hysteresis value for cell (re-)selection if the pilot Ec/I0 is the measured quantity. Fig. 7-19 Generic Load Control tab of the cell configuration dialog www.com . dBm dB dB dB dBm s 7. Hysteresis value for cell (re-)selection if the pilot RSCP is the measured quantity.3. Fig. Pilot Ec/Io (Qqualmin) Qhyst value (Ec/Io meas. The minimal CPICH Ec/I0 level to allow a service admission at this cell.

The permissible range is [0. The permissible range is [0. they are lower than the maximal cell output power. DL DPCH Power The minimal DL DPCH transmit power for reference spreading factor 128. Since this maximal power can usually be exceeded only for a short period of time (several UMTS frames). Only new SHO links can be allocated. dBm dBm The threshold values of the DL load control are relative to the maximal cell output power. 1). i. 1). the value must be negative. i. …. Connections with a high Tx power are handled by the Congestion Control if the instantaneous cell output power exceeds this threshold. New services are blocked if the instantaneous cell output power exceeds this threshold. DL DPCH Power Max.e. The maximal DL DPCH transmit power for reference spreading factor 128. www. # Radioplan Power Control Min. 7-20. — — Radioplan DL Load Control Admission Control Threshold The DL threshold relative to the maximal cell output power for the admission of new service attempts. The DL threshold relative to the maximal cell output power for the Congestion Control. the value must be negative.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 230 Table 7-17 Load Control parameters of a cell (for simulation only) Parameter Description Unit Radioplan UL Load Control Maximum UL Load for Admission Control Maximum UL Load for Congestion Control The maximally allowed UL load factor for the Admission Control to control the network load for this cell. This value must be greater than or equal to the Admission Control UL load factor. as shown in Fig.actix. The admission control threshold defines an upper limit for the admission of new service attempts. dB Congestion Control Threshold dB Compressed Mode Max. Number of CM Links The maximum number of links in a cell that can be in Compressed Mode.com . above this threshold only new SHO links can be admitted. the relative thresholds must be negative dB-values. Reasonably. Reasonably. The maximally allowed UL load factor for the Congestion Control to control the network load for this cell. ….e.

4.csv files (comma separated) can be exported or imported. scrambling code lists as *. A repeater always inherits the same network layer and. the new settings are first only shown in the cell settings overview dialog without actually making them effective in the project. when drive test measurements shall be imported and the drive test was performed at a time when there were different scrambling codes used in the network than in the current network plan. For such purposes.6 Scrambling Code List Handling In some cases it can be useful to change the scrambling code assignment of the cells in a project. 7-21 shows the Resources tab of the repeater configuration dialog. The cell settings overview dialog has according functions in its Tools Scrambling Codes pulldown menu.com . 7. In case of importing a scrambling code list. The distinct output power settings are described in Table 7-18. For example.5.1 UMTS Resources Configuration for Repeaters The output power settings of a repeater can be configured in a separate tab of the repeater configuration dialog.4 UMTS Repeater Configuration In Radioplan. thus. The general repeater parameters can be found in section 6. It is always connected to a donor cell. 7-20 Relative DL Load Control thresholds 7.actix. Output Power Available Cell Output Power Congestion Control Threshold Admission Threshold Fig.3.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 231 Max. By choosing either of the entries Import… or Export… a file open or save dialog is shown where the respective file can be selected. it is necessary to reload those old scrambling codes into the project before the measurements are imported.5. www. a repeater is a system technology specific element. Fig. This way the user can first check the correctness of the scrambling codes before confirming these settings by clicking the OK button of the cell settings overview dialog. 7. the same sytem technology as the donor cell.

a specific user configuration is not necessary. although most parameters are related to UMTS.6 for more information. This value can be initialized from the total DL power from a network simulation. The constant output power on the PCPICH. For the purpose of network optimization and site selection.5 Configuration of the User Behavior The user behavior is configured equally across all supported system technologies.com . dBm The common control channels at the repeater are controlled proportionally to its PCPICH output power applying the same offsets as in the donor cell.actix. www. However. a traffic distribution matrix for a generic service profile can be considered for the optimization. 7-21 Resources tab of the repeater configuration dialog Table 7-18 Repeater UMTS resources settings of a cell Parameter Output Power Description Unit Maximum Power PCPICH Power Downlink Load The maximal output power of the repeater. 7. dBm dBm Total Power An optional value denoting the total emitted DL power for Ec/I0 plots only.Actix Radioplan User Guide UTRAN Configuration 232 Fig. See section 6.

5. Each tab of the cell configuration dialog has a Default button to reset all parameters to reasonable default settings. and pathloss tuning. Table 8-1 Radio resources settings of a CDMA2000 cell Parameter Output Power Description Unit Maximum Power FPICH Power Other CCH Power Offset The maximal output power of the cell. 8. measurement analysis.actix. The valid range of the scrambling code number is 0 … 511. This string denotes the scrambling code domain that the scrambling code of this cell belongs to. The general RNC parameters can be found in section 6. Fig. The constant output power on the FPICH. There are no CDMA2000 specific parameters at the BS. The general BS parameters can be found in section 6. dBm dBm dB Downlink Load Total Power Scrambling Code An optional value denoting the total emitted DL power for Ec/I0 plots only. Automatic cell planning (ACP) or automatic neighbor list planning (ANP) does not require any RNC configuration. 8-1 shows the Resources tab of the cell configuration dialog.1 CDMA2000 Resources Configuration The output power settings and radio resources of a cell can be configured in a separate tab of the cell configuration dialog. 8. The distinct radio resources settings are described in Table 8-1.3. 8.2 CDMA2000 Base Station Configuration A site in a pure CDMA2000 network is called base station (BS) in the following. Projects with CDMA2000 network layers can be used for a variety of network planning and optimization activities such as capacity/coverage optimization.3 CDMA2000 Cell Configuration A cell comprises both equipment and algorithm parameters that are cell specific. The general cell parameters can be found in section 6.4.Actix Radioplan User Guide CDMA2000 RAN Configuration 233 8 CDMA2000 RAN Configuration This chapter describes the configuration of CDMA2000 specific project items in Radioplan.5.com .1 RNC Configuration The CDMA2000 specific network controller is called RNC. The compound average output power on the other CCHs specified by an offset to the FPICH output power.2.5. this string can be empty. The scrambling code number that is assigned to this cell.3. 8. There are no CDMA2000 specific parameters at the RNC. If no scrambling code domain is defined. dBm Code Number — Scrambling Code Domain — www. site selection.

Max.Actix Radioplan User Guide CDMA2000 RAN Configuration 234 Fig. After the total powers have been set properly in the cells. the Ec/I0 plot can be generated by choosing the icon (tooltip Plot Interference Ratio) from the views toolbar. By assigning individual total power values to the cells of a network. More details about the generation of Ec/I0 plots can be found in section 3. The remaining cell Tx power can be utilized by other channels. 8-2. It represents to total power radiated from that cell.1. www. FCH. 8-1 Resources tab of the CDMA2000 cell configuration dialog The assembly of the maximally assignable cell output power is depicted in Fig. These channels are modeled with their average effective power as if they all were broadcast permanently. customized Ec/I0 plots can be generated.g.actix. Typically.com . A dialog appears where the option Individual Cell Tx Power must be selected. Output Power Available Cell Output Power available for Transport Channels FPICH other CCH Fig. 8-2 Assembly of the cell output power in CDMA2000 The total cell power parameter of a cell is only used for creating Ec/I0 plots. e. the compound Tx power of the common control channels ranges between 10% and 20% of the total cell Tx power.4.

8.4 CDMA2000 Repeater Configuration In Radioplan. It is always connected to a donor cell. A repeater always inherits the same network layer and. In case of importing a scrambling code list. Fig.Actix Radioplan User Guide CDMA2000 RAN Configuration 235 8.5. For such purposes. Fig. This way the user can first check the correctness of the scrambling codes before confirming these settings by clicking the OK button of the cell settings overview dialog.4.2 Scrambling Code List Handling In some cases.3.csv files (comma separated) can be exported or imported. when drive test measurements shall be imported and the drive test was performed at a time when there were different scrambling codes used in the network than in the current network plan. it can be useful to change the scrambling code assignment of the cells in a project. the new settings are first only shown in the cell settings overview dialog without actually making them effective in the project. 8. the same sytem technology as the donor cell.5.1 CDMA2000 Resources Configuration for Repeaters The output power settings of a repeater can be configured in a separate tab of the repeater configuration dialog. The cell settings overview dialog has according functions in its Tools Scrambling Codes pulldown menu. By choosing either of the entries Import… or Export… a File Open or Save dialog is shown where the respective file can be selected. 8-3 Resources tab of the CDMA2000 repeater configuration dialog www.com . a repeater is a system technology specific element. The general repeater parameters can be found in section 6. For example. 8-3 shows the Resources tab of the repeater configuration dialog.actix. thus. scrambling code lists as *. The distinct output power settings are described in Table 8-2. it is necessary to reload those old scrambling codes into the project before the measurements are imported.

8. a specific user configuration is not necessary. a traffic distribution matrix for a generic service profile can be considered for the optimization. For the purpose of network optimization and site selection.6 for more information.Actix Radioplan User Guide CDMA2000 RAN Configuration 236 Table 8-2 Output power settings of a CDMA2000 repeater Parameter Output Power Description Unit Maximum Power FPICH Power Downlink Load The maximal output power of the repeater. dBm dBm Total Power An optional value denoting the total emitted DL power for Ec/I0 plots only.5 Configuration of the User Behavior The user behavior is configured equally across all supported system technologies. See section 6. dBm The common control channels at the repeater are controlled proportionally to its FPICH output power applying the same offsets as in the donor cell. The constant output power on the FPICH. although most parameters are related to UMTS.com . www. However.actix.

actix.5. There are no GSM specific parameters at the BS.2 GSM Base Station Configuration A site in a pure GSM network is called base station (BS) in the following.5. Fig.com . The distinct output power settings are described in Table 9-1.5. and pathloss tuning.1 BSC Configuration The GSM specific network controller is called BSC. The general cell parameters can be found in section 6. Automatic cell planning (ACP) or automatic neighbor list planning (ANP) does not require any BSC configuration. The general BS parameters can be found in section 6. 9. 9. Each tab of the cell configuration dialog has a Default button to reset all parameters to reasonable default settings. site selection.2.Actix Radioplan User Guide GSM RAN Configuration 237 9 GSM RAN Configuration This chapter describes the configuration of GSM specific project items in Radioplan. 9.3 GSM Cell Configuration A cell comprises both equipment and algorithm parameters that are cell specific. Projects with GSM network layers can be used for a variety of network planning and optimization activities such as capacity/coverage optimization.3. measurement analysis. 9-1 shows the Resources tab of the cell configuration dialog.1 GSM Resources Configuration The output power settings and radio resources of a cell can be configured in a separate tab of the cell configuration dialog. There are no GSM specific parameters at the BSC.3.4. Fig. 9-1 Resources tab of the GSM cell configuration dialog www. The general Network Controller parameters can be found in section 6. 9.

The distinct table columns for the transmitter settings are described in Table 9-2. dB CI LAC BSIC The Cell Identity of the cell.com .4. ‘No hopping’.g. site 1…4’. RxPower Threshold The minimum DL received power required for being served by this cell (e. — — NCC BCC The Network Color Code of the cell. If no value is specified the Min.1). The Location Area Code for the cell. In case of the BCCH only a single channel number is allowed. Fig. ‘Synth. The list of channel numbers used by the respective Tx. dBm Forbidden Frequencies List of frequencies which are not allowed for this cell. sector 1…4’.actix. The choices are: ‘Default’. — — Hopping Strategy TCH List Defines which hopping strategy is used for this cell. This can either be ‘BCCH’ or a sequential number for the TCH. and ‘Synth. DL RxPower (Coverage cutoff) from the Configuration Data Plot dialog is applied (see section 3.3. 9-2 shows the Transmitters tab of the cell configuration dialog. — — HSN MAIO Hopping Sequence Number Mobile Allocation Index Offset — — www.2 GSM Transmitters Configuration The transmitters of a cell can be configured in a separate tab of the cell configuration dialog. The Base Station Color Code of the cell. Parameters — HoMarginPBGT Identification The handover margin power budget. A semicolon separated list of the frequency channel numbers. a semicolon separated list of channel numbers can be given (for frequency hopping). — — 9. the cell’s transmitter is considered as inactive. ‘Baseband’. Table 9-2 Transmitter table parameters of a GSM cell Parameter Description Unit Tx Active The Tx identifier.Actix Radioplan User Guide GSM RAN Configuration 238 Table 9-1 Radio resources settings of a GSM cell Parameter Output Power Description Unit Output Power The output power of the cell on the BCCH at the antenna connector. If at least the BCCH Active flag is disabled. for concentric cells). The active flag of the respective transmitter. For other TCH. dBm Serving Cell Calculation Min.

The general repeater parameters can be found in section 6. Gives the number of logical channels. one non-BCCH Tx can support up to 8 full-rate speech logical traffc channels. It is always connected to a donor cell. a repeater is a system technology specific element. — Fig. thus. 9-2 Transmitters tab of the GSM cell configuration dialog 9. 9-3 shows the Resources tab of the repeater configuration dialog.com . For example.5.actix. The distinct output power settings are described in Table 9-3.4.1 GSM Resources Configuration for Repeaters The output power settings of a repeater can be configured in a separate tab of the repeater configuration dialog. Fig.Actix Radioplan User Guide GSM RAN Configuration 239 Parameter Description Unit Number of Logical Ch. A repeater always inherits the same network layer and. 9. the same sytem technology as the donor cell. www.5.4 GSM Repeater Configuration In Radioplan.

The Location Area Code for the repeater. 9-3 Resources tab of the GSM repeater configuration dialog Table 9-3 Output power settings of a GSM repeater Parameter Output Power Description Unit Output Power Identification The output power of the repeater on the BCCH at the antenna connector. However.Actix Radioplan User Guide GSM RAN Configuration 240 Fig. www. dBm CI LAC The Cell Identity of the repeater. although most parameters are related to UMTS.com .6 for more information. a specific user configuration is not necessary.actix.5 Configuration of the User Behavior The user behavior is configured equally across all supported system technologies. See section 6. For the purpose of network optimization and site selection. — — 9. a traffic distribution matrix for a generic service profile can be considered for the optimization.

g.3. measurement analysis. Fig. The general Network Controller parameters can be found in section 6. 10. Table 10-1 Radio resources settings of an iDEN cell Parameter Output Power Description Unit Output Power The output power of the cell on the BCCH at the antenna connector.5.2. RxPower Threshold The minimum DL received power required for being served by this cell (e.1 Network Controller Configuration There are no iDEN specific parameters at the Network Controller. DL RxPower (Coverage cutoff) from the Configuration Data Plot dialog is applied (see section 3.actix. 10. 10. dBm Forbidden Frequencies List of frequencies which are not allowed for this cell. The general cell parameters can be found in section 6. site selection. Projects with iDEN network layers can be used for a variety of network planning and optimization activities such as capacity/coverage optimization. A semicolon separated list of the frequency channel numbers.1 iDEN Resources Configuration The output power settings and radio resources of a cell can be configured in a separate tab of the cell configuration dialog. Each tab of the cell configuration dialog has a Default button to reset all parameters to reasonable default settings.com .4.3.3 iDEN Cell Configuration A cell comprises both equipment and algorithm parameters that are cell specific. The general BS parameters can be found in section 6. 10. If no value is specified the Min. — www.Actix Radioplan User Guide iDEN RAN Configuration 241 10 iDEN RAN Configuration This chapter describes the configuration of iDEN specific project items in Radioplan. There are no iDEN specific parameters at the BS. The distinct output power settings are described in Table 10-1. BSIC — Color Code The color code for this cell.4.5. 10-1 shows the Resources tab of the cell configuration dialog.5. and pathloss tuning. Automatic cell planning (ACP) or automatic neighbor list planning (ANP) does not require any Network Controller configuration.2 iDEN Base Station Configuration A site in a pure iDEN network is called base station (BS) in the following.1). dBm Serving Cell Calculation Min. for concentric cells).

Fig.com . The distinct table columns for the transmitter settings are described in Table 10-2. Fig.actix. 10-2 shows the Transmitters tab of the cell configuration dialog.Actix Radioplan User Guide iDEN RAN Configuration 242 Fig.3.2 iDEN Transmitters Configuration The transmitters of a cell can be configured in a separate tab of the cell configuration dialog. 10-2 Transmitters tab of the iDEN cell configuration dialog www. 10-1 Resources tab of the iDEN cell configuration dialog 10.

10-3 shows the Resources tab of the repeater configuration dialog. The active flag of the respective transmitter. the cell’s transmitter is considered as inactive. — — Channel Number of Logical Ch.1 iDEN Resources Configuration for Repeaters The output power settings of a repeater can be configured in a separate tab of the repeater configuration dialog. 10-3 Resources tab of the iDEN repeater configuration dialog www. 10. A repeater always inherits the same network layer and. The list of channel numbers used by the respective Tx. If at least the BCCH Active flag is disabled.4. It is always connected to a donor cell.com .5. Gives the number of logical channels. This can either be ‘BCCH’ or a sequential number for the TCH.4 iDEN Repeater Configuration In Radioplan.Actix Radioplan User Guide iDEN RAN Configuration 243 Table 10-2 Transmitter table parameters of a iDEN cell Parameter Description Unit Tx Active The Tx identifier.5. Fig. a repeater is a system technology specific element. The general repeater parameters can be found in section 6. the same sytem technology as the donor cell. thus. The distinct output power settings are described in Table 10-3. — — 10.actix. Fig.

although most parameters are related to UMTS. For the purpose of network optimization and site selection.actix. dBm 10.6 for more information. a specific user configuration is not necessary. a traffic distribution matrix for a generic service profile can be considered for the optimization. See section 6. However.Actix Radioplan User Guide iDEN RAN Configuration 244 Table 10-3 Output power settings of an iDEN repeater Parameter Output Power Description Unit Output Power The output power of the repeater on the BCCH at the antenna connector. www.5 Configuration of the User Behavior The user behavior is configured equally across all supported system technologies.com .

4.5. site selection. dBm Channels Channel Number The WiMAX channel number of this cell.5. — www.actix.4.1 WiMAX Resources Configuration The output power settings and radio resources of a cell can be configured in a separate tab of the cell configuration dialog.1). Automatic cell planning (ACP) or automatic neighbor list planning (ANP) does not require any Network Controller configuration. The distinct radio resources settings are described in Table 11-1. and pathloss tuning. If no value is specified the Min. 11.3. 11.1 Network Controller Configuration There are no WiMAX specific parameters at the Network Controller.3 WiMAX Cell Configuration A cell comprises both equipment and algorithm parameters that are cell specific.2. The general cell parameters can be found in section 6. 11.Actix Radioplan User Guide WiMAX RAN Configuration 245 11 WiMAX RAN Configuration This chapter describes the configuration of WiMAX specific project items in Radioplan. for concentric cells). Fig. The general BS parameters can be found in section 6. The general Network Controller parameters can be found in section 6. 11-1 shows the Resources tab of the cell configuration dialog. dBm Serving Cell Calculation Min.com . Each tab of the cell configuration dialog has a Default button to reset all parameters to reasonable default settings. Table 11-1 Radio resources settings of a WiMAX cell Parameter Output Power Description Unit Output Power The average output power on the pilot channel at the antenna connector.5.g. Projects with WiMAX network layers can be used for a variety of network planning and optimization activities such as capacity/coverage optimization.3. There are no WiMAX specific parameters at the BS.2 WiMAX Base Station Configuration A site in a pure WiMAX network is called base station (BS) in the following. 11. RxPower Threshold The minimum DL received power required for being served by this cell (e. measurement analysis. DL RxPower (Coverage cutoff) from the Configuration Data Plot dialog is applied (see section 3.

Table 11-2 Output power settings of a WiMAX repeater Parameter Output Power Description Unit Pilot Power The average pilot power of the repeater. Fig. The distinct output power settings are described in Table 11-2. A repeater always inherits the same network layer and. 11-2 shows the Resources tab of the repeater configuration dialog.5. the same sytem technology as the donor cell. a repeater is a system technology specific element. 11-1 Resources tab of the WiMAX cell configuration dialog 11.com .Actix Radioplan User Guide WiMAX RAN Configuration 246 Fig.4.5. 11. It is always connected to a donor cell.1 WiMAX Resources Configuration for Repeaters The output power settings of a repeater can be configured in a separate tab of the repeater configuration dialog.actix. dBm www.4 WiMAX Repeater Configuration In Radioplan. The general repeater parameters can be found in section 6. thus.

5 Configuration of the User Behavior The user behavior is configured equally across all supported system technologies. a specific user configuration is not necessary.6 for more information. However. See section 6.actix.com .Actix Radioplan User Guide WiMAX RAN Configuration 247 Fig. although most parameters are related to UMTS. 11-2 Resources tab of the WiMAX repeater configuration dialog 11. a traffic distribution matrix for a generic service profile can be considered for the optimization. For the purpose of network optimization and site selection. www.

actix.com .Actix Radioplan User Guide WiMAX RAN Configuration 248 www.

www. For example.com . Only the available disk space on the file system sets a physical restriction for them. The advantage of this solution is a considerably faster data access and virtually no limitation on the amount of network data stored. performance counter data files or result files of the Radioplan WiNeS Simulator. 12-1 shows the general network performance data management procedure: ActixOne Platform WiNeS Simulator Measurement Data Simulation Results Files PM Counters Files Measurement Files Results Import Module Actix Radioplan Network Performance Management Measurement Device SQL Database Binary Binary Results Binary Data Results Results Data Data Fig. 12-1 Network performance data management The results import module analyzes the recorded network performance data files and filters the parameters according to the conditions mentioned above. and binary result data files stored in the file system.actix. type and size of data) that is stored in the database. Other examples of performance data could be drive test data files. All those data files can be loaded into Radioplan in order to be analyzed and postprocessed. network measurement data can be directly loaded from the ActixOne Platform into Radioplan. In order to grant an efficient network data analysis with reasonable memory requirements.1 Network Performance Data Management Network performance data that are to be evaluated can originate from different sources.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 249 12 Network Data Evaluation 12. define a time interval by category to load the data for that specific interval. it is possible to • • • select specific parameters and categories from the results that shall be loaded into Radioplan. Thus the user need not care about the handling of the binary results data. specify an analysis area commonly smaller than the simulation area to load the network performance data for a specific region. The SQL database manages the binary files completely. All imported parameters are converted into meta information (parameter name. The following scheme in Fig.

2 Binary File System Configuration and Default Parameter Import Settings The location where binary files are stored can be specified globally in the wines. Furthermore. A summary report can be created for each result set that contains most of the key performance indicators essential for a qualified network performance and capacity analysis.actix.ini file (see [R-Admin]) by default. Parameters can be analyzed over time. it is possible to load several result sets4 into one project like discussed in section 5. 4 all parameters loaded into Radioplan in one import process www.g.ini file is used by Radioplan to translate result parameter names from previous versions into an updated naming convention scheme.ini file.3 Concept of Result Analysis Once the network performance data have been loaded into Radioplan. Please see [R-Admin] and the relevant module specific user guides for more information on these *. these categories are defined together with their parameters and default result loading settings in the resultparameters. All result data can also be presented in tables which enables an easy internal analysis due to a variety of built-in statistical analysis functions. a simulation series (refer to [R-Sim]). result sets from other projects are accessible for a comparison which is especially useful for the evaluation of e. the user is prompted for both the database each time Radioplan is started.ini files. for measurement data from a measurement device the result parameters and categories are defined in the resultparameters_measurements. and a short description. default loading flag. If the feature AskForMDBOnStart is switched on that wines. They area tab-delimited ASCII files. The resultparameterstrans. For the network simulator. Result parameters are grouped by categories.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 250 In order to allow for a comparison between network performance results from different simulation runs or against measurement data. type. Each result parameter is specified by a line together with its category.9.com . Cell-based parameters can be visualised. 12. Fig. as spatial plot or as a statistical distribution. 12.ini file. they can be analyzed with respect to different aspects.ini file. 12-2 shows the general result analysis capabilities directly supported by Radioplan. Also an external analysis is possible due to flexible data export functions. The binary file system is always located below the directory of the Radioplan database file. These files are installed together with Radioplan and should only be modified with caution.

or to tune network planning data with real measurement data. Surface Plot cell-mapped or position based values Chart Diagram x and y values histogram. and table) can easily be transformed from one into another. cell visual. clutter statistics. Radioplan offers two opportunities: www. or direct pixel values per pixel New Result Set New Result Set New Result Set Histogram histogram out of values Table Store in Project (as Report) cell-based values Cell Visual Fig. surface plot. or a set of performance counters. a set of results from one simulation run. Moreover. Analysis in Cell Visuals Parameter Set Temporal Analysis in X-Y Chart Diagrams Inspecting Individual Plot Data Statistical Analysis in Histogram Charts Summary Report in a formatted table Presentation in a Table Internal/External Analysis Fig.com . chart diagram. it is possible to convert arbitrary data given in a table into a new result set.actix. To enable the direct comparison of results obtained from different simulation runs. 12-3 Data transformation options supported by Radioplan A result set is the summary of all parameter sets loaded into Radioplan in one import step. for example. a set of drive test files. histogram. 12-3.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 251 Spatial Analysis in Surface Plots Manipulating Surface Plots Coinciding Different Surface Plots Statistical Analysis of Surface Plots Identifying Trouble Spots Cell Param.e. The principal data conversion opportunities are presented in Fig. 12-2 Supported types of result analysis The great flexibility of the data evaluation in Radioplan is furthermore evident from the fact that all the different data presentation means (i.

in particular they cannot be deleted. a project. An example of the hierarchical result parameters tree for results from a dynamic network simulation is shown in Fig. 12-4.actix. UE-specific parameters additionally have an associated position. Result sets from other projects in the database can be made accessible by choosing Show Results of all Projects from the context menu of an arbitrary item in the Result tab of the tree window (i. Other parameters can be displayed as cell visuals or also mapped on the cell areas according to their associated site or cell. In surface plots. In order to distinguish the parameters from different result sets. Fig.com . a result set. www. The visibility of other projects’ results is controlled by the user rights management. UE-specific parameters can be presented directly at their associated position. and parameter sets are displayed in a hierarchical tree structure in the Results tab of the tree window. This means that a user can only see the results from those projects that he has authorized access to. results from other projects cannot be modified. result categories. The symbol indicates the time relation of the parameters.1. The different projects with their result sets. This is indicated by the combined symbol . The time stamp is given in frames (in case of UMTS/FDD simulation data) or in seconds. Parameter names from different result sets are properly amended by suffices as described below. a category. This suffix is added automatically and it is unique for all parameters of a result set. the parameter names are extended by an appropriate numbered suffix. all parameters are monitored in conjunction with a time stamp. Moreover.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 252 • • Several result sets can be held in a project in parallel. alternatively. or a parameter).4.e. 12-4 Sample view of the Results tab of the tree window In general. The cell areas are determined from the pathloss data and the pilot powers as given by the Best Serving Cell layer described in section 3. A parameter itself is a record that contains all the items given in Table 12-1.

The time stamp (UMTS frame number or time instant) when the parameter was monitored. [R-TecRef]. Parameters without position information can nevertheless be displayed in a surface plot. For this purpose. UEs. The owner of the parameter (e. if the parameter is related to the ID and to the Assigned NE. e. An instance number to distinguish between different instances of e. Parameters related to different carrier frequencies or network layers as. the Parameter DL_SIR_DPDCH_dB stands for DPDCH Downlink SIR and is given in dB. Carrier Frequency (optional) A parameter set is the agglomerate of all monitored values for a specific parameter represented by its name.1. measures related to inter-frequency HO can be associated with an indicator for the carrier frequency. It can be used to select result parameters for presentation in different ways and www. The key to the extremely flexible result analysis system of Radioplan is the results selection dialog. In the sequel. a power value related to a UE can be distinguished by this parameter for different cells. beginning from 1. Positions are available for UE-specific parameters as well as for measurement data.g. The value for the parameter. each creating a new result data layer. e. for example a Tx power from a cell to a certain UE instance.g. Parameters have certain properties: • • • • Parameters are assigned to a specific network element.g. each result parameter has a context menu that can be selected with the right mouse button. are distinguished by their instance number. Read more about the result parameter capabilities in section 12. A flag for numerical values indicates. an analysis with regard to the carrier frequency can be useful. 12. For example. this parameter contains the snapshot number. site. The unit is separated by an underscore. Value Time Stamp Position (X and Y value) [m] (optional) ID Instance Assigned NE (optional) The current position of a UE at the given frame number. can be either a numeric or a string value. An ID of an assigned network element. the secondary network element is denoted as Assigned NE to characterize this unique relationship.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 253 Table 12-1 Items of a parameter Item Description Parameter Name The name of the parameter. a UE type. If a parameter is associated with two specific network elements.actix.4. Different network elements. In case of snapshot simulation results. cell. Especially in hierarchical network structures. Radioplan presents the unit in brackets []. For instance.4. They are mapped onto the cell coverage areas as predicted by the Best Serving Cell plot (see section 3.4 Analyzing Result Parameters All result parameters in the Results tab of the tree window can be displayed and analyzed in various ways. …). These parameters can be presented in spatial views. the term ‘parameter’ is also used as a synonym for a parameter set.. please refer to [R-Meas]. In indicator for the carrier frequency or network layer that this parameter belongs to.1).g. The instance number is unique over all UEs. if the value is a finite value or a NaN (-Infinity and +Infinity values are handled as NaN’s).com . a UE.

The new values in the right column can be edited. for example: ▫ For a result set created by a drive test measurement import. With this function it is possible to e. 12-5.1 Analysis Capabilities of Result Parameters Each result parameter has a context menu that offers the following functionalities: • • • • • • Select… leads to the results selection dialog.2. Collapse All is used to collapse the category folders in the tree completely. and Show Results of all Projects is used to make the results of all those projects visible that the user is authorized to access according to the user rights management. ▫ In order to manipulate the IDs contained in a result set.com . refer to Fig. and any other strings in the result set.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 254 granularity. see [R-Meas]. see section 12. and Delete All Results in Project… is used to remove all result sets with their parameters that are loaded into the currently open project from the database and from the binary file system (with an according warning message). Delete Result Set… is used to remove the entire results set including all of its parameters from the database and from the binary file system (with an according warning message). if their feeders are exchanged. Delete this Parameter… is used to remove the corresponding parameter from the database and from the binary file system (with an according warning message).12.4. a certain selection in the results selection dialog represents a filter for the result database of the current Radioplan project. Basically. Then a dialog with a mapping table between old and new values is shown. Expand All is used to expand the category folders in the tree completely. The entire result set – only of the currently opened project – has some more functions in its context menu: • • • • • Edit… is used to edit all available IDs. Direct Surface Plot is used to directly create a surface plot layer from this result parameter applying the current settings in the results selection dialog. Assigned NEs. Rename Result Set… is used to assign this result set a new name. Aggregate Result Set… can be used to aggregate the contained data. 12. the Edit… function from the context menu can be used. www. exchange the IDs of two measured cells in a measurement result set. More functions may be available depending on the type of the result set. For a result set created by a performance counter import.actix.4. The configuration of the results selection dialog is detailed in section 12. either by choosing an existing string value from the pulldown list or completely freely by entering a new string. Create Default Plots… can be used as a shortcut for the display of surface plots for selected parameters.g.

First all result sets that shall be deleted must be selected using the <Shift> and <Ctrl> keys in combination with the mouse or using keyboard commands (arrow keys in combination with <Shift>. there are more options for the deletion of multiple result sets in one step. A warning dialog appears in order to avoid unintended deletion.4. Using this dialog.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 255 Fig. 12-5 Edit result set IDs dialog In addition to the context menu entries to delete result sets. all relevant settings can be adjusted for the parameter analysis – as described in the following sections. and <Space>).com . <Ctrl>. Fig. 12-6 shows the results selection dialog. www.2 Results Selection Dialog The key to analyze the result data in Radioplan is the results selection dialog. 12.actix. It can be accessed directly from the context menu of the desired parameter or by double-clicking the parameter item itself. Then all the selected result sets are deleted in one go by either choosing Delete Result Set… from one of its context menus or by pressing <Delete>.

Instances. Note that the underlying data are loaded into the memory for the currently selected parameter set to determine all available IDs.4. The default entry ‘ALL’ means. Instance. a traced mobile in a very flexible manner. This technique enables the analysis of a parameter from a global point of view down to a specific instance. 12-6 Results selection dialog 12. 12-7.actix.com . that the parameters of all the available entries in the respective category (ID. and carrier frequencies. e. Assigned NEs. Instances.4. Subset of Cells by Carrier) are considered during the data analysis.5. The latter two filter conditions can be specified in the Spatial/Temporal Restrictions groups as explained in subsection 12. Assigned NE. Assigned NEs.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 256 Fig. The user can decide whether he would like to analyze the data of all network element items of a certain parameter set or he can choose the data of a subset or a single network element. the currently selected parameter is shown in the combo box and can be changed here as well. In other words the desired parameter sets can be filtered by selecting one or more IDs. The operating mode of the result parameter selection as a filter is demonstrated in Fig. or carrier frequencies as well as by selecting an observation time period and/or a geographical region (simulation/analysis area). www.1 Result Filter In the left part of the dialog.2.g.2.

In this list field for results parameters whose ID’s or Assigned NE’s NE type is “cell”. or table). surface plot. Unit Caption ID Instance Assigned NE Subset of Cells by Carrier www. and is also displayed in the created presentation of the parameters (e. Even non-consecutive Assigned NEs can be selected using the <Ctrl> key.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 257 Parameter (Set) ID Instance Assigned NE Carrier Time Period / Snapshots Area DB Filter Parameter with • selected ID(s) • selected Instance(s) • selected Assigned NE(s) • selected Carrier(s) • selected Time Period / Snapshots • selected Area (Simulation/Analysis) Graphical Presentation as: • • • • • Surface Plot Cell Visual Chart Graph Histogram Table Fig. and is also displayed in the created presentation of the parameters (e. It is derived from the parameter name and the settings in the results selection dialog. histogram.g. Table 12-2 Result parameter identification Parameter Description Parameter In this list field the parameter name can be chosen. surface plot. It is possible to select a group of Assigned NEs while holding down the <Shift> key. In this list field the user can choose one or a subset of the available instance IDs that match the specified parameter and ID in the fields above.g. or table). whereas all cells in this subset transmit on the same carrier frequency.com . It is possible to select a group of cell subsets while holding down the <Shift> key. In addition. a subset of cells can be selected. The caption of the parameter. It is derived from the settings in the resultsparameters. Even nonconsecutive cell subsets can be selected using the <Ctrl> key.actix. 12-7 Filtering effect of the results selection dialog A description of the different result parameter identification characteristics are given in Table 12-2. Even non-consecutive Instances can be selected using the <Ctrl> key. then this parameter is already preselected. diagram. time and area of a parameter can be restricted by the according flags and ranges to the right of the results selection dialog. It is possible to select a group of Instances while holding down the <Shift> key.ini files. diagram. In this list field the user can choose among the available Assigned Network Elements that match the parameter specified in the field above. Even nonconsecutive IDs can be selected using the <Ctrl> key. If the result dialog was opened from a certain parameter. histogram. The unit of the parameter. It is possible to select a group of IDs while holding down the <Shift> key. In this list field the user can choose among the available network element IDs that match the parameter specified in the field above.ini and resultparameters_measurements.

For raster plots. The resolution of the grid or the average pixel distance in continuous plots can be adjusted by the Pixel Size. location-base data can be plotted at the exact positions associated with the respective values. it can be chosen. DIFFERENCE: The maximal difference of the values is stored into the pixel. PROBABILITY: The probability per pixel is computed for the values contained in each pixel compared to a numerical reference value using a comparison operator (out of <. =. This feature can be used later to animate the temporal behavior of that parameter in a layer slide show (refer to section 12.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 258 Results can be represented in spatial views (surface plots). it is possible to adjust that function. LIN STDDEV: The standard deviation of linear values is stored into the pixel. Finally. the results selection dialog chooses a reasonable combination function by default. This option is to be chosen for the linear averaging of values that are given in dB. MIN: The parameter with the minimum value is stored into the pixel. all this information is shown in a tooltip when the mouse pointer is above a certain pixel. LOG STDDEV: The standard deviation of logarithmic values is stored into the pixel. however. the values are combined. COUNT: The number of overlapping parameter sets is stored into the pixel. LIN AVERAGE (BEST): All values of the ID with the highest values of the pixel. if the data of the non-empty pixels is presented graphically in a surface plot (checkbox Surface Plot (Graphic)) or in an Excel-like table (checkbox Raw Data (Table)). reasons for dropped calls etc.g. Note. The following combination functions are available and can be selected from the Function list field: • • • • • • • • • • MAX: The parameter with the maximum value is stored into the pixel. it can be chosen.4. Furthermore.2. the grid has an equal resolution in the X and Y directions. www. The configuration for these types of presentation are described in more detail below.2. >. the resulting average is logarithmized again.2 Surface Plots A surface plot presents the selected parameter sets in a spatial view as grid-based data or continuous plot. Otherwise. <>. all values per pixel are de-logarithmized. The table represents exactly the data shown graphically in a surface plot. An overview of the result configuration options for surface plots is given in Table 12-3. The tooltips can be switched on or off in the display settings dialog. If the values of the selected parameter sets are strings (e. or as a histogram. or in Excel-like tables. 12. averaged linearly per pixel. the corresponding IDs and instances of the parameter sets are stored in the pixel together with the values. >=. LIN AVERAGE: All values are averaged linearly per pixel. Then.10).). If two or more parameter values overlap in a raster pixel. Only the first parameter is stored in a pixel. or <=). only the value is shown in the tooltip. The latter presentation option enables a comfortable post-processing of the data in further applications.5. given in meters.actix. see section 3. that only if the MAX or MIN combination algorithms were selected. According to the type of parameter. all others are not added. Using the option Evaluate in Subperiods it is possible to create several surface plots from a parameter that consecutively cover the entire given time period. if the data is represented in graphical views (surface plots. In this case. in charts over time.5.com . charts). LOG AVERAGE: Before averaging. the data combination algorithms are ignored except for the COUNT function. This option is to be chosen for deriving the standard deviation of values given in dB. In the latter case.

this value specifies the average distance between pixels. Using the Interpolation flag. the parameter is shown in a surface plot creating a new layer. thus. the subperiods are as twice as long and overlap by 50 percent. The options to choose from are: ‘MAX’. ‘COUNT’.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 259 Table 12-3 Surface plot result configuration Parameter Description Unit Surface Plot or Mapped Surface Plot Output to Cell Visual If this radio button is checked. the areas between the originally set pixels are filled with interpolated values. distant pixels. the number of separate consecutive surface plots. In case this switch is activated. Each of these subperiods gets plotted into a separate surface plot. ‘LIN AVERAGE’. Here. When enabling the option Most Reliable Values. there could be single extreme values that are clearly wrong and that would distort the average or other statistical measure.10. This feature is especially useful in connection with the Layer Slide Show. When used within a Layer Slide Show. a continuous plot will be created where each value is presented as an individual pixel at its exact associated position. — — Values Most Reliable Values — — Continuous Plot — Raster Plot Interpolation — — Pixel Size / Avg.5. For a parameter with cell names as ID. if several values fall into a single pixel.com . refer to section 12. Evaluate in Subperiods m — # of Periods Smooth Animation # — www. — — Raw Data (Table) Function If this radio button is checked. In case of a continuous plot. refer to section 12. This option is useful for plots that usually consist of single.10. This way (almost) entirely covering plots can be created. Specifies the number of subperiods. if the ‘PROBABILITY’ combination function is selected.2*Std. ‘LIN STDDEV’. where the cell-based values are mapped to the cell symbols.Dev. as an alternative to the Mapped Surface Plot output. only the values lying in a range of +/. For a parameter with cell names as ID. By choosing this radio button. ‘DIFFERENCE’. a raster plot with the given pixel size will be created. a Mapped Surface Plot will be created.actix. Dst. the parameter is shown in a table sorted with respect to the associated position / site / cell / carrier. a number of subperiods can be specified. By choosing this radio button. ‘LIN AVERAGE (BEST)’. The pixel width and height for the surface plot. for the Cell Visual no best serving cell areas caluculation is required. ‘MIN’. Especially in case of analysing measurements. A comparison operator and a numerical reference value can be chosen. ‘PROBABILITY’. around the average in each pixel are considered for the binning. the traces of the individual UEs move much smoother. ‘LOG AVERAGE’. where the cell-based values are mapped to the best serving area of the cell. an output to a Cell Visual can be selected. and ‘LOG STDDEV’. In contrast to the Mapped Surface Plot.5. This list field offers different ways to combine location related values of a parameter.

For instance. The default style is a line without symbols. the user wants to create a set of charts for the downlink transmit power on a DPCH for a specific UE instance for each cell. To create charts for all cells. it is a Boolean group function. A scaling factor can be specified additionally. Otherwise. A line style can be specified using the Style list box. In the following.3 Chart Graphs Most of the dynamics of a radio network can be observed by representing measurements over time. Using the Add to Existing Chart or Add to Existing Table options. the ID or Assigned NE is applied to the corresponding graph as a label to distinguish between several graphs created in one step. all the available data is presented in one common curve or column in the table. Like COUNT.2. if more than one UE of this type were activated. one of the following group functions can be chosen: • • • • • • • • FIRST VALUE: The first value (with respect to its position in the database) is stored into the field. LOG SUM: The logarithmic sum of all values is stored into the field. if different parameter sets shall be compared graphically in one chart.4. the ALL item shall be active in the Assigned NE box. Radioplan suppresses ‘empty’ graphs. if the data of different parameter sets shall be compared. the parameter ‘DL_TxPower_DPCH – Cell [dBm]’ must be chosen by double-clicking it. A label text can be defined in the Y Axis Label field. this group function enables the display of string messages in time charts. Since for each pair of frame and ID / Assigned NE exactly one field is available in such a cross table.com . LAST VALUE: The last value (with respect to its position in the database) is stored into the field. and a separate column is created for each ID or network element assigned to it. Also this option enables the direct comparison of equal measurements obtained from different simulation runs represented by different result sets. if any of the group functions are inactive. COUNT: The number of data items related to the ID / Assigned NE and frame is stored into the field. An example shall demonstrate the usage of the group function capabilities. SUM: The sum of all values is stored into the field. a group function can be specified to combine all the available data related to this field.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 260 12. This option is useful. In order to create a separate graph for each of the cells. The underlying algorithm is comparable to a cross table. Instances. where the rows represent the UMTS frames. In some cases it may be useful to present a graph by discrete symbols without connections between adjacent points. Secondly. If no group function was selected. the chart is not cleared – the currently selected parameter set is displayed in the same chart distinguished by colors and usually other line styles or in the same table as another column. It is possible to add a set of data to a chart (or table) that already contains items. for instance if events such as handover requests shall be drawn over time. First. special group functions were introduced.actix. but the ranges differ www. This text is only applied to a graph. respectively. Assigned NEs. an Instance must be chosen. In order to allow for a quick and easy access to graphs related to one or more IDs. The result of this group function is like: (COUNT > 0) ? 1: 0. Thus. This group function enables the display of string messages in time charts. If one of the checkboxes Group ID’s or Group Assigned NE’s is selected. only graphs for those cells are created where a connection was available. a UE profile (ID) can be selected from the list box. This group function is recommended for values in dB/dBm. the Group Assigned NE’s checkbox must be switched on. MIN: The minimal value is stored into the field. carrier frequencies. This feature can be useful. MAX: The maximal value is stored into the field. EVENT: The pure existence of at least one event related to the ID / Assigned NE and frame is stored into the field. or groups of them. Thus. A graph can be drawn as a combination of lines and symbols.

The options to choose from are: ‘FIRST VALUE’. Table 12-4 Time chart result configuration Parameter Description Parameter over Time (Chart) If this radio button is checked. ‘MAX’. The presentation of the parameter sets in tables is a convenient way to statistically evaluate the data inside Radioplan or to export the data for a post-processing in other applications. ‘SUM’. If the data are shown in a table. A line style related to the chart graphs to be created can be specified. and ‘MIN’. If this checkbox is selected. the parameter is shown as a curve vs. a time axis given either in seconds or in UMTS frames. the parameter is shown in a table sorted with respect to the associated frame number / time stamp. the table display is not cleared when a new parameter is to be viewed. if one of the group checkboxes is switched on. If this checkbox is checked. When creating a chart graph from snapshot simulation results. More precisely. The time unit is determined by the respective selection in the Temporal Restrictions group to the right of the results selection dialog. The analysis of the non-numeric (string) data is always possible using the table option. Instead. if NaN values were found between them. Finally. ‘LOG SUM’.actix. This parameter is usually initialized with the parameter name (without unit). the chart display is not cleared when a new parameter is to be viewed. For instance. it can be chosen if the data are presented graphically in a diagram (checkbox Parameter over Time (Chart)) or in an Excel-like table (checkbox Parameter over Time (Table)). ‘LAST VALUE’. the parameter is shown as a time plot in a chart. If this checkbox is checked. An overview of the result configuration options for chart graphs is given in Table 12-4. If this checkbox is selected. ‘EVENT’.com . Instead. occurring NaN or Infinite values can be suppressed if the data are presented in a table. this feature may be useful. the snapshot index is mapped on the x-axis (instead of UMTS frame number or time). if an Active Set size graph and downlink Tx power DPCH graph(s) shall be drawn in one chart. For instance. for each selected Assigned NE a separate graph (time chart) / column (table) is created. String values cannot be displayed in a diagram except one of the group features is switched on and the group function is equal to ‘COUNT’ or ‘EVENT’. If this checkbox is checked. The label of the time curve in the chart. If this radio button is checked. the new data are added to the table as another column. the new curve is added to the chart in another color and according to the current line style. if handover requests are shown graphically over time. A numerical value that scales the values of the graphs to be created. Add to Existing Chart Parameter over Time (Table) Add to Existing Table Group ID’s Group Assigned NE’s Group Function Y Axis Label Style Suppress NaNs Scaling Factor www. it may be useful to scale the Active Set size graph by a factor of 10. Data items of numerical values are not connected. This option is only active. A function can be specified that is used to combine the data for each pair of frame / time stamp and ID / Assigned NE. for each selected ID a separate graph (time chart) / column (table) is created. NaN values as well as infinite values force a break in the curve of the graph.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 261 significantly. ‘COUNT’. occurring NaNs can be suppressed by checking the box Suppress NaNs.

It is clear that histograms can only be generated from numeric data. These results analysis settings are defined as given in Table 12-6. or in an Excel-like table (checkbox Histogram (Table)).2.4. the parameter is shown in a histogram. Table 12-6 Results analysis restrictions Parameter Description Unit Spatial Restrictions Whole Area Simulation Area Analysis Area Using this radiobutton.com .actix. — hh:mm:ss www. as Logarithmic Values (dB / dBm) A second graph / column is added that represents the CDF of the histogram.4 Histograms A histogram is frequently used to determine the statistical distribution of a parameter set. The start time of the temporal selection of the currently analyzed result parameter. NaN values will be automatically suppressed. the mean value and the standard deviation for the histogram is shown as an additional legend. Inside the diagram the mean value and the standard deviation can be shown as a label optionally. — 12. the result analysis is confined to the analysis area.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 262 12. The data of the histogram can be presented graphically (checkbox Histogram (Chart)). respectively.2. The bin width for the histogram. If this checkbox is active. If this radio button is checked. the analysis of the results can be restricted to a certain area and/or a time interval. The items in the result dialog are summarized in Table 12-5. the result analysis is confined to the simulation area. the parameter is shown in a table that contains the values of the histogram. Deviation Mean and StdDev. the mean value and the standard deviation are calculated under the assumption that the histogram was created from logarithmic values (usually given in dB).4. If this checkbox is active. Using this radiobutton. — — Bin Width according to the parameter — — Show CDF Show Mean Value and Std. the all results are used for analysis. Table 12-5 Histogram result configuration Parameter Description Unit Histogram (Chart) Histogram (Table) If this radio button is checked. Using this radiobutton.5 Spatial and Temporal Restrictions In the right part of the dialog. — — — Temporal Restrictions Use Time Information Start Time If this radiobutton is selected. the time scale of all diagrams will be given in seconds. A bin width in units of the currently selected parameter can be adjusted to define the resolution of the histogram. Additionally to the histogram a CDF can be created.

and some further information. different blocking/dropping reasons or cells can be distinguished by their colors.4) by clicking into the legend area to the left. the results analysis is restricted to the given time period. Detect Data Range Restrict Analysis to a Time or Frame Period On pressing this button.actix. the number of different strings is determined. hh:mm:ss — UMTS frames / snapshots UMTS frames / snapshots — Last The last frame of the result parameter value to be considered. This period can be specified in terms of a start/end time or a first/last UMTS frame below. This way it is possible to overlay several cell based parameter plots and compare the cell coverage (e. For UE related parameters. or analysis area). for comparison between planning and measured data). The first frame of the result parameter value to be considered.5 Results Analysis with Surface Plots A surface plot consists of a legend to the left and a plot area to the right. and each string is assigned a different color. Depending on the data combination function. If this checkbox is activated. If non-numeric values (strings) are detected in the result data. and value (numeric or nonnumeric) for the underlying item located at the current position of the mouse pointer. the analysis would be restricted to the range between the first and the last snapshot. Then a surface plot is created directly without showing the results selection dialog. In case of snapshot simulation results. Either the parameter item in the Results tab of the tree window is double-clicked to open the results selection dialog. In case of snapshot simulation results.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 263 Parameter Description Unit End Time Use Frame/Snapshot Information First The end time of the temporal selection of the currently analyzed result parameter. 12-8. However. There the radio button Surface Plot (Graphic) must be selected. a tooltip shows the ID. regarding the data combination function within a pixel etc. www. The other possibility is to choose the entry Direct Surface Plot from the context menu of the respective parameter item in the Results tab of the tree window. this value contains the last snapshot to be considered. the time scale of all diagrams will be given in UMTS frames. An example of a result surface plot is given in Fig. There are two possibilities to create a result surface plot. The plot area contains the values for the previously selected parameters. — The different checkboxes can be used to enforce an analysis that is specific to a time period or a region (whole area.com . only those parameters are regarded where the associated network element is situated inside the chosen area. In case of snapshot simulation results. the actual parameter that is displayed. Numeric values are scaled automatically and are mapped by the currently selected color palette to presentation colors. the according values are mapped onto the cell coverage areas using unambiguous color codes for each cell scrambling code.g. simulation area. 12. the valid time period is determined for the currently selected parameter based on the loaded result data. this value contains the first snapshot to be considered. Using this technique. If parameters associated with cells are displayed. instance.) are used for creating the surface plot.g. If this radiobutton is selected. For cell/site specific parameters. the current settings in this dialog (e. The legend shows the color palette with the current data scaling (for numeric data). the strings are shown in the lower left corner of the plot area as an additional legend. The scale and the color palette can be modified in the layer settings dialog (see section 3. only positions inside the (possibly) chosen area are considered.5.

This enables a free comparison • • • 5 Read more on the database filter functions of the results selection dialog in section 12.2. An impressive way of comparing two layers is to alternately double-clicking on either of them.5. such that their presentation is constantly toggled. To make a distinct layer visible. Layers can have individual graphical presentations.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 264 Infinite or NaN values are suppressed.e. A corresponding warning appears in the message window. The properties of the currently active layer can be edited in the layer settings dialog by clicking into the black legend area to the left.1 Result Surface Plot Layers For every displayed result parameter with a certain database filtering5 a new layer is created.1.4. Furthermore it is possible to save this picture into a bitmap (for instance a JPEG file) using the File Save Plot as Image menu item. i. the color palette. For an efficient result analysis. All available result layers are listed in the Layers tab of the tree window. the individual color range transparency. the alpha blending factor (opacity). Layers can be overlaid. 12. just active the corresponding checkbox in the Layers tab of the tree window. all the usual layer evaluation functions can be used.actix. In particular. In order to bring up or push down a certain layer. etc. a layer can be dragged graphically by the mouse to another level in the layers list.com . Fig. also for configuration data layers and image layers. just double-click on its item in the Layers tab of the tree window. Interesting graphical properties of result layers for a flexible analysis are. The described analysis functions can be used for any type of layer. one can reorder the layers by the Move <…> functions from that layer’s context menu. 12-8 Sample view of a surface result plot The currently displayed contents of the viewing area (including legend as shown in Fig. among others. Alternatively. 12-8) can be transferred to any other application via the clipboard using the normal copy/paste functions. www. the following options seem to be interesting: • To display an already existing single layer.

2 Identifying a Certain Data Item for Trouble Shooting In a surface plot. Now the user has a variety of opportunities to further analyze the trouble spot: • • By simply clicking the OK button in the results selection dialog. and optimized network setups. 12-9 Identifying a trouble spot for further analysis The results selection dialog is opened where the identified item (in terms of ID. This situation is shown in the left part of Fig. if it e. that each pixel only contains a single value. 12-9. On right-clicking at an identified trouble hot-spot in a result data surface plot. simulation results. However. it must be possible to investigate a certain result item from a position. Further constraints could be chosen for the identified parameter ID such as another data combining function. This is required for an effective trouble-shooting analysis of the network. usually a parameter is shown for several IDs/Instances simultaneously. then this special parameter item can be investigated by choosing the menu entry Investigate this Item…. Radioplan offers an individual network trouble-shooting by using the same basic result parameter evaluation methods as previously introduced in conjunction with the parameter filtering functions. the value cannot be associated with a certain network element instance. another pixel size. the identified parameter could be presented solely in a new surface plot layer.com .4. the MIN or MAX functions should be used when creating the surface plot to ensure. This is very useful for a quick overview of the spatial distribution of that parameter across the entire simulation area. Consequently. a context menu is shown.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 265 between network configuration data. If a valid result pixel was hit.actix. real measurement data. and Assigned NE) is highlighted which is shown in the right part of Fig.5. etc.g. to identify and localize a special problem in the network at a certain time stamp. 12-9 as an example. A detailed description on the layer concept of Radioplan can be found in section 3. Note that this function is only available if the chosen pixel contains a single value. Otherwise. www. Fig. contains an average value or a probability. Instance. 12.

A radiobutton to reuse the surface plot layer that the manipulate layer function was called from. e. www. ‘SUB’.actix. Invert (Multiply by -1) Reciprocal (1/x) Function Compare A function to invert the values of an existing layer. ‘GREATER OR EQUAL’.e. This function can be applied to any kind of layer. it can be manipulated in various ways to either create a new layer or update the original one. Only pixels inside the analysis area are manipulated. another parameter can be chosen to find out the connection between different parameters for the same ID/Instance in the trouble spot. ‘UNEQUAL’. or in a table. A function to process the layer with a value. it logarithmizes the values of the original layer. This function is invoked by using the entry Manipulate this Layer… from a layer’s context menu in the Layers tab of the tree window. 12. This function can be applied to any kind of layer. Overwrite this Layer Output Convert [dBm] -> [W] A function to convert logarithmic power values (assumed being given in dBm) into linear power values (given in Watts). A function to compare the values of a layer with a reference. For pixels containing 0 this function creates empty pixels. where the pixels of the resulting layer are calculated from the pixels of the original layer by a selectable function. Generally speaking. ‘LESS OR EQUAL’. Available comparison functions are ‘LESS’. the unit is not checked.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 266 • • • Since the particular ID and possibly the Instance of the trouble parameter are already identified. Last but not least. A function to calculate the reciprocal of the values in a layer. and ‘DIV’. This dialog is shown in Fig. Table 12-7 Parameters to manipulate a layer Parameter Layer Options Description Use only Pixels inside the Simulation Area Use only Pixels inside the Analysis Area Target Layer Only pixels inside the simulation area are manipulated.com .3 Manipulating a Surface Plot Layer Once having created a surface plot layer. it delogarithmizes the values of the original layer. i. ‘EQUAL’. the trouble parameter could be displayed in a chart graph. in a histogram. ‘MUL’.5. the time span could be further limited. The resulting layer pixels are either 1 (if condition fulfilled) or 0 (if condition not met). the unit is not checked. Create new Layer A radiobutton to create a new surface plot layer from the given layer. Generally speaking. 12-10. These are just some proposals for possible options to further track down a potential problem and to investigate the network behavior in detail. The elements of it are described in Table 12-7. ‘GREATER’. Available operations are ‘ADD’.g. Then the dialog is shown where several manipulation functions are offered. Convert [W] -> [dBm] A function to convert linear power values (assumed being given in Watts) into logarithmic power values (given in dBm). The way of data presentation can be changed.

result layers with the continuous plot option) cannot be manipulated either. either be it network configuration data. simulation results. Here. the starting point can be surface plot layers or cell visuals of the data.4 Coinciding Surface Plot Layers Another interesting option is to investigate the possible relation between two different parameters. It is not possible to manipulate image layers or graphics layers because they contain no value information in pixels. For cell visuals only a combination function can be chosen. 12-10 Manipulate layer dialog The manipulate layer function can be applied to the following types of layers: • • • • • configuration layers. optimization layers. Furthermore. Using the entry Coincide with other Layer/Visual… from a layer’s or cell visual’s context menu in the Layers tab of the tree window.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 267 Fig. and post-processing layers.actix. 12. 12-11. drive test data. www.g. or optimization plots. This dialog is shown in Fig. measurement layers. result layers.com . layers with continuous pixels (e. a dialog is shown where another layer or cell visual and different options for comparison can be chosen. The elements of it are described in Table 12-8. network performance counters.5.

All available surface plot layers from the Layers tab are listed in this list field. ‘AND’. a dot is set in the resulting graph. The first layer is mapped on the y-axis. ‘QUOTIENT’. A function to interrelate two layers. a line for the linear function X = Y is added to the XY scatter graph as a reference. 12-11 Coincide layers dialog Table 12-8 Parameters to coincide layers Parameter Description Current Layer Reference Layer Use only Pixels inside the Simulation Area Use only Pixels inside the Analysis Area Ignore Transparent Pixels Create new Layer The layer from which the dialog was called (cannot be changed).com .Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 268 Fig. Only pixels inside the simulation area are coincided. A radiobutton to create a new surface plot layer from the given two layers. If this checkbox is enabled.actix. The second layer for the comparison. A radiobutton to create a scatter graph from the given two layers. ‘PRODUCT’. The data in the table is the same as is created by the XY Scatter Graph function. Only pixels inside the analysis area are coincided. where the pixels of the layers are interrelated pair wise by a selectable function. ‘MAX’. Available functions are ‘MIN’. and the second layer is mapped on the x-axis. Function Create XY Scatter Graph Add X = Y Line Create XY Scatter Table Create Scatter Statistics (Surface Plot) www. ‘SUM’. A radiobutton to create a scatter statistics plot from the given two layers. For each pixel pair of the layers. Transparent pixels in either layer are excluded from the combination. A radiobutton to create a scatter table from the given two layers. Each pixel that fulfils a certain coverage criterion in both layers is plotted in a color determined from the reference layer’s legend. ‘OR’. and ‘XOR’. ‘DIFFERENCE’. creating a new layer.

Fig. www. The coinciding layers function can be applied to the following types of layers: • • • • • • configuration layers. A possible result is shown in Fig. cell visuals. and post-processing layers or cell visuals. At first it shall be demonstrated how this function can be exploited to identify those regions in a network where users could directly get access. 12-12 Direct access of services in brown (left) and blocked access attempts in green (right) If. result layers with the continuous plot option) cannot be coincided either. 12-12 to the left) it can clearly be seen that there are regions especially at the cell borders where users did not get direct network access.actix. where there was a service attempt.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 269 Parameter Description Create Scatter Statistics (Table) A radiobutton to create a scatter statistics table from the given two layers. 12-13. optimization layers. The results are listed in a table. This can be accomplished by combining the parameters ‘ServiceRequest’ and ‘ServiceBlocked’ from the Service category by an XOR function.and y-axes of the graph (XY scatter graph).g. This result is underlined by the Figure to the right where additionally the blocked services (green) are shown that fill those empty regions.e.com . i. Each pixel that fulfils a certain coverage criterion in both layers is counted. result layers. as another example. and the resulting coverage probability is calculated. i. layers with continuous pixels (e. but no blocking occurred. these regions are empty in the view. the coincide layers function can be used to create a chart graph from the values of these two layers mapped onto the x. In the resulting layer (see Fig. the relation between the best pilot Ec/I0 over the mean pathloss shall be investigated. measurement layers.e. Furthermore. It is not possible to coincide image layers or graphics layers because they contain no value information in pixels.

In order to choose certain dedicated thresholds. As a special case.9. The resulting scatter statistics table contains both the coverage percentage values for the compound threshold settings (in the upper part) as well as the corresponding absolute number of pixels that fulfill the corresponding criteria (in the lower part).actix. www. it is recommended to select the Use Color Steps option in the color palette dialog of the respective layers and then specify the thresholds. The principle of the scatter statistics is that the coverage percentage of both layers according to certain threshold combinations are determined and listed in a table. 12-13 Sample chart graph of two coincided layers Similar to the scatter graph.com . For this particular case there is also a special function available which is described in section 12.5. in the above example the combined coverage of pilot RSCP and pilot Ec/I0 in a UMTS network were calculated. The applied thresholds are directly derived from the color legend of the layers. 12-14. This function allows to have several diagrams and tables simultaneously on the screen to easily compare them. An example of a scatter statistics table is shown in Fig. also scatter statistics can be calculated from coinciding two layers. Chart graphs and tables from coincided layers can also be created in separate windows when holding down the <Shift> key while pressing the OK button of the coincide layer dialog.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 270 Fig.

the underlying pixel data of the surface plot is translated into a statistical distribution shown in a chart or a table. respectively.5 Deriving Histograms from Surface Plots The data of the currently active surface plot layer can be easily translated into a histogram view. This function allows to have several diagrams and tables simultaneously on the screen to easily compare them. 12-14 Scatter statistics between pilot RSCP and Ec/I0 from a UMTS/FDD measurement 12. Histograms from surface plot layers can also be created in separate windows when holding down the <Shift> key while selecting the according menu entry. 12-15. www.com .Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 271 Fig. This procedure is demonstrated in Fig. 12-15 Creating a histogram from a surface plot layer The presentation of the histogram can further be modified as described in section 12.5.7. Using the functions of the submenu Results Histogram from Surface Plot.actix. Fig. The same functions can be reached from the context menu of result data layers (submenu Histogram from Surface Plot) which can be displayed by right-clicking into a surface plot of that result parameter. This feature may be useful if a spatial distribution instead of a temporal distribution is required.

The same functions can be reached from the context menu of result data layers (submenu Data Table from Surface Plot) which can be displayed by right-clicking into a surface plot of that result parameter.5. 12.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 272 12. The data in the table can further be modified and post-processed as described in section 12. This function allows to have several diagrams and tables simultaneously on the screen to easily compare them. Using the functions of the submenu Results Data Table from Surface Plot. 12-16. make the data from a coincided layer available for further analysis in the embedded clipboard (see section 12.5. Tables from surface plot layers or cell visuals can also be created in separate windows when holding down the <Shift> key while selecting the according menu entry.6 Extracting Tables from Surface Plots and Cell Visuals The pixel-oriented data of the currently active surface plot layer can be easily extracted into a table. First the respective layer must be activated by clicking on its item in the Layers tab of the tree window. This feature may be useful to e.8. 12-17. 12-16 Creating a table from a surface plot layer This function is also available for cell visuals. In this case.7 Cell Statistics from a Layer Each layer can be statistically evaluated over the best cell areas based on the pathloss maps and cell (pilot) powers. Fig. the underlying pixel data of the surface plot is transferred into a table. it can only be invoked from the context menu when right-clicking into the cell visual in the viewing area and choosing Data Table from Cell Visual.2) or an external application. The resulting table contains a mapping between the cell IDs and their respective values from the cell visual. www.8.com . Choose one of the subentries of Cell Statistics from this context menu to evaluate statistical measures of the selected layer over the best cell areas as shown in Fig. This procedure is shown in Fig. Then a right mouse click into the viewing area lets the surface plot context menu appear.g.actix.

When holding down the <Shift> key during invocation of the function. 12-18 Example of the cell statistics for a pilot Ec/I0 plot www. See Fig.g.actix. the table is opened in a separate window.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 273 Fig.com . 12-18 for an example. average and standard deviation) of the values from the chosen layer for each cell area in combination with the number of relevant bins for statistical puposes. 12-17 Deriving cell statistics from a surface plot layer The result of this function is a table giving various statistical measures (e. Fig. Cells that have no best cell pixel in the selected area are suppressed in the table.

In order to choose dedicated thresholds. Then a right mouse click into the viewing area lets the surface plot context menu appear. First the respective layer must be activated by clicking on its item in the Layers tab of the tree window. The thresholds are directly derived from the color scale of the layer which can be seen when comparing the two Figures above. The given number of bins per clutter class can be used to weigh the importance of each percentage value in a statistical evaluation. Then the table grid context menu is displayed by right-clicking into the marked column. When holding down the <Shift> key during invocation of the function. Clutter classes that do not occur in the selected area are suppressed in the table. The according column containing the values to be mapped must be selected by clicking the respective header field of the table. Choose one of the subentries of Clutter Statistics from this context menu to evaluate the “coverage” of the selected layer according to different thresholds for each clutter class as shown in Fig. In this case it is recommended to choose the option Use Color Steps in the color palette dialog.com . the table is opened in a separate window.8 Clutter Statistics from a Layer Each layer can be statistically evaluated over the clutter classes defined by the clutter matrix. It remains to specify the column containing the Graph Selection cell IDs and proper plot caption/tree label and unit in the appearing dialog. www.actix. 12-19.8. 12-19 Deriving clutter statistics from a surface plot layer The result of this function is a table giving the percentage of the values of the chosen layer being above different thresholds over each clutter class in combination with the number of relevant bins for statistical puposes. See Fig. Fig. More details about the mapped surface plot function from a table can be found in section 12. 12. 12-20 for an example. the color scale of the layer can be modified accordingly.7.5.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 274 This table can be directly used to plot the statistical measures on the best cell areas in a new surface plot layer. The function to choose is Mapped Surface Plot.

4.4. 12. analyze the portions in each value range in a histogram from that layer. and Smooth Animation is commented. Fig. Here. It is recommended to define discrete color steps for the original layer. As an example. ten layers of the Maximum of ‘DL_SIR_DPDCH [dB]’ shall be produced for a layer slide show. the configuration of surface plots was described in section 12. etc.5.9 Discrete Value Layers The values of an existing layer can be discretized according to the current legend thresholds.5.actix. or to coincide it with other layers to assess the coverage of certain parameters. If continuous color shading as applied instead. 12-21 Settings in the results selection dialog to produce a layer slide show www. The resulting discretized layer could be further used to e. The currently displayed layer can be discretized by right-clicking into the layer presentation in the viewing area and choosing Surface Plot Tools Set Pixel Values to Legend Thresholds from the appearing context menu. The basics for the work with layers in Radioplan are explained in section 3.2. Then the exact legend thresholds will be used for discretizing.com . These ten layers can be created with the following settings of the mentioned three parameters. it might be enlightening to animate the dynamics in the network after a dynamic simulation or to visualize drive test data (play-back). This slide show presents multiple surface plots from the layer tree consecutively in the order of their creation.g. Moreover. 12-21. 12-20 Example of the clutter statistics for a best pilot power plot 12. the resulting discretized layer would have equally distributed steps between the maximal and minimal values of the legend.10 Layer Slide Show In order to better understand the manifold of interacting mechanisms in a live UMTS network. Then immediately all pixel values of the layer are exchanged by the corresponding lower legend threshold according to the defined ranges.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 275 Fig. as apparent from Fig. where the layer shall be analyzed according to defined value ranges. the use of the parameters Evaluate in Subperiods. # of Periods. Radioplan offers a slide show of multiple layers of surface plots. This function is particularly useful when using discrete color steps.2.

Once the view is set up properly. The created layers are handled like normal layers. To start a layer slide show. The slide show stops when the user presses the Abort Slide Show button in the appearing pop-up dialog.11 Printing Surface Plots Spatial views with all possibly overlapping surface plot layers can be printed true-to-scale. there is also an icon ( .000. choose Results Layer Slide Show from the menu.g. 1:100.e. e. the time interval between the switching of the layers in the slide show can be chosen between 0 and 5 seconds. several surface plot layers will be automatically created that represent (partly overlapping if option Smooth Animation is selected) time periods within the entire configured time range. the printing process can be started either out of the print icon (tooltip preview window or by using the print command from the File menu or the Print) from the standard toolbar. the layer slide show can be started by pressing the OK button. the included layers are repeated one after the other with the chosen time interval between the switching in a loop. Furthermore. Now.5.actix. When everything is set up right. Then the layer slide show dialog is opened. see Fig. they could be presented normally by double-clicking them in the Layers tab of the tree window. the black legend is automatically displayed in white in all printouts. Also a print preview is available using the menu entry File Print Preview or by clicking icon (tooltip Print Preview) from the standard toolbar. Furthermore. It is also possible to show some layer(s) permanently in the background during the slide show. This can be accomplished by selecting them in the Show Always column. This is especially useful when specifying a dedicated scale factor for the plot to be printed. 12. i. Fig. Alternatively. www. An example of the print the preview is shown in Fig.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 276 As a result of these settings. 12-22. all layers to be included in the slide show should be selected in the Include column. Then distances in the printout could be directly measured with a ruler. 12-23. 12-22 Layer slide show dialog with deactivated image layers In this dialog box.com . tooltip Start Layer Slide Show) in the views toolbar to start a layer slide show.

12-24 Sample view of a chart www. 12-24. Fig.6.com .and y-axes each have labels that are automatically set by default. An example of a diagram showing the transmit power of a speech user while moving through several cells with Soft Handovers in a dynamic network simulation is given in Fig.6 Results Analysis with Charts (Plots over Time) A chart graph presents data in a chart. Several settings for the diagrams can be modified using the axis scale and diagram settings dialog. The x. 12-23 Sample print preview with white legend and true-to-scale alignment 12. Each chart has a freely configurable title (by default derived from the current settings in the results selection dialog). described later in section 12.4.actix.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 277 Fig.

com . Shows a file save dialog to save the diagram as an image. Alternatively. In the appearing dialog.3. All new curves in a chart will inherit the selected style properties. A scaling factor can be specified for the graph presentation.6. Once the user has zoomed into the graph. See [R-Sim] for details.1 Creating a Chart Graph Arbitrary result parameters (either from measurements or simulations) can be presented in a chart graph.2. the <F3> key can be used. the option Parameter over Time (Chart) must be selected. The separate chart graph windows are freely resizable and have an own menu bar. the <F4> key can be used. As an example. the user can choose some additional settings in the results selection dialog to influence the data presentation in the chart in certain ways. Fit To Window Axis Scale and Settings… Reset to default styles 12. However. newly created chart graphs are displayed in the viewing area. All new curves in a chart will use the same specified scaling factor. The chart graph configuration in the results selection dialog is also briefly explained in section 12.and y values of the graph in a separate window.2 Data Evaluation Opportunities in Chart Graphs When creating a chart graph. Restores the default diagram settings. the chart graph is immediately shown in the viewing area. Create Table from Graph Zoom Out Creates a table with two columns representing the x. However. several chart graphs can be visible at the same time which enables an easy comparison between them. The key to create a chart graph from a result parameter is the results selection dialog. it is also possible to create a new chart graph in a separate window by holding down the <Shift> key while creating the diagram. see section 12. the time course of the number of active UEs during a dynamic simulation can be shown by choosing Results Simulation Results Active UEs as Chart. Opens the axis scale and diagram settings dialog to modify the graph presentation. the following settings can be made: • A special line style can be chosen for the graph presentation. Table 12-9 Functions of the menu in a chart graph window Menu Entry File Menu Function Print Save as Image… Close Edit Menu Opens the print dialog.6. Copy Graph Menu Copies the chart to the Windows clipboard.4. Using this option. see section 12.5. Once the user has zoomed into the graph. one zoom stage can be reverted by this command. By default.4. In particular. It can be opened by double-clicking the respective parameter item in the Results tab of the tree window. Each of the Radioplan Modules can have special kinds of chart graphs. On confirming the settings by clicking the OK button of the dialog. by consecutively adding curves to a diagram (see below). Alternatively.6. Closes the chart graph window. The functions of the menu are explained briefly in Table 12-9. different line styles can be chosen for the distinct lines.6.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 278 12.actix. by consecutively adding • www. However. the zoom can be set back to the entire graph by this command.

6. the according grouping functions can be used. i. • • • Once a chart graph was created. In this case it is recommended to choose the option Use Frame Information in the Temporal Restrictions group of the results selection dialog. Usually. Instead. The zoom function in chart graphs is always active.actix. In is accomplished by using the View Create Table separate graph windows. Fig. This Graph Create Table from Graph menu entry. when investigating simulation results it is better to select the time axis in UMTS frames in order to assure a correct presentation of the time curves. the data can be further evaluated in the following ways: • • Single values can be inspected in tooltips. Note that when choosing the latter time scale. an old chart is not deleted. 12-24 is an example of a parameter that is shown for a single selected ID/Instance (UE) and grouped for the Assigned NEs (cells). Thus. Fig. the smallest resolution of the time axis is generally 1 second. It is not useful to use this function for displaying time and frame based result data together in one chart. 12-25 gives an example of the zoom function in chart graphs.and y values of a chart diagram can be extracted into a table with two columns. Also some of the normal zoom functions (zoom out <F3>.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 279 curves to a diagram (see below).e. 12-25 Zooming into a chart graph Charts can be transferred to another application via the clipboard. different scaling factors can be applied to the distinct lines. For snapshot simulation results without time relation. values at a certain time stamp could be associated with different IDs and/or Assigned NEs of that parameter. It is easy to zoom into a chart at an interesting region by dragging a box with the left mouse button. In order to display separate curves for each of those IDs / Assigned NEs.com . However. fit to window <F4>) are available. or they can be saved as Save Plot as Image… item from the menu bar in different an image using the File graphics formats. Moving the mouse pointer on a curve. a parameter is presented in a single curve in a chart graph.3 Creating a Table from a Graph The x. the time axis of the chart graph can either be given in UMTS frames or in seconds (hh:mm:ss format). Fig. the chart is updated with new scaling settings.g. the same function can be called from the Graph www. the new curve(s) are added to the possibly existing ones. 12. • By selecting the Add to Existing Chart option when displaying a parameter in a chart. An analogous function is available for adding columns in a temporal data table. For time related results (e. a tooltip appears showing the coordinates (time stamp and value) of the closest vertex on the curve. measurement data or dynamic simulation results). When the mouse button is released. the snapshot index will be mapped on the x-axis of a chart. irrespective the current mouse pointer mode. for each cell associated with that parameter there is a separate curve in the graph.

depending on the settings in the results selection dialog. a shape is drawn defined by the fill style and the two specified colors. the limits for both X and Y axes can be specified manually. Thus.8. histogram graphs. ‘Vertical Shape’. 12-26 Axis scale and diagram settings dialog In the upper part of the dialog the general appearance of the chart can be influenced. www. The annotation character size can be used to adjust the mean spacing between characters inside the legend. Radioplan stores these background settings for the chart type persistently into the Windows registry. A dialog appears similar to Fig. Using one of the latter three options. If the checkbox Rember Settings is active and the OK button is clicked. The axis scaling can be done automatically by Radioplan (Autoscale checkbox is switched on). Moreover. In separate chart graph windows the same dialog can be accessed from File Print. In the table available in the lower right part of the dialog the annotations of all currently drawn graphs can be modified. The time scale of the diagram can be specified in terms of either UMTS frames or normal time stamps. 12. As default the current minimum and maximum limits are pre-selected. If this feature is deactivated. ‘Horizontal Shape’. The background settings are stored for each graph type separately into the registry. Fig. 12-27. The table data can be further post-processed by means of the statistical evaluation functions available in Radioplan (refer to section 12. 12. the usage is self-explanatory.6. and polar graphs (antenna diagrams) a different background.6. The fill style can be ‘Solid Color’ (only the first color is used).4 Customization of Charts The initial scaling of a chart is determined automatically. that can be opened using the View Axis Scale and Settings… item from the menu bar. In a separate chart graph window. respectively. It is possible to define the axis Graph limits manually using the axis scale dialog. The dialog is shown in Fig.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 280 from Graph menu entry. it is possible to assign XY-graphs. the background color can be modified using two colors and a fill style.com . So a title and the labels for the X and Y axes can be modified in the Title / Labels group. The size and the orientation of the chart on the page can be Graph Page adjusted using the chart page setup dialog. or ‘45° Shape’.5 Printing a Chart Graph Charts can also be printed.actix. this menu entry is also available. Furthermore it is possible to select one or more graphs here to remove them from the current chart. accessible from the View Setup… menu item. 12-26. Note that this value represents a mean size for the maximum amount of characters of labels due to the non-mono spaced font used for the legend.2) or in an external application.

actix. Histograms can only be generated for numeric values of the parameters. Possibly occurring NaNs are not considered when generating the histogram. Basically.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 281 Fig. Besides the actual histogram (quantized version of the probability density function). 12-28 Sample view of a histogram www. Fig. An example for the histogram of the number of visible cells recorded during a UMTS drive test is presented in Fig. 12-28. also the CDF as well as the mean value and the standard deviation of the selected parameter can be inspected.com . a histogram represents the probability distribution of a parameter and can thus reveal statistical properties that could not directly be extracted from a surface plot or a time course of that parameter. the printing process can be started either out of the print preview window or by icon (tooltip Print) from the using the print command from the File menu or the standard toolbar. Once the chart is set up the properly.7 Results Analysis with Histograms Histograms are an important means to statistically evaluate network performance data. 12-27 Chart page setup dialog Also a print preview is available using the menu entry File Print Preview or by clicking icon (tooltip Print Preview) from the standard toolbar. 12.

The functions of the menu are very similar to that of chart graphs. Table 12-10 Functions of the menu in a histogram window Menu Entry File Menu Function Print Save as Image… Close Edit Menu Opens the print dialog. Closes the histogram window. the same function could be invoked from the menu bar Histogram from Surface Plot. www. (despite the configured restrictions/filtering). it is also possible to create a new histogram in a separate window by holding down the <Shift> key while creating the histogram. the data is normalized so that the sum of the bars is equal to 1. newly created histograms are displayed in the viewing area. they are given below in Table 12-10. there was a certain pre-filtering with regard to the positions of the distinct values. There are generally two ways to create a histogram: either directly from the results selection dialog. In the appearing dialog. the histogram is generated based on the complete amount of values of the parameter at hand. Alternatively. several histograms can be visible at the same time which enables an easy comparison between them. irrespective the time stamp. Copy Copies the histogram to the Windows clipboard. This means that all values of the parameter are handled equally. For convenience. On confirming the settings by clicking the OK button of the dialog. The reference area can be the entire area. Then the histogram based on by choosing Results the surface plot layer values is immediately displayed in the viewing area. In the first case. etc. Shows a file save dialog to save the histogram as an image. the position. or the analysis area.7. Using this option. the option Histogram (Chart) must be selected. given by the range of the underlying parameter. Both options are described in the following: • One possibility to create a histogram from a result parameter is the results selection dialog.com . the number of parameter sets is calculated. one can create a surface plot from the respective parameter. First. the histogram is immediately shown in the viewing area. However. There is a fundamental difference between these two histogram versions of a parameter. for each bin (defined by the bin width parameter in the results selection dialog).actix. The separate histogram windows are freely resizable and have an own menu bar. Then click with the right mouse button into the surface plot to view the context menu and choose one of the subentries from the Histogram from Surface Plot entry. or based on an existing surface plot. In particular. It can be opened by double-clicking the respective parameter item in the Results tab of the tree window. So this type of histogram represents a kind of spatial statistics of the parameter. Finally. the simulation area. however. several values in a pixel were combined according to the choice of the data combination function in the results selection dialog. • The generation process of a histogram is basically performed in two substeps.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 282 12. By default. Secondly. In the second case.1 Creating a Histogram Arbitrary result parameters (either from measurements or simulations) can be presented in a histogram. the limits for the minimum and maximum values are determined. As a second possibility.

Restores the default histogram settings.4.5. 12.actix. a dialog appears that can simply be left by pressing the OK button.2.7.4. the following settings can be made: • • The bin width can be specified. or they can be Save Plot as Image… item from the menu bar in saved as an image using the File different graphics formats. limits.4 Customization of Histograms The initial scaling of a histogram is determined automatically.. see section 12. In separate histogram windows. the coverage of a parameter can be exactly evaluated at a certain threshold. Optionally the CDF can be shown as additional graph. • Histograms can be transferred to another application via the clipboard. the <F3> key can be used.7. Then the histogram is updated with new scaling settings.com . 12.4. 12. respectively. The histogram configuration in the results selection dialog is also briefly explained in section 12. the user can choose some additional settings in the results selection dialog to influence the data presentation in the histogram in certain ways. More details about the threshold evaluation methods in histograms can be found in section 12.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 283 Menu Entry Graph Menu Function Create Table from Graph Zoom Out Fit To Window Histogram Settings… Axis Scale and Settings… Reset to default styles Creates a table with three columns representing the x values and the PDF and CDF values of the histogram in a separate window.2 Data Evaluation Opportunities in Histograms When creating a histogram. irrespective the current mouse pointer mode.7. fit to window <F4>) are available. the same function can be called from the Graph Create Table from Graph menu entry. Alternatively. In particular. Once a histogram was created. etc. Opens the axis scale and diagram settings dialog to modify the graph presentation. The latter characteristics can be calculated on the basis of linear or logarithmic values.7. This is accomplished by using the View Graph Create Table from Graph menu entry. the data can be further evaluated in the following way: • It is easy to zoom into a histogram at an interesting region by dragging a box with the left mouse button. Alternatively. Here the histogram limits and the bin resolution (either in terms of a bin size or the number of bins) www. By choosing the proper method. Also some of the normal zoom functions (zoom out <F3>.8. Shows the histogram settings dialog to modify bin size. The table data can be further post-processed by means of the statistical evaluation functions available in Radioplan (refer to section 12. The mean value and the standard deviation can be added to the chart as additional label. 12-29.2) or in an external application. The zoom function in histograms is always active. When the mouse button is released. There are different threshold evaluation methods available in histograms. These settings can also be modified afterwards in the histogram settings dialog as shown in Fig. Zooms back to the last larger zoom after a zoom in mouse action.7.3 Creating a Table from a Histogram The x values as well as the PDF and CDF values of a histogram can be extracted into a table with three columns. It influences the resolution of the histogram. the <F4> key can be used. Zooms on the entire histogram to the fit into the window.

12-29 Histogram settings dialog The threshold evaluation methods in the dialog are explained in greater detail in section 12.5 * binres. the according characteristics are calculated based on logarithmic values.com . Additionally. The coverage of such a parameter is equivalent to the inverse CDF of the histogram. The coverage of such a parameter is equivalent to the normal CDF of the histogram.5 * binres <= x < thres + 0.4 for the usage of this dialog.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 284 can be specified. Coverage Evaluation below Threshold: On the contrary. and the standard deviation can be controlled.e. 12. These options are described below: • Normal Threshold Evaluation: In the standard setting for histograms. each bin is centred around the corresponding threshold value. If the option Skip Values outside Limits is selected. as Logarithmic Values (dB / dBm) is chosen.6. the coverage at a given threshold can be directly read from the table in the respective row. In a separate histogram window. when evaluating a parameter that is interpreted as being better the lower the values are (such as pathloss or Active Set size). all values out of the configured limits are not considered in the creation of the histogram. the mean value.5 Threshold Evaluation Methods in Histograms The histogram settings dialog contains three options that influence the creation of the histogram and that can be used to evaluate the coverage of the respective parameter at a certain threshold.7. a coverage level at a given threshold is defined as the percentage of area where the values x >= thres. If then a table is created from the histogram. Coverage Evaluation above Threshold: When evaluating a parameter that is interpreted as being better the higher the values are (such as best pilot Rx power or Ec/I0). this menu entry is also available. • • www. using the axis scale dialog can be used to set the axis limits manually in a way similar to chart graphs. Furthermore. This option is selected by choosing the radio button thres – 0. the coverage at a given threshold can be directly read from the table in the respective row. typically given in dB. it reaches from half the bin resolution below the threshold to half the bin resolution above the threshold. This option is selected by choosing the radio button x <= thres (normal CDF). i. This dialog can be opened using the View Graph Axis Scale and Settings… item from the menu bar. If the option Mean and StdDev. This option is selected by choosing the radio button x >= thres (inverse CDF). a coverage level at a given threshold is defined as the percentage of area where the values x <= thres. If then a table is created from the histogram. Fig. the visibility of the CDF.7.5. See section 12.actix.

12-30 Histogram function in the context menu on a surface plot Then open the histogram settings dialog and make the following adjustments: • • • set the upper and lower limits to an integer nearby (preferrably outside the initial range). A histogram from this layer is created by choosing one of the functions from the Histogram from Surface Plot submenus which can be reached by a right mouse click into the plot. Fig.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 285 The following example demonstrates the usage of the threshold evaluation method in order to determine the pilot RSCP coverage in a UMTS network at a given threshold.g.actix.com . select the threshold evaluation method x >= thres (inverse CDF). The final settings can be seen in the dialog below. choose an integer bin resolution (e. It is recommended to hold down the <Shift> key while clicking the menu entry. 1dB). www. How to evaluate the network coverage at a given threshold? The starting point is a surface plot of the predicted or measured pilot RSCP which is presented in the viewing area.

9%.7. the network RSCP coverage at a threshold of -80dBm is 83.6 Printing a Histogram Histograms can also be printed. The RSCP coverage of the network can now be directly read from the ‘CDF’ column at a given threshold. the printing process can be started either out of the print preview window or by icon (tooltip Print) from the using the print command from the File menu or the standard toolbar.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 286 Fig.7. www. Print Preview or by clicking Also a print preview is available using the menu entry File icon (tooltip Print Preview) from the standard toolbar. see section 12. Once the histogram is set up the properly.3.6.com .actix. Fig. accessible from the View Setup… menu item. 12.5 for details. 12-32 Histogram Data Table created from a histogram For example. 12-31 Histogram Settings dialog These settings have immediate effect on the histogram after confirming them with OK. Now a table can be created from the histogram as described in section 12. The usage is comparable to the page setup for chart graphs. The size and the orientation of the histogram on the page Graph Page can be adjusted using the page setup dialog. In separate histogram windows the same dialog can be accessed from File Print.

Alternatively. So many known usage concepts of tables are adopted in Radioplan. 12-33 Sample view of a table A table is a grid. 12-33 where the UMTS DL transmit power on a DCH for a single UE instance was evaluated when making a cell reselection from cell to another. the table is immediately shown in the viewing area.8 Results Analysis with Tables All the network performance data presented in surface plots.1 Creating a Table Since the data of surface plots.8. The distinct Radioplan Modules have some specialized tables as well as summary reports (which are also tables in turn). and histograms can alternatively be displayed in a table. one can create a surface plot from the respective parameter. each row contains a single parameter value.actix. • www. such as selection of single fields. Also powerful copy and export functions are available. or histograms can also be displayed in tables. As another possibility.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 287 12. An example that demonstrates the parameter filtering is given in Fig. rows. the main access point for doing this is the results selection dialog. • Creating a table from a result parameter is mainly controlled from the results selection dialog. chart graphs. It can be opened by double-clicking the respective parameter item in the Results tab of the tree window. Each filter criterion is represented as a separate column in the table. similar to Excel. charts. Then the tabular data of the histogram or the data table per pixel based on the surface plot layer values are immediately displayed in the viewing area. the same functions Histogram from could be invoked from the menu bar by choosing Results Surface Plot as Table or DataTable from Surface Plot. respectively. All data filtering adjustments are incorporated in the generation of a table. some details are given on the mentioned opportunities.com . and columns. 12. also a histogram from a surface plot can be displayed as a table. Then click with the right mouse button into the surface plot to view the context menu and choose one of the subentries from the Histogram from Surface Plot or Data Table from Surface Plot entries. Besides this. presenting time-related data from a diagram in a table is done by choosing Parameter over Time (Table) (with the option a add more columns for other parameters using the Add to Existing Table flag). presenting histogram data in a table is done by choosing Histogram (Table). In the following. On confirming the settings by clicking the OK button of the dialog. and post-processing of the data contained in them. Fig. There are three options to choose from: presenting location-oriented data from a surface plot in a table is done by choosing Raw Data (Table). This type of data representation is most intuitive regarding the understanding of the data filtering mechanisms of Radioplan.

12. reordered.8. data can be copied via the clipboard into this table at arbitrary positions. Copies the table data to the Windows clipboard. Furthermore.” or “. www.com . several tables can be visible at the same time which enables an easy comparison between them. • By default.actix.2 Data Import into Tables It is possible to import a tab-delimited ASCII file into a table grid in a separate window. Opens a replace dialog valid for the current selection in the table. The easiest way to import a new file is to open the embedded clipboard by choosing Edit Embedded Clipboard (Table) and use the menu entry File Import Text File in the appearing grid window. Redoes the last change in the table. The separate table windows are freely resizable and have an own menu bar.4 for more details. These summary reports can be reached from the according menu entries or toolbar icons. or used to create other presentations of the data as chart graphs or surface plots. The same menu entry is also available in any other table window. Last but not least. Pastes the clipboard contents into the table starting at the selected field. Data can also be copied into a table from another table at an arbitrary position. in particular the decimal delimiter (“. the data can be modified. The BIFF-8 format (MS Excel 97/2000) is supported that translates locale differences. it is also possible to create a new table in a separate window by holding down the <Shift> key while creating the table. This table offers very flexible data choosing Edit analysis functions.8. Using this option. Stores this table as a report in the project. Table 12-11 Functions of the menu in a table window Menu Entry File Menu Function Import Text File Export Text File Store in Project… Close Edit Menu Imports a tab-delimited ASCII file into this table window. Opens a find dialog for the current selection in the table. Exports the table as tab-delimited ASCII file. For example. specialized tables of different Radioplan Modules can be created as described in the respective chapters of this user guide. newly created tables are displayed in the viewing area (except for the embedded clipboard table). However. The functions of the menu are given in Table 12-11. Read in the next Section how to copy data from a table. Undo Redo Cut Copy Paste Copy Table Find… Replace… Undoes the last editing action in the table. See section 12.3 Data Export from Tables Radioplan provides mighty copy functions to allow for an unlimited post-processing of the network performance data in other applications. some Modules provide a summary report per results set that is also displayed as a table.8.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 288 • Likewise. Closes the table window. Cuts a selection from the table (and copies it to the clipboard). 12. the user can open a new window with an empty table by Embedded Clipboard (Table).” problem). Copies a selection of the table to the clipboard. Arbitrary parts of a table can be selected and then be copied to the clipboard.

This table can be reached from the menu by Embedded Clipboard (Table). its item can be double clicked in the tree window. It is not recommended to export a grid to an Excel file with more than 2000 rows. Fig. This is done by using the menu entry File File. choosing Edit The embedded clipboard offers the same functionality as normal data tables. This can be done using the Edit (shortcut <Ctrl-Shift-C>). 12. a report can be removed from the project by choosing Delete from the context menu. 12-34 shows an example with two saved reports in the project. Copy Table as Text menu item headers to the clipboard. the values of individual table fields can be entered and modified. The selection of fields in a table is intuitive as known from other spread sheet applications. Likewise. a tables are selected and the Edit warning appears in the message window and the selected items will be transferred as plain ASCII text into the clipboard. Last but not least. Fig. 12-35 shows an example of the embedded clipboard filled with collected data.com .8. the maximum table size is limited to 10. it can be saved by using the menu entry View Table Save Report…. To this end. and additionally it is editable and extendible. table data in a separate table window can be exported Export Text into a tab-delimited ASCII file. the entire table is selected by clicking the upper left corner of the table. If a selection is copied to the embedded clipboard that has more columns or rows than initially provided by the clipboard. In particular. the Open entry can be selected from its context menu. 12-34 The Results tab of the tree window with some saved reports In order to reopen a report. an arbitrary selection of fields can be done with the mouse pointer while holding down the left mouse button.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 289 Due to performance issues. because it can be very time consuming. Lastly. Every new report is stored under its description at a special node called Saved Reports in the Results tab of the tree window. Radioplan has an embedded clipboard that basically is an empty table grid. If larger Copy menu item (shortcut <Ctrl-C>) is pressed. Then a small dialog is shown that separate table windows as File queries the user for a description of the report. The embedded clipboard is resizable and minimizable which allows for an efficient working. In particular. This can for example be useful to save summary reports or optimization results beyond the temporary lifetime of the underlying data. it is automatically extended.4 Saving a Table/Report in the Project Any tabular data such as summary reports. and table rows and columns can be dragged & dropped with the mouse.000 fields. Alternatively the table can Export Export Grid Data also be exported as plain ASCII data using the menu item File in ASCII Format. Fig. The same function is also available in Store in Project…. Selecting a complete row or column of the table is accomplished by clicking the corresponding header field. other tabular reports.8. Export Export Grid Data A table can be saved as an Excel 97/2000 file using the File in Excel 97 Format menu item.actix. www.5 Embedded Clipboard Sometimes it seems to be useful to collect tabular data from several sources in order to compare them and to collectively evaluate them. If the table or summary report is displayed in the viewing area. A second copy function transfers the entire table incl. 12. Alternative. or ordinary tables containing data can be stored in a project.

The available table evaluation functions are described in Table 12-12. This function should be used for values given in dB. Fig. Deviation www. Average Calculates the linear average of the selected numerical values and shows the result in a dialog.6 Statistical Data Evaluation in Tables Numerical values in tables can be evaluated in various ways. The workflow of statistically evaluating a table selection is demonstrated in Fig.8.com . 12-36 Statistical evaluation of numerical table data Table 12-12 Statistical evaluation functions in a table Context Menu Entry Evaluate Selection Function Linear Average Log. 12-35 Embedded clipboard for data collection and statistical evaluation 12. Then the chosen evaluation function is applied to the selected data. This function should be used for values given in dB. 12-36. Calculates the linear standard deviation of the selected numerical values and shows the result in a dialog. Calculates the logarithmic average of the selected numerical values and shows the result in a dialog. Deviation Log. The result value is shown in a dialog. The data evaluation functions are accessible from the context menu of a table field. Linear Std. Calculates the logarithmic standard deviation of the selected numerical values and shows the result in a dialog. In order to use the functions.actix. Std. first a relevant selection of values in the table must be made.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 290 Fig.

The available presentation functions are described in Table 12-13. The resulting plot can either be created as raster plot (where the cell related values are mapped to the best cell areas) or as cell visual. Creates a cell-mapped surface plot from the values of the selected column.actix. their index (“time”) in a separate chart graph window. In order to map these values to pixels. two other columns can be selected to define the x. The value pairs are depicted as (X.and y-coordinates. In order to map these values to the cell coverage areas. Determines the maximum of the selected numerical values and shows the result in a dialog. histogram.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 291 Context Menu Entry Function Sum Min Max Count Calculates the sum of the selected numerical values and shows the result in a dialog. Mapped Surface Plot Time Chart Scatter Chart Shows a curve of a selected column of numerical values vs. In case of a diagram/histogram. a new result layer is created. a separate window is opened with the chart or histogram. 12. Determines the minimum of the selected numerical values and shows the result in a dialog. it is possible to weight the cell-based values relative to the associated cell areas. www. Shows a scatter graph from the value pairs of two consecutive selected columns in the table.7 Transforming Table Data into Graphical Presentations Selected values in a table can be transformed into graphical presentations as chart graph. Table 12-13 Graphical presentation functions from a table Context Menu Entry Graph Selection Function Surface Plot Creates a surface plot layer from the values of the selected column. or surface plot by using the entries in the Graph Selection submenu of the table grid context menu. Histogram The workflow of creating a graphical presentation from a table selection is demonstrated in Fig.Y) dots in the graph.com . Determines the number of the selected numerical values and shows the result in a dialog. in case of a surface plot. As an option. Determines the histogram of a selected column of numerical values in a separate histogram window. 12-37 with a histogram as example. another column can be selected that is assumed to contain valid cell IDs.8.

It must be ensured that the function is called from function Graph Selection the column that contains the values to be plotted. Then a dialog appears as shown in Fig. then ‘No header row’ should be selected here. Furthermore. pixel size.actix.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 292 Fig.2 Creating a Mapped Surface Plot or Cell Visual from Table Data A surface plot from cell related values can be created by using the context menu function Graph Selection Mapped Surface Plot. 12. and unit for the new plot. the user can specify plot title (to appear in the black legend in the viewing area). and there must be two other columns that define the Cartesian coordinates (x.y coordinates of the pixel locations must be determined.8.com . Then a dialog appears as shown in Fig. Below that the columns specifying the x. 12-37 Graphical presentation of numerical table data 12. The surface plot is eventually created when pressing the OK button of the dialog. 12-38 Create surface plot from table dialog In the field Header Row one can select the table row that contains the column headers. tree label (to appear in the Layers tab).y pair) of each value.1 Creating a Surface Plot from Table Data A surface plot from position related values can be created by using the context menu Surface Plot.8. If there are no headers on top of the columns. It must be ensured that the function is called from the column that contains the cell related values to be plotted. and there must be another column that define the corresponding cell IDs. Fig. www.7. 12-39. 12-38.7.

the cell values are directly displayed in the cell visuals.e. In the following.com . the user can specify plot title (to appear in the black legend in the viewing area). However. only data from the currently active network layer(s) will be considered. 12-40. www. If there are no headers on top of the columns. tree label (to appear in the Layers tab). will be used.actix. The surface plot is eventually created when pressing the OK button of the dialog.8 Converting Table Data into a Result Set As a further option. Make sure that the project is currently open that the table data shall be imported into. and unit for the new plot. an example is given how to further evaluate simulation results created by ATOLL [ATL-UM] with Radioplan. If the data have once been converted to a result set. for cell visuals generally all data from the table. The simulation results can be transferred to Radioplan via the Windows Clipboard and are copied into the embedded clipboard. and then to convert it into a result set. in the latter one. the cell-based values can be weighted with the according cell areas by selecting the checkbox Weight Values by Covered Cell Area. In the field Header Row one can select the table row that contains the column headers. 12-39 Creating a cell visual from cell related values There are two types of surface plots in which the cell related values can be displayed: as raster layer or as cell visual. The actual conversion can be initiated by clicking with the right mouse button into the table grid and choosing Import Table as Result Set from the appearing context menu as shown Data Conversion in Fig. any kind of data from a table can be converted into a result set which opens an unforeseen flexibility of data analysis. Furthermore. independent of the active network layer(s).. In the first case. the cell values are mapped on the best cell areas. though the embedded clipboard is independent of any project. Note that when creating a mapped raster layer. e. Below that the column specifying the cell IDs must be determined.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 293 Fig. i. come from a measurement device or an RNP tool. 12. then ‘No header row’ should be selected here. all the data evaluation and filtering functions available from the results selection dialog can be applied to them.g. An interesting option is to first load a tab-delimited ASCII file with some data to be analyzed into the embedded clipboard table.8. The data could. If a raster layer is to be created. The reason for this is that the new result set is always added to the current project. pixel size.

12-41 Convert table to result set dialog www. it is recommended to have the column descriptions in the first row of the imported table data. It is possible to define up to five parameters in the new result set.actix.com . The according entries of the dialog are explained in Table 12-14. 12-41. An example of this dialog is given in Fig. This makes it easier to identify the distinct columns in the conversion procedure. Fig.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 294 Further. 12-40 Converting a table into a result set Then the conversion dialog is shown where the user can determine the role of the distinct data columns during the conversion procedure. Fig.

actix. A radiobutton to interpret the new result set as measurement . Choose the column to be interpreted as instance numbers of the parameter ID. indicated by the symbol A radiobutton to interpret the new result set as simulation data. Choose the column to be interpreted as time or frame information. the service was chosen as parameter ID.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 295 Table 12-14 Parameters for the conversion of table data into a result set Parameter Description Header Row If there is a row containing headers. respectively. Choose the column to be interpreted as Assigned NE. If there is no header row. In the example. respectively. This enables the user to evaluate the imported parameters e. . refer to Fig. a name and a unit can be given to the right. 12-42 New simulation result set as imported from the embedded clipboard www. This flag must be set if the positions are given in geographic coordinates. then row 0 can be chosen (default). Fig. . indicated by the symbol A radiobutton to interpret the new result set as generic data. This will ease the selection of the other columns later.g. All rows above the header row including itself will be excluded from the data import. Make sure that the correct projection coordinate system is chosen. For each parameter. 12-42. indicated by the symbol Measurement Data Simulation Data Generic Data Meta Data Columns Pos X or Longitude Pos Y or Latitude Convert Geographic Coordinates ID Assigned NE Time or Frame Instance Number Choose the column to be interpreted as x-coordinate (given in m) or longitude (given in °). This name can be changed easily by double-clicking on it and entering the new name in the appearing dialog. Choose the column to be interpreted as y-coordinate (given in m) or latitude (given in °).e.com . it is assumed that the data start in the row below the header row. data. and the activity indicator as Assigned NE. Choose the column to be interpreted as parameter ID. i. After the data have been converted. initially with the default name “From Table”. the new result set is shown in the Results tab of the tree window. it can be selected here. Result Parameter Columns Parameter 1…5 Choose the column to be interpreted as a parameter for the new result set. according to UEs only active in UL or DL.

12-43 Results selection dialog for non-speech users active in UL Fig. or a multiline head row of a table only shows a part of the header. Note that such an ordering operation generally causes a permutation of columns or rows. That is why the width of table rows and columns can be modified afterwards by simply dragging the border lines between rows/columns with the mouse pointer.com .Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 296 In order to demonstrate the data evaluation. 12-44 Histogram of the total UE transmit power for non-speech users 12. www. This is accomplished with the settings given in Fig. However. The resulting histogram is shown in Fig. the histogram of the total UE transmit power for non-speech users active in UL shall be generated.actix. 12-44.9 Customization of Tables The initial scaling of the rows and columns in a table is determined automatically. 12-43. sometimes a column may be too narrow thus hiding a part of the field contents.8. The data in the table can be ordered with respect to a certain row or column. This is accomplished by double-clicking the respective header field of the row/column. Fig.

tables.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 297 For flexible table handling. The appearance can be adjusted in the grid page setup dialog. These kind of plug-ins make use of all previously described means of network performance analysis like surface plots. 12-45. The outfit of tables can be modified in various ways. Fig. For instance. In order to modify the data in a table. Find and Replace functions are available. These features can be initiated from the Edit menu of a table window and are applied to the current selection in the table.9 Network KPI Analysis Radioplan offers several plug-ins for fully automatic network KPI analysis. these functions are applied to the entire table. Here only generic plug-ins are covered.3. If there is no active selection. the printing process can be started either out of the print preview window or by using the print command from the File menu or the icon (tooltip Print) from the standard toolbar. The plug-in dialog is opened by Radioplan KPI Analysis as shown in Fig. The parameters and thresholds of the KPI analysis are described in Table 12-15.com . rows and columns can be inserted or deleted. the page orientation.2. 12.10 Printing a Table Tables can also be printed. Read more on the table display settings in appendix 13. and summary reports. Both generic and customized plugins are available for different technologies. 12-46. histograms.8. Note that selecting the menu entry Tools in the moment of invoking this function at least one UMTS network layer must be selected in order to get the UMTS KPI analysis functions. accessible from the View Table Page Setup… menu item. The page setup dialog is shown in Fig. www. it can be decided. These functions are available from the Modify Grid submenu in the table context menu. Moreover. can be specified. All these functions can be accessed from the Table menu. printing of column and row headers etc.1 UMTS KPI Analysis The UMTS KPI analysis plug-in provides several studies and a summary report based on the network planning data from the current project. 12. Their functionality is self-explanatory. Once the table is set up the properly. 12-45 Page setup dialog for tables Also a print preview is available using the menu entry File Print Preview or by clicking icon (tooltip Print Preview) from the standard toolbar.actix. if the grid should be printed in color or not.9. 12.

— % — Total Cell Tx Power dBm www. The constant network load in all cells in case the option “Constant Network Load” is selected. Three different evaluation thresholds of the pilot Ec/I0 for the Ec/I0 study. The particular control channel power settings of the cells are ignored in this case. If this checkbox is active.actix. The cell overlap margin below the best pilot RSCP to be considered for cell overlap. A radio button to use a constant cell Tx power in all cells for Ec/I0 plot creation. 12-46 Generic UMTS KPI analysis dialog Table 12-15 UMTS KPI analysis thresholds Parameter Pilot RSCP Study Description Unit Enable Pilot RSCP Study Minimum Pilot RSCP Pilot Ec/I0 Study If this checkbox is active. the cell overlap will be evaluated. The minimum required pilot RSCP for providing cell coverage. the pilot Ec/I0 coverage (assuming a constant cell total power) will be evaluated. the pilot RSCP coverage will be evaluated. The minimum pilot RSCP evaluation threshold for the RSCP study.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 298 Fig.com . — dBm Enable Pilot Ec/I0 Study Minimum Pilot Ec/I0 Cell Overlap Study If this checkbox is active. — dB Enable Cell Overlap Study Minimum Pilot RSCP Cell Overlap Window Calculation — dBm dB Constant Network Load Network Load Constant Cell Tx Power A radio button to use a constant network load in all cells for Ec/I0 plot creation. The constant total cell Tx power that is assumed in all cells for the pilot Ec/I0 study in case the option “Constant Cell Tx Power “ is selected.

com . The assumed average noise figure at the mobile terminal. The indivual cell Tx powers are taken from the Total Power cell parameter which can be set e. Otherwise. an alternative traffic map can be specified for the KPI analysis. A radio button to confine the KPI analysis to the analysis area. Various georeferenced raster formats are supported. the KPI analysis is performed which is indicated in the progress bar on the bottom of the application window. The particular control channel power settings of the cells are ignored in this case. An example of such a KPI analysis summary is given in Fig. The effective calculation pixel size for all studies of the KPI analysis.g. from simulation results or imported from another RNP tool.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 299 Parameter Description Unit Individual Cell Tx Power A radio button to use individual cell Tx powers for Ec/I0 plot creation. — MS Noise Figure Shadowing Margin Calculation Pixel Size Calculate Statistics per Cell dB dB m — Create Plots Alternative Traffic Map — — Area Filter Simulation Area Analysis Area A radio button to confine the KPI analysis to the simulation area. It is also possible to specify an alternative traffic map for the study. If this checkbox is active. When the processing is finished. a summary report was created that is shown in the viewing area. Optionally. the three study plots are listed in the Layers tab of the tree window to the left. the KPI summary report will additionally contain individual statistics for all cells. The assumed shadowing margin of the mobile radio channel. only the global statistics for the entire network will be given. 12-47. proper surface plots for the selected studies will be created. If this checkbox is active. Furthermore.actix. — — The study applies the traffic map data of the project in terms of masking the non-zero traffic areas. After having configured all parameters and pressed the Start button. www.

Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 300 Fig.com . The parameters and thresholds of the KPI analysis are identical to those for UMTS which are described in Table 12-15. After having configured all parameters and pressed the Start button.9. 12-48 Generic CDMA2000 KPI analysis dialog The study applies the traffic map data of the project in terms of masking the non-zero traffic areas.2 CDMA2000 KPI Analysis The CDMA2000 KPI analysis plug-in provides several studies and a summary report based on the network planning data from the current project. It is also possible to specify an alternative traffic map for the study. www.actix. Fig. Note that selecting the menu entry Tools in the moment of invoking this function at least one CDMA2000 network layer must be selected in order to get the CDMA2000 KPI analysis functions. 12-47 UMTS KPI analysis summary report 12. the KPI analysis is performed which is indicated in the progress bar on the bottom of the application window. The plug-in dialog is opened by Radioplan KPI Analysis as shown in Fig. 12-48.

12. The plug-in dialog is opened by selecting Radioplan KPI Analysis as shown in Fig. This KPI analysis dialog is identical to the one shown in Fig. for an example see Fig.9. 12-50. on the other hand it delivers a statistical comparison between the measurements and the network planning data. its parameters are described in Table 12-17. a summary report was created that is shown in the viewing area.com . there is another CDMA2000 KPI analysis plug-in that allows to compare the network performance from measurements with Radioplan the planning data. 12-47. The parameters and thresholds of the KPI analysis are described in Table 12-16.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 301 When the processing is finished. Thus the resulting report contains two sections “Measurement Analysis” and “Difference to Planning Data” which give statistical measures for each cell. Fig. Note that in the the menu entry Tools moment of invoking this function at least one GSM network layer must be selected in order to get the GSM KPI analysis functions. This KPI analysis plug-in accomplishes two purposes: On the one hand it performs a comprehensive statistical analysis of the measurement data. The KPI analysis summary for CDMA2000 is similar as for UMTS. In addition to the pure planning data related KPI analysis. Furthermore. 12-49 Generic GSM KPI analysis dialog www. the three study plots are listed in the Layers tab of the tree window to the left.3 GSM KPI Analysis The GSM KPI analysis plug-in provides several studies and a summary report based on the network planning data from the current project. This function is invoked by selecting the menu entry Tools KPI Measurement Analysis while at least one CDMA2000 network layer is active.actix. 12-49.

The minimum Cell Overlap Count to be evaluated. only the global statistics for the entire network will be given. This will mark the lower end of the C/I plot color palette. The minimum required Rx Level for providing cell coverage. The minimum C/I to be evaluated. — — Minimum Rx Level Minimum C/I Step Size Maximum C/I Cell Overlap Study dBm dB dB dB Enable Cell Overlap Study Minimum Rx Level Cell Overlap Window If this checkbox is active. If this checkbox is active. The minimum required Rx Level for providing cell coverage. the BCCH C/I coverage will be evaluated. This will mark the upper end of the C/I plot color palette.com . the frequency plan is considered in the interference calculation. all BCCH and TCH channels would be assumed on the same frequency. The step size between the minimum and maximum Cell Overlap Count. This effectively models indoor coverage. If this checkbox is active. — dBm dB Min. If this checkbox is active. Cell Overlap Count Step Size Max. the cell overlap will be evaluated. proper surface plots for the selected studies will be created. This will mark the upper end of the plot color palette. This will mark the lower end of the plot color palette. the KPI summary report will additionally contain individual statistics for all cells. If this checkbox is active.actix. The step size between the minimum and maximum C/I. m — Create Plots — www. Then the resulting C/I would mirror the general overlap / interference situation between all cells. Otherwise. The minimum pilot RSCP evaluation threshold for the RSCP study. the Rx Level coverage will be evaluated. Otherwise. The maximum Cell Overlap Count to be evaluated. The cell overlap window below the best BCCH Rx Level to be considered for cell overlap. Cell Overlap Count Calculation # # # Calculation Pixel Size Calculate Statistics per Cell The effective calculation pixel size for all studies of the KPI analysis. — — Threshold Rx Level C/I Study dBm Enable C/I Study Use Frequency Plan If this checkbox is active.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 302 Table 12-16 GSM KPI analysis thresholds Parameter Rx Level Study Description Unit Enable Rx Level Study Use Clutter Offsets If this checkbox is active. the clutter specific pathloss offsets will be applied on the Rx Level Threshold. The maximum C/I to be evaluated. It is defined by an upper and a lower limit.

— — The study applies the traffic map data of the project in terms of masking the non-zero traffic areas. A radio button to confine the KPI analysis to the analysis area. When the processing is finished.4 KPI Analysis with Measurements In addition to the pure planning data related KPI analysis plug-ins of the previous sections. — Area Filter Simulation Area Analysis Area A radio button to confine the KPI analysis to the simulation area. there is another KPI analysis plug-in that allows to compare the network performance from measurements with the planning data. 12-50. The technology used for the KPI plug-in is determined by the currently active network layer(s). the KPI analysis is performed which is indicated in the progress bar on the bottom of the application window. 12-50 Generic measurement KPI analysis dialog www.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 303 Parameter Description Unit Alternative Traffic Map Optionally.com . Various georeferenced raster formats are supported. a summary report was created that is shown in the viewing area. This KPI analysis dialog is shown in Fig. Fig.9. Furthermore. It is also possible to specify an alternative traffic map for the study. After having configured all parameters and pressed the Start button. its parameters are described in Table 12-17. This function is available for all supported Radioplan KPI technologies and can be invoked by selecting the menu entry Tools Measurement Analysis. 12. an alternative traffic map can be specified for the KPI analysis.actix. the three study plots are listed in the Layers tab of the tree window to the left.

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Network Data Evaluation 304

Table 12-17 Measurement KPI analysis settings

Parameter Project

Description

Unit

Project

The project that the measurement results set(s) shall be taken from for comparison.

Measurement Results Sets

Result Set

A list field with available results sets. One or more result sets from the selected project can be chosen for the KPI comparison.

Calculation

Cell Overlap Window Measurement Data Bin Size
Area Filter

The Rx power range below the best cell Rx power that is applied to assess the cell overlap. The binning size applied to the measurements in the KPI comparison.

dB m

Simulation Area Analysis Area

A radio button to confine the measurement KPI analysis to the simulation area. A radio button to confine the measurement KPI analysis to the analysis area.

— —

This KPI analysis plug-in accomplishes two purposes: On the one hand it performs a comprehensive statistical analysis of the measurement data, on the other hand it delivers a statistical comparison between the measurements and the network planning data. Thus the resulting report contains two sections “Measurement Analysis” and “Difference to Planning Data” which give statistical measures for each cell. An example of the measurement KPI analysis report is presented in Fig. 12-51.
Radioplan UMTS Measurment Analysis for Project 'CS Capacity Opt Sample ORG Tuned'
Created Pixel Size [m2] Cell Overlap Window [dB] Filter Area Cell/SC 25.04.2006 10:41:03 50x50 6.00 Simulation Area Measurement Analysis Area [bins] Measured Best Server Area [Bin] Area [Bin]

Area [km2] Outside Best Measured Server Area Area [km2] [Bin]

Best Server Area [km2]

Distance to Cell Outside Best Distance Min Distance Server Area [m] Mean [m] [km2]

Measured Values Distance Max Mean RSCP Mean RSCP [m] [dBm] Best [dBm]

Mean Cell Overlapping

02-1 SC 25 02-2 SC 33 02-3 SC 41 05-1 SC 97 05-2 SC 105 05-3 SC 113 06-1 SC 121 06-2 SC 129 06-3 SC 137 07-1 SC 145

52 102 40 87 62 1 13 74 80 4

19 23 15 12 15 0 0 20 43 0

33 79 25 75 47 1 13 54 37 4

0.13 0.26 0.10 0.22 0.16 0.00 0.03 0.19 0.20 0.01

0.05 0.06 0.04 0.03 0.04 0.00 0.00 0.05 0.11 0.00

0.08 0.20 0.06 0.19 0.12 0.00 0.03 0.14 0.09 0.01

37.83 37.83 37.83 471.14 471.14 594.99 49.32 42.52 49.32 158.74

802.04 831.36 399.89 1216.85 962.05 594.99 488.74 833.18 693.60 364.23

1519.96 1680.62 1519.96 2306.95 2153.73 594.99 905.23 1965.02 2221.56 577.73

-83.98 -81.09 -82.10 -86.36 -87.10 -82.60 -79.87 -79.85 -83.07 -93.14

-78.67 -74.53 -69.86 -79.05 -78.89

1.89 1.78 1.60 2.42 1.93

-66.32 -79.34

1.25 1.84

Fig. 12-51 Sample measurement KPI report

12.9.5 UMTS Combined RSCP and Ec/I0 Analysis
Network quality is determined by both radio coverage (in UMTS: pilot RSCP) and interference ratio (in UMTS: pilot Ec/I0). Thus it is interesting to analyze the area or the traffic percentage where both parameters are above a certain required threshold. This analysis can be performed in the combined RSCP and Ec/I0 analysis plug-in. Combined Pilot A new combined study can be started by selecting the menu entry Tools RSCP/EcIo Analysis. Then a dialog is opened where the user can configure the required thresholds for the pilot RSCP and Ec/I0 coverage and some further relevant parameters. This analysis study dialog is shown in Fig. 12-52, the configuration is explained in Table 12-18.

www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Network Data Evaluation 305

Fig. 12-52 Combined pilot RSCP and Ec/I0 analysis dialog for UMTS Table 12-18 UMTS combined pilot RSCP and Ec/I0 analysis thresholds

Parameter RSCP / Ec/I0 Study

Description

Unit

Minimum Pilot RSCP Minimum Pilot Ec/I0
Calculation

The minimum pilot RSCP evaluation threshold for the combined study. The minimum pilot Ec/I0 evaluation threshold for the combined study.

dBm dB

Constant Network Load Network Load Constant Cell Tx Power Total Cell Tx Power

A radio button to use a constant network load in all cells for Ec/I0 calculation. The constant network load in all cells in case the option “Constant Network Load” is selected. A radio button to use a constant cell Tx power in all cells for Ec/I0 calculation. The particular control channel power settings of the cells are ignored in this case. The constant total cell Tx power that is assumed in all cells for the pilot Ec/I0 study in case the option “Constant Cell Tx Power “ is selected. A radio button to use individual cell Tx powers for Ec/I0 calculation. The particular control channel power settings of the cells are ignored in this case. The indivual cell Tx powers are taken from the Total Power cell parameter which can be set e.g. from simulation results or imported from another RNP tool. The assumed total noise threshold being composed of the thermal background noise and the average noise figure at the mobile terminal. The effective calculation pixel size for the combined analysis. If this checkbox is active, plots of the analysis parameters will be created when the study is executed.

— % —

dBm

Individual Cell Tx Power

Total Noise Threshold

dB

Calculation Pixel Size Create Plots

m —

www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Network Data Evaluation 306

The study produces a summary report that shows the combined pilot RSCP and Ec/I0 coverage in the simulation/analysis areas in relation to the covered area and the covered traffic. If the option Create Plots was selected, coverage plots of the various coverage areas are created and listed in the Layers tab to the left. An exemplary summary report of this combined study is given in Fig. 12-53.

Fig. 12-53 Sample combined pilot RSCP and Ec/I0 report

12.10 Traffic Matrix Generation
Radioplan can automatically create traffic matrices from live network data such as cell counters collected from a switch. By means of the Traffic Matrix Generation wizard, which is called by the menu entry Tools Traffic Matrix Generation , for any service type a traffic matrix can be generated that:

• • •

distributes the cell counter traffic to the best serving cell areas, optionally only to areas with a minimum beacon signal received power, optionally considers clutter weights, is attached to a Service Profile previously defined in the Radioplan project tree.

This functionality can be used as an alternative to importing traffic data from a radio network planning tool (refer to section 5.5.1). The following sections describe the prerequesites for that as well as the wizard-based traffic matrix generation itself.

12.10.1 Prerequisites
Before starting the Traffic Matrix Generation wizard, the following prerequisites should be observed:

Select the Network Layer(s) for the best serving cell calculation The best serving cell areas will be calculated for the Radioplan project configuration of the selected network layer(s) (refer to section 5.2). Thus, the calculation can be based on predictions imported from a planning tool as well as on predictions tuned afterwards in Radioplan by measurements.

• • •

Only the active cells will be considered for traffic matrix generation. The Simulation Area defines the area for traffic matrix generation. Define a Service Profile as part of the Radioplan project user configuration, to which the generated traffic matrix shall be attached to. A set of profiles representing a generic user can be created easily by selecting Add Generic User Profiles from the context menu of the User folder in the project tree (refer also to section 6.6.5). Through the Network Layer setting of each UE Profile that references the Service Profile the traffic matrix can also be assigned to a specific network layer. For more information on the user configuration in a Radioplan project, please refer to section 6.6.

www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Network Data Evaluation 307

• •

If the traffic shall be weighted during the distribution to the best serving areas based on the clutter matrix, a clutter matrix must be defined in the Radioplan project. If the traffic shall be weighted during the distribution to the best serving areas based on another raster map, this raster map must be displayed as a surface plot in the Radioplan Layers tab. This surface plot can be created, for example, by importing a raster data file (refer to section 3.4.12), by displaying any matrix of the Radioplan project (e.g. clutter matrix; refer to section 6.4.1.5), and by creating any other surface plot based on the comprehensive Radioplan analysis capabilities (refer to section 12.5).

The input data with the cell-based traffic (counter) values must be available as a list of cell names (cell IDs as in the Radioplan project) associated with the cell traffic value. It may be provided in a spreadsheet application for copy-paste via the clipboard or as a tab- or comma-separated file: *.txt , *.csv , or *.dat .

The traffic value may be basically any type. As what type it is interpreted by Radioplan, depends on the Service Profile to which the traffic matrix is attached to, e.g.:

• • •

Erlang – for service profiles with Traffic Model “Speech /Video” – i.e. a served traffic value for circuit-switched services number of potential users – for service profiles with Traffic Model “AtollCompatible …” – i.e. an offered traffic value number of simultaneously active users (of a certain type) – for service profiles with any other Traffic Model – i.e. a served traffic value for any type of service

The traffic matrix in Radioplan will always represent this traffic value as a spatial density <any_trafic_funit>/km2 , because this is independent of the pixel size.

12.10.2 Traffic Matrix Generation
The traffic matrix generation is started by the menu entry Tools Traffic Matrix Generation . It opens a 3-page wizard that guides the user through the configuration options. At the first page of the wizard, the input data can be specified and verified against the Radioplan project, Fig. 12-54.

www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Network Data Evaluation 308

Fig. 12-54 Traffic Matrix Generation Wizard: Input Data

In order to provide the input data, either copy-paste the corresponding two columns from a spreadsheet application into the two-column grid or click the Load Traffic From File… button. In order to paste into the grid, simply select the first Cell ID field. As the next step, by clicking the Check Input Data button, the provided list of Cell IDs is compared to the cells of the network layer(s) selected in the Radioplan project. Thereby, all lines where the Cell ID field does not correspond to any cell in the selected Radioplan network layer(s), are automatically removed from the grid. The result is indicated in a message box:

• •

Traffic Input Data Are Valid : There is a traffic value defined for each cell of the selected Radioplan network layer(s).

Close the message box and click Next to proceed.
n Cells were found without Traffic Value. Please check the Validity of Input Data! For one or more cells of the selected Radioplan network layer(s) there is no traffic value specified (either the field is empty or the cell ID is not listed.

After closing the message box the respective cells are also listed in the grid having “No Traffic Value”. In the latter case the following options are possible:

• •

Simply add the missing traffic values by editing the respective fields in the grid, eventually Check Input Data again, and proceed by clicking Next. There area two scenarios to cope with missing traffic values:
▫ Consider Cells with Traffic Value only : The values are not available for cells, which had not been active in the network, when the counters where collected. Then, the traffic input data only represents the active cells of the live network and should also be distributed to those cells serving areas only. Accordingly, the traffic matrix generation will be executed only for the cells with a traffic value.

By checking Permanently deactivate Cells without Traffic Value , the cells
www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Network Data Evaluation 309

without traffic values will remain deactivated in the Radioplan project as a result of the traffic matrix generation. Otherwise, they are only deactivated during the Traffic Matrix Generation.
▫ Consider all Cells : In this case, the traffic matrix generation assumes zero traffic for the undefined cells, but calculates the best serving cell areas also for those cells. Accordingly, no traffic is spread to the undefined cells, thus creating zero traffic areas.

At the second page of the wizard, optionally, the traffic weighting can be specified, Fig. 12-55. In the distribution of the cell traffic values to each cell’s best serving area weight based on the clutter or based on a raster layer can be considered. A formula for the clutter weighting is given in section 6.6.6.7. In any case the Weighting Factors are used as relative weights, i.e. a pixel with weighting factor 10 will get 10 times the traffic of a clutter pixel with weighting factor 1. Moreover, a Weighting Factor of zero results in zero traffic for the respective area. At the same time, the total traffic in each cell area will remain the same as the input traffic value; only the relative distribution of the traffic across each cell area may be different.

Weighting by Clutter Matrix : For each clutter class a Weighting Factor can be specified by editing the Weighting Factor column. Then the weight to be applied to each pixel depends on the pixels clutter class. The clutter weights can be pre-configured in the TrafficMatrixGeneration.ini configuration file, which is located in the configuration\resultanalysis\ subdirectory of the Radioplan installation (see [R-Admin] for more information). Weighting by Raster Layer : If one or more surface plots are available in the Layers tab, they are available for selection in the associated drop-down list. If a raster layer is selected, then the weight to be applied to each pixel is taken from that surface plot.

Fig. 12-55 Traffic Matrix Generation Wizard: Traffic Weighting

www.actix.com

Actix Radioplan User Guide

Network Data Evaluation 310

Then, at the third page of the wizard, the calculation and output options can be specified, Fig. 12-56.

Fig. 12-56 Traffic Matrix Generation Wizard: Calculation and Output Options

The calculation and output options include:

• • • • •

The Pixel Size [m] for the traffic matrix to be generated. If Enable Area below Min. Rx Power [dBm] is enabled, the traffic is only distributed to areas where the beacon signal power received from the best serving cell exceeds the specified Min. Rx Power. The Scaling Factor is applied to each pixel of the generated traffic matrix. The traffic matrix to be generated must be assigned to a Service Profile. All service profiles defined in the user configuration of the Radioplan project are availabel for selection from the associated drop-down list. If Generate Plot of Traffic Matrix is enabled, a surface plot of the generated traffic matrix is automatically created at the end. The unit that will be displayed in the layer settings of that surface plot can also be defined. Note that the specified unit does not affect the traffic matrix generation process nor the contents of the generated traffic matrix; it is just a display property of the generated surface plot layer.

By clicking Run , the traffic matrix generation is executed. As the result a new traffic matrix is created and attached to the specified service profile in the Radioplan project tree. And if Generate Plot of Traffic Matrix was enabled, it is also already displayed as a surface plot. The end of the processing is also logged in the Message window.

12.11 Interference Matrix Generation
Radioplan can automatically create interference matrices from the project data. Such interference matrices are typically used for frequency planning.

www.actix.com

033376508 0. 1st column: C/I threshold 2nd column: co-channel interference probability for the respective C/I thresholds 3rd column: adjacent-channel interference probability for the respective C/I thresholds These values can be specified in a tab-separated *.066807201 0. The Simulation Area defines the area for interference matrix generation.252492538 adj 0.308537539 0.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 311 Since a Radioplan project may contain different types of pathloss matrices.006209665 0. For generating an interference matrix using Traffic Weighting.009815329 0.90878878 0.047790352 0. 12.63055866 0. and rows not starting with such an integer number are ignored.1 Prerequisites Before starting the Interference Matrix Generation wizard.09121122 0.878327495 0. all traffic matrices will be considered that are referenced through their Service Profile by an active UE Profile and where the UE Profile either references an active network layer or ALL network layers.000770985 www.01513014 0.2).001349898 0.691462461 0.com .actix. predictions tuned afterwards in Radioplan by measurements.003830381 0. Moreover.747507462 0.5 0.txt file. The following sections describe the prerequesites for that and how to create interference matrices as well as the contents of the interference matrix result set and how to export interference matrices.11. the following prerequisites should be observed: • • • • Only the active Network Layer(s) will be considered for interference matrix generation (refer to section 5.121672505 0. the resulting interference matrices can be based on: • • • predictions as imported from a planning tool.. or measurements only.933192799 0.022750132 0.36944134 0. Only the active cells will be considered for interference matrix generation.433816167 0.158655254 0. where: C/I values must be integer in ascending order per row. For example: co 0.797671619 0. a C/I mapping table with 3 columns is required as an input to the interference matrix generation: • • • • • C/I 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 .566183833 0. if the pathloss matrices were created from measurements.841344746 0..002303266 0.

thus yielding probabilities of interfered traffic.1. Fig. Use Area (homogeneous traffic): ignores the traffic configuration of the project and calculates the probabilities of interfered area. Use Traffic Weighting: considers the traffic matrices configured in the project (refer to section 12. with the configuration parameters defined in Table 12-19. 12-57.11. — Title (Result Set) — Noise Threshold dBm Pixel Resolution Weighting m — By clicking OK . the Interference Matrix Result Set does not contain pixelbased values. The pixel size that is applied for generating the interference matrix. Pixels with a best server beacon signal received power (for GSM: RxLev_DL) not exceeding this threshold are ignored by the interference matrix generation. but cell-based values that refer to another cell.3 Interference Matrix Result Set An “interference matrix” actually represents interference probabilities for a number of cellto-cell relations.actix. The title of the Result Set that will be created as a result of interference matrix generation.com .11.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 312 12.1 – is a mandatory input. www. At the end a new Result Set with the specified name is added (appended) to the Results tab.11. the interference matrix generation is executed and the progress and end is logged in the Message window.2 Create an Interference Matrix Result Set The interference matrix generation is started by the menu entry Tools Interference Matrix Create Interference Matrix… which opens the Create Interference Matrix dialog. Fig. Table 12-19 Create Interference Matrix parameters Parameter Description Unit C/I Mapping Table File The file with the mapping of C/I thresholds to probabilities of co-channel and adjacent-channel interference – as specified in section 12. The default is “Interference Matrix”. 12-57 Create Interference Matrix dialog A C/I mapping table – as specified in section 12.11. Accordingly.11. 12.1) for weighting the probabilities of interfered area.

format by the menu entry Tools which opens the Export Interference Matrix dialog. selecting Parameter over Time (Table) in the Graphical Settings. a list of the cell-to-cell relations for each Result Set parameter can be created a double-click on the parameter and then. 12-58 Calculation principle of the values in the Interference Matrix Result Set The Interference Matrix Result Set can be further analyzed and displayed by all usual functions for a Radioplan result set (refer to section 12.4 Export an Interference Matrix An Interference Matrix Result Set can be exported to a tab-delimited file in Cellopt AFP 2 Interference Matrix Export Interference Matrix… .11. Both parameter either represent interfered area. 12-59. if Use Area (homogeneous traffic) was selected as Weighting.4). 12-58. 1]. www. 12. Both values actually are not probabilities in the range [0. these values are calculated as illustrated in Fig.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 313 In the Result Set. Use Traffic Weighting was selected in the Create Interference Matrix dialog. Fig. two values are distinguished: • • a measure for co-channel interference probability: IM – CoChannel [Num] and a measure for adjacent channel interference probability: IM – AdjChannel [Num] . For example. with the total traffic density value of the bin (thereby ignoring bins with zero traffic density) Accumulate the weighted probabilities over the bins yielding: the probable interfered traffic or area for co-channel and adjacent channel interference Fig. in the opened Parameters for Active Project dialog.com . but measures that indicate accordingly higher or lower interference probability. In the interference matrix generation process.actix. for each best cell i (‘C’ representing the received signal level): for each other cell k != i: for each best server area pixel of cell i: calculate Ci/Ik (thereby ignoring C or I levels below Noise Threshold) map it to the 2 probabilities: for co-channel and for adjacent-channel interference multiply the probability with: the bin size (for interfered area) and. for interfered traffic. or interfered traffic.

the result set aggregation can be started by selecting the entry Aggregate Result Set… from the context menu of the result set name. Even if only one is listed.com .12 Result Set Aggregation Radioplan can be used to aggregate data that has been imported by the Performance Counter measurement import plugin into a Generic Radioplan result set (refer to section 5. For such a Generic result set. traffic data measured at a switch over a certain period can be aggregated in order to use it as representative input to traffic matrix generation. All Interference Matrix result sets are listed.11. Fig.1). for example.actix. The contents of such a generated file in Cellopt AFP 2 format may look as follows: 12.5 Customizing the Interference Matrix Generation Some default settings of the interference matrix generation can be pre-configured in the winesinterferencematrix.9. it must be selected. or automatic parameter optimization in Radioplan. Thus. 12. automatic neighbor list planning.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 314 Fig. www.ini file in the configuration data folder %APPDATA%\configuration (see [R-Admin] for details). 12-60. the user must: • • specify the name of the interference matrix file to be created and select the Interference Matrix Result Set. 12-59 Export Interference Matrix dialog In this dialog.

if the Measurement Period is set to 60 minutes.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 315 Fig. The availability range Start Time and End Time is initialized with the period for which the selected Master counter is available in the underlying result set. That result set contains the average value of N_Best Busy Hour values for each cell. one for each hour of the day. 12-61. how many values for each measurement object the selected master counter consists of. There are two methods available to aggregate the result set data: • Calculate the Busy Hour or.actix. more generally. a Busy Period for each cell and day ▫ If the Average flag is checked.com .e. The Data Availability per Day [%] that is required to use the data for aggregation and the Measurement Period [minute] can be specified. One of them has to be selected as the master counter in order to determine the Busy Hour or Busy Period. 24 counter measurements for a particular cell and day. have to be available to achieve a Data Availability per Day of 100%. where N_Best means is specified by the Number of Days. when aggregating a huge amount of performance counters. and Time Range. Typically the master counter represents some kind of traffic. All other counters will be aggregated for the same Busy Hour or Busy Period time stamps. i. a further result set in addition to the Busy Hour result set will be created. all performance counter parameters of the result set are listed. This time range may be further delimited to get a shorter time focus. Measurement Period. www. Based on that the data availability is checked before the result set aggregation for each cell and day. The Average Number of Values per Object indicates to the user. will be discarded.g. • Calculate the Maximum Value for each cell In the Select Master drop-down list. It is automatically generated for the selected Master counter. For example. The counter of one hour could be missing to still achieve 95% data availability. 12-60 Generic result set context menu This opens the result set aggregation dialog. e. Fig. Counter measurements for which the data availability threshold is not exceeded.

12-61 Result Set Aggregation dialog By clicking OK in the result set aggregation dialog.Actix Radioplan User Guide Network Data Evaluation 316 Fig. At the end a new … (Busy Period) result set with the name corresponding to the processed result set is created.com . www. the data aggregation is executed.actix.

1. Normally.1.com . the network configuration files should not be changed manually although they are in a readable ASCII format. however. All files (if not unique) contain an identifier inside to uniquely distinguish between different objects. 13-1 Directory structure of the configuration files In general. they must be unique inside a certain directory.Actix Radioplan User Guide Appendix 317 13 Appendix This appendix contains additional information and reference guides about Radioplan in general. Fig. Comments start with a “#” and continue until the end of line. 13. It is characterized by line based data. then there must be three corresponding configuration files in the config\utran\nodeb directory. see section 6. 13. Always use Radioplan to modify the network configuration! www. The names of the configuration files can be chosen arbitrarily. The parameters (“Java properties”) can appear in arbitrary order in the files. The only exception is large binary files for grid-based data (e. 13-1.1 Directory Structure of the Network Configuration Files The network configuration files are ordered in a hierarchical directory structure. If there are.2 Network Configuration File Format Most of the network configuration files are in ASCII format. three different sites in the simulation setup. every leaf directory in the tree contains all possible data sets in separate files.actix.1 Network Configuration Data Specification 13. This structure is also mirrored in the tree structure that is displayed in the Configuration tab of the tree window in Radioplan. It is also possible to give comments in the configuration files. Inside this project directory. for instance. pathloss data). Every project needs its own data and should thus have an own data directory. Each line contains first a parameter name (starting with capital letter) followed by an equation sign (“=”) and subsequently a value of the parameter. The configuration files use the Java properties file format in general.1.g. the hierarchical directory structure resides as shown in Fig.

2.2 Window Controls Reference 13.Actix Radioplan User Guide Appendix 318 13.actix. File Menu Creates a new project Loads configuration data (creates a new project) Saves configuration data of the current project Functions related to current project (see File Saves the current plot as image (not for tables) Connect/Disconnect Atoll session Import functions (see File Export functions (see File Import) Export) Current Project) Shows print dialog for current view Shows print preview Shows printer setup dialog Quits the application File Import Imports a raster file into an image layer Imports a vector file into an image layer Imports a Radioplan layer Imports a graphics layer Imports a Radioplan project from another database Imports a new Asset project Imports a new ATOLL project Imports a new TCPU project Imports a new NetPlan project Imports a new Odyssey project Imports a new Planet EV project Imports a new Wizard project Imports a new CellOpt AFP project Imports measurement data from a measurement device Imports tuned pathloss matrices into the project Imports network configuration data from the OSS File Export Updates an Asset project with changes Updates an ATOLL project with changes Updates an Odyssey project with changes Updates a Planet EV project with changes Updates a Wizard project with changes Exports a CellOpt AFP plan Exports tuned predictions to Asset Exports tuned predictions to Atoll Exports data in Excel 97 format (for tables only) Exports data in ASCII format (for tables only) Exports all tuned pathloss matrices from the project Updates OSS network configuration data with changes www.com .1 Menus The following overview gives a summary of the available functions that are accessible from the menus.

Actix Radioplan User Guide Appendix 319 Edit Menu Undoes the last action Redoes the last action Cuts a selection (stored to clipboard) Copies a selection (stored to clipboard) Copies a selection as plain text Pastes the clipboard contents at the cursor Shows the find dialog Shows the replace dialog Selects all items in current view Opens the embedded clipboard in a separate window View Menu Shows the projection settings dialog Select configuration data to be viewed (see View Graph edit functions (see View Table edit functions (see View Zoom functions (see View Graph) Table) Configuration Data Plots) Zoom) Visible Components) Paint) Viewing area component switches (see View Graphical edit functions (see View View Configuration Data Plots Shows composite pathloss layer Shows composite pathloss layer with antenna patterns Shows best cell received power layer Shows interference ratio layer Shows best serving cell layer Shows cell overlap layer Shows frequency plan Shows RSSI layer (for CDMA systems only) Shows carrier-to-adjacent interferer layer (for GSM only) Shows clutter data layer Shows DEM layer View Graph Creates a table from the shown diagram/histogram Shows the axis scale dialog Shows the histogram settings dialog Shows the chart page setup dialog Resets chart view to default styles The graph submenu is only active if a chart/histogram is displayed in the viewing area.actix.com . www.

see section 13. View Visible Components Checkbox for viewing sites Checkbox for viewing cells Checkbox for viewing area boundaries Checkbox for viewing streets Checkbox for viewing site/cell labels Checkbox for viewing additional legend These entries are identical with the checkboxes of the components toolbar.com .2. see section 13. View Paint Default paint mode (no paint option active) Switches to zoom mode Switches to pan mode (to shift the displayed surface plot) Distance measurement tool Switches to simulation area paint mode Switches to analysis area paint mode Switches to streets paint mode Switches to matrix editing mode Switches to Site and Cell add mode Switches to Site and Cell configuration mode Shows the grid size dialog Measurements Menu Starts the measurement software Clears the measurement layers Opens the Measurement Module settings dialog Opens a dialog to tune all pathloss matrices with measurements Reverts pathloss tuning Creates pathloss matrices from measurements.2. View Zoom Shows an enlarged part of the view Shows a downsized part of the view Fits the view to the window size (total configuration data) Fits the simulation area to the window size Fits the analysis area to the window size These entries are identical with the respective icons in the standard toolbar.Actix Radioplan User Guide Appendix 320 View Table Stores table/report in project Shows the page setup dialog for printing Shows the header/footer dialog for printing Allows page breaks in tables Splits up a table to pages with given # rows/columns The table submenu is only active if a table is displayed in the viewing area. if available Copies tuned predictions into this network layer www.actix.2.2.

com .actix.Actix Radioplan User Guide Appendix 321 Optimization Menu Starts the optimization engine Stops the optimization engine Releases the optimization engine Opens the general optimization settings dialog UMTS & CDMA analysis plots (see Optimization GSM & iDEN analysis plots (see Optimization WiMAX analysis plots (see Optimization Revenue analysis plots (see Optimization Shows optimization summary report Shows optimization progress chart Checkbox for the automatic plot update during optimization Loads optimization settings Saves optimization settings CDMA & UMTS Analysis Plots) GSM & iDEN Analysis Plots) WiMAX Analysis Plots) Revenue Analysis Plots) Optimization CDMA & UMTS Analysis Plots Shows a surface plot of the pilot RSCP coverage Shows a surface plot of the pilot RSCP threshold per pixel Shows a surface plot of the pilot Ec/I0 coverage Shows a surface plot of the pilot Ec/I0 threshold per pixel Shows a surface plot of the pilot RSCP from the best cell Shows a surface plot of the pilot Ec/I0 from the best cell Shows a surface plot of the RSSI per pixel Shows a cell overlap plot (pilot pollution areas) Shows a mapped surface plot of the cell overlap ratio per cell Shows a mapped surface plot of the site overlap ratio per site Shows a surface plot of the equivalent traffic Shows a surface plot of the absolute traffic in terms of users Shows a surface plot of the relative load per cell Shows a surface plot of the relative traffic per cell Shows a surface plot of the number of users per cell Shows a surface plot of the cell sizes per cell Shows a surface plot of the CQI Best cell areas display functions (see Optimization <…> Analysis Plots Best Cell Areas) Optimization GSM & iDEN Analysis Plots Shows a surface plot of the BCCH coverage Shows a surface plot of the BCCH RxLev threshold per pixel Shows a surface plot of the BCCH C/I coverage Shows a surface plot of the BCCH C/I threshold per pixel Shows a surface plot of the BCCH RxLev from the best cell Shows a surface plot of the BCCH C/I from the best cell Shows a surface plot of the best cell area overlap Shows a mapped surface plot of the cell overlap ratio per cell Shows a mapped surface plot of the site overlap ratio per site Shows a surface plot of the absolute traffic in terms of users Shows a surface plot of the number of users per cell Shows a surface plot of the cell sizes per cell Best cell areas display functions (see Optimization <…> Analysis Plots Best Cell Areas) www.

com .actix.Actix Radioplan User Guide Appendix 322 Optimization WiMAX Analysis Plots Shows a surface plot of the RSSI coverage Shows a surface plot of the RSSI coverage threshold per pixel Shows a surface plot of the CINR coverage Shows a surface plot of the CINR coverage threshold per pixel Shows a surface plot of the RSSI from the best cell Shows a surface plot of the CINR from the best cell Shows a surface plot of the best cell area overlap Shows a mapped surface plot of the cell overlap ratio per cell Shows a mapped surface plot of the site overlap ratio per site Shows a surface plot of the absolute traffic in terms of users Shows a surface plot of the number of users per cell Shows a surface plot of the cell sizes per cell Best cell areas display functions (see Optimization <…> Analysis Plots Best Cell Areas) Optimization Revenue Analysis Plots Shows a surface plot of the total revenue Shows a surface plot of the covered revenue Shows a surface plot of the lost revenue Shows a surface plot of the total revenue per cell Shows a surface plot of the covered revenue per cell Shows a surface plot of the lost revenue per cell Optimization <…> Analysis Plots Shows best cell areas of all cells Best Cell Areas Shows best cell areas of all reconfigurable cells Shows best cell areas of all relevant cells Simulation Menu Opens the simulation settings dialog Applies network element templates (see Simulation Starts a dynamic network simulation Stops a dynamic network simulation Shows the project series dialog Loads the latest simulation results Flag to automatically load simulation results Toggles the backup function Enables simulations on the local machine Available remote connections Network Configuration) Simulation Network Configuration Applies template settings to sites in project Applies template settings to cells in project www.

actix.com .Actix Radioplan User Guide Appendix 323 Results Menu See Results -> Measurement Results See Results -> Simulation Results Histogram from plot functions (see Results -> Histogram from Surface Plot) Table from plot functions (see Results -> Data Table from Surface Plot) Starts a layer slide show Results Measurement Results Shows the measurement summary report Results Simulation Results Shows the simulation result summary report Creates default result layers Shows chart with active UEs per UE profile Shows table with active UEs per UE profile Results Histogram from Surface Plot Creates a histogram from all plot pixels Creates a histogram from the plot pixels in the simulation area Creates a histogram from the plot pixels in the analysis area Creates a histogram table from all plot pixels Creates a histogram table from the plot pixels in the simulation area Creates a histogram table from the plot pixels in the analysis area Results Data Table from Surface Plot Creates a data table from all plot pixels Creates a data table from the plot pixels in the simulation area Creates a data table from the plot pixels in the analysis area Tools Menu Opens the general settings dialog Opens the display settings dialog User-defined workspace functions (see Tools Neighbor list optimization (see Tools User Settings) Neighbor Lists) Interference Matrix) Interference matrix generation (see Tools Database functions (see Tools -> Database) License management functions (see Tools -> License Management) List of additional plug-ins www.

Actix Radioplan User Guide Appendix 324 Tools User Settings Exports the color legend presets Imports the color legend presets Export the workspace Import a workspace definition Reset the workspace to factory defaults Opens the layer template manager for the workspace Tools Neighbor Lists Shows the neighbor list optimization dialog Exports the neighbor list definitions Tools Interference Matrix Creates an interference matrix Exports the interference matrix Tools Database Automatically updates all projects in the database Shows a list of all projects currently in the database Cleans up and compresses the database Deletes all cached matrices (to free disk space) Deletes cached matrices in current project Deletes all temporary files (to free disk space) Tools License Management Shows the license registration dialog Needed for license transfer to another computer The usage of the license handling menu entries is described in section 2. Window Menu Checkbox for the standard toolbar Checkbox for the status bar Checkbox for the message window Checkbox for the tree window Minimizes all separate windows Closes all separate windows List of current separate windows Help Menu Opens the online help window Shows the info dialog of WiNeS www.com .3.actix.

Actix Radioplan User Guide Appendix 325 13.2.actix.2 Toolbars Standard Toolbar Creates a new project Loads the configuration data of a project Saves the configuration data of a project Cuts the selection and adds it to the clipboard Copies the selection to the clipboard Pastes the clipboard contents at the cursor position Undoes last action Redoes last action Shows print dialog for current view Shows print preview dialog Zooms in (scale-up) Zooms out (scale-down) Zoom undo Fits current view (total configuration data) to window size Fits simulation area to window size Fits analysis area to window size Shows the last surface plot Shows the last chart graph Shows the last histogram Shows the last table Shows the results summary report Context sensitive help function Views Toolbar Opens the network layer management dialog Currently active network layer(s) Filters the visible network elements to the active network layer(s) Creates best cell received power layer Creates interference ratio layer Creates best serving cell layer Creates cell overlap layer Creates clutter data layer Creates DEM terrain layer Shows raster image import dialog Starts a layer slide show Cell Search Toolbar Cell search field Find cell www.com .

zoom mode need not be chosen to scale the diagrams.Actix Radioplan User Guide Appendix 326 Paint Toolbar Default paint mode Zoom mode Pan mode Distance measurement tool Simulation area paint mode Analysis area paint mode Site and Cell add mode Site and Cell configuration mode Matrix editing mode Street paint mode Graphics paint mode Define grid size In zoom mode. the viewing area is scaled to the just drawn dragbox. In pan mode the visible part of the viewing area can be shifted with the mouse by pressing and holding the left mouse button while moving the surface plot to the desired position. i. the user can draw a dragbox with the mouse pointer by holding down the left mouse button.actix. This mode works for surface plots only. If a chart graph is displayed in the viewing area. When releasing the mouse button. Components Toolbar Checkbox for viewing sites Checkbox for viewing cells Checkbox for viewing simulation/analysis area boundaries Checkbox for viewing streets Checkbox for viewing site/cell labels Checkbox for viewing additional legend (string data only) Graphics Toolbar This toolbar is only visible in graphics paint mode. Simulator Toolbar Starts a dynamic network simulation Stops a dynamic network simulation Opens the simulation settings dialog Opens the simulation results import dialog Creates the simulation result summary report www.com .e. then zooming with the mouse pointer also works in the default mode.

1) + (2. providing the user with a mechanism to mix fonts within the header/footer. and Right Aligned. The column headers. All of these adjustments are available from the Table menu.1) + (8. Centered. Fig.1) + (4.1) + (5.1) + (9. indicate the header alignment of the text in the cells below them.3 Additional Table Grid Settings When displaying a table. In other words.com .1) + (10.y) indicates the text contained in that cell and + indicates string concatenation. 13-2). the changes will be applied back to the selected cells. The Centered column will be centered horizontally and Right Aligned will be right justified. several additional adjustments can be made. where (x. 13-2 Header/footer dialog for tables There are 10 rows used for entering header/footer text.1) + (3.1) + (7. All of the text contained in the Left Aligned column (with the exception of the column header) will be left justified in the header/footer.2. and then clicking the font button.1) + (6.Actix Radioplan User Guide Appendix 327 Optimization Toolbar Measurement Toolbar Starts the measurement software Clears all measurement layers Opens the Measurement Module settings dialog Creates the measurement summary report 13.1). A standard font dialog will be displayed and the user can make the necessary changes. The header/footer dialog for tables allows to set up headers and footers of the current table for printing (see Fig. The actual text printed to the page is pieced together by appending each of the cells to the previous. the Left Aligned header text is determined as follows: (1.actix. www. When the font dialog is closed via its OK button. labeled Left Aligned. The font can be changed by selecting a cell or range of cells.

In particular. the library contains typical template profiles and sample matrices for the following items: • • • • • • • • • • sample clutter matrix equipment profiles mobility profiles service profiles sample traffic matrix UE profiles antenna patterns a generic cell a generic site sample pathloss matrices www.1. cyan lines appear that can be used to adjust the page breaks similar to Excel. If activated.com . the grid will also accept the following predefined tokens (or escape sequences): Token Description $F $A $P $N $D $R Document file name Application name Current page number Total number of pages Current date Register / Tabsheet name Table Page Break Mode A page break feature can be switched on or off using the View menu item.3 Library Overview A library with typical parameter settings for the radio network configuration items is provided in the \library\ directory below the Radioplan installation directory. 13-3 Page configuration dialog In some cases it should be useful to print a table to a predefined number of pages.Actix Radioplan User Guide Appendix 328 In addition to text.m] Pages checkbox is switched Radioplan scales the table if the View on. 13. Fig. Table Fit to [n. the library is structured hierarchically as the network configuration data tree which is described in chapter 6. The library directory structure is identical with the network configuration structure given in section 13. that the table fits to the desired number of columns and rows. Internally.actix.

see chapter 4.com . diagonally aligned 6° Downtilt Antenna Freespace propagation model with pathloss exponent of 3 Speech UE (40Erl/km2. 13-4. See chapter 4 for details.03].5 + 20 ⋅ log⎜ ⎜ ⎟ ⎜ [ MHz ] ⎟ + 10 D ⋅ log⎜ [km] ⎟ ⎟ ⎝ ⎠ ⎝ ⎠ UMTS 30.4 Examples Overview Altogether three example projects are provided in the \examples directory of the Radioplan installation CD-ROM. movement along streets) and WWW UE (5Erl/km2. A realistic UMTS network scenario in the center of Dresden. Free space pathloss equation: ⎛ R ⎞ ⎛ f ⎞ L[dB] = 32. Table 13-2 Specification of the Demo Project Configuration Item Specification Investigation area Network configuration Antennas Pathloss model UE profiles 1000m x 1000m 2 sites with three cells each. Three of them are calculated with a freespace pathloss model. the other four ones are calculated according to the vehicular propagation model as specified in [30. 13.actix.4. measured from the average rooftop level pathloss exponent Δh b : D: 13. Germany.1 Demo Project The specifications of the Demo Project are given in Table 13-2. An optimized UMTS network scenario with respect to capacity and QoS in the center of Dresden. straight movement) www.03 version 3. They are summarized in Table 13-1.Actix Radioplan User Guide Appendix 329 • • a generic RNC monitor template configuration (for simulator only) Seven sample pathloss matrices are provided in the library.0 Vehicular: ⎛ R ⎞ ⎛ f ⎞ L[dB] = 40(1 − 4 ⋅10 −3 Δhb ) ⋅ log⎜ ⎜ ⎟ ⎜ [km] ⎟ − 18 ⋅ log(Δhb ) + 21 ⋅ log⎜ [MHz ] ⎟ + 80 ⎟ ⎝ ⎠ ⎝ ⎠ R: f: base station – mobile station separation carrier frequency (2000 MHz) base station antenna height. The models used are explained in the following. in meters. Table 13-1 Example projects Project Description Demo Project Dresden Example Dresden Example Optimized The demonstration project.2. The simulation area is shown in Fig. Germany.

www. 10km2 10 sites (mostly 3-sectorized).actix. different antenna heights 6° Downtilt Antenna Empirical propagation model (COST 231 with 3-dimensional building model) [RPS] different user profiles for a typical service mix Different traffic matrices. The simulation area is shown in Fig. placed with respect to surroundings. other services mainly in hotspot areas. Simple street grid (rectangle). Table 13-3 Specification of the Dresden example project Configuration Item Specification Simulation area Network configuration Antennas Pathloss model UE profiles Traffic Streets Polygonal area of approx.Actix Radioplan User Guide Appendix 330 Configuration Item Specification Traffic Streets Equally distributed within rectangles (different regions per UE profile). 13-6. Fig.2 Dresden City Example The specifications of the Dresden scenarios are given in Table 13-3. 13-5. Both projects differ slightly in the network configuration. 13-4 Demo project 13.com . Realistic street map of the center of Dresden. speech mainly concentrated to streets. whereas the 3-dimensional building structure is shown in Fig.4.

13-6 3-dimensional building database of downtown Dresden www.Actix Radioplan User Guide Appendix 331 Fig. 13-5 Dresden scenarios Fig.actix.com .

it is necessary to have the EPSG *.tiffw or *.3 Arc/Info Raster Formats 13. 13.tfw. However. clutter.1. the accompanied image file is given in the TIFF format. 13.com .prj file containing information on an affine georeferencing transform and some projections. The first two lines specify the pixel scaling vector for the x-direction. Please refer to [ATL-TR] for further details about the BIL file format structure. and the last two lines locate the orientation point (usually the upper left corner) of the image.5.5. or a list of GCPs.5. 13.5. coordinate system ignored) could be used.1) with the extension *.2 Arc/Info Binary Grid Format This format is the internal binary format for Arc/Info Grid incl. the value in the fourth line (pixel scaling vector in y-direction) must be negative because the y-vector points downward then.1.1 TIFF / Geo TIFF Format Most forms of TIFF and GeoTIFF files are supported where the latter ones are georeferenced. and takes the form of a coverage level www. It contains information about the absolute location of the image as well as the scaling and alignment of the image pixels. the third and fourth lines give the pixel scaling vector in y-direction. They can either be loaded as image layers or as network configuration matrix for DEM.wld or *. The values are assumed being given in meters. The most common of these file formats are briefly introduced in the following Subsections with some remarks on special features and their georeferencing ability. Usually. 13.3. or pathloss.Actix Radioplan User Guide Appendix 332 13. All common GeoTIFF projections are supported.2 BIL File Format The BIL file format represents one or more matrices in binary format. the first line contains the xcoordinate and the latter line contains the y-coordinate of the vector or the position. and takes the form of an ASCII file. a transformation matrix. If no georeferencing information is available in the TIFF file itself.5. the values in the second and third lines must be zero. this is not an exclusive condition. as well as a MapInfo *.hdr file is used to specify the exact data format of the binary matrix (*.tfw. 13.bil file).1 Arc/Info ASCII Interchange Format This format is the ASCII interchange format for Arc/Info Grid. Both 8 and 16 bit precision formats with “I” or “M” byte order formats are supported. If the orientation point is the upper left corner of the image. Since Radioplan uses a Cartesian coordinate system internally.wld. information on an affine georeferencing transform and some projections. Grids are treated as signed 16bit integer unless the first scan line contains decimal values in which case the image is treated as 32bit floating point. an ESRI world file (see Section 13. plus sometimes an associated *. In either of these line pairs. In order to use some uncommon projected and geographic coordinate systems and translate them into OGC WKT.actix.1 ESRI World File Format The ESRI World File format is an ASCII format to associate an image file with a geographical reference. *. A *.wld file consists of six lines with a numeric value in each line. respectively.3. They must be found at the location pointed to by the GEOTIFF_CSV environment variable.5 Supported Raster Data File Formats A large number of raster data formats are supported for import.5.5.tab file (only control points used.csv files available. Georeferencing from GeoTIFF is supported in the form of one tie point and pixel size. The number of bands defined within the BIL matrix is restricted to one. traffic. Thus it is ensured that the image is aligned to the x. A *.and yaxes of the underlying coordinate system. The usual extension for such a header file is *.

adf file (such as hdr.x and previous releases) and HDF5. 13. Only the raster data can be accessed.7 Grid eXchange File Format This is a raster exchange format propagated by Geosoft. But if an ESRI world file exists with the *. 13. if an ESRI world file exists with the *.5. NASA's Earth Observing System (EOS) maintains its own HDF modification called HDF-EOS which is also supported for import.g.DAT file.1). The format also includes support for georeferencing information and projections.img format is supported with some limitations. u16. Pyramid levels and metadata are ignored. but palettes and georeferencing is captured. f64. One HDF file may contain several different SDS arrays. number of dimensions. GIF files always appear as having one colormapped eight bit band.mem. 13. SDS is a multidimensional array filled by data. Scientific Datasets (SDS) are most often used. For data storing.5 Erdas Imagine Format The Erdas Imagine *. However. Hierarchical Data Format is a container for several different datasets.1. Generally. 13. It supports the Erdas band types u8. …) and a header file which must be called HEADER. These files are a product of the Japanese Geographic Survey Institute.adf) from within it. JPEG files are represented as one band (grey scale) or three band (RGB) datasets with Byte valued bands.10 JPEG File Format The widely used JPEG JFIF format is supported.1. To open the coverage select the coverage directory.DAT. or an *.jgw suffices (see Section 13.Actix Radioplan User Guide Appendix 333 directory in an Arc/Info database. GIF files have no integrated support for georeferencing. and may represent data for different regions.5. Note that also tiled TIFF images with JPEG compressed tiles can be imported. c64 and c128. Here. it will be read and used to establish the geotransform for the image. it will be read and used to establish the geotransform for the image.com . Georeferencing and other meta data is ignored. and made a standard in the gravity/magnetic field.5. 13.5.5. www.8 Hierarchical Data Format (Release 4) There are two HDF formats.wld or *.9 Japanese DEM Format Japanese DEM files can be imported.5.5. The import of remote sensing and geospatial datasets in form of raster images is supported. The georeferencing of the files is recognized as well as the coordinate system (always latitude/longitude on the Tokyo datum).4 EOSAT Fast Format EOSAT datasets normally consist of one or more raster data files (e. normally having the extension *. They may differ in size.6 GIF File Format Normal and interlaced GIF files are supported. These files are represented as having one 32bit floating band with elevation data. This modification is suited for use with remote sensing data and fully compatible with underlying HDF. To open the dataset select the HEADER.1). Overviews can be built for JPEG files as an external *. the ASTER Level 1B and ASTER DEM formats are supported. 13. BAND1. These formats are completely different and not compatible.5. s16. f32.5. BAND2.actix.DAT. u32. For georeferencing the HDF files.DAT.wld extension (see Section 13. s32. s8. only HDF4 file import is supported. HDF4 (4. 13. There is no direct support for georeferencing information or metadata for JPEG files.ovr file.

*. including 8. The *. ESRI world files with the extensions of *.13 Portable Network Graphics Grey scale.11 Atlantis MFF Raster File Format Atlantis Scientific's MFF datasets consist of a header file (typically with the extension *.hdr file if required. and MSB (big-endian). projections.. paletted.5. and some degree of support is included for GeoJP2 (GeoTIFF-in-JPEG2000). RGB and RGBA PNG files (with extension *.png) are supported as well as precisions of eight and sixteen bits per sample. labeled DOQ format can be handled.tfw or *. including reading of an affine georeferencing transform. 32 and 64 bit data precisions in integer. ERMapper GML-in-JPEG2000. *. and color tables will be reduced to about 70 colors automatically.DDF.14 USGS DOQ Format The USGS (US Geological Survey) DOQ (Digital Ortho Quad) format is supported.tifw (see Section 13. To open a PCI labeled file. www. Single transparency values in grey scale files will be recognized as a nodata value. In addition.APP) can be imported.wld. Each DEM should have one file with a name like XXXCATD. Coordinate system and georeferencing transformations are read. 13. Unrecognized keywords from the *.5. SDTS datasets consist of a number of files.1) will be read for georeferencing the PNG file. 13.hdr) and a set of data files with extensions like *. This should be selected to open the dataset. 16. tile organized files (as produced by the Atlantis SAR Processor . The XPM interface does not support georeferencing (not available from XPM files) nor does it support XPM files with more than one character per pixel. .16 X11 Pixmap Format XPM (X11 Pixmap Format) image files are color-mapped one band images primarily used for simple graphics purposes in X11 applications. and 32R) is supported. select the raw data file itself..actix.aux labeled raw raster file format of all PCI data types (8U. Georeferencing.5.com .15 USGS SDTS DEM Format Support for reading USGS SDTS (Spatial Data Transfer Standard) formatted DEMs is included.Actix Radioplan User Guide Appendix 334 13. Projection and georeferencing information can also be extracted. 13.5.1. 13. Reading latitude/longitude GCPs (TOP_LEFT_CORNER. 13.5.hdr file are ignored.) is supported but there is no support for reading affine georeferencing or projection information. real and complex data types.hdr file.12 PCI Labeled Raw Format The PCI *. and the new GML-in-JPEG2000 specification developed at OGC.5. pseudo-colored. unlabeled DOQ format and the new.x00. the keyword BYTE_ORDER can be used which can take a value of LSB (little-endian).5. 16S. Diverse data types are supported. USGS DEMs always have a data type of signed sixteen bit integer.aux file (which must have a common base name) will be checked for automatically.17 ERMapper Compress Wavelets Format Reading of JPEG2000 files and ERMapper Compress Wavelets (ECW) is supported. However. This may be manually added to the *. and capture of the projection string. MFF files are not normally portable between systems with different byte orders. 13. Both the old.b00 and so on. 16U. New XPM files must be colormapped or grey scale. To open a dataset select the *.5. and other metadata is ignored.

13. A polygon layer is named PAL if present. polygon. MapInfo coordinate system information is also supported. The most common of these file formats are briefly introduced in the following Subsections with some remarks on special features and their georeferencing ability. Polygon geometries are collected for polygon and region layers from the composing arcs. If this is inaccessible or corrupt. it is also possible to use one of the files (*. In this case the directory name should be used as the dataset name.Actix Radioplan User Guide Appendix 335 13. Text sections are represented as point layers. and then it will be treated as a dataset with one layer. A region subclass is named according to the subclass name. but the geometry should still be accessible.dbf) in a shape file set as the dataset name. The label. no info attributes will be appended to coverage layers. several vector data formats are supported for import. even for polygons with multiple outer rings. A whole directory of MapInfo files is treated as a dataset. Display height is preserved in the HEIGHT attribute field. and a single file within that directory as a layer.actix.6. If available. The new ESRI measure values are discarded if encountered. or *. www. In this case the directory name should be used as the dataset name. it will be read and used to associate a projection with features. However. it is also possible to use one of the files (*. arc.tab or *.6. a whole directory of shape files is treated as a dataset. and text sections of a coverage are all supported as layers. but not specifically named to be attached to one of the existing geometric layers is currently not accessible.shx. centroid. or free standing points) is named LAB if present. polygons. 13. Note that info tables are stored in an 'info' directory at the same level as the coverage directory. other information about text orientation is discarded.com .3 Arc/Info Binary Coverage File Format Arc/Info Binary Coverages (e. They can either be loaded as image layers. Arc/Info V7 and earlier) are supported. region.6 Supported Vector Data File Formats In addition to raster images.1 Shape File Format All varieties of ESRI shape files are supported.6. or region where appropriate. A text section is named according to the section subclass. or as simulation/analysis area or street data in the network configuration. The Arc/Info binary coverage interface attempts to optimize spatial queries but due to the lack of a spatial index this is just accomplished by minimizing processing for features not within the spatial window. and a single shape file within that directory as a layer. An arc (line) layer is named ARC if present. Info tables associated with a coverage. *. however.prj file in old Arc/Info style or new ESRI OGC WKT style is present. 13. Normally.g. the projection information is read and translated.2 MapInfo File Format MapInfo datasets in native (TAB) format and in interchange (MIF/MID) format are supported.shp. However. arcs. Attributes from INFO are appended to labels. If a *. and then it will be treated as a dataset with one single layer. Note that usually polygons rather than multipolygons are imported. A centroid layer (polygon centroids) is named CNT if present.mif) in a MapInfo set as the dataset name. The layers are named as follows: • • • • • • A label layer (polygon labels.

13.Actix Radioplan User Guide Appendix 336 Random (by FID) reads of arcs and polygons is supported. It may not be supported for other feature types.6. www.com .actix. 13.4 Planet ASCII Vector Format The ASCII vector format known from the Planet EV RNP tool is supported for reading.6.5 Asset Vector Binary Format The binary VBF vector format known from the Asset RNP tool is supported for reading.

Actix Radioplan User Guide Abbreviations 337 14 Abbreviations ACP A-DPCH AFP AICH ANP ARFCN ARQ ASM BCC BCCH BCH BIL BLER BS BSC BSIC BSS C/I CBR CC CDF CE CINR CIR CM COM CPCH CPICH CQI CTCH CTS DB DCH DEM DL DPCH DPCCH DPDCH Automatic Cell Planning Associated Dedicated Physical Channel Automatic Frequency Planning Acquisition Indicator Channel Automatic Neighbor List Planning Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number Automatic Repeat Request ATOLL Synchronization Module Base Station Color Code Broadcast Control Channel Broadcast Channel Band Interleaved by Line (graphics data format for multi-band images) Block Error Rate Base Station Base Station Controller Base Station Identification Code Base Station Subsystem see CIR Constant Bit Rate Convolutional Coding Cumulative Distribution Function Channel Element Carrier-to-Interference-and-Noise Ratio Carrier-to-Interference Ratio.com .actix. alternatively C/I Compressed Mode Component Object Model Common Packet Channel Common Pilot Channel Channel Quality Indicator Common Traffic Channel Channel Type Switching Database Dedicated Channel Digital Elevation Model Downlink Dedicated Physical Channel Dedicated Physical Control Channel Dedicated Physical Data Channel www.

Earth Fixed Enhanced Dedicated Channel Enhanced Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel Effective Isotropic Radiated Power European Petroleum Survey Group Enhanced Relative Grant Channel Evolution Data Only Forward Access Channel Fundamental Channel Frequency Division Duplexing Fractional Dedicated Physical Channel First In.com .actix. First Out Forward Paging Channel Forward Pilot Channel File Transfer Protocol Geographical Information System Global System for Mobile Communications Hybrid ARQ Hierarchical Cell Structure Hard Handover High Speed Downlink Packet Access High Speed Dedicated Physical Control Channel High Speed Downlink Shared Channel High Speed Physical Downlink Shared Channel High Speed Shared Control Channel High Speed Uplink Packet Access Hypertext Transfer Protocol Interarrival Time International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection Information Element Inter-Frequency Handover Internet Protocol Incremental Redundancy Interference Signal Code Power Inter-System Handover Key Performance Indicator Local Area Network Medium Access Control Multimedia Message Service www.Actix Radioplan User Guide Abbreviations 338 DSCH DTX E-AGCH ECEF E-DCH E-HICH EIRP EPSG E-RGCH EV-DO FACH FCH FDD F-DPCH FIFO FPCH FPICH FTP GIS GSM HARQ HCS HHO HSDPA HS-DPCCH HS-DSCH HS-PDSCH HS-SCCH HSUPA HTTP IAT ICNIRP IE IFHO IP IR ISCP ISHO KPI LAN MAC MMS Downlink Shared Channel Discontinuous Transmission Enhanced Absolute Grant Channel Earth Centered.

com .actix.Actix Radioplan User Guide Abbreviations 339 NCC NE OGC OTSR OVSF PCCPCH PCPCH PCPICH PDCP PDSCH PDU PICH PM PRACH QoS RAB RACH RBC RL RLC RLF RLS RNC RNP RoHC ROI RPS RR RRC RRM RSCP RSN RSSI Rx SCCPCH SCH SDU SF SHO SIR SJF SMS Network Color Code Network Element Open GIS Consortium Omni Transmit Sectorial Receive Orthogonal Variable Spreading Factor Primary Common Control Physical Channel Physical Common Packet Channel Primary Common Pilot Channel Packet Data Convergence Protocol Physical Downlink Shared Channel Protocol Data Unit Paging Indicator Channel Performance Management Physical Random Access Channel Quality of Service Radio Access Bearer Random Access Channel Radio Bearer Control Radio Link Radio Link Control Radio Link Failure Radio Link Set Radio Network Controller Radio Network Planning Robust Header Compression Return on Investment Radiowave Propagation Simulator Round Robin Radio Resource Control Radio Resource Management Received Signal Code Power Random Seed Number (Useful) Received Signal Strength Indicator Receiver Secondary Common Control Physical Channel Synchronization Channel or Supplemental Channel Service Data Unit Spreading Factor Soft Handover Signal-to-Interference Ratio (see CIR) Shortest Job First Short Message Service www.

actix.Actix Radioplan User Guide Abbreviations 340 STTD TB TBS TC TCH TCP TDD TGP TPC TrCH TTI Tx UARFCN UE UL UMTS UTRA UTRAN VBR WiNeS WKT WWW Space-Time Transmit Diversity Transport Block Transport Block Set Turbo Coding Traffic Channel Transmission Control Protocol Time Division Duplex Transmission Gap Pattern Transmit Power Control Transport Channel Transmission Time Interval Transmitter UTRA Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number User Equipment Uplink Universal Mobile Telecommunications System UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network Variable Bit Rate Wireless Network System Simulator Well-Known Text (Format) World Wide Web www.com .

929-933. Sophia Antipolis. 3rd Generation Partnership Project. [25.214] [25.0. Physical Layer Procedures (FDD) (Release 6) – 3GPP TS 25. March 2006. 3GPP.304] [25. Voigt. 3rd Generation Partnership Project. 240247. version 6. S.306. Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network. J.0.0. Sophia Antipolis.10. Fischer. March 2006. Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network. J. September 2006. Sophia Antipolis. version 6. M.0.0. France. Radio Link Control (RLC) Protocol Specification (Release 6) – 3GPP TS 25.9. G. 3GPP.0. [23. M.” Proceedings of the Symposium on Performance Evaluation of Computer and Telecommunication Systems (SPECTS’99). France. “Object Oriented Modeling of a Generic Radio System for Dynamic System Simulation. QoS Concept and Architecture (Release 6) – 3GPP TS 23.0. Lehnert. France. Wagner. September 2005.4.214.107] 3rd Generation Partnership Project. June 2002. IL.107.” Proceedings of the IEEE 47th Vehicular Technology Conference (VTC’97). 3GPP. 1999. September 2005. 3rd Generation Partnership Project. France. UE Procedures in Idle Mode and Procedures for Cell Reselection in Connected Mode (Release 5) – 3GPP TS 25. Physical Layer .215] [25. Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network. D.306] [25. Sophia Antipolis. Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network. 3rd Generation Partnership Project. Schweigel. and J. version 6. 2. Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network. 1997. and J.1. Fettweis.4. “On Setting Reverse Link Target SIR in a CDMA System. 3rd Generation Partnership Project. version 6. Phoenix. 3GPP. R. Hunold. Holtzman. France. Deissner.15 References [Fisc99] J. [Samp97] A. Sampath.Measurements (FDD) (Release 6) – 3GPP TS 25.322. Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network. Vol. May 4-7.9.101. 3GPP. September 2006. Sophia Antipolis. Kumar.322] 341 . P. version 5. pp.8. USA. July. version 6. UE Radio Transmission and Reception (FDD) (Release 6) – 3GPP TS 25. Technical Specification Group Services and System Aspects. Sophia Antipolis. Sophia Antipolis.101] [25. France. pp. 3GPP. 3rd Generation Partnership Project. version 6. Chicago.304. France. UE Radio Access Capabilities Definition (Release 6) – 3GPP TS 25. 3GPP.215. USA. AZ.

WCDMA for UMTS. Actix GmbH. version 6. WiNeS Simulation Guide. Dresden. Wiley. 3GPP. Germany. Actix GmbH.331. December 2006. Actix GmbH. 2004. Automatic Cell Planning User Guide. 2008.331] 3rd Generation Partnership Project.0. [25. Wiley. Actix GmbH. version 6. Dresden. Neighbor List Planning Guide. Actix GmbH. Dresden. Germany.com .actix. Sophia Antipolis. Radio Resource Control (RRC) Protocol Specification (Release 6) – 3GPP TS 25. 3rd Generation Partnership Project. 2008. version 6. Radioplan Documentation. 3GPP. Data Synchronization Guide for ATOLL. UTRAN Iub Interface NBAP Signalling (Release 6) – 3GPP TS 25. September 2005. Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network. 2008. France. and T. Novosad (Ed. A. Germany.0. Radio Network Planning and Optimisation for UMTS. December 2006. 3GPP. A.922.Actix Radioplan User Guide References 342 [25. Measurement Guide. 2002. Dresden. Actix GmbH. 3GPP. 3nd edition. Holma. Germany. Dresden. Sophia Antipolis. Toskala (Editors). Radio Access For Third Generation Mobile Communications. France. France. Germany.433. Laiho. 3rd Generation Partnership Project. Germany.3. Dresden. Technical Reference of the WiNeS Snapshot Simulator.12. Sophia Antipolis.922] [Holm04] [Laih02] [R-Sim] [R-TecRef] Radioplan Documentation. 2008. [R-API] Radioplan Documentation. Dresden. March 2006. 3rd Generation Partnership Project. [R-Snapshot] Radioplan Documentation.0.401. H.7. Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network. Radioplan Documentation. France. Germany. Sophia Antipolis. RRM API and Library of the WiNeS Dynamic Network Simulator. Technical Reference of the WiNeS Dynamic Network Simulator. 2008. Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network.433] [25. version 6. 2008. Dresden. UTRAN Overall Description (Release 6) – 3GPP TS 25. Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network. Radioplan Documentation. 2008.401] [25.). Radioplan Documentation. Germany. J. Wacker. Actix GmbH. Radioplan Documentation.0. [R-Meas] [R-ACP] [R-ANP] [R-ASM] www. Radio Resource Management Strategies (Release 6) – 3GPP TS 25.12. 2008. Actix GmbH.

Actix GmbH.com . Germany. ATOLL Documentation. [30. Sophia Antipolis.Actix Radioplan User Guide References 343 [R-Admin] Radioplan Documentation.actix. [ATL-UM] [ATL-TR] [RPS] www. Forsk. France. Administration Guide. France. 1997-2008.. Dresden. Actix GmbH.2. Radiowave Propagation Simulator.03): Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS). London. 2008. Dresden.03] ETSI Document TR 101 112 V3. [miniAFP] Cellopt Documentation. 2008. 2008.0 (UMTS 30. UK. April 1998. Selection procedures for the choice of radio transmission technologies of the UMTS. ATOLL Documentation. Actix Ltd. User Manual. France. Forsk. 2008. Cellopt miniAFP Module in Actix Radioplan. Technical Reference Guide. Germany. Blagnac. Blagnac.

Actix Radioplan User Guide References 344 www.com .actix.

....................... 147......................... 44.................................................................... 171 examples ........ 128 streets .....................................49 clutter classes ............................................... 114 file format ...............................99 configuration item .............. 125 raster file import ............. 140......................... 292 channel element ............................................. 201 cell ...... 143 tuned pathloss matrices.............. 249 additional antenna .......... 249 results..... 272 cell visual . 233 directory structure....................................................................................................................................... 105 database .............................. 237 iDEN ............................................................... 41............................. 83.....................................47 project ...13 Viewpoint .................. 40.........245 equipment profile..... 290 coordinate system............................................................................................255 statistical ~.............................................23 Actix products ActixOne.................................................... 158........actix.............................. 114 DEM.. 272................................293 export/synchronization .................................. 67..................99 clutter statistics ..................................................... 317 GSM ..................... 151......................................................................................................................................... 162 Area Analyzer..........................................16 diagram...98 settings overview table to file ................................................................289 parameter filtering...274 creation from vector layers.........260....29 ActixOne .....329 export clutter ..................35..221 WiMAX ~ ...274 coinciding layers ..........................................241 UMTS ~..................... See W-CDMA Area Analyzer area management...................... 151.................................... 241 library ................................87 DEM.........100....... 135..............31............................................99 interference matrix........... 90 Radioplan ..... 259...................115 clutter statistics ........... 277 dongle...................................... 129 user behavior........ 129.....................................................................271......................... 30........................................................................................................... 126.................................................................................................................................119 raster file import..... 249 Analyzer ............ 114 CDMA2000 ~ . 196 best server ...... 124 street category ................................................................... 237............. 137 embedded clipboard ..................................Actix Radioplan User Guide Index 345 16 Index A activation code ............................... 124 Automatic Cell Planning (ACP) ................ 328 project setup ........289 environment copy/fill ........................ 245 projection........ 164.............................................. 110 antenna........... 172 demo project ....................................267 configuration scatter statistics ............124 binary file system....................... 313 layer .................... 115 clutter matrix ............ 107 ARQ............ 160 compatible traffic models ..........................................................99....233 GSM ~ ...... 112....................260.......................... 140.......................... 127..................... 252 BSC ........................................... 329 Actix Cellopt AFP plan .135...........256 results selection dialog................ 31......99 Actix CellRefs..................190 result import ..........250 embedded clipboard ............................................................ 249 analysis area................ 277 clutter ...................................................... 274.................................122 raster file export................................................................ 17.................................................................... See network controller C Capital Planning.....237 iDEN ~ ......................................................................................................... 122.98 RNP project update ........................99 Cellopt AFP ..................... 270 area management......................................119 www.......................... 169 cell statistics ..................... 317 environment ..........................................126.129....... 142.................................. 165 UTRAN .......... 114..... 128....................... 219 chart graph ......... 282..... 99..........28 D data management downtilt ....... 160................... 249 raster file export .... 101................................................... 205 WiMAX ..........................com ............. 106 RAN ......................................................................................................................................................... 250 configuration ....................... 181 ATOLL ATOLL Synchronization Module concept of ~ ................................... 149 analysis....... 147............. 170....................... 159 workspace............... 271 XY scatter graph ....... 107 CDMA2000 .................................................................. 169................................... 86................. See hardware dongle E editing functions B background image ........................98 import/update...........................................................................................

..............................................313 generation .......................... 130 Network Controller .................................................................................................................................................... 201 interference matrix ......................... 116 intra-scrambling code ~...............................................54 slide show .....................................................................................................................................312 result set ...........................................................................................................................................83 network optimization .................................217 noise figure.............................23 floating ~ ............................................. 205.........................................................40 ~ project from Radioplan database .........................................................332 vector data ~..................................................................Actix Radioplan User Guide Index 346 cell visuals.............................................................335 workspace ... 271......61 line .....................335 during simulation................................................................... 138 copy parameters from other network layer(s) ............................. 259...................................................................275 library ..................................................... See configuration network controller ...........................................172.................. 23............24 ~ file transfer ........................................................................87 raster file ~.............16 network performance counters.....205 Inter-Frequency ~.......................................................... 292 Measurement Module. 143 layer ................................153 network configuration .........312 K KPI analysis ................................47 OSS network configuration ..................................................See coinciding layers color settings ............................................... 21.... 281 I import Hard ~ ..41 coinciding layers ...48 ~ folder ......................256 G graphics painting mode.............. 61 image layers..................21 configuration folder. 49...... 328 license..........................43 layer templates.............................................................317 raster data ~ ...42 layer slide show ..........83 cell ....... 173 N neighbor lists .................................... 275 F fast fading ......23 threshold evaluation methods...........................................................................57 graphics layers.................................................................. 22 histogram ...... 221 Softer ~ ............61 drawing preferences ......... 221 activation code....................................170 O orthogonality factor ~ based on ROI ............23 hardware dongle ............................ 25 activation code.actix....................... 205..........................40 layer functions ............................88 project .....................................100 traffic matrix from measured traffic............................ 198.............................................................................................................25 ~ registration .........116......................................... 154 www.............................41 result layers.. 297 OSS network configuration ...............................297 L layer concept .............15 Node B ...................................................... 307 tuned pathloss matrices ................................170 parameter ~ ......................................................................62 graphics layers...................................22 user folder ................................................................ 264 settings ..205 Inter-System ~ .......................22 hardware dongle..........300 ~ for GSM........... 155 raster file import ...... See manipulating layers post-processing layers ............42 layer overview dialog.............................................................301 ~ for UMTS..................................................... 87..................88 external result data ..........................63 text...63 H Handover layer functions......................... 310 export ...23 transaction key .........................241 network layer . 198................................................................................................85 duplicating network layers .159 vector file ~ ..................................................................................32 high/low-res ~.....................................................................................332 result data .................85 installation ~ of image layers .....262...............129...............314 network planning .....25 ~ update.....................................com ..... 57 legend presets ......................................................................45 manipulating layers .......................137.............. See hardware dongle transaction key ....... 252................63 polygon ......205 Soft ~ .............................................................88 P pathloss matrix intracell inter-scrambling code ~ ................................................................................... 41.....................284 ~ file.............................................................. 117 file format filtering configuration ~ ............................293 from file to settings overview table............................. 118 ~ for CDMA2000 .................................................................................................................61 locked layers ................................................................................................23 M manipulating layers ........................................ 135.......................14 mobility profile ................................................................266 mapped surface plot...............48 network layer management ............................

......146 CDMA2000 ~ ................... 241 UMTS ~ ..................................................54 legend presets ......205...............................................................206...............................................................................................16 T table ...........207 ACP........................................ 237 iDEN ~...... 221..................................................221 SCCPCH ........ 169.................................129............................................................................. 193 traffic type................................. 145 U UE result set ............306 creation from layer................................................................. 221 ..............................................15 physical layer .................................271 service arrival process ..... 115........205 Radio Link Monitoring ............................... 221 FACH ........................... 166.................................... 169.............................284 traffic matrix ........................ 167 threshold evaluation methods ..16 traffic matrix generation ...........outer loop....... 168 service profile......................130........221.....................................................202 raster file import..... 223 Radio Bearer Translation .......... 154....................174...................................................... 222...........................................................................243 UMTS ~...........254 parameter .......................... 207 Congestion Control ..........................................Actix Radioplan User Guide Index 347 performance counters............................................................................... 170 position update interval ......... 205......................... 87..... 83.................................................. 222 FPICH................. 165................................................ 205.................com creation from traffic matrix........165 user rights management ........................ 221 Radioplan ..................... 180 pilot Ec/I0................................ 221... 314 revenue matrix...........................23 Transport Channel Radio Resource Management .15 activation ...205........................................ 212........................201 ................. 76............................................329 pathloss matrix .....207 Compressed Mode ..................................................................................................................................................... 222 simulation area.................. 176........ 178........................ 167 user behavior ........ 91 UTRA/FDD ............................................................................ 190 traffic matrix..................................................................actix.......15 workspace ............ 192...................................94 comparison......................................... 223 AICH ...................... 263 CDMA2000 ~.......................................................................61 www........................................................109 site ................. 174.....................................................................................47 color palette .............................192 store in project .........105 duplicating projects ................................................ 232 PRACH......................................................................231 WiMAX ~ ...... 307 ATOLL compatible ~............... See network performance counters physical channel RNC ..... See network controller S scatter statistics ........................ 156 shadowing .........246 functions ............................................. 192 service portion. 221 RACH ................................. 221.........96 ~ update .101 merging projects ..........101 spreading factor.................. 86...................................96 configuration........................... 208 Power Control ................................................. 179 radio propagation (fast) fading.................................................................................................................................... See network layer management sub ~ ................. 172 Power Balancing ............................................. 179 transaction key.......... 343 repeater ..... 223 Channel Type Switching ........ 174........................52 layer settings...................................................... 251 result set aggregation............................................................................93 multi-layer ~ . 221 ~ statistics.......................166...... 196 raster file export ....................81 maintenance wizard...................................................... 181 simulation.............................287 mapped ~ .............. 254 UE profile............... 252..................................................................... 233 GSM ~ ......................205............................. 233...................... 193 traffic model.....................90 handling ....................................................................... 170 project ................................................ 90.............................................................. 217 WiMAX ~................. 221 HSUPA ................................................................................. 205 BCH ................................................................ 245 system level.............. 105 network layer management............ 222 PCPICH....................... 160............................. 201 cascaded ~................................. 194 raster file import ...............165.....................180 statistical analysis ...............................open loop .................................... 178.... 208 vendor specific ....................................239 iDEN ~ .................. 289 R Radio Access Bearer .......... 192 owner .......................................... 207..... 205.221 ...............13 Radiowave Propagation Simulator . 117 pathloss equation ..................... 131 filtering .....................inner loop ................. 290 surface plot......................... 169..................................................91 master ~ ........................57 display settings ...........282....... 86.................129.54 W-CDMA Area Analyzer.................................................................................235 GSM ~ ............... 221 HSDPA ..... 107 W watermark ....................................258..........115 Admission Control .................................................................... 236 PCCPCH........ 221 DCH......See mapped surface plot template.......

.......54 Index 348 Z zoom functions .............65 www................................................Actix Radioplan User Guide watermark........com .....actix...............

actix.Actix Radioplan User Guide Index 349 www.com .

Actix Radioplan User Guide Index 350 www.actix.com .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful